Magento 2 Instagram Feed extensionallows admins to integrate Instagram feeds into the Magento storefront, to showcase attractive media & content from their accounts.
The Instagram Feed will look like this.
Note: If the post has multiple media, the first image/video will be chosen to display on the Instagram feed.
2. How Does it Work?
2.1. Module Configuration
2.1.1. General Configuration
Here, you will enable the module and configure it to connect Instagram with your Magento store.
At Enable Module: Choose Yes to activate the module.
At Instagram Access Token: Enter the user Token provided for your Instagram account. This token is necessary for calling API to get the images/videos from the Instagram feed. To get Instagram token, please follow this guide.
2.1.2. Advanced Token Settings
This is important as Token has expired dates and whenever you post something new, these settings will update automatically for you.
API call interval minutes: Set the interval time between 2 continuous API calls.
Refresh Token: Choose Yes to automatically generate and update a new token, replacing the expired one.
Note: Usually, the token will expire after 60 days. If this configuration is enabled, 2-3 days before the token expires, the module will process to let the Meta for Developer system automatically generate a new token and update it to the Instagram Access Token configuration above. However, you need to run cron for your site. Or approximately every 60 days, you have to access and pressthe Save config button before the token expires to keep it running.
Token Expired Date: show the expiration date of the current Access Token.
2.1.3. Media Popup Settings
This module allows a popup to show up whenever customers click on an Instagram feed.
At Popup Auto Play: Choose Yes if you want the media to move to the next one automatically. Or No to disable it, and customers have to click the arrow to see the next posts.
At Popup Auto Play Speed: Enter the amount of time (seconds) that the post takes to switch to the next one.
2.2. Instagram Feed Widget Configuration
The Instagram feed enabled by this module works as a widget in the Magento store, so that you can set the display pages, positions, titles, and layouts for the feed.
2.2.1. Add the widget
To add a new Instagram feed widget, navigate to Content > Widgets. Click the Add Widget button.
At Settings, in the Type field: Choose BSS Instagram Feed Widget. Then choose Design Theme & Click the Continue button to proceed.
2.2.2. Set up Storefront properties
Widget Title: Enter the title for the widget in the backend.
Assign to Store Views: Assign the widget to the selected store views.
Sort Order: Set the order if there is more than 1 widget in the same container.
In Layout Updates, you will choose the pages & positions on those pages to display the Instagram feed. You can put the widget on multiple places by clicking the Add Layout Update button to add more.
At Display on: choose to display the widget on which page/product/category type. Then accordingly, you will see the options to choose which page or specifics or all products/categories.
On the right, there’s a Container option: choose the container position for the widget.
To finish, click on the Save button.
2.2.3. Widget Options: Label, Layout & Auto-play
Widget Label: Enter the name of the Instagram feed widget on the frontend.
Widget Layout: Choose the layout for the widget - Standard for grid layout and Slider for slide layout. If you choose the Slider layout, you will choose whether the widget auto-plays or not at Auto Play. Then set the auto-play time at Auto Play Time.
Enable Repeated Images: Choose Yes to let the slider repeat the images after reaching the end.
Magento 2 Cookie Consent extensionallows users to create a consent bar for customers to be informed and granted the right to accept or deny cookies explicitly. This is required to comply with the EU Data Privacy Policy.
The consent bar will be displayed on the frontend like this:
This module supports setting consent mode & cookie banner to specific countries. Therefore before that, you need to update the GeoIP country database.
In Upload Custom File, you can upload a custom file (such as a paid database version from MaxMind) to be the database. However, in case the uploaded file is larger than the limit of the server, this option will be not available.
* Note: When you upload the file, you need to rename it and use the right format so that the file can be uploaded successfully and then the system runs cron. The file format must be the .zip file (This .zip file includes CSV files). After finishing uploading, choose Save Config then click Upgrade Data.
In Upload Custom URL, you can fill in the URL of the database file if you cannot upload it in the Custom File option (when the file is larger than the limit of the server). After completing, choose Save Config then click Upgrade Data.
In Update Database from MaxMind, please click in Upgrade Data to automatically download the Database from MaxMind or to use the uploaded file. After the file is extracted, a notification “Waiting for Cron run!” will be shown, and please wait for the database to be updated.
*Note: If Upload Custom File and Upload Custom URL are left blank, the module will use the Country Lite Database in MaxMind page. Hence, not all IP countries are available in this database.
On the other hand, the extension also uses another tool named IPinfo to identify the IP country in case it cannot be found in the database.
2.2. Cookie Consent Configurations
2.2.1. General configurations
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
In Auto Hide Message (seconds), enter a number to set the duration that the cookie consent bar is displayed. When the time is over, the notification is hidden automatically.
In Position, select an option to set the position of the notice to be shown on your website pages. There are 4 available options: Bottom Left, Top Left, Bottom Right, and Top Right.
In Country Restrictions, select the countries to apply consent mode. There are 3 options: All Countries, EEA Countries, and Specific Countries (EEA Countries will be auto-selected following this list).
If you choose Specific Countries, a dropdown will appear for you to choose certain countries to apply consent mode.
2.2.2. Default Consent
Usually, the default status when visitors do not interact with the cookie bar/popup is “Denied”.
However, with this module, you can configure the default status for each of the consent types that will be sent to Google tools such as GTM, GA4, or Google Ads in case there’s no interaction from users with the consent bar.
At Default Status, with each consent type, Choose “Granted” or “Denied” at the Status column as you wish. Then click Save Config button to save this default setting.
In Message Title, edit a title for the consent bar.
In Title Text Color, select color text for Message Title.
In Message, edit a message to offer information about your website cookies. Here you also can add links to text in the message. SPECIAL: Here, you can also add links to any text in the message. To do so, add this tag: <a href="https://...">Text</a>
In Message Text Color, select the color for the message text.
In Background Color, select the background color for the notification.
2.2.4. Accept All Button Configs
An Accept All button is presented for customers to confirm that they have understood the notice. If they click this button, the notice will hide immediately, and they consent to cookies being collected. If they don’t, the notice will be displayed every time they change pages on the website or refresh a page.
In Text, edit text on the Accept button.
In Text Color, select the color for the text on the button.
In Background Color, select the color for the button background.
2.2.5. Deny All Button Configs
When clicking the Deny All button, customers will confirm that they do not consent to their cookies being collected & stored on your site.
In Enable, you can set this button to be displayed or not on the consent bar.
In Text, edit text on the Deny All button.
In Text Color, select the color for the text on the button.
In Background Color, select the color for the button background.
2.3. Set up cookie popup link on webpage by widget
By adding this link, even when already choosing the consent mode, customers can click it to show cookie popup again to reselect consent mode.
After enabling the module, navigate Content ⇒ Widgets ⇒ Add Widget.
At Type: click to see the dropdown, choose “BSS Cookie Consent Setting”. Then choose Design Theme & Click Continue button.
Here you’ll see more configuration options. Set the Widget Title &Assign to Store View. & Then choose the Layout Updates to add the link to which page/position.
In Widget Options, fill in the title for this cookie banner link. This title will be displayed on store page. Then click Save to finish.
Note:
In this demo, we also install the Google Analytics 4 extension so that you can easily test if this module has impact on reports in GA4.
And Please follow the documents from Google to test the impact of consent mode on Google products:
Magento 2 ChatGPT extension enables you to integrate ChatGPT into your store to automatically generate high-quality & SEO-friendly content for all your pages.
2. How Does It Work?
Magento 2 ChatGPT module only helps integrate ChatGPT into Magento site. To use the ChatGPT service, you need an OpenAI account.
In your OpenAI account, on Billing overview, you will see what type of account (Free trial or Paid account), and Credit remaining.
To set up a paid account, click Add payment details and set the appropriate payment information.
2.1. Enable the extension
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ ChatGPT ⇒ ChatGPT Configuration.
Enable: Choose Yes to enable the module or No to disable it.
API Key: Enter the API key provided by ChatGPT. To get the API key, please follow the ChatGPT API guide.
Model Type: Choose the model type of the ChatGPT (ChatGPT-3.5 Turbo or ChatGPT-4). For more details, please follow the ChatGPT Model guide.
Max Tokens (Store view): Enter the token limitation of the model. Only an integer greater than 0 is valid. For more details, please follow the ChatGPT Tokens guide. *Note:
- You should enter an integer number greater than 1000 and less than the max tokens provided by ChatGPT.
- The value in this field will automatically change to the default value of the respective ChatGPT model.
- If the language you use is not English, you should input a lower number of Max Tokens because ChatGPT may not be able to tokenize your words in a standard way. You can test the token length of your prompt here.
- Learn more about how to set Max Tokens value for Languages Other Than English (LOTE) here.
Temperature: Enter a real number: 0 <= x <= 2. For more details, please follow the ChatGPT Temperature guide.
*Note:
Higher values like 0.8 will make the output more random, while lower values like 0.2 will make it more focused and deterministic. See: ChatGPT Temperature in FAQs.
Call ChatGPT: Click the button to check the configurations after editing them. *Note: When you click the button, it will use the current configurations on the page to check. You don't need to save configs before calling it.
2.2. Default prompts
Default prompts appear when you use the Get Default Prompt config, which acts like the query to send to the ChatGPT system to command the AI to write content for you.
Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ ChatGPT ⇒ Default Prompts.
Default Prompts are divided into smaller sections: Product Prompts, Category Prompts, CMS Prompts, and SEO Prompts.
ChatGPT System role: Each of these prompts will include the ChatGPT System role section to define the role of ChatGPT when generating answers for the section below. Example: A professional eCommerce advertisement content writer who is proficient in SEO, A professional SEO expert in eCommerce, ….
Product Prompts: The default prompt to write content for long and short product descriptions.
Category Prompts: The default prompt to write content for category descriptions.
CMS Prompts: The default prompt to write content for CMS pages.
SEO Prompts: The default prompt to write content for SEO elements, including:
SEO Meta Title: The default prompt to write content for meta titles.
SEO MetaKeywords: The default prompt to write content for meta keywords
SEO Meta Description: The default prompt to write content for meta description.
To use custom prompts as the default prompts, uncheck the Use system value checkbox and enter your prompts.
Navigate to Catalog ⇒ Products. Choose to edit an existing product or create a new one.
Then scroll down to the Content section and expand it.
Click the ChatGPT Content button in the short description or long description section. A popup window will show up.
ChatGPT System role: Enter the system role to define the role of Chat GPT when generating answers for this section.
If you delete the default role and then want to recover it, you can click on the refresh icon
If this configuration is left blank, ChatGPT will generate answers with its default role
Prompt: Enter your custom prompt to generate content. If this box is left empty, the default prompt will be used.
Get Default Prompt: Click the button to get the default prompt in the prompt field. You can edit it in the prompt field.
Attribute Box: Choose one or multiple product attributes in the attributes box to give ChatGPT some input to generate content.
Send to ChatGPT: Click the button to send your prompt to ChatGPT to get the result.
Next, scroll down to the Search Engine Optimization section and expand it.
Click the ChatGPT Content button to generate content for meta title, meta keywords and meta description.
*Note: On the product edit page, if you edit any product attribute, the Magento ChatGPT module can update the attribute in realtime to generate content accordingly without you having to save the product first.
2.3.2. Generate content for Category pages
Navigate to Catalog ⇒ Categories. Choose to edit an existing category or create a new one.
Then scroll down to the Content section and expand it.
Click the ChatGPT Content button in the description section. A popup window will show up.
ChatGPT System role: Enter the system role to define the role of Chat GPT when generating answers for this section.
If you delete the default role and then want to recover it, you can click on the refresh icon
If this configuration is left blank, ChatGPT will generate answers with its default role
Prompt: Enter your custom prompt to generate content. If this box is left empty, the default prompt will be used.
Get Default Prompt: Click the button to get the default prompt in the prompt field. You can edit it in the prompt field.
Keywords box: Enter some keywords in the keywords box to give ChatGPT some input to generate content.
Send to ChatGPT: Click the button to send your prompt to ChatGPT to get the result.
Next, scroll down to the Search Engine Optimization section and expand it.
Click the ChatGPT Content button to generate content for meta title, meta keywords and meta description.
2.3.3. Generate content for CMS pages
Navigate to Content ⇒ Pages. Choose to edit an existing page or create a new one.
Then scroll down to the Content section and expand it.
Click the ChatGPT Content button in the description section. A popup window will show up.
ChatGPT System role: Enter the system role to define the role of Chat GPT when generating answers for this section.
If you delete the default role and then want to recover it, you can click on the refresh icon
If this configuration is left blank, ChatGPT will generate answers with its default role
Prompt: Enter your custom prompt to generate content. If left empty, default prompt will be used.
Keywords box: Enter some keywords in the keywords box to give ChatGPT some input to generate content.
Get Default Prompt: Click the button to get the default prompt in the prompt field. You can edit it in the prompt field.
Send to ChatGPT: Click the button to send your prompt to ChatGPT to get the result.
Next, scroll down to the Search Engine Optimization section and expand it.
Click the ChatGPT Content button to generate content for meta title, meta keywords and meta description.
2.4. Generate SEO metadata
This tutorial shows you how to generate SEO metadata for all pages (product, category, CMS).
First, on the edit page, scroll down to the Search Engine Optimization section and expand it.
Click the ChatGPT Content button to generate content for meta title, meta keywords and meta description.
After clicking the button, a popup window will show up with similar configs (Keywords box/Attributes box, Prompt, Get Default Prompt, Send to ChatGPT). Follow the tutorial for generating content to get SEO metadata.
2.5. Mass Generate Content
Now you can select multiple products and perform mass action - generating content for descriptions & metadata, just by a few simple clicks.
Go to Catalog > Products. Here, select the products that you want to mass generate content.
At Action dropdown, choose Generate Content with ChatGPT.
Then choose which kinds of content you want the module to generate. There're Short Description, Description, Meta Title, Meta Keywords & Meta Description.
Then the Prompt settings popup will show up. Follow the same guide above for product content generation to continue.
After clicking Send to ChatGPT button, the module will do the work for you. And you will see a message to confirm your action.
To check if the action for certain product is successfully done, check in the Buik Actions Log by navigating: System > Action Logs > Bulk Actions.
The generated content will added right after the old content.
3. Set Max Tokens value for non-English language
Our module uses ChatGPT's fixed formula to calculate the max token for the answer (completion).
According to the ChatGPT's doc: A helpful rule of thumb is that one token corresponds generally to 4 characters of text for common English text. This translates to roughly ¾ of a word (so 100 tokens = 75 words).
For example: You're using Chinese (a non-English language).
Given that the max token input in ChatGPT configuration is 4097 tokens.
If your prompt has 260 characters, the module calculates that:
- The token number of the prompt is 260/4 = 65 tokens.
- The max tokens for the answer that the module request ChatGPT to generate is approximately 4097 - 65 = 4032 tokens.
However, because you're using Chinese, ChatGPT calculates the token number of the prompt as 434 tokens (test it here). The reason is that it takes a lot of tokens to tokenize figurative language (Chinese in this case) for ChatGPT to understand, increasing the prompt token significantly.
So after you use that prompt and call ChatGPT, ChatGPT will automatically generate an answer according to the max token value the module request sent (in this case, 3931 tokens), and then compare it with the model's max token.
An error occurred due to: 434 (prompt) + 3931 (completion) = 4365 tokens => Exceeded max token of the module => The module will report the error and did not print that completion in the Magento text field.
Thus, if the language is not English, you should input a lower number of Max Tokens.
Magento 2 Dynamic Category extension enables you to automatically associate products to categories according to your product conditions.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. Enable the extension
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Catalog ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ Dynamic Category.
Enable Module: Choose Yes to enable the module or No to disable it.
Enable Category Reindexation Logging: Choose Yes to allow logging all reindexation of each dynamic category into the database. Otherwise, choose No.
Then click Save Config.
2.2. Setup the rule for each category
Category Magento 2 extension automatically associates products to categories based on product attributes and special conditions. By following this guide, you can set up any kind of condition with any degree of complexity.
Please go to Catalog ⇒ Categories. Choose the category you want to setup a dynamic category rule then expand the Products in Category section.
Dynamic Category: Choose Yes to allow the module to assign the products for the category based on the conditions you set up below. Choose No to use the default Magento settings for the category.
Import Category Rules: Select the category that you want to import its dynamic category rules.
Dynamic Category Rule: Set up the product conditions for the category as you want.
Refresh matching products: After setting up the dynamic category rule, click this button to preview all products that meet the rule you set up in a product grid.
Then you click Save to save the dynamic category settings. The results are shown on the frontend now.
Note: When you have already assigned a product to a dynamic category, removing that category at that product’s detail page BE will not take effect.
Magento 2 Affiliate extension allows you to create and run various affiliate programs in your store. The affiliate programs help build a huge community to promote your products and you can gain more orders.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Affiliate to configure the module.
2.1 General Settings
In Enable Affiliate Pro: Choose Yes to enable the module, No to disable it.
2.1.1 New Affiliate
In Auto sign up new registered customers to Affiliate Program: If you choose Yes, new customers will be assigned as an affiliate automatically and the affiliate registration form will not be shown on Create account page. To disable this feature, choose No.
In Extend default customer registration form to allow sign up box for Affiliate program: Choose Yes to display the Affiliate signup on the Registration Page. To disable this feature, choose No.
*Note: If there are already other extensions overwriting the registration page, please be aware that some conflict possibilities may happen.
In Enable customer to voluntarily sign up for affiliate program on default customer registration form: Select among 3 options (Disable, Enable - signup checkbox, Enable - signup form).
In Auto approve Affiliate registration: Choose Yes to automatically approve the affiliate registration. If choose No, you need to go to Affiliate Pro⇒Manage Members⇒ Pending Members to approve the registration manually.
In Assign affiliate to group when registration auto-approved: If you enable affiliate registrations automatical approved, the affiliates will belong to the group that you assign here.
In Length of the manual referral code (set # of characters): Enter the number of characters of the referral code.
2.1.2 Customers
In Show manual affiliate referral code field on extended customer registration form: Choose Yes to display the referral code box on the account registration page. To disable this feature, choose No.
In Extend shopping cart page to allow Affiliates to enter credit: Choose Yes to overwrite the shopping cart page. Otherwise, choose No.
In Show manual referral code block on extended shopping cart page: Select Yes to allow customers to insert the referral code at shopping cart page. To disable this feature, choose No.
In Reassign customer to new affiliate when they use new manual referral code: If you choose Yes, when a customer enters a new referral code, the system will change the parent affiliate of this customer to a new Affiliate who has that new referral code and update referral information. Otherwise, choose No.
In Do not display 'Share this page' link on following pages: List the page that you don’t want customers to share. The selected page will not have the Share this page option in the footer.
2.2 Manage Affiliate Commission and Customer Discount
In Program Executing Priority: Choose one of 3 options (By maximum commission, By maximum discount, By priority)
*Note: Please be aware that only 1 Affiliate program will take effect if the purchased product belongs to 2 or more programs
In Calculate affiliate Discount with Tax: Choose Yes for customers to get Discount with Base Price of Product incl Tax. Selecting No means that customers get Discount with Base Price of Product excl Tax. (Only use with Discount by Percent which set up in Programs)
In Calculate affiliate commission: Choose between Before discount and After discount. This feature allows you to calculate affiliate discounts and commissions before or after Magento default discount.
In Include taxes when calculating Affiliate commission: Choose Yes if you want to count affiliate commission and discount with tax. Otherwise, choose No.
In Apply discount and commission for affiliates when they purchase themselves: Choose Yes to allow affiliates to receive discount and commission when they purchase products from store. Otherwise, choose No.
In Add commission to account balance when order status is: Select an order status. When an order reaches that status, the commission will be added to Affiliate account balance. The Default is Complete.
In Auto-subtract commission in case of customer refund: Select Yes to automatically subtract commissin when the order is refunded. Otherwise, select No.
In Reverse commission from account balance when order status is: Select an order status. Then, when the order within the affiliate commission is changed to this status, the system will automatically subtract the commission that has been added before from the affiliate balance.
In Hold commission in a number of days: Enter the number of days to hold back the affiliate’s commission.
In Commission for referral visitor: You can set the amount of commission for referral visitor.
For example: Affiliate A will get 5% commission if any visitor accesses the store via A’s Affiliate link.
In Commission for referral sign-up: You can set the amount of commission for referral sign-up. When a visitor goes to your store and sign-up an account via the link of Affiliate A then Affiliate A will get the commission.
In Commission for referral subscribe: Set the amount of commission for referral subscription (signup for newsletters).
2.3 Manage Affiliate Withdrawal Requests
In Enable Affiliate Withdrawal: Select Yes to enable affiliate withdrawal. Otherwise, select No.
In Payment Method: Click on “Add payment method” to add payment methods on your site, fill in information for Payment Method Code (paypal, moneybookers, banktransfer,check), Payment Method Title, Payment Processing Fee. In the Payment Processing Fee, insert an amount of money as the Payment Processing Fee for every withdrawal (X: fixed fee amount or Y%: by percentage of withdraw amount). For each payment method, admin can set different payment processing fee. In the Enable Frontend field, select ‘Yes’ to show or select ‘No’ to hide the payment method on the frontend.
In Minimum Withdrawal Amount and Maximum Withdrawal Amount: Enter the minimum and maximum amount of money that affiliates can withdraw.
In Withdrawal Period: Choose a time period for withdrawal either weekly or monthly.
In Withdrawal processing day: It will show up the weekly day or monthly dates for selecting, depending on your option in the above Withdrawal Period. This is applied to the automatic withdrawal option.
2.4 Affiliate - Customer Invitation
In Use Affiliate's email address when sending invitations to friends in 'My invitations' or with link on product and category pages: Select Yes to show affiliate emails when an affiliate sends an invitation to friends. If you choose No, the system will use the value of the Email Sender (who reply emails will be sent to if the affiliate does NOT use their own email return address above) field.
In Email Template For Recipients: You can manage email templates that are used by an affiliate to invite friends.
In 'Referred but unregistered Customer' Cookie to expire in (set # of days): Enter a number of days. This will be the valid period for referral links. The period starts from the time that a customer clicks on the referral link. When an affiliate invites a customer and this customer clicks on the referral link, in the valid period, he/she will be recorded as referred by this affiliate for the next visits or purchases.
2.5 Affiliate - Widget
In Widget width: Enter the width of Widget
In Widget title: Enter the title for widget, the title will be shown on widget at the frontend.
In Widget product quantity: Specify the quantity of products displayed on widget.
2.6 Affiliate - Paypal
In this section, you will enter the information about Paypal Bussiness. When an affiliate requests withdrawal by Paypal method, he/she can withdraw from this Paypal account.
In Enable Automatic Withdraw By Paypal: Choose Yes to enable this feature. Otherwise choose No.
In API Username, API Password, API Signature, API Endpoint, Paypal Notification Subject, Paypal NotificationNote: Enter the information of Paypal.
In Paypal Balance Minimum: Enter a minimum balance. When the balance is lower than this number, an email will be sent to the email in bellow setting.
In Notification Email When Paypal Account Balance Is Low: Choose an email to receive notification when Paypal Balance is lower than the minimum number.
2.7 Admin Email Notification Template
In Admin Notification Template, you can manage notification emails for the administrations.
In Email Sender (who reply emails will be sent to): Choose an email sender.
In Notify Admin when New Affiliate signs up: Select to get notifications of new affiliate.
In Send New Affiliate Request To: Enter email addresses separated by coma.
2.8 Affiliate Email Notification Templates
These fields allow the admin to choose email senders and email templates for referral. Sample templates are available (choose default ones).
You can view and edit sample templates by going to app\locale\en_US\template\email\mw_affiliate
The affiliate system will notify Affiliate members about account status.
The affiliate system will notify Affiliate members about balance changes, withdrawals and programs.
3. Manage Affiliates
To manage affiliate members, please go to Affiliate Pro ⇒ Manage Affiliate This menu includes 5 sections: Active Affiliate, Pending Affiliates, Manage Affiliate Groups, Manage Websites and All customers.
3.1 Active Affiliates
All active affiliates will be listed under Active Affiliates section.
Please click on each affiliate to view details.
The administrator can lock affiliate accounts here by disabling it via action box. If an affiliate account is locked, he will no longer receive commission and discount as well as use affiliate functions till this account is unlocked.
3.2 View an active affiliate
After clicking on the detail affiliate page, under Affiliate Information, you can find all information of that affiliates such as general, credit balance, history of credit, invitation, withdrawal, and so on.
In General Information, the information of affiliate account, payment method, referral code, affiliate parent, payment method, withdrawal notice email, withdrawal method and reports current balance, total amount of received commission and total amount paid out are stored.
3.3 Manual Adjustment/Payout
In Manual Adjustment section, admin can add or subtract affiliate balance manually. In Manual Payout, enter an amount of money. This amount will be taken as a completed withdrawal of the affiliate. This feature is used when admins wants to pay directly for the affiliate and the system will update affiliate’s current balance and the Total Paid Out field in the General Information tab.
3.4 Transaction History
Transaction History tab shows a list which includes the information of Transaction Time, Type of Transactions, Transaction Detail, Amount (Add or subtract credit for each event) and Balance.
3.5 Invitation History
Invitation History shows details about Invitation Time, Customer Email Address, IP Address, Status (type of referral).
3.6 Invitation History
Withdrawal History show transactions of withdrawal including Withdrawal Time, Withdrawal Amount, Payment Processing Fee, Net Amount (After calculating payment processing fee) and Status (pending or complete). For each withdrawal transaction, you can use Actions box to change its status.
3.7 Withdrawal History
Withdrawal History show transactions of withdrawal including Withdrawal Time, Withdrawal Amount, Payment Processing Fee, Net Amount (After calculating payment processing fee) and Status (pending or complete). For each withdrawal transaction, you can use Actions box to change its status.
3.8 Commission History
Commission History tab lists all transactions related to affiliate’s commission.
3.9 Affiliate Programs
In Affiliate Programs, all programs that affiliate joined in will be shown, however only 1 affiliate program with highest priority is applied for this affiliate.
3.10 Affiliate Websites
Affiliate Websites shows the information of Affiliate’s website.
3.10 Affiliate Network
Affiliate Network lists all sub-levels of Affiliate.
3.11 Pending Affiliates
If you do not select automatically approve the affiliate registration (in Configuration), when a customer signs up for the affiliate system, his/her information will be listed in this page. Then, the administrator can choose to approve or not pending members by selecting members and changing their status at the Actions box (from Pending to Approved or Not Approved).
3.12 Manage Affiliate Groups
In this section, you will have all the affiliate group listed. Admin can Delete group(s) via Action box or Export group to CSV.
To add a new group, follow as below:
After clicking on Add Group, you will see the affiliate group information page with 3 sections: general information, programs and members.
3.12.1 General information
In Group Name: Write a name for the group.
In Maximum number of days affiliate will earn commission from new referral: Set a number of days you want.
In Maximum numbers of orders affiliate will earn commission from new referral: Specify a number of orders. Insert 0 if there is no limitation.
In Maximum commission affiliate will earn from each referral: Specify an amount of money. Insert 0 if there is no limitation.
For example, if you choose $50, consider the case that Affiliate A invites customer B. The customer B places orders that brings the affiliate A an amount of commission. If this amount reaches $50, the Affiliate A will not receive any more commission from customer B’s next orders.
3.12.1 Programs
Assign available programs for the group.
3.12.1 Members
In Members: Pick members for the group.
3.13 Manage Websites
Under this section, you can see details about all affiliate websites including: Customer Email, Website and Status.
Via Action box, you can Delete or Change Status (Verified or Not Verified). Moreover, all websites can be Exported to CSV or XML
3.14 All Customers
Customers section list all customers on your site. You can change the affiliate parent here, applying for both general customers and affiliates. Select customers, choose to Change Affiliate parent at the Actions box, insert the affiliate parent’s email to the Affiliate parent field, and click Submit.
Note that: If you enable the Reassign affiliate when customer enters new referral code field (in configuration), from the frontend page, when an affiliate inserts a new referral code at the shopping cart page, his affiliate parent will be updated.
Moreover, all customers can be Exported to CSV or XML.
3.15 Manage Withdrawals
To manage affiliate withdrawals, please go to Affiliate Pro ⇒ Manage Withdrawals This menu includes 2 sections: All Withdrawals, Pending Withdrawals.
3.15.1 Pending Withdrawals
At this sections, all details of pending withdrawals are shown. They are: Affiliate Account, Payment Method, Payment Email, Withdrawal Time, Withdrawal Amount, Payment Processing Fee, Net Amount and Status
Admis can Change Status of withdrawals (Canceled or Complete) via Actions box and Export to CSV or XML all withdrawals.
3.15.2 All Withdrawals
At this sections, all details of pending withdrawals are shown. They are: Affiliate Account, Payment Method, Payment Email, Withdrawal Time, Withdrawal Amount, Payment Processing Fee, Net Amount and Status.
3.16 View All Transactions
To manage transactions, please go to Affiliate Pro ⇒ View All Transactions This menu includes 2 sections: Commision History, Transaction History.
3.16.1 Commision History
At this sections, Affiliate commission and discount statistics are shown. They are: Transaction Time, Commission Type, Affiliate Account, Affiliate Commission, Customer Discount, Purchase Total, Detail, Status.
Click on View to see details
Admis can Change Status of commission of orders (commission status, not related to the order status) via Actions box or via CSV.
3.16.2 Transaction History
The Transaction History lists all information that relates to balance change (including Time, Affiliate Email, Transaction Type, Amount, Balance).
3.17 Manage Programs
To manage programs, please go to Affiliate Pro ⇒ Manage Programs ⇒ Manage Programs
In Manage Programs section, you are able to create marketing campaigns that decide the commission and discount rule.
To add a new program, click on Add Program. After that, set up more details of the program: general information, conditions, actions, assigned Affiliate groups and program transactions as follow:
3.17.1 Program Details
In Notify affiliate via email: Tick on the checkbox to notify affiliates of the program. Specify Program Name, Description, Store view, Priority for the program.
In Status: Select Enabled to activate the program.
In Start Date and End Date: Choose the active time for the program. The system will auto-close the program when it reaches the expiration date.
In Total Members: The number of affiliates of the program will be shown.
The Total Commission shows the total amount of the commission.
In Conditions: You can set rules for the program, which are the same as Magento shopping cart rules.
In Affiliate Commission/ Customer Discount: Define commission and discount for the program.
In Affiliate Commission, fill in a commision amount for affiliates (if referred customer meets program conditions). The format is x or y% (x - fixed commission amount/ y% - percent of product value) separate multi-level marketing with commas for each level (ex 10%, 5%, 1 etc.)
In Referred Customer Discount for Subsequent Purchases, fill in an amount. To change discounts (fixed amount 'x' or percentage 'y%') for subsequent customer orders, separate discounts with commas in field. Last figure will apply for all subsequent purchases. Ex 10%,5,0 for 10% discount on 1st purchase, $5 discount on 2nd purchase and no discount on subsequent purchases (until expiration date set in Affiliate Group detail)
Under Affiliate will earn commission on individual cart items if they meet the following conditions, you can specify more conditions. In this case, the items in shopping cart have to satisfy conditions at Conditions section and this option.
In Add Group, assign the program to specific affiliate groups. Hit Reset filter and select groups.
Program Transaction displays a list of transaction information: transaction time, product name, affiliate account (who received commission), order number, product value, product commission, discount and status. If the status is complete, the commission will be added to the affiliate balance.
3.18 Manage Banners
To manage banners, please go to Affiliate Pro ⇒ Manage Programs ⇒ Manage Banners. A banner can be visible on specific store views, assigned to specific links and affiliate groups.
To add a new banner, click on Add Banner. After that, set up more details of the banner: Title, Link, Image, Width, Height. Admin also have to assign specific Store views, Affiliate groups and Members to the banner.
3.19 Report
To view Affiliate statics, please follow Affiliate Pro ⇒ Affiliate Report. This including 4 sections: Overview, Affiliate Invitation, Affiliate Sales, Affiliate Website(s).
3.19.1 Overview
Under Date Range dropdown, you can choose a time range to view the report among: Last 24h, Last week, Last month, Last 7 days, Last 30 days or Custom.
Line Chart: Show total sales that are generated by Affiliates, total commission of Affiliates and total amount of discount in the chosen time range.
Sales by Programs (Pie Chart): Present percentages of sales by each affiliate program in chosen time range.
Commission by Programs (Pie Chart): Present percentages of commission by each affiliate program in chosen time range (for the type of commission come from referrals such as: referral visitor, referral sign-up, referral subscribe, those type of commission will belong to non-program group)
Statistics box: Show total sales, total orders, total commission, total withdrawals (withdrawal status is complete), total withdrawal fees, total transactions, average commission per order, average commission per affiliate, average order value and total affiliate.
Top Affiliate by Sales box: Show 10 top affiliates who have highest sales.
3.19.2 Affiliate Invitation
In the From and To fields, use the calendar to specify the time range for report data aggregating.
Select type of showing by Day, Month, or Year in dropdown of the Show By field.
Click on the Refresh button to view details information about Affiliate Account, # of clicks, # of New accounts, # of purchases and Website
Select the CSV or Excel option and click on the Export button to export the report information, in the Export to field.
3.19.3 Affiliate Sales
In the From and To fields, use the calendar to specify the time range for report data aggregating.
Select type of showing by Day, Month, or Year in dropdown of the Show By field.
Click on the Refresh button to view details information about Affiliate Account, # of customers referred, # of order, # of sales items, Total Sales, Total Commission, Total Customer Discount
Select the CSV or Excel option and click on the Export button to export the report information in the Export to field.
3.19.4 Affiliate Websites
In the From and To fields, use the calendar to specify the time range for report data aggregating.
Select type of showing by Day, Month, or Year in dropdown of the Show By field.
Click on the Refresh button to view details information about Affiliate website, # of clicks, # of new accounts, # of purchases
Select the CSV or Excel option and click on the Export button to export the report information in the Export to field.
How to know your website performance in real-time, daily, weekly, monthly, etc.? Google Analytics 4 (GA4) is a savior here! Our Magento 2 Google Analytics 4 extension helps to directly integrate GA4 and your store by filling in the GA4 measurement ID.
With just one step, you will be able to track, record, and view crucial data for your eCommerce business right in your Google Analytics account. Keep track of your purchases, cart additions, impressions, and overall user activity and confidently plan your next move.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Google Analytics 4.
IMPORTANT: To prevent duplicate events, disable native Magento GA4 if supported in your Magento version: Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Google API.
2.1. General Config
In Enable, choose Yes to enable or No to disable the module.
Measurement ID: Fill in your GA4 Measurement ID. Check the instructions below (part 2.2) to set up data streams and get the Measurement ID.
Product Identifier: Allow store owners to choose attributes to identify products imported to GA4: ID or SKU.
Enable Brand: Choose Yes to add param item_brand to the item’s data; otherwise, choose No. (The default is No)
Brand Attribute includes all product attributes (system and custom) on site. This config allows the store owner to choose identified attributes for the product’s brand.
For example,
Enable Affiliation: Choose Yes to add param affiliation to the item’s data; otherwise, choose No. (The default is No)
Affiliation Attribute includes all product attributes (system and custom) on site. This config allows the store owner to choose identified attributes for the product’s affiliation.
For example,
Next, you can also customize the value of the transaction:
Get price of bundle product by: There’re 3 options: min, max and average to choose from. This function helps admin to decide which bundle price will be listed on GA4.
Exclude Shipping From Transaction: Choose Yes if you don’t want to calculate shipping costs to transactions listed on GA4. Otherwise, select No. (The default is No)
Exclude Orders with 0 value: Choose Yes if you don’t want to list Orders with 0 value on GA4. Otherwise, select No. (The default is No)
2.2. How To Get GA4 Measurement ID
2.2.1. Create an Analytics account if you haven’t had one yet
Step 1: Go to Admin => Account column => Create Account.
Step 2: Fill out the account name and set up the data-sharing to monitor which data you share with Google.
Step 3: Click Next
2.2.2. Create a property
Step 1: In Admin => Property column => Create Property
Step 2: Enter a name for the property. Then, select the reporting time zone and currency.
Step 3: Choose Next. Select your industry classification and company size.
Step 4: Click Create.
2.2.3. Add a data stream
Click Web => Enter your website URL => Enable enhanced measurement if you want to use eCommerce tracking => Create stream.
2.2.4. Get your measurement ID
Paste your "G-" ID into the Measurement ID field that the module provides. Your "G-" ID appears at the upper right.
* Note: Starting the data collection process could take up to 30 minutes. The real-time report or debug mode can confirm that you are receiving data.
2.2.5. Monitor events in DebugView
DebugView displays the events and user properties that Analytics collects from a user in real time, allowing you to troubleshoot issues as you install your tags or step through an external user's live activity.
To monitor certain events only, add a 'debug_mode':true parameter to just those events, for example:
gtag('event', 'xyz', { 'debug_mode':true });
Disable debug mode
To disable debug mode, exclude the 'debug_mode' parameter; setting the parameter to false doesn't disable debug mode.
Once you enable debug mode on your devices, go to Admin > DebugView in the left navigation monitor the events as they're triggered.
The Seconds stream (the middle column) shows the events that have been logged in the last 60 seconds. The Minutes stream (the left column) shows a series of archives of events in the last 30 minutes. The right column shows the Top Events logged in the 30-minute period and the user properties for the currently selected device.
3. eCommerce Events Tracking
3.1. Recommended events for eCommerce stores
We recommend you to track these eCommerce events via Google Analytics 4 to measure sales on your Magento store:
Our module supports these following payment methods for conversion tracking:
Paypal Express
Braintree
Klarna
Stripe
Check/Money order
Bank Transfer
Cash On Delivery
Zero Subtotal Checkout
Purchase Order
Authorize.net Direct Post
3.3. Track Custom Product Attributes
Besides the predefined dimensions that Google Analytics already provides, users can also add customized parameters for better tracking.
Our GA4 extension will support creating custom item-scoped dimensions in the backend for product attributes like color, size, product name, price, etc. within the items array of e-commerce events like 'purchase' or 'add_to_cart'.
3.3.1. How to set up
To do this, you have to (1) Add the custom event parameter to your website (which our module will do for you), then (2) Create item-scoped custom dimensions in your GA4 property.
First, in the backend, navigate Stores > Configuration > BSS Commerce > Google Analytics 4 > Custom Dimension.
At Enable Item-scoped, choose Yes to enable this function.
At Related Product Attribute:
To add a custom dimension/parameter, click the Add button. You can add only up to 10 custom dimensions.
In Track Custom Attributes column, choose the product attributes you want to add to GA4 tracking.
In Parameter Label column, you name the dimension/parameter for the selected attribute. Note: this label must have the same name as the item parameter dimension you’re about to add to GA4.
Then click Save Config button to finish.
After that, create the custom dimension in your GA4 property following this guide from Google.
Note:
The product attributes to be tracked are only supported in these formats: 'text', 'textarea', 'date', 'date/time', 'dropdown', 'multi-select', 'price', 'boolean', 'swatch_visual', 'select', 'swatch_text'.
With Dimension Name, you can't use hyphens in the name, but you can use underscores and spaces instead.
3.3.2. Expected Results
Note: It usually takes around 24-48 hours for custom parameters to be sent to Google Analytics. During this period, the value displayed will often be "not set".
To view all the dimensions added on GA4, by these ways:
(1) See the list of item-scoped dimensions you add by navigating: Admin > Data Display > Custom Definitions
(2) See the custom parameters in ‘purchase’ or 'add_to_cart' events in Google Analytics 4 reports or in Tag Assistant's Data Layer like this:
(3) Use in Explore function of GA4:
Navigate to the Explore. Then select Create New Exploration.
You will see the Dimensions tab on the left. Click the + button to see all the Dimensions.
Choose the Custom tab. Then expand the Custom section, and you will see the added dimensions. Now, your custom dimensions are accessible for use in your report.
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ Convert Image Webp ⇒ General Configuration.
In the Enabled section, choose:
- Yes: Enable Magento 2 webp online converter module. It starts the automatic conversion of webp image display in the frontend. - No: Disable the module. You don't want the automatic conversion and display of webp images in the frontend.
Quality: The higher this value is, the higher the image quality will become. Our webp quality default is 75. * Note: This configuration can only be applied when uploading images or running commands., which means that the webp image quality displayed on the frontend will not depend on this value.
Skip Folders: You can pick the image folders that you do not allow automatic conversion to webp images in the frontend. Enter the relative path of an image in its original format (jpg, png..).
Auto Generate Webp Image: Choose "Yes" to automatically convert images to webp format when loading pages that have images in jpg, jpeg, or png format. Choose "No" to keep images in jpg, jpeg, or png format.
Clear All Webp Images: Delete all webp images that the module generated (used when updating new quality)
Note: In case you want to update quality using command, you can run php bin/magento bss_c_i_w:convert [<path>] [<quality>], with [<path>] is the image location and [<quality>] is the new quality index. (e.g. php bin/magento bss_c_i_w:convert pub/media 80). With this cmd, you would not need to wait for the system to delete old webp images.
2.1.2. Choose the place on-site to convert to webp images
Magento 2 Convert images to webp enables you to choose the pages you want the webp image online converting. There are 4 main places: Product Page, Category Page, Home Page, CMS Page.
Product Page
Switch Enabled to Yes to enable the process of converting images to webp automatically at the Product Pages.
Ignore IDs Products: For Product IDs inputted here, in the frontend, images in those product pages will be shown in the original format.
Ignore Images: Input the image name in the original format. It's possible to input many images, each of them is separated by commas. The inputted images will be shown in the original format. This configuration is used when admin wants to display images with full size and quality on the frontend, which does not require to convert images into .webp format. * Note: In case you upload an existing image, Magento will auto-change the image name. So, please make sure to input the exact image name.
The same configurations are applied to the other page types.
Category page
Home Page & CMS Page
2.2. Magento 2 Social Login
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ Ajax Social Login.
2.2.1. General
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it. In Use Popup Ajax, choose Yes to enable popup for login and register. Otherwise, choose No to disable it. In Send Password, choose Yes to send customers an email that contains the password after they login using a social account. The customer then can use their email and password to log in to your site. Choose No to disable it. In Display Customer Photo, choose Yes to display the customer’s profile photo from the social account they used for signup, or choose No to not display customer’s social photo. In Redirect after Login, select the page on site or any particular URL you want to redirect after customer login successfully. In Redirect after Register, select the page on site or any particular URL you want to redirect after customer completed register process.
2.2.2. Social Button Block
In Display buttons social login on popup, decide to display social buttons on Login tab or Register tab of popup, or place it on both tabs. In Display buttons social follow class or id, enter class/id to place social button social login on. In Display buttons social register follow class or id, enter class/id to place social button social register on. In Number of button displayed, set the restriction of number of buttons to display on social login block. In Social Button Sorting, decide the arrangement of buttons in social login block.
2.2.3. ReCaptcha
In Site Key and Secret Key, click “Create a site key” and register reCaptcha. After registering, you will get the Site key and Secret key as below: In Theme, choose the theme of reCaptcha between: Light: Dark: In Type: Choose the type of robot checking between Image and Audio In Size: Choose the size of reCaptcha widget between Normal and Compact. In Popup Form: Choose the form(s) of popup on site to place the reCaptcha widget. A form of popup includes Login,Register and Forgot Password?
2.2.4. Configure specific social account
2.2.4.1. Facebook
Take Facebook account as the example: In Enable, choose Yes to enable Facebook account for login and register on the site, or choose No to disable it. In App ID and App Secret, click on “click here” below Enable dropdown box, you will be redirected to a page to set up new API like below. After completing register step, you will see a page as below. Click on Get Started in Facebook Login. Click on Dashboard, you will see your App ID and App Secret - copy them and paste correspondingly into App ID and App Secret box in the backend configuration. In URI redirection valid OAuth– copy the Valid OAuth redirect URIs like below and paste into the box URI redirection valid Oauth. In Small Icon, upload the file for the icon of this account displayed in the frontend. In Login Button Text, customize the text in social login button. In Registration Button Text, customize the text in social registration button. Note: In case you run into the error “Blocked URL” use URI at the link to re-setup the configuration, as follow: For other social accounts, follow similar steps like the setting for Facebook:
2.2.4.2. Twitter
2.2.4.3. Google
2.2.4.4. LinkedIn
To get Client ID, Client Secret and Redirect URL, please click on "click here" link and follow steps as below: + Create new application: + Set up Authentication for application: You get Redirect URLs in this step: + Copy Client ID and Client Secret to the configuration:
2.2.4.5. Window-Live
To get Application ID, Application Secret and Redirect URL, please click on "click here" link and follow steps as below: + Click on "click here" link to be redirected to Microsoft App register page: + Copy & Paste Redirect URL(s) to the app detail page: + Copy & Paste Application Id and Secret to Social Login configuration:
2.2.4.6. Instagram
Note: You need to edit the email after the 1st login. To get Application ID, Application Secret and Redirect URL, please click on "click here" link and follow steps as below: + Create New Client ID: + Fill in web information: + Get Client ID and Client Secret: *Note: - Client status must be Authorized, then you can get the real Instagram account. In case you use sandbox mode, sandbox account is only accepted. - Sometimes, you might face up to the error like this. The solution is to copy the Redirect URIs and paste it in the client info page:
2.2.4.8. Vkontakte
Finally, click Save Config and to complete setting process.
2.3. Magento 2 Layered Navigation
Before going into details of the configuration, we want to remind you about some terms we will use in the User Guide. About Attributes: Attributes are the building blocks of your product catalog, and describe specific characteristics of a product. There are 2 terms will be used in the User Guide: Attribute Block and Attribute Option.
2.3.1. Layered Navigation Configs
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ LayeredNavigation and start configuration.
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the module, otherwise choose No. In Rating, choose Yes to enable filter by rating attribute, otherwise choose No. Multiple select is disabled for rating attribute block, and users can only select one rating attribute option at a time.
In Category Tree Level, enter the number of category tree level to be displayed in Category attribute block. Enter 0 to display the default Category. Let’s take the following example:
If you enter 0: only show category A
If you enter 1: show category A and sub-categories of the category A (B and C)
If you enter 2: show category A, B, C and also sub-categories of category B.
In Use Ajax, choose Yes to enable loading layered navigation result by Ajax, otherwise choose No. In Apply Button, choose Yes to display Apply Filter button on the frontend, otherwise choose No. If you choose Yes: customers can select wanted attribute options, and click Apply Filter button. Then, customers can get corresponding search results with their selected options. For example:
Customer select options as below:
Results are generated:
To clear filters, customers click to Clear All. *Note: We will have some logic for filtering here:
Filter by category: If you select 2 categories, only products belonging to either of 2 categories are displayed in the filter results (OR condition).
Eg: You select Jackets and Tees categories. Product A belongs to Jackets. Product B also belongs to Tees
→ Hence, product A and B will be displayed after filtering.
Filter by attribute input type (Multiple select, Dropdown, and Swatch):
If you choose 2 options in an attribute, the results will show all products satisfying 1 or 2 of these 2 options (OR logic).
Eg. You select Insulated and Hooded in the style option. After filtering, you will get all products with Insulated OR Hooded style.
If you choose 2 options in 2 different attributes, the results will show all products satisfying both of these 2 options (AND logic).
Eg. You select Mesh and Fleece in the material option and select XS in the size option. After filtering, you will get all products with Fleece OR Mesh material AND with size XS.
Filter by Price: you are allowed to filter Price by the only one range.
Eg: you can filter products with price from $20 to $50. It is impossible to filter products with 2 price ranges: $20-S50 and $70-$100.
Note:
+ Function Filter by price DOES NOT depend on the config default Price Navigation Step Calculation - set up 3 options in the configuration will not result in bug of displaying price in Layer Navigation.
+ If Price is set to be seen as List, the price range will not be influenced by default config set up at Configurations. However, it will get influenced by the config "Layered Navigation Price Step" set up at the backend Category page.
Filter by Rating: you are allowed to filter by the only one rating option.
In Expand/Collapse, choose Expand to expand the attribute options after loading the page or filtering results. Choose Collapse to collapse the attribute options. In Show More/Less, fill in a number (X). If the number of attribute options is bigger than X, the Show More/Show Less buttons will be displayed. Enter 0 if you want to disable the Show More/Show Less button.
2.3.2. Product Attribute Settings
Please go to Stores ⇒ Attributes ⇒ Product Edit Product Attribute and start configuration.
2.3.2.1.Storefront Properties
In Storefront ⇒ Properties Use in Layered Navigation, choose one of the two options below
Filterable (with results): Layered navigation includes only those filters for which matching products can be found. Any attribute option that already applies to all products shown in the list does not appear as an available filter. Attribute options with a count of zero (0) product matches are also omitted from the list of available filters.
Filterable (no results): Layered navigation includes filters for all available attribute options and their product counts, including those with zero (0) product matches. If the attribute option is a swatch, the value appears as a filter, but is crossed out.
Please note that Use in Layered Navigation is only available to catalog input type Dropdown, Multiple Select and Price.
2.3.2.2. Storefront Proper
Go to Attribute ⇒ Information ⇒ BSS Layered Navigation to start configuration. In Display Option Settings, there are 8 display options to choose. But the options are available to specific catalog input types, here are how you can set up.
Display Option
Catalog Input Type
Label with checkbox
Multiple Select + Dropdown
Label with radio box
Visual swatch
Dropdown
Visual swatch with label
Text swatch
Price slider (from-to)
Price
Price range (automatic calculator)
Price input box (from-to)
In Show More/Less, there are 2 options:
No: disable Show More/Show Less button of the attribute block.
Use General Setting: follow the general settings at Stores Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE Layered Navigation ⇒ Show More/Less.
In Expand/Collapse, there are 3 options:
Expand: expand the attribute options after showing filtered results.
Collapse: collapse the attribute options after showing filtered results.
Use General Setting: follow the general settings at Stores ⇒ Configuration BSSCOMMERCE Layered Navigation ⇒ Expand/Collapse.
Click Save and flush the cache to complete the configuration. NEW UPDATE: Show/hide count in the layer by following this path config Catalog > Catalog > Layered Navigation > Display Product Count.
2.4. Magento 2 Popup
2.4.1 General Configuration
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Pop-up General Configuration. In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
2.4.2 Manage Pop-up Grid
Go to Marketing ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Pop-up ⇒ Manage Pop-up.Manage Pop-up grid shows all pop-up you have created with full information, including Pop-up Name, Enable, Display Rule, Displayed Pages, Content, Store Views, Customer Groups, Start Date and End Date. The Manage Pop-up grid works just like standard grid in Magento 2 default with features such as mass action (delete, enable, disable), filter and column display.
2.4.3 How to Create New Pop-up
Please click on the Create New Pop-up button located on the top right of the grid. You will be redirected to the New Pop-up Page, which has 3 tabs:
General
Display Rule
Content and Design
There are 4 buttons to support creating a new pop-up:
Back
Reset
Save and Continue
Save Pop-up
2.4.3.1 General
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the new pop-up. In Name, enter the pop-up’s name. In StoreViews, select which store views to display the pop-up. In CustomerGroups, choose the customer groups to view pop-up. In StartDate, select a date in the calendar view to begin showing the pop-up. In EndDate, select a date in the calendar view to stop displaying the pop-up. In Priority, enter a number to decide the priority of the pop-up when multiple pop-ups are created on a page.
2.4.3.2 Display Rule
In DisplayRule, choose one of the four following conditions to set conditions for displaying the pop-up:
After customers spend X seconds on the page.
After customers scroll page by X percent.
After customers view X pages.
Immediately when customers visit the page.
Exit Intent
In Xequals, enter a number to decide the value of X. In DisplayAnimation, choose one of the six following options to set display effects for the pop-up:
Zoom
Horizontal Move
Move from Top
3D Unfold
Zoom-out
None
In Position, select the position to display the pop-up on the page.
Top Left
Top Center
Top Right
Middle Left
Middle Center
Middle Right
In Auto Close Pop-up After, enter the amount of time (seconds) for the pop-up to automatically close. Ex: 10. Enter “0” to disable auto close of Pop-up In Display Frequency, determine the frequency of pop-up display by selecting one of the following options:
When all conditions are satisfied: the pop-up appears if the above rules are executed.
Only once: the pop-up only appears once.
Only once per session: the pop-up appears once in a session. If you choose this option, you need to set Cookie Expires.
For example, if you choose DisplayFrequency as “Only once per session” and set the 2 minutes for the CookieExpires, the pop-up is displayed when the conditions are satisfied, then it won’t be shown in the next 2 minutes (until the session ends or the cookie expires). In Enable Floating Pop-up, choose Yes to display Floating Popup (Popup still appear on product page after being closed by customer).After choosing Yes, you need to implement these configurations:In Floating Pop-up Type: Alter Popup into Icon/Button by selecting one.
If you choose Icon, in Floating Icon, you canchoose one of 8 available icon designs:
Contact Form
Hot Deal
Newsletter
Notification Bell
Promotional
Promotions
Social Media
Warning.
If you choose Button, you can customize the text and color of the popup in Floating Button Text and Floating Button Fill Color.
In Floating Pop-up Position, select the position to display the floating pop-up on the page:
Middle Left
Middle Right
Bottom Center
Bottom Left
Bottom Right
In Display "Close" button, select No to not allow customers to close Floating Popup. Otherwise, select Yes. In Layout Updates: In Display on, select pages to show the pop-up, including the following types of pages:
Category Pages
Product Pages
Generic Pages
When you choose each type of page, you can select all pages or specific pages depending on your demand. For example: + Category page: + Product page: + All pages: (You can exclude specific pages from displaying a popup when you select the option as All pages) Furthermore, it is easy to add more layout updates to show popup in more pages by clicking the button. After selecting the position and page, you can check the result on the front end.
2.4.3.3. Content and Design
Content and Design In Content, use the WYSIWYG editor to create content for the pop-up. You can use this tool to insert widget, image or video for the pop-up’s content. In Pop-up CSS, use CSS to change the design of the pop-up. If leaving blank, the default pop-up will be applied. Or, you can use our default template to quickly render your pop up. There are 5 templates to choose from:
Contact Form
Age Verification
Newsletter
Hot deals (product listing)
Social sharing
After choosing your template, click on the Load Template button to make the template appear in the Content edit interface. In the Content edit, you can make any modification if needed. In Popup CSS, you can enter CSS code to change the popup design. If leave blank, the default design will be used. Note: After any change to the pop-up configuration, either Save, Delete, Mass delete, Mass active, is made, a cache notification will appear. You then must go to SYSTEM -> Tools -> Cache Management ->Flush Magento Cache for those changes to be applied to the front end.
2.5. Magento 2 One Step Checkout
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ One Step Checkout.
2.5.1 In General
In Enable:
Choose Yes to enable Magento 2 One Step Checkout extension.
Choose No to disable this module.
In Allow Creating Account On Checkout Page:
Choose Yes to allow customers to create their accounts right on the checkout page.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Title: Write your wanted title for the checkout page. In Router Name: Choose an URL name for your checkout page.
2.5.2 In Fields Display
In Show Order Comment:
Choose Yes to show a text box for customers to leave their comments for orders.
Choose No to exclude this box from the checkout page
In Show Discount Code:
Choose Yes to display a discount code box for entering coupon codes.
Choose No to hide it.
2.5.3 In Newsletter
In Show Subscribe Newsletter:
Choose Yes to allow customers to subscribe to the newsletter on the checkout page.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Auto Check Newsletter Sign up Box: Choose Yes to automatically tick the Newsletter Sign up box or choose No to uncheck.
2.5.4 In Tracking Address by Google
In Enable Tracking Address by Google:
Choose Yes: Auto-detect and pre-fill customers' country, state/province, city - Google Suggest to autocomplete shipping address while typing.
Choose No: Customers have to find all street addresses and location information themselves.
In Google API Key: Fill in your API Key. In case you haven’t yet had an API Key, please click the link after this configuration to get it.In Tracking Address from Applicable Countries: This configuration determines which countries to apply auto-suggesting customer addresses. There are 2 options to select:
If you choose All Allowed Countries: auto-suggesting address function is applied to every country.
If you choose Specific Countries: there is a list of countries in Tracking Address from Specific Countries and the maximum number of countries you can select is 5. Moreover, when you choose this option, Google just auto-suggests city name and country, not street name. This is the default function of Google auto-suggest.
*Notes:
Admin has to work with Google and pay for Google Maps to activate the address autocompleting feature.
Your websites must be "https://" to run the auto-fill function.
Your login customers can checkout with multiple addresses.
2.5.5 In Order Delivery Date
In Show Delivery Date:
Choose Yes to display Order delivery date in the Shipping method section that allows customers to choose their own suitable dates and times to receive orders.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Show Delivery Comment:
Choose Yes to display a Delivery comment box in the Shipping Method section.
In case M2 Order Delivery Date is installed: All features of M2 Order Delivery Date will be active. Customers can choose the delivery date and admin can give them certain delivery time slots:
In case M2 Order Delivery Date is not installed: All features of One Step Checkout delivery date will be active. Customers can choose whatever delivery date and time they want:
2.5.6 In Gift Message
In Show Gift Message on Order Level:
Choose Yes to allow customers to send a gift message to other people.
Choose No to disable this function.
* Gift Message config is applied only when the corresponding default config is enabled. To enable the default config, please go to Stores⇒ Sales ⇒ Sales ⇒ Gift Options and choose Yes to the suitable gift message level:
2.5.7 In Gift Wrap
In Enable:
Choose Yes to allow customers to request a gift wrap for their order.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Type: This function currently supports gift wrap for each order only, so the value is Per Order by default.In Gift Wrap Fee: Fill the price for gift wrap service. The entered value is a positive number and automatically rounded to two decimal places. If left empty or filled with a negative number, the value would turn to be 0.
M2 Customer Attributes: Carefully config the Customer Attributes function to give your customers the best shopping experience! Go to Customers⇒ Customer Attributes. In each customer attribute, go to Display Configuration:
In Display on Checkout Page: Choose Yes to make customer attributes be shown on the checkout page, choose No to disable this function.
In Hide If Filled Before: Choose Yes so that if customers fill the customer attribute for the first time, it will not display after that. Choose No to always display the customer attribute whenever customers go to the checkout page.
M2 Checkout Custom Field: Go to Sales⇒ Bss Commerce ⇒ Manage Checkout Custom Field ⇒ Add New Field to create a custom field for the checkout page.
M2 Pre-select Shipping/Payment: Go to Stores⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ Pre-select Shipping/Payment to config the default shipping/payment method when customers enter the checkout page.
2.5.9 In Custom Style
In Checkout Step Number Color: you choose the color for the checkout number steps. In Checkout Step Background Color: Choose a color for the background of checkout number steps. In Custom Code: you can add more code to customize about background color for the checkout page, “Sign in” button or text color and so on.
2.5.10 Somes notes
Notes about custom code
+ Change background of the checkout page, you need to add more code:
body { background-color: #333333;
}
(#33333 is the color code which is corresponding to Black). + Change text color of the checkout page, you need to add more code:
body { color: #ffffff;
}
(#fffff is the color code which is corresponding to White). + Change Sign in to a button, you add more code:
Step 1: Go to Content⇒ Blocks ⇒ Add New Block to create a new block for payment trust badge. Step 2: Go to Content⇒ Widgets ⇒ Add Widget to choose certain place to display the block of payment trust badge.
Note about adding header/footer for the checkout page: Upload folder bss_onestepcheckout to app/design/frontend/theme_space/theme.
To log in to Amazon Pay on the One step checkout page, you need to check and change the URL so that the URL of Router Name config in BSS One Step Checkout extension is the same as Magento Checkout Url Path one in Amazon.
Magento 2 Administration Package is a comprehensive solution to assist admin in carrying out essential tasks and managing activities in the backend of a Magento 2 website. It includes 13 extensions:
+ Admin Email Notification
+ Admin Action Log
+ Admin Product Preview Plus
+ Inventory Report
+ Guest to Customer
+ Custom Order Number
+ Auto Invoice
+ Product Grid Inline Editor
+ Duplicate CMS Page/Block
+ Delete Order
+ Reindex from the Backend
+ Custom Product Attribute Export
+ Disable Compare
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. Admin Email Notification
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Admin Email Notification.
2.1.1. Select Email sender
In Email Sender: choose an email from your system to send notification emails.
2.1.2. New Order Notification Email
In Enable Notification: choose Yes to enable notification email when a new order has been placed, or Not to disable it.
In Email Template: select email template for new order notification email. This module has a default email template but you can create your new email template to apply to this config. (Marketing → Email Templates)
In Email Receiver: enter email addresses to receive the notifications, the emails are separated by commas (,). This module supports sending multiple emails.
Output Email (default template)
2.1.3. Low stock products
In Enable Notification: choose Yes to enable notification email when a product becomes low stock, or Not to disable it.
In Notify When Product Qty Falls Below: enter a number to set as low stock value. The notification email will be sent if product quantity falls below this value.
In Email Template: select email template for low stock notification email. This module has a default email template but you can create your new email template to apply to this config. (Marketing → Email Templates)
In Email Receiver: enter email addresses to receive the notifications, the emails are separated by commas (,). This module supports sending multiple emails.
Output email (default template)
2.1.4. Order status change
In Enable Notification: choose Yes to enable notification email when order status has been changed, or Not to disable it.
In Email Template: select email template for order status change notification email. This module has a default email template but you can create your new email template to apply to this config. (Marketing → Email Templates)
In Status: select statuses that you want to receive email when order status change to what you selected.
In Email Receiver: enter email addresses to receive the notifications, the emails are separated by commas (,). This module supports sending multiple emails.
Output email (default)
2.1.5. New review
You can customize this section the same as New Order Notification Email.
Output Email (default template)
2.1.6. New customer registration
You can customize this section the same as New Order Notification Email.
Output email (default template)
2.1.7. Customer newsletter subscription
You can customize this section the same as New Order Notification Email.
Output email (default template)
2.1.8. Customer newsletter unsubscription
You can customize this section the same as New Order Notification Email.
Output email (default template)
2.1.9. New wish list
The new wish list notification email will be sent only when customers add products to wishlist the first time. You can customize this section the same as New Order Notification Email.
Output email (default template)
***Note: After setting, you need to press Save Config button to save your configuration then flush cache to start using the module.
2.2. Admin Action Log
2.2.1 General configs
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Admin Action Log.
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
In Automatically Clear Action Logs after…Days: enter a number (days) to set how long the log records will be deleted automatically.
In Enable Objects: Select objects to log actions related to.
2.2.2. Admin action log
2.2.2.1 Action Logs Grid
Please go to Amin Panel ⇒ Admin Action Log ⇒ Admin Logs Grid.
In Date column: the date and time when action is performed.
In User Name column: show user name of the admin.
In IP Address column: the IP Address of the corresponding admin user.
In Action Name column: full name of the action.
In Action Type column: display type of action, including Delete, Mass Delete, Save, Edit, Flush, View, Login, Print,…
In Object column: object of the action, this extension only logs actions related to objects selected in the General Configuration above.
In Specific Object column: the specific object was affected by the action.
In Result column: the result of the action, it can be “Success” or “Failure”.
In View column: click on “View” link to preview action log detailed page.
2.2.2.2. Action Log Details Page
The Action Log Details page displays:
The general information of the action displayed in the grid
A table shows all detailed information about the action, including:
+ Source data (it is the line Magento\Catalog\Model\Product in the screenshot above)
+ Name column: name of item attributes
+ Old Value column: the value of attributes before performing the action
+ New Value column: the value of attributes after performing the action. The changed value is highlighted to realize easily.
***Note: The table showing detailed changes in attribute value will be disabled for some action types such as Login, View, Flush, Delete, Mass Delete, Create,...
Revert action
This extension allows you to revert actions affecting configs of System Configuration object change in case these modifications are incorrect. Please notice that you can only restore the changes of configs in Store → Configuration.
2.2.3. Login action grid
Please go to Admin Panel ⇒ Admin Action Log ⇒ Login Action Grid. The Login action Grid displays all login attempts of administrators to your store backend.
In Date column: the specific date and time when the user logins to the backend.
In User Name column: the name of the user who logins to the backend.
In IP Address column: IP address of the admin user.
In User Agent column: web-browsers that admin uses to login.
In Status column: the result of login action such as Success Failure, Auto Logout.
2.2.4. Page visit history
2.2.4.1. Page Visit History Grid
Please go to Admin Panel ⇒ Admin Action Log ⇒ Page Visit History The Page Visit History grid shows the browsing history of admins in each session.
In User Name column: the user name of the administrator.
In Full Name column: full name of admin account.
In IP Address column: IP Address of the admin user.
In Session Start column: the specific time when a session started.
In Session End column: the specific time when the session ended. In case the session is currently active, the Session End field will be blank.
In View column: link to Page Visit Details of each session.
2.2.4.2. Page Visit Details
Please click on “View” link in View column to see the Page Visit Details of a specific session. The first part is the general information displayed in the Page Visit History Grid.
A table lists all pages that the user visited in a session:
In Page Name column: the title of the visited page
In Page URL column: the URL link of this page
In Stay Duration column: the duration time that the admin user stayed on the page.
2.2.5. Active session grid
Please go to Admin Panel ⇒ Admin Action Log ⇒ Active Sessions
The Active Sessions Grid lets you know who is online in your backend store.
In Login At column: specific date and time that user logins to the backend.
In User Name column: user name of the admin.
In Full Name column: full name of the admin.
In IP Address column: IP Address of the admin user.
2.2.6. Admin user roles
Please go to System ⇒ Permissions ⇒ User Roles, press Role Resources tab In the tree, mark the checkbox related to this module to allow the admin to access the module and action log pages, or don’t mark the checkbox related to this module to disable module settings and action log pages with the admin.
When complete, tap the “Save Role” button.
2.2.7. Email notification when quantity changes
Here, you can set up:
Email sender: The default is General Contact. If you want to change the config, uncheck the Use system value box then choose from the drop-down field.
Send Email Copy To: Fill in the email you want to recieve the email nofication. You can enter multiple email here, use a comma to separate them.
Qty Change Email Template: The default is Qty Change Notification. If you want to change the config, uncheck the Use system value box then choose from the drop-down field.
2.3. Product Preview Plus
2.3.1. In Stores
Please navigate to Stores ⇒Settings⇒Configuration.
In General Configuration.
In Enabled Admin Preview, choose Yes to enable module or choose No to disable module.
In Product Grid Preview Button Position, set position of product grid preview button by choosing In New Column or In Action Column.
In Customer Grid Login Button Column, set position of column of customer Log-in button by choosing In New Column or In Action Column.
In Product Preview Link Type, choose Frontend or Backend to decide the navigation of preview links.
In Disable Page Cache For Admin User, choose Yes to activate automatic cache flush before admin log in as customer and set show Product Preview Link Type to Frontend, otherwise choose No.
In Show Edit Link In Frontend For, choose one or multiple pages to place Edit Page buttons which directs admin to backend Edit Page from the frontend.
2.3.2. In Sales
Please go to Sales ⇒ Operations ⇒ Orders.
Then check the Sales Order Grid table consisting of various columns, in which Bill-to-namecolumn presenting names of customers who have placed orders on site, and Item Ordered column displaying brief information of ordered product (SKU, name, image…)
Click the name of the customer to navigate to Customer Information section in the backend to check or make changes if needed.
Click the name of the product to see the preview of Product Page in the frontend.
2.3.3. In Products
2.3.3.1. Preview Products
To get preview of products, please navigate to Products ⇒ Catalog
Click Preview button in product grid view in Catalog section to see the preview of Product Page in the frontend, make changes in product information in Edit if necessary and click save.
Admin need to enable the product to use the Preview button; however, you can decide to show that product to customers or not by using the Admin Preview attribute on Product Edit Page in the backend.
If choose Yes for the Admin Preview attribute, only you can see the preview of that product by clicking the Preview button. Customers can't search or see that product.
2.3.3.2. Preview Categories
To get the preview of categories, please go to Products ⇒Categories
Check the list of Category Pages, make changes if needed, click Save then use Preview button to check the frontend display of the chosen Category Page.
2.3.4. In Customers
Please go to Customers ⇒ All customers Click Login button to log in customer account from the backend. The module will permit admins to log in as customer in frontend page. In Customers ⇒ Login As Customer Log. Login As Customer Log shows history of how many times admin has logged in as customer in the frontend.
2.3.5. In Content
Please go to Content ⇒ Elements ⇒ Pages.
Check the list of CMS Pages, click select and choose Edit to make changes in the content of CMS Pages, then click Save.
In Edit CMS page, make changes if necessary, click Save Page and use Preview button to check frontend display of the edited page.
2.4. Inventory Report
2.4.1. Inventory Report for all products
Please go to Admin ⇒ Products ⇒ Inventory ⇒ Inventory Report.
A grid logging all product stock movement will appear.
In ID column: ID of the change in product inventory.
In Product ID column: ID of product that is changed quantity.
In Product Name column: product name linked to product edit page.
In Product SKU: product SKU and it is linked to product edit page.
In Time column: the time that the inventory is modified. It depends on settings in Admin ⇒ Configuration ⇒ General ⇒ Locale Options. Click on the arrow (↑ or ↓) to change the order of time quickly.
In Quantity column: current quantity of product.
In Quantity Change column: quantity of products that are modified.
In Stock Status column: stock status of product (In Stock/Out of Stock)
In Note column: note the action that makes quantity change, such as Order Creation No, Order Cancellation No, Credit Memo Refund No, Import Product, Admin Manual Change and Change stock by REST API. (the order number is attached to the notes relating to order)
In User column: display who makes the product inventory change.
In Source Name column: new function in Magento 2.3 specifies the name of warehourses or physical stores where you get products to ship to customers.
In Action column: click on View Order or View Memo to see the detailed order or detailed credit memo.
New update:
Enable Salable Quantity and Salable Quantity Change column:
In the User column: separate the inventory changemaker: admin, customer, or guest. There is also a quick link to see the customer details.
***Note:
This module only works with products having stock management.
All actions with grid in Magento 2 are also valid with this grid. You are able to sort, filter, search, show/hide columns, pagination and export data.
You can delete inventory log by selecting wanted logs and click Action box to remove.
2.4.2. Inventory Report for each product
Please go to Admin ⇒ Products ⇒ Inventory ⇒ Catalog, click on Edit to go to product edit page.
In BSS Inventory Report section, there is a grid table showing all stock changes of this product.
You can also navigate to product edit page by click on the product name or SKU in the inventory report grid of all products.
2.4.3. Actions make quantity change
Admin manual change
+ Change quantity in product edit page
+ Add new product
Create order
+ Customers create order from the frontend
+ Admin Create order in the backend
Please go to Sales ⇒ Orders ⇒ Create New Order.
Cancel the order and show the quantity change
Create an invoice for the downloadable, virtual product, source quantity
Create credit memo: Refund (full/partial)
This module only logs the quantity change due to creating credit memo if you select the “Return to Stock” option.
Import product (in case import new product or update quantity for product)
Go to System → Import, in Entity Type, select Products to import products.
Note: This module can also track if the order is backorder.
2.4.4. Disable Inventory Report
Because you can’t enable/disable the module by configuration, to disable the module, you need to:
+ Run php bin/magento module:disable Bss_InventoryReport
+ Run php bin/magento cache:flush to flush cache.
2.5. Guest to Customer
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Guest to Customer.
2.5.1 General configs
In Enabled: set Yes to enable or set No to the module.
In Assign Orders with The Same Checkout Email to Customer: Choose Yes to enable this function and choose No to disable it. The logic of this config is presented as follow:
Config status
Customer behaviors
Result
Yes
Create an account right after the purchase using this button on the checkout success page:
The order gets assigned to the customer profile both frontend and backend.
Yes
Create an account using after the purchase using the button on the header:
Due to complications regarding time delay between orders and the relation with the invoice, credit memo,... outside of a sheer order => Currently, in this case, the extension doesn't support assigning orders with the same email to the new account.
Yes
Checkout using the registered email but not login
The order gets assigned to the customer profile both frontend and backend
Config: Yes. The customer creates an account right after their purchase using the button => The orders get assigned to the customer profile both frontend and backend.
Config: Yes.
In Sync address, choose Yes to synchronize customer's address when the billing address and shipping address are the same.
In Auto Convert to Customer: there are 2 options to select.
+ If you set Yes, guests are automatically converted to real customers after they finish their checkout.
In Customer Group: select customer group to assign converted customers.
+ If you set No, guest users after checkout will be included in a Guest Management grid table. Then, you can make mass actions to assign them to customer groups. This action also means that you manually convert them to real customers and create accounts for them.
For guests placing orders before you install this extension, you can still import them to the Guest Management grid, and convert them into customers automatically or manually.
Accordingly, pick a period time to import guest in From and To.
Then, click Import button to import guests.
2.5.2. Guest Management
You go to Customers ⇒ Guest ⇒ Guest Management to check this table: If you want to convert any guest to a customer, you tick in the box and then choose Assign a Customer Group. Specific customer groups are displayed to select: After choosing customer group and submit the request by click OK in the popup, guests are converted to customers.
2.5.3. Notification email
In Enable Notification Email to Customer: choose Yes to enable this function or choose No to disable it.
In Email Sender: select one store email to send notification emails to customers. These emails confirm customer account information to login into store website.
In Email Templates: select email template. This extension provides a default email template and you can easily customize in Marketing ⇒ Communications ⇒ Email Templates.
After converting, new customers will receive an email with templates as configured:
2.6. Custom Order Number
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Custom Order Number
2.6.1. Custom order number configuration
In Enable: choose Yes to enable customized order number, or No to disable it (the order number is default order number).
In Number Format: enter a format containing letters, numbers as well as variables for the order number.
+ The variables that you can add to the order number format:
{counter}: an incrementing number, is set up in the below configs.
{d}: date with no 0 leading.
{dd}: date, always has 2 digits
{m}: month with no 0 leading
{mm}: month, always has 2 digits
{yy}: year with 2 digits
{yyyy}: year with 4 digits
{storeID}: ID of the Store that customer placed the order in. It should be used in case your website has multiple stores.
{rndNumbers**}: random a number, replace ** by a number to set the padding for a random number. For example, you enter {rndNumber01}: the output of this variable will be the one-digit number, {rndNumber02}: the output of this variable will be the two-digit number...
{rndLetters**}: random letters, replace ** by a number to set the padding of this variable. For example, you enter {rndLetter01}: the output of this variable will be one letter (a, b, c...), {rndNumber02}: the output of this variable will be two letters (ab, mn...)
{rndAlphanumberic**}: random both number and letters, replace ** by a number to set the padding of this variable.
Configuration of {counter} variable:
In Start Counter From: enter a number to set which number the {counter} variable begins counting.
In Counter Increments: enter a number to set the {counter} variable increases by for every new order made. For example, if you set the increments to 5 and the last counter number is 004, the next counter number will be 009.
***Note: After setting the new increments, you should reset the counter to be not confused when managing the order document.
In Number Counter Padding: enter a number to set the total of digits for the counter number. For example, if the counter is at 9 and you set padding is 6, it would output 000009 (there are 5 numbers “0” added into the front of the counter number).
In Reset Counter Number: choose an option to reset counter numbers automatically daily (By Day), weekly (By Week), monthly (By Month), yearly (By Year) or choose Never to never reset the counter.
***Note: This module will reset counter depending on the time of sever and please make sure that cron job in your website always operates (refer Configure and run cron in MagentoDev Docs).
In Reset Counter Number Now: click on the Reset Now button to reset the {counter} variable immediately. It is just reset for the next increment number.
***Note: If your website has multiple store views, you can customize the order number for each store view.
In Configuration Store View, please select a store view. The config “Use Different Counter Numbers for Different Store Views” will appear.
In Use Different Counter Numbers for Different Store Views:
+ Choose Yes to use an individual sequence of the counter for each store view, which means each store view has own sequence. For example, your website has 2 store views A and B.The first order is placed in store A and the sequence of {counter} variable of order number in this store is 1. After that, an order is placed in store B and the sequence of {counter} variable also is 1, because it is not depended on the store A.
+ Choose No to use the sequence of the counter for all store views (like default). In case the below example, the sequence of {counter} of order number in store B is 2, not 1.
***Note: If the order number is duplicated, a random number will be added to this number.
2.6.2. Custom invoice number configuration
In Enable: choose Yes to enable the customized invoice number, or No to disable it (use the default invoice number).
In Similar to Order Number:
+ Choose Yes to use the invoice number same as the order number, which means that the invoice number will use the transaction the order number belongs to. You can replace letters part in order number format by other letters that are more suitable (you can’t replace the variable in order number format:
In Replace Part of Order Number: enter a letters part of order number format that you want to replace it
In Part of Order Number is Replace by: enter the letters that replace with the above part.
+ Choose No to not use the invoice number same as the order number. You can customize an individual invoice number like customizing order number above.
2.6.3. Custom shipment number configuration
It is the same as the Custom Invoice Number Configuration.
2.6.4. Custom credit memo number configuration
It is the same as the Custom Invoice Number Configuration.
***Note:
- Because the scope of the module configuration is store view, you can customize the numbers for each store view.
- After setting, you need to save your configuration then flush cache to start using the module.
2.6.5. Set User Role to manage the module
Please go to System ⇒ Permissions ⇒ User Roles⇒ Role Resources.
2.7. Auto Invoice
Go to Admin Panel ⇒ Store ⇒ Settings ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ Auto Invoice.
In Enabled, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it.
2.7.1. Select payment method
In Select Payment Methods, select one, multiple or all payment methods to apply auto invoice/shipment generation. When a customer has successfully placed an order, this order has the order state as "new".
Based on the "new" order state and the selected payment method, Magento 2 Auto Invoice extension will automatically export the order invoice.
This means some online payment methods such as PayPal, Credit Card...which create order state as "processing" and "pending payment" won't work for this logic of Auto Invoice for Magento 2 extension.
***Note:
When customers use Amazon Pay with payment action Charge on Order, the module works as normal.
However if the payment actions is Charge on Shipment, request to create Invoice will get denied by Amazon. Hence, our module does not support this payment action.
NEW: The Magento 2 Auto Invoice extension is now:
Compatible with Klarna payment
Compatible with Paypal express method with action: Sale, Order, Authorize
In Enable automatic invoice generation, choose Yes to enable the function then invoices will be generated automatically after orders are completed.
In Select capture status for online payment method(s), choose capture with auto invoice for online payment: + Capture Online: Once auto invoice is created, the amount captured will transfer from customers account to your business account. + Capture Offline: The order amount will not be processed via payment channel , invoice status = Paid + Not Capture: Orders that have not been paid, invoice status = Pending
In Attach PDF File To Invoice Email, choose Yes to add invoice PDF to invoice email. This config will show only when admin Enable Auto Invoice.
In Enable automatic shipment generation, choose Yes to enable the function then shipment will be generated automatically after orders are completed.
Remember that only when automatic invoice generation is enabled, can you enable automatic shipment generation.
In Attach PDF File To Shipment Email, choose yes to enable the function to add shipment PDF to email shipment. This config will show only when admin Enable Auto Shipment.
2.7.3. Invoice/Shipment confirmation email
If you enable both the automatic invoice and shipment generations, your customers will receive 3 emails after ordering completely: Order confirmation, Invoice confirmation, and Shipment confirmation.
Check email samples as follow: Invoice confirmation email
Shipment confirmation email
2.7.4. Select capture status for online payment methods
In the configuration panel, you can choose to the capture status up to 3 status:
Capture Online
Capture Offline
Not Capture
2.7.5. Create order shipment independent with order invoice
You can create order shipment independent with the order invoice within the backend configuration. This comes in handy when you want more flexible with your work flow.
For example: You allow customers to pay after they receive their order.
2.8. Product Grid Inline Editor
2.8.1. General configs
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Product Grid Inline Editor.
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
In Allow Editing Content of Input Types: multi-select product attribute input types including Text Field, Text Area, Date, Yes/No, Multiple Select, Dropdown, and Price to allow editing in the grid.
***Note:
If the Date input type is allowed editing, the default format in the grid for you to customize is mm/dd/yyyy.
Quantity is considered as Text Field input type, so you can edit product quantity only when the Text Field is picked.
In Edit Multiple Rows: choose Yes to allow editing multiple rows (products) in the grid at once, or No to not allow.
In Edit Single Cell: choose Yes to only edit a cell is clicked at once, or No to take action on all editable fields in a row.
***Note: Edit Multiple Rows and Edit Single Cell function can’t work together. If you turn both configs to Yes, only Edit Single Cell function will be enabled. Although Edit Multiple Rows is Yes, you are not allowed to take action on multiple rows.
After selecting all configs, press Save Config button, and flush cache to start using this module.
2.8.2. Edit Attributes in the admin product grid
Please navigate to Catalog ⇒ Products, the admin product grid is displayed on this page. You can add columns (both default and custom columns) to product grid.
2.8.2.1 Edit a product in a row
To edit a product that is displayed on a particular row, please click on the row (except first tick-box and links).
The selected row is enabled and the editable information and attributes are included in boxes, which are available for you to change their values. After editing, you need to hit one of the following buttons to complete:
Cancel: cancel all your recent adjustments on this row, and all values in the row won’t be changed.
Save: save your changes.
***Note: You are not allowed to:
Edit Quantity of these product types: configurable, grouped, and bundle product.
Edit cells in Price attribute input type of these product types: configurable product, grouped product, and bundle product with dynamic price.
Edit ID, Thumbnail, Type, Attribute Set, Websites, Action (link) of all product types.
2.8.2.2. Edit multiple rows
To edit multiple rows at once, please follow this instruction:
Step 1: Choose a row
Step 2: Select other rows to be edited together by checking box, an additional row including editable boxes that are correlative to the selected rows will be enabled.
Step 3: enter the custom values to the All in Column boxes
Step 4: Choose Apply button in the additional row to apply new attribute values to all chosen products.
Step 5: Choose Save Edits or Cancel button to complete.
***Note: You can edit multiple products in different types, but the new values can be applied to only allowed editing input types.
2.8.2.3. Edit a single cell only
When you set to allow editing single cell only, you need to click on the cell you want to edit and enter the new value, then press Save button.
***Note: With MSI:
You can edit multiple source quantity and status via popup under Edit Single Cell type only.
Can not work with Edit Multiple Rows type.
All enabled Sources will be displayed in the popup (including unassigned Sources); when a Source's quantity is edited, that Source will automatically be assigned for the product.
2.9. Duplicate CMS Page/Block
After completed installing, “Duplicate Button” will appear immediately in Content, as below:
In Grid View
In Grid View, you can duplicate with “duplicate button” in the right action-column.
Besides, you are able to duplicate mass Pages/Blocks in the grid view. Firstly, you choose Pages or Blocks which you want to duplicate. Then, you click on “Duplicate Button” in the left Action column.
In Detailed Page/Block
In the detailed view, “Duplicate button” appears on the menu bar.
A successful message will be displayed after the duplicating process.
After being duplicated, the status of your new CMS Page and Block is Disabled, but you can change to “enable” at any time.
A new URL key and Identifier is automatically generated for your duplicated Page/Block. Additionally, you can freely change the URL key or Identifier for your purpose.
URL Key in CMS Page
Identifier in Block
2.10. Delete Order
2.10.1 Delete orders
Please go to Sales ⇒ Orders, a list of all orders will be shown as usual. Tick on the checkbox of unwanted order(s) and choose the action Delete Orders in Select Items box.
Then a pop-up will appear for action confirmation. Select OK to completely delete the order(s).
You can also delete orders from Order View Page by choosing Delete button in the Information tab of a particular order.
***Note:
You can delete many delete orders at a time by ticking on their checkboxes.
Once you delete an order, it would be removed permanently from the system and could not be restored. You’d better do it carefully.
When an order is deleted, all of its related information like shipment, invoice, credit memo will be erased too.
2.10.2. Delete invoices
Go to Sales ⇒ Invoices and select Invoices you want to wipe out of the backend and then choose Delete Invoices in Select Items box. After that, a popup appears and you click OK to confirm removing these selected Invoices.
After Invoices are deleted, order status turns back to Pending (if shipments have not been created) or Processing (if shipments have already created). Credit memos are also removed. Invoices can be also recreated.
You can also delete invoice of a particular order in its Order View Page by going to tab Invoices, click on Delete button or choose Delete Invoices in Actions dropdown box.
2.10.3 Delete shipments
Similar to deleting orders and invoices, we can erase unneeded shipments by navigating to Sales ⇒ Shipments and select Shipments that you want to rub out. Then, you choose Delete Shipments in Select Items box and press OK in the confirmation popup to finish the process.
Similarly, you can delete shipment from Order View Page under Shipments tab by clicking on Delete button or choose Delete Invoices in Actions dropdown box.
When a shipment is removed, its order status is updated to Pending (if invoices have not been created) or Processing (if invoices have already been created). Admin can totally recreate shipments.
2.10.4. Delete credit memos
Like Invoices and Shipments, there are two ways to remove redundant Credit memos:
Go to Sales ⇒ Credit memos, select unwanted Credit memo(s), choose Delete Credit memos in Select Items box, then click OK in the popup to completely exclude them from the backend.
Under Credit Memos tab in Order View Page of a particular order, click on Delete or select Delete Credit Memos in Actions dropdown box.
Order Status is altered to Complete (if invoices and shipments have already been generated) or Processing (if only invoices have been created). Credit memos are easily recreated.
2.11. Reindex from the Backend
Please go to Stores ⇒ System ⇒ Index Management and start configuration.
Choose the Indexers which you want to reindex.
In Action box: Choose Reindex Data.
Choose Submit to complete.
2.12. Custom Product Attribute Export
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Product Export Column and start configuration.
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the module or choose No to disable it.
In Allowed Attribute: Choose the custom product attributes which you want to be in separate columns when exporting products.
After that, move over to System⇒ Data Transfer ⇒ Export.
In Entity Type, select Products.
After that, scroll all the way to the end of the page and click Continue to export your product with custom attributes seperated.
***Note: For Magento 2.3.2, the export is processed under the backend. You need to set up Cron and wait for the export process complete and then check exported file by navigating to System ⇒ Export.
2.13. Disable Compare
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒DisableCompare.
In Disable, choose Yes to remove all functions related to Compare. This action will:
Remove the Compare button on the Widget, Category Page, Search Result Page, and Product Page.
Remove Compare at the bottom of Layered Navigation.
Remove Compare next to the Search Box (if you previously added one or more products to Compare)
Remove Compare in the Related, Upsell, Cross-sell Products.
When you select No, Compare functions will work normally.
Magento 2 Convert Images to WebP extension allows Magento store owners to change all images in the format: jpg., png., jpeg. to webp. This action aims to optimize the speed loading and image quality of your website.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. General Settings
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ Convert Image Webp ⇒ General Configuration.
In the Enabled section, choose:
- Yes: Enable Magento 2 Webp online converter module. It starts the automatic conversion of Webp image display in the frontend.
- No: Disable the module. You don't want the automatic conversion and display of Webp images in the frontend.
Quality: The higher this value is, the higher the image quality will become. Our Webp quality default is 75.
* Note: This configuration can only be applied when uploading images or running commands, which means that the Webp image quality displayed on the frontend will not depend on this value.
Image CDN: If you use image CDN, enter the CDN URL into this field to enable its compatibility with the module.
Convert Images inserted via Page Builder: Choose Yes to enable converting images in Page Builder (banner, slider, image, product listing) to Webp format.
*Note: - If you enable both this config and the Auto Generate on First Page Loading config, the module will convert Page Builder images on the first page load. From the second page load,
- The more images in the Page Builder, the slower the speed on the first page loading time.
Skip Folders: You can pick the image folders that you do not allow automatic conversion to Webp images in the frontend. Enter the relative path of an image in its original format (jpg, png..).
Auto Generate on First Page Loading: Choose "Yes" to automatically convert images to webp format when loading pages that have images in jpg, jpeg, or png format. Choose "No" to keep images in jpg, jpeg, or png format. This config can be enabled to convert images from before installing this module without having to run cmd to convert.
Clear All Webp Images: Delete all webp images that the module generated (used when updating new quality)
*Note: In case you want to update quality using command, you can run php bin/magento bss_c_i_w:convert [<path>] [<quality>], with [<path>] is the image location and [<quality>] is the new quality index. (e.g. php bin/magento bss_c_i_w:convert pub/media 80). With this cmd, you would not need to wait for the system to delete old webp images.
2.2. Choose the place on-site to convert to webp images
Magento 2 Convert images to webp enables you to choose the pages you want the webp image online converting. There are 4 main places: Product Page, Category Page, Home Page, CMS Page.
Product Page
Switch Enabled to Yes to enable the process of converting images to webp automatically at the Product Pages.
Ignore IDs Products: For Product IDs inputted here, in the frontend, images in those product pages will be shown in the original format.
Ignore Images: Input the image name in the original format. It's possible to input many images, each of them is separated by commas. The inputted images will be shown in the original format. This configuration is used when admin wants to display images with full size and quality on the frontend, which does not require to convert images into .webp format.
* Note: In case you upload an existing image, Magento will auto-change the image name. So, please make sure to input the exact image name.
The same configurations are applied to the other page types.
Category page
Home Page
CMS Page
*Note: The module does support converting child items' images of configurable products on the product listing page when user click on it. However, if there are too many variants, it could affect badly on the user's loading speed on the first page loading time.
Store owners desire to classify products into multiple categories to make it convenient for customers and for admin to manage products more easily. With products that store owners want to sell more, allowing special attributes to appear on multiple positions on the product page is a great way to attract customers.
Magento 2 Custom Attribute Position is an amazing extension that supports you to do that. This module allows showing product attributes on the optional positions on the product page. Furthermore, this feature can be customized following the store view.
2. How Does It Work?
This module is easy to use. You just take 1 minute to get this feature. Follow the below-detailed steps:
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Custom Attribute Position and start the configuration.
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the module, otherwise choose No.
In Custom Attribute Position, you can set up the position of product attributes with 4 configs:
'Attribute Code' (required): Type the attribute code (You can check in Product section: Admin > Store > Attributes > Product)
'Custom Position' (required): Choose the frontend block class that you want the product attribute to display in the frontend.
How to get the frontend block class:
Step 1: Go to frontend product page, open devtool window (F12 or Right-clicked on the block to ‘Inspect’ it.)
Step 2: Ctrl + Shift + C (Or click on the mouse icon in the upper left corner of the Inspect table) -> click on the class you want to display
In Apply product type, choose the product types that you want to apply this feature to.
In Attribute CSS, set up CSS for displayed attributes.
*Notes:
- Attribute still displays without config " Visible on Catalog Pages on Storefront: Yes". It will appear in both Default Magento and module CAP positions if displayed.
- 1 attribute can be displayed in multiple positions and vice versa.
Firstly, please go to Store > Configuration > BSS Commerce > Limit Order Qty Per Product For Customer Group > General Configuration.
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the module, otherwise choose No.
After enabling the module, let’s follow the following steps to complete the setting:
Go to Catalog > Products > Edit (Create New)
(At this step, you select each product from the product grid table to configure it)
On the editing product page, click on Advanced Inventory.
In Minimum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart Per Customer Group config:
Enter the minimum product quantity number you want the customer to have in the shopping cart in the Quantity column.
In Customer Group column, select one to apply the condition.
You can add more conditions by clicking the Add button.
Remove the condition by clicking the Delete button.
In Minimum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart Per Customer Group config:
Enter the maximum product quantity number you want the customer to have in the shopping cart in the Quantity column.
In Customer Group column, select one to apply the condition.
Add or Delete the conditions with the available buttons.
Then Save the configuration and repeat this process for other products.
3. Import Min/Max Quantity
Please go to System > Data Transfer > Import.
In the Entity Type dropdown, choose BSS Limit Order Import. Then click Download Sample File to download and edit the import file.
In the Import Behavior dropdown, choose the import behavior you want:
Add/Update: If there isn't data before, the min/max quantity will be added. If there is, the min/max quantity will be updated. In case the old data. If the old data has more than one version for 1 customer group, it will be updated to only 1 version. If the new data has more than one version for 1 customer group, it will be changed to the new one.
Replace: Delete all old data and save the new data.
Delete: Save new data after removing old data from csdl.
Finally, scroll down to the File to Import section, in Select File to Import, click Choose File button and choose your import file.
4. Version
Version 1.0.0: First Release
Version 1.0.1: Update the import min/max quantity feature
*Note:
The rules apply to simple products and child products of bundle/configurable/grouped products only.
When you enable the min/max quantity of both the default and the module, the module's logic is applied.
In Minimum qty configuration, if you set multiple quantities for one customer group, the condition applies the minimum value. The same rule applies for multiple max values.
This add-on works closely with Magento 2 Company Account extension to provide a complete solution for gathering access of all staff within an organization under a single account for easy management.
The add-on works very simply. For any existing customer that you (as the store admin) want to turn into a sub-user of a company account, you just need to go to Customer Grid and go to the detail page of that customer.
As long as this customer is not a company account, you will see a tab at the bottom of the Customer Information section called “Assign as Sub-user”.
In this tab, you will see a list of company accounts that you can assign this customer to be a sub-user of. Please choose the company first, then the equivalent roles will be automatically loaded for you to choose from.
After this customer has been assigned, you will see them in the list of sub-users of this company account.
2.2. In the Frontend
After the customer has been assigned as a sub-user, they will receive an email saying their account has been successfully transferred. All their former attribute information will be deleted but their orders will be kept.
Now when logging into their account, they will see the information of their company account and take some actions that their role allows them to.
If you need help using this add-on, please feel free to reach us via sales@bsscommerce.com.
Magento 2 Maximum Order Quantity per Product extension lets you set restrictions on the maximum quantity of each product that your customers can buy within a calendar month. Hence, you can make better inventory planning and avoid sending order rejection emails to customers.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. In the Backend
As this extension allows you to set restrictions on two levels on configuration, with product config having higher priority than global config, we will look at them respectively.
First of all, please go to Stores → Configuration → BSS Commerce → Order Restriction and set Yes to Enable our module.
2.1.1. Global Config
Please go to Stores → Configuration → Catalog → Inventory → Product Stock Options.
In the Limit Product Quantity per Month field, uncheck the Use System Value checkbox, and enter the global limit that you want to set as the maximum order quantity within a calendar month for all products. Do not forget to hit Save.
*Note: If you leave this field blank, then there will be no global limit for all products.
2.1.2. Product Config
If you want to set a special limit for any specific product, please go to that product detail page then expand the Advanced Inventory section.
In the Limit Product Quantity per Month field, uncheck the Use Config Settings field, and enter the maximum order quantity per month for this product.
*Note: If you leave this field blank, then there will be no limit for this product.
2.2. In the Frontend
When customers order a product with a quantity greater than the limit (first time in the month) or the remaining limit (second time and forth), they will receive an error message.
2.2.1. When placing an order with surpassed quantity on the product page
2.2.2. When updating quantity to more than the available limit in the shopping cart
In mini cart
In shopping cart
If you change the limit of any product within the month or prioritize the product config over general config, then the limit will be automatically adjusted. Also, if an order is canceled or refunded, like with the case of inventory being added back, the limit will be adjusted accordingly.
Magento 2 B2C package by BSSCommerce is the complete retail solution to help your site sell better, bigger, and easier.
The package contains 5 quintessential modules:
Magento 2 SEO extension
Magento 2 Popup extension
Magneto 2 One Step Checkout extension
Magento 2 Guest to Customer
Magento 2 Social Login extension
I. Magento 2 SEO Extension
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE and start configuration.
1.1. In SEO Core
In Enable Custom H1 Page: Choose Yes to enable or No to disable this function.
When you choose Yes, you go to the Search Engine Optimization of each category, CMS or product edit page to enter a customized Heading 1.
This feature is very useful for store owners in specific cases.
For example: you run a promotion for a product A and want to place an eye-catching Heading 1 without changing the product name (the H1 as the default setting), you can enter a custom H1 like “Hot Deal 50% OFF Strive Shoulder Pack | Today Only”. Customers now see the new heading on the product page replacing the original heading 1. However, the product name is unchanged anymore and is still displayed in the shopping cart and checkout page.
In Google Site Verification Code: If you are using Google Search Console, you need to enter the code provided by Google. This helps the module to show you impressions, clicks, CTR,... from Google Search Console.
You enter this code to the field: 9FD50240145DBB177642FF639FD4A222
1.2. In Rich Snippets
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
1.2.1. Site Structure
In Sitename in Search Result: Choose Yes to show the website name you assign in the search result, otherwise choose No. If you choose No, the Show Search Box in Search Result will be disabled.
In Website Name: Choose the name for your website to be displayed in the search result.
In Website Description: This description is applied to all pages as a default one (excepted for product and category pages).
In Website Image: Choose an image for your website to be displayed when sharing via Open Graph on Facebook and via Twitter Card on Twitter.
In Show Search Box in Search Result: Choose Yes to show a specific search box for your website, otherwise choose No.
In Twitter Username: Enter Twitter Username with @ to support Twitter card.
In Show breadcrumbs: Choose Yes to show breadcrumbs (show navigation path) of product pages instead of the regular URLs in the search result, otherwise choose No.
1.2.2. Local Business
In Enable Local Business: Choose Yes to show the following information of your website in the search result, otherwise choose No. If you choose No, all the following settings will be disabled.
In Business Type: Select your suitable business type from the drop-down list.
In Logo: Choose a logo of your business.
In Name of Business: Choose a name for your business to be displayed in the search result.
In Email: Enter your business email.
In Telephone: Enter your business phone.
In Price Range: Enter the price range of your business.
In Locality: Enter the locality of your business.
In Street Address: Enter your business street address.
In Social Profile Links: Enter your business social profile links. Please enter one link per line.
⇒ For more information about these store properties, explore HERE!
1.2.3. Product Options
In Show Name: Choose Yes to show the product name in the search result, otherwise choose No. If you choose No, all the following settings will be disabled.
In Show SKU: Choose Yes to show the product SKU in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Image: Choose Yes to show the product image in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Description: Choose Yes to show the product description in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Review: Choose Yes to show the product review in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Avg. Rating: Choose Yes to show the product average rating in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Price: Choose Yes to show the product price in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Availability: Choose Yes to show the product availability (in stock/out of stock) in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Conditions: Choose Yes to show the New condition of products. We support the New attribute to appear in the search result.
In Add Category: If you choose Enable, the category path is added to the product URL displayed in SERPs.
In Add Brand: Select an attribute code of the brand to appear in the search result.
In Add Gtin: Select a GTIN to display in the search result.
In Custom Properties: Customize any Rich snippet and assign it to an attribute. You need to enter custom properties following the Rich snippet structure. Otherwise, you face issues when checking your website on Google Structured Data Testing Tool.
1.2.4. Category Options
In Show Name: Choose Yes to show the category name in the search result, otherwise choose No. If you choose No, all the following settings will be disabled.
In Show Description: Choose Yes to show the category description in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Product Offers: Choose Yes to display offers of products in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Image: Choose Yes to show the category image in the search result, otherwise choose No.
1.2.5. Open Graph
In Enable for Product Page: Choose Yes to enable Open Graph when sharing Product Pages via Facebook, otherwise choose No.
In Enable for Category Page: Choose Yes to enable Open Graph when sharing Category Pages via Facebook, otherwise choose No.
In Enable for Website: Choose Yes to enable Open Graph when sharing your homepage via Facebook, otherwise choose No.
1.2.6. Twitter Card
In Enable for Product Page: Choose Yes to enable Twitter Card when sharing Product Pages via Twitter, otherwise choose No.
In Enable for Category Page: Choose Yes to enable Twitter Card when sharing Category Pages via Twitter, otherwise choose No.
In Enable for Website: Choose Yes to enable Twitter Card when sharing your homepage via Twitter, otherwise choose No.
1.3. Google XML Sitemap
To configure XML sitemap for your Magento 2 store, please follow these 2 steps:
Step 1: Configure the extension settings as your wishes at Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Google XML Sitemap.
Step 2: Create a new XML sitemap at Marketing ⇒ Google XML.
First, we will show you how to configure the feature settings.
1.3.1. General Setting
In Enables: Choose Yes to generate an XML Sitemap.
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the extension to update the sitemap. The options are Daily - Weekly – Monthly.
In Error Email Recipient: Choose the recipient to receive an error email once there is an error.
In Error Email Sender: Choose the name of the sender displayed in the error email.
In Error Email Template: Choose the template for error email.
In Root Path: Specify a root path for the XML sitemap.
In Sitemap Title: Enter a title for the sitemap.
In Sitemap Description: Enter a description for the sitemap.
1.3.2. Homepage Options
In Show Homepage: Choose Yes to show homepage in the XML sitemap, otherwise choose No to hide it.
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index Homepage. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index Homepage. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
In Enable Modify: Choose Yes to show the time of the latest modify of the homepage in XML sitemap file, otherwise choose No to hide it.
1.3.3. Categories Options
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index category pages. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index category pages. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
In Disable Category and All Products on Category: Fill in the ID of categories you want to hide from sitemap (separated by a comma). All products in selected categories will be hidden as well.
* Note: You can exclude categories from the XML sitemap by configuring it in each category edit page. Once you set Yes for this configuration, the category is listed in the Disable Category and All Products on Category config.
1.3.4. Product Options
In Enable Path: If you choose Yes, the Use Categories Path for Product URLs config is also enabled. This config is found by going to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Catalog⇒ Search Engine Optimization ⇒ Use Categories Path for Product URLs.
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index product pages. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index product pages. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
In Add Images to Sitemap: Choose how you want to add the images of products into your XML sitemap. There are 3 options:
No: Do not add images to the sitemap.
Base Only: Only add base images of products into the sitemap.
All: Add all images of products into the sitemap.
In Disable Product Type: You can choose to hide all products belong to (a) product type(s) from the sitemap.
In Disable Product: Fill in the ID of products you want to hide from sitemap (separated by a comma).
* Note: You can exclude products from the XML sitemap by configuring it in each product edit page. Once you set Yes for this configuration, the product is also listed in the Disable Products config.
1.3.5. CMS Page Options
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index CMS pages. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index product pages. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
In Disable CMS Link: Choose CMS links to be disabled from the XML Sitemap.
1.3.6. Additional Link List
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index additional links. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index additional links. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
In List of Additional Links: Fill in the list of additional links to be shown in the sitemap.
1.3.7. Sitemap File Limit
In Divide Sitemap: There are 4 options for dividing sitemap:
None: Do not divide sitemap.
Date: Divide site map by the last modified date of the products.
Category: Divide site map by the products in the same category.
Manufacture: Divide site map by the products with the same manufacturer. The sitemaps are arranged based on the following sort order:
1: CMS Page Link + Category Link
2: Product Link
3: Additional Link
* Note: Dividing the sitemap still follows the maximum number of URLs per file and maximum file size settings.
In Maximum No of URLs per file: Maximum number of URLs in an XML sitemap file.
In Maximum File Size: Maximum file size in byte.
1.3.8. Search Engine Submission Settings
In Enable Submission to Robots.txt: Choose Yes to display XML Sitemap URL in Robots.txt file, otherwise choose No.
1.3.9. Generate Sitemap
After finishing setting up the extension, the admins will generate a sitemap that will be created following the above settings.
Please go to Marketing ⇒ Google XML Sitemap, select Add Sitemap to create a new sitemap.
In File Name: Choose a name for the sitemap. The format is nameofthesitemap.xml.
In case you are already using an XML sitemap, there would be 2 options at this point:
Create a new sitemap with a different name from the old sitemap. You can submit both sitemaps on Google Search Console and the crawler will read both file.
Delete the old sitemap then create a new one with the same name as the old. The new sitemap following the module setting will be overwritten on the search console and will not affect SEO.
In Path: The default path is “/”. If you want to use a different path, you have to create a new folder at the backend.
Choose Save.
After saving the sitemap, click Generate for the sitemap to be created following the module settings.
1.3.10. Edit and Delete Sitemap
Please go to Marketing ⇒ Google XML Sitemap, select the sitemap you want to edit or delete.
In the Name, Path and Store View section, you can change the name, path and store view of the XML Sitemap. Click Save and Generate to finish the change.
Click Delete to delete the sitemap.
To reset the sitemap, click Reset and then click Save. Back to the main section, and click Generate to finish.
1.4. In HTML Sitemap
1.4.1. General
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature, otherwise, choose No.
In HTML Sitemap URL Key: Enter a URL key for the sitemap.
*Note:
URLs of the sitemap are different per store:
For example, the URL key of the sitemap in store A is store-a and the URL key of the sitemap in store B is store-b. When customers access the sitemap of store A, then switch to store B, customers are redirected to the sitemap in store B under the right sitemap URL of store B.
Enter special characters to URL key or any spaces:
After saving configs, these special characters or spaces are auto removed and replaced by the dash(-).
In Title of Site: Choose the title for the sitemap.
In Show Link at: Select Footer or Header where the sitemap link is displayed.
In Session Order: Fill in the order of sessions to be displayed. Please fill in all 4 items separated by a coma. The ID of sessions as below:
1: Product List
2: Store View List
3: Additional Link List
4: Category and CMS Page List
1.4.2. Search Engine Optimization
In Meta Title: Choose the meta title for your sitemap.
In Meta Keywords: Choose the meta keywords for your sitemap.
In Meta Description: Write meta description for your sitemap.
1.4.3. Product List
In Show Product Link: Choose Yes to show product links in the sitemap, otherwise, choose No.
In Title of “Product List”: Choose the title for the product list session in the sitemap.
In Sort Product by: Choose among DESC for descending or ASC for ascending.
In Arrange Product by: Choose Name/Date/Price to sort product links.
In Maximum Products Displayed on Sitemap: Choose the maximum for the number of product links to be shown. The limit number you can fill in is 50000.
* Note: You can exclude products from the HTML sitemap by configuring it in each product edit page.
1.4.4. Store List
In Show Store View Link: Choose Yes to show store view links in the sitemap, otherwise choose No.
In Title of “Store View List”: Choose the title for the store view list session in the sitemap.
1.4.5. Category List
In Show Category Link: Choose Yes to show category links in the sitemap, otherwise choose No.
In Title of “Category List”: Choose the title for the category list session in the sitemap.
In Disable Category: Fill in IDs of categories you want to hide in the sitemap (separated by a comma). For example: 1,2,5,9,23,45,77.
* Note: You can exclude categories from the HTML sitemap by configuring it in each category edit page. Once you set Yes for this configuration, the category is listed in the Disable Category config.
1.4.6. Additional Link List
In Title of “Additional Link List”: Choose the title for the additional link list session in the sitemap.
In List of Additional Links: Choose the links and the anchor you want to display for each link. Follow this example: [http://yourlink1.com][Anchor Text 1].
In Open Additional Link in a New Tab: Choose Yes to open additional links in a new tab, otherwise choose No.
1.4.7. CMS Link List
In Show CMS Link: Choose Yes to show CMS links in the sitemap, otherwise choose No.
In Title of “CMS List”: Choose the title for the CMS link list session in the sitemap.
In Disable CMS Link: Choose the CMS links you want to hide from the sitemap. Hold Ctrl when choosing multiple options.
1.5. Robots Meta Tag
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Robots Meta Tag: Enter URL Pattern based on the following formats.
With categories or a folder: Enter the path with "/" before and after the path
For example: You want to set NoIndex and Nofollow for all categories with the "tops-men" URL key. Please enter: /tops-men/
In Option: There are 3 options for you to choose, which is INDEX, NO FOLLOW – NOINDEX, FOLLOW and NOINDEX, NOFOLLOW.
In NOINDEX, FOLLOW Robots Meta Header: Choose pages to set up No Index, Follow Tag.
Edit custom instruction of robots.txt File: enter your custom instruction of robot.txt file (if any). You can learn how to write a robot.txt file here. If you leave this field blank, file Robots.txt will run with the default Magento setup.
1.6. Canonical Tag
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
1.6.1. Canonical Tag for Homepage
In Use Another Url for Homepage: Leave it blank if you want to use the default Canonical Tag for Homepage. Fill in the URL path if you want the crawler to read that URL instead of the homepage.
This config is also included in the Search Engine Optimization section of the Homepage edit page.
1.6.2. Canonical Tag for Product
In Canonical for Product: There are 2 available options:
Use Long Url Path: Set the Canonical Tag on the longest product URL. If the product belongs to multiple categories at the same category level, the applied category will be the last category in the Categories section on Catalog management of the product. Take the below image as an example, the applied category will be Jackets.
In the Search Engine Optimization section of each product edit page, you can also specify another URL for the Canonical tag.
1.6.3. Canonical Tag for Category
In Use Next/Previous Tag in Category: Choose Yes to enable canonical for Next/Previous Tag in categories or choose No to disable it.
In Add Canonical Tag to Layered Navigation:
Choose Yes: Canonical URL is the URL of the original category.
Choose No: Canonical URL is the URL corresponding to parameters.
In the Search Engine Optimization section of each category edit page, you can also specify another URL for the Canonical tag.
1.7. Advanced Breadcrumbs SEO
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Type of Breadcrumbs: There are 2 available options:
Use Long Url Path: Set the breadcrumbs to be the FULL path of a product or a category
Use Short Url Path: Set the breadcrumbs to be the SHORTENED path of a product or a category. Now, you need to configure Enable Category Priority to show the shortened path (Noted: Type of Breadcrumbs config has higher priority than Enable Category Priority config.)
The Breadcrumbs for Product A will be Home ⇒ Jacket ⇒ Product A. You can take a look at the image below.
If the product belongs to multiple categories with the same category level, the applied category will be the last category at the Categories section on Catalog management of the product.
In Enable Category Priority: Choose Yes to enable category priority or No to disable it.
To manage category priority, please go to Marketing ⇒ BSS Commerce SEO ⇒Advanced Breadcrumbs.
ID: show the ID of the category. In this section, all available categories of your site will be listed.
Path: show the path of the category.
Level: show the category level. Only categories whose the category level is greater or equal 2 can be applied breadcrumbs
Priority: fill in the ID of the prior category (to prevent your breadcrumb from rendering wrongly, you shouldn't fill the Priority ID with 1 or 2 - any other number is fine.) Take a category with ID= 5 and the path of 1/2/3/5 as an example. If you fill in the priority as 3, Breadcrumbs of category 5 and all of its belonging products will be displayed with breadcrumbs of category 3 as the priority.
The default table has no priority set up and the system will automatically show the full breadcrumb path accordingly. Once you edit the value of the priority config, you must enter a number or Cancel to get back to the original value. From here, you can't leave this field empty anymore.
1.8. Redirect 301 SEO
1.8.1. General
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
1.8.2. Redirect 301 SEO
This setting only applies to deleted product pages.
In Default Redirect to: Set the default page for the 301 pages to be redirected to. These are the options for the destination of redirecting: Parent Category, Parent Category with Priority, Homepage, and Other CMS Pages.
In case of choosing Parent Category, when a product is deleted, the links of that product will be redirected to the nearest parent category of the product.
In case of choosing Parent Category with Priority, redirects work similarly to the option of Parent Category. However, if the destination category is set up for a priority in ID in Marketing ⇒ BSS Commerce SEO ⇒Advanced Breadcrumbs, the links of that product will be redirected to this category priority.
In case the product gets several categories at the same level, the category will be redirected is the last category in the Categories section on Catalog management of the product.
In Time Period (in days) to Keep Redirect on Website: choose the time period for redirecting to be applied.
1.9. HREFLANG Tag Support
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Add HREFLANG for Store View: Assign language and country for each store view.
In Enable for Homepage: Choose Yes to enable Hreflang tag for Homepage or choose No to disable it.
In Enable for Category: Choose Yes to enable Hreflang tag for Category Pages or choose No to disable it.
In Enable for CMS Page: Choose Yes to enable Hreflang tag for CMS Pages or choose No to disable it.
In Enable for Product Page: Choose Yes to enable Hreflang tag for Product Pages or choose No to disable it.
1.10. Meta Tags Template
1.10.1. Feature Settings
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Product Setting:
In Max Product Meta Title Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for product meta title (should be about 70-71 characters).
In Max Product Meta Description Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for product meta description (should be about 160 characters).
In Max Product Meta Keywords: Choose the maximum number of product meta keywords (should be about 30 words).
In Max URL Key Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for product URL keys (should be about 70 words).
In Category Setting:
In Max Category Meta Title Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for category meta title (should be about 70-71 characters).
In Max Category Meta Description Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for category meta description (should be about 160 characters).
In Max Category Meta Keywords: Choose the maximum number of category meta keywords (should be about 30 words).
In Max URL Key Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for category URL keys (should be about 70 words).
1.10.2. Generate a Product Meta Template
Please go to Marketing ⇒ BSS Commerce SEO ⇒ Meta Template and start configuration.
Choose Add New to create a new meta template.
In General:
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the template or No to disable it.
In Name: Choose a name for the template.
In Meta Template Type: Choose Product.
In Scope: Choose the scope (store view, website) to apply the template. You can choose multiple store views/websites by holding Ctrl and click.
In Priority, choose priority for the template. In case the product is under multiple categories with different templates, the priority settings will be considered for the affected meta template to avoid conflict. The smaller number will be prioritized.
In Product Conditions:
You need to set up necessary conditions to determine which products to be applied by the meta tag template.
In Template Settings:
In Meta Title: Write the meta title for products. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Meta Description: Write the meta description for products. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Meta Keyword: Write the meta keywords for products. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In URL Key: Enter a URL key or click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Short Description: Write a short description of the products. In the WYSIWYG editor, the Insert Template Variables will not be shown. Click on Show/Hide Editor to show the regular text area with variables.
In Description: Write a short description of the products. In the WYSIWYG editor, the Insert Template Variables will not be shown. Click on Show/Hide Editor to show the regular text area with variables.
Finally, you click Save and Generate button and then are redirected to a new Generate Meta Template page. You continue to click Start Generating button and will track the process of generating the product template. You can let the process automatically run and continue to make other configurations in a new tab. Don’t configure on the same tab while the process is happening.
After this process is finished, you can check the results on the Search Engine Optimization of each product edit page.
*Note: In the Search Engine Optimization of each product edit page, you can exclude the product from Meta Templates Updates.
1.10.3. Generate a Category Meta Template
Please go to Marketing ⇒ BSS Commerce SEO ⇒ Meta Template.
Choose Add New to create a new meta template.
In General:
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the template or No to disable it.
In Name: Choose a name for the template.
In Meta Template Type: Choose Category
In Scope: Choose the scope (store view, website) to apply the template. You can choose multiple store view/website by hold Ctrl and click.
In Priority choose priority for the template. In case the category is under multiple categories with different templates, the priority settings will be considered for the affected meta template to avoid conflict. The smaller number will be prioritized.
In Category Choose:
Choose the category to apply the template. You can choose multiple categories by holding Ctrl and click.
In Apply for Sub-categories: Choose Yes to apply the template for sub-categories, otherwise choose No.
In Template Settings:
In Meta Title: Write the meta title for categories. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Meta Description: Write the meta description for categories. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Meta Keyword: Write the meta keywords for categories. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In URL Key: Enter a URL key or click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Description: Write a short description for the categories. In the WYSIWYG editor, the Insert Template Variables will not be shown. Click on Show/Hide Editor to show the regular text area with variables.
Lastly, click Save and Generate and do similarly as you start generating the product meta template.
*Note: In the Search Engine Optimization of each category page, you can exclude the category from Meta Templates Updates.
1.11. SEO ALT Text
1.11.1. Configurations
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Alt Tag Template: Write Alt text template for images. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Image Name Template: Write the name template for images. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
Then you click Generate button to be redirected to a new page, then start generating both templates. You can track the process in this page conveniently.
*Note: In the Search Engine Optimization of each product edit page, you can exclude the product from SEO Alt Text Template.
1.11.2. Manage images and edit ALT for each image
Please go to Marketing ⇒ BSS Commerce SEO ⇒ SEO ALt Text.
This grid shows all product images on your website and you can easily filter wanted images.
When you click an image, you are able to edit the image file name and alt text, then save config within the grid.
*Note: Enter the right format for image names without any special characters and under .jpg, .jpeg, .png, .gif, .bmp.
For product with many images, click on the product and every image is shown for you to edit.
1.12. SEO External Links
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Excluded Domain: List domains you want to not apply this function.
1.13. SEO Toolbar
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
Then you click Start Check button to see an SEO analysis for homepage on the frontend.
This toolbar tells you which SEO factors meet requirements, and which ones are not good enough and need to be checked again.
When you navigate to other pages, the toolbar appears to give an SEO analysis for these pages.
1.14. SEO Report
2.14.1. Configurations
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Google Search Console Start Date: Enter a start date to check data on Google Search Console.
In Google Search Console End Date: Select an end date
Current date: Data is checked from the start date to the current time you are checking.
Custom date: You can select any date as you want.
In Google Authorization Code: Click the button to get the Google Authorization Code, then enter it into the field.
1.14.2. SEO report & SEO Audit in edit pages
After completing configurations, you navigate to a product, category or CMS edit page to check how SEO report and SEO Audit performs.
SEO Report
In Meta Title and Meta Description: display a color bar to notify admins about how valid title and description are, according to the number of characters.
In Main Keyword: Enter the main keyword and it is used to for SEO Audit and Google Search Console.
SEO Audit
In SEO Audit: The module gives you a list of messages to notify about:
+ The usage of main keyword in meta title, meta description, product description, and URL
+ Main keyword density
+ The current situation of description
+ Outbound links
In Google Search Console: You need to set up Google Authorization Code to connect Google Search Console, then complete settings in the SEO Report Config.
A grid is displayed to tell you such information as below:
The module checks 3 factors in this section: Main keyword, Meta keyword and Page URL. Through connecting Google Search Console, the admin will know the details of each key including Average position, Impressions, Clicks and CTR.
*Note: URLs of product, category or CMS pages are used to query on Google Search Console. These URLs meet configs on the Canonical Tag module.
1.14.3. SEO Report Dashboard
Please go to Marketing ⇒ BSS Commerce SEO ⇒ SEO Report.
This grid displays all important SEO information of page URLs on the website.
If you click Crawl All Site button, you are redirected to the Crawl SEO report page. The module carries out crawling data for websites which have just set up this module. This process only needs to be done once because new products are automatically updated.
You tap Crawl All site button to start the data crawling process. There are 2 Crawl status:
Success: the URL can be accessed from the frontend (even 404).
False: Lost of Internet connection can be a cause for False status. As a consequence, the crawling process is not finished.
*Note:
Data of meta title, meta description, meta keyword and main keyword is updated according to the real time.
Data of Headings, Images, Open Graph, Twitter Card is updated once a day when admins edit products/categories.
During the crawling process, you can open a new tab to make other configurations.
The process will stop when you click Back to SEO Report button.
Pop-up for Magento 2 extension helps you create the eye-catching pop-up that is highly flexible and customizable for many purposes, such as promotion, notification, guideline, or newsletter. You decide where to display the pop-up, set display animation, and apply for customer groups or store views.
II. Magneto 2 Popup
2.1 General Configuration
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Pop-up General Configuration.
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
2.2 Manage Pop-up Grid
Go to Marketing ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Pop-up ⇒ Manage Pop-up.
Manage Pop-up grid shows all pop-up you have created with full information, including Pop-up Name, Enable, Display Rule, Displayed Pages, Content, Store Views, Customer Groups, Start Date and End Date. The Manage Pop-up grid works just like standard grid in Magento 2 default with features such as mass action (delete, enable, disable), filter and column display.
2.3 How to Create New Pop-up
Please click on the Create New Pop-up button located on the top right of the grid. You will be redirected to the New Pop-up Page, which has 3 tabs:
General
Display Rule
Content and Design
There are 4 buttons to support creating a new pop-up:
Back
Reset
Save and Continue
Save Pop-up
2.3.1 General
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the new pop-up.
In Name, enter the pop-up’s name.
In StoreViews, select which store views to display the pop-up.
In CustomerGroups, choose the customer groups to view pop-up.
In StartDate, select a date in the calendar view to begin showing the pop-up.
In EndDate, select a date in the calendar view to stop displaying the pop-up.
In Priority, enter a number to decide the priority of the pop-up when multiple pop-ups are created on a page.
2.3.2 Display Rule
In DisplayRule, choose one of the four following conditions to set conditions for displaying the pop-up:
After customers spend X seconds on the page.
After customers scroll page by X percent.
After customers view X pages.
Immediately when customers visit the page.
In Xequals, enter a number to decide the value of X.
In DisplayAnimation, choose one of the six following options to set display effects for the pop-up:
Zoom
Horizontal Move
Move from Top
3D Unfold
Zoom-out
None
In Position, select the position to display the pop-up on the page.
Top Left
Top Center
Top Right
Middle Left
Middle Center
Middle Right
In Auto Close Pop-up After, enter the amount of time (seconds) for the pop-up to automatically close. Ex: 10. Enter “0” to disable auto close of Pop-up
In Display Frequency, determine the frequency of pop-up display by selecting one of the following options:
When all conditions are satisfied: the pop-up appears if the above rules are executed.
Only once: the pop-up only appears once.
Only once per session: the pop-up appears once in a session. If you choose this option, you need to set Cookie Expires.
For example, if you choose DisplayFrequency as “Only once per session” and set the 2 minutes for the CookieExpires, the pop-up is displayed when the conditions are satisfied, then it won’t be shown in the next 2 minutes (until the session ends or the cookie expires).
In Layout Updates:
In Display on, select pages to show the pop-up, including the following types of pages:
Category Pages
Product Pages
Generic Pages
When you choose each type of page, you can select all pages or specific pages depending on your demand.
For example:
+ Category page:
+ Product page:
+ All pages:
(you can exclude specific pages from displaying a popup when you select the option as All pages)
Furthermore, it is easy to add more layout updates to show popup in more pages by clicking the button.
2.3.3. Content and Design
In Content, use the WYSIWYG editor to create content for the pop-up.
You can use this tool to insert widget, image or video for the pop-up’s content.
In Pop-up CSS, use CSS to change the design of the pop-up. If leaving blank, the default pop-up will be applied.
Or, you can use our default template to quickly render your pop up.
There are 5 templates to choose from:
Contact Form
Age Verification
Newsletter
Hot deals (product listing)
Social sharing
After choosing your template, click on the Load Template button to make the template appear in the Content edit interface.
In the Content edit, you can make any modification if needed.
Note: After any change to the pop-up configuration, either Save, Delete, Mass delete, Mass active, is made, a cache notification will appear.
You then must go to SYSTEM -> Tools -> Cache Management ->Flush Magento Cache for those changes to be applied to the front end.
III. Magento 2 One Step Checkout
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ One Step Checkout.
3.1 In General
In Enable:
Choose Yes to enable Magento 2 One Step Checkout extension.
Choose No to disable this module.
In Allow Creating Account On Checkout Page:
Choose Yes to allow customers to create their accounts right on the checkout page.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Title: Write your wanted title for the checkout page.
In Router Name: Choose an URL name for your checkout page.
3.2 In Fields Display
In Show Order Comment:
Choose Yes to show a text box for customers to leave their comments for orders.
Choose No to exclude this box from the checkout page
In Show Discount Code:
Choose Yes to display a discount code box for entering coupon codes.
Choose No to hide it.
3.3 In Newsletter
In Show Subscribe Newsletter:
Choose Yes to allow customers to subscribe to the newsletter on the checkout page.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Auto Check Newsletter Sign up Box: Choose Yes to automatically tick the Newsletter Sign up box or choose No to uncheck.
3.4 In Tracking Address by Google
In Enable Tracking Address by Google:
Choose Yes: Auto-detect and pre-fill customers' country, state/province, city - Google Suggest to autocomplete shipping address while typing.
Choose No: Customers have to find all street addresses and location information themselves.
In Google API Key: Fill in your API Key. In case you haven’t yet had an API Key, please click the link after this configuration to get it.
In Tracking Address from Applicable Countries: This configuration determines which countries to apply auto-suggesting customer addresses. There are 2 options to select:
If you choose All Allowed Countries: auto-suggesting address function is applied to every country.
If you choose Specific Countries: there is a list of countries in Tracking Address from Specific Countries and the maximum number of countries you can select is 5. Moreover, when you choose this option, Google just auto-suggests city name and country, not street name. This is the default function of Google auto-suggest.
*Notes:
Admin has to work with Google and pay for Google Maps to activate the address autocompleting feature.
Your websites must be "https://" to run the auto-fill function.
Your login customers can checkout with multiple addresses.
3.5 In Order Delivery Date
In Show Delivery Date:
Choose Yes to display Order delivery date in the Shipping method section that allows customers to choose their own suitable dates and times to receive orders.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Show Delivery Comment:
Choose Yes to display a Delivery comment box in the Shipping Method section.
In case M2 Order Delivery Date is installed: All features of M2 Order Delivery Date will be active. Customers can choose the delivery date and admin can give them certain delivery time slots:
In case M2 Order Delivery Date is not installed: All features of One Step Checkout delivery date will be active. Customers can choose whatever delivery date and time they want:
3.6 In Gift Message
In Show Gift Message on Order Level:
Choose Yes to allow customers to send a gift message to other people.
Choose No to disable this function.
* Gift Message config is applied only when the corresponding default config is enabled. To enable the default config, please go to Stores⇒ Sales ⇒ Sales ⇒ Gift Options and choose Yes to the suitable gift message level:
3.7 In Gift Wrap
In Enable:
Choose Yes to allow customers to request a gift wrap for their order.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Type: This function currently supports gift wrap for each order only, so the value is Per Order by default.
In Gift Wrap Fee: Fill the price for gift wrap service. The entered value is a positive number and automatically rounded to two decimal places. If left empty or filled with a negative number, the value would turn to be 0.
M2 Customer Attributes: Carefully config the Customer Attributes function to give your customers the best shopping experience! Go to Customers⇒ Customer Attributes. In each customer attribute, go to Display Configuration:
In Display on Checkout Page: Choose Yes to make customer attributes be shown on the checkout page, choose No to disable this function.
In Hide If Filled Before: Choose Yes so that if customers fill the customer attribute for the first time, it will not display after that. Choose No to always display the customer attribute whenever customers go to the checkout page.
M2 Checkout Custom Field: Go to Sales⇒ Bss Commerce ⇒ Manage Checkout Custom Field ⇒ Add New Field to create a custom field for the checkout page.
M2 Pre-select Shipping/Payment: Go to Stores⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ Pre-select Shipping/Payment to config the default shipping/payment method when customers enter the checkout page.
3.9 In Custom Style
In Checkout Step Number Color: you choose the color for the checkout number steps.
In Checkout Step Background Color: Choose a color for the background of checkout number steps.
In Custom Code: you can add more code to customize about background color for the checkout page, “Sign in” button or text color and so on.
3.10 Somes notes
Notes about custom code
+ Change background of the checkout page, you need to add more code:
body { background-color: #333333;
}
(#33333 is the color code which is corresponding to Black).
+ Change text color of the checkout page, you need to add more code:
body { color: #ffffff;
}
(#fffff is the color code which is corresponding to White).
+ Change Sign in to a button, you add more code:
.authentication-wrapper button{
padding: 15px;
background: #6D268A;
color: #fff;
}
.authentication-wrapper button:hover{
text-decoration: unset;
background: #FF0000;
color: #fff;
}
Note about configuring payment method
+ You need to configure all payment methods that default Magento supports.
Add information about Order delivery date and delivery comment to orders when getting orders via customerOrders default
{{base_url}}/graphql
POST
2
Add information about Order delivery date and delivery comment to the payment extension
{{base_url}}/graphql
POST
3
Get information about Order delivery date and delivery comment from Quote
{{base_url}}/graphql
POST
IV. Magento 2 Guest To Customer
To configure the extension, please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Guest to Customer.
4.1 General configs
In Enabled: set Yes to enable or set No to the module.
In Assign Orders with The Same Checkout Email to Customer: Choose Yes to enable this function and choose No to disable it. The logic of this config is presented as follow:
Config status
Customer behaviors
Result
Yes
Create an account right after the purchase using this button on the checkout success page:
The order gets assigned to the customer profile both frontend and backend.
Yes
Create an account using after the purchase using the button on the header:
Due to complications regarding time delay between orders and the relation with the invoice, credit memo,... outside of a sheer order => Currently, in this case, the extension doesn't support assigning orders with the same email to the new account.
Yes
Checkout using the registered email but not login
The order gets assigned to the customer profile both frontend and backend
Config: Yes. The customer creates an account right after their purchase using the button => The orders get assigned to the customer profile both frontend and backend.
Config: Yes.
In Sync address, choose Yes to synchronize customer's address when the billing address and shipping address are the same.
In Auto Convert to Customer: there are 2 options to select.
+ If you set Yes, guests are automatically converted to real customers after they finish their checkout.
In Customer Group: select customer group to assign converted customers.
+ If you set No, guest users after checkout will be included in a Guest Management grid table. Then, you can make mass actions to assign them to customer groups. This action also means that you manually convert them to real customers and create accounts for them.
For guests placing orders before you install this extension, you can still import them to the Guest Management grid, and convert them into customers automatically or manually.
Accordingly, pick a period time to import guest in From and To.
Then, click Import button to import guests.
4.2. Guest Management
You go to Customers ⇒ Guest ⇒ Guest Management to check this table:
If you want to convert any guest to a customer, you tick in the box and then choose Assign a Customer Group. Specific customer groups are displayed to select:
After choosing customer group and submit the request by click OK in the popup, guests are converted to customers.
4.2 Notification email
In Enable Notification Email to Customer: choose Yes to enable this function or choose No to disable it.
In Email Sender: select one store email to send notification emails to customers. These emails confirm customer account information to login into store website.
In Email Templates: select email template. This extension provides a default email template and you can easily customize in Marketing ⇒ Communications ⇒ Email Templates.
4.3 Required fields
In this section, you complete customer information which are displayed in the checkout if you set up as Required for this information in the Name and Address Options.
*Note: Reason why you need these configurations.
In Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Customer ⇒ Customer Configuration ⇒ Name and Address Options:
In case you set Required for information such as Show Prefix, Show Suffix, Show Date of Birth, Show Tax/VAT Number, Show Gender, Show Telephone, Show Company and Show Fax, which means that customers can create accounts only when they complete all of this information. However, when a guest user checkouts, he/she doesn't complete them because this information is not included in the default checkout. Therefore, the module cannot create accounts for guests when converting them to customers
With Required Fields configuration of the module, customer information is completed here and in the above case, the module will take customer data from these configurations to create an account for converted customers.
V. Magento 2 Social Login
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ Ajax Social Login.
5.1. General
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it.
In Use Popup Ajax, choose Yes to enable popup for login and register. Otherwise, choose No to disable it.
In Send Password, choose Yes to send customers an email that contains the password after they login using a social account. The customer then can use their email and password to log in to your site. Choose No to disable it.
In Display Customer Photo, choose Yes to display the customer’s profile photo from the social account they used for signup, or choose No to not display customer’s social photo.
In Redirect after Login, select the page on site or any particular URL you want to redirect after customer login successfully.
In Redirect after Register, select the page on site or any particular URL you want to redirect after customer completed register process.
5.2. Social Button Block
In Display buttons social login on popup, decide to display social buttons on Login tab or Register tab of popup, or place it on both tabs.
In Display buttons social follow class or id, enter class/id to place social button social login on.
In Display buttons social register follow class or id, enter class/id to place social button social register on.
In Number of button displayed, set the restriction of number of buttons to display on social login block.
In Social Button Sorting, decide the arrangement of buttons in social login block.
5.3. ReCaptcha
In Site Key and Secret Key, click “Create a site key” and register reCaptcha.
After registering, you will get the Site key and Secret key as below:
In Theme, choose the theme of reCaptcha between:
Light:
Dark:
In Type: Choose the type of robot checking between Image and Audio
In Size: Choose the size of reCaptcha widget between Normal and Compact.
In Popup Form: Choose the form(s) of popup on site to place the reCaptcha widget. A form of popup includes Login,Register and Forgot Password?
5.4. Configure specific social account
5.4.1. Facebook
Take Facebook account as the example:
In Enable, choose Yes to enable Facebook account for login and register on the site, or choose No to disable it.
In App ID and App Secret, click on “click here” below Enable dropdown box, you will be redirected to a page to set up new API like below.
After completing register step, you will see a page as below. Click on Get Started in Facebook Login.
Click on Dashboard, you will see your App ID and App Secret - copy them and paste correspondingly into App ID and App Secret box in the backend configuration.
In URI redirection valid OAuth– copy the Valid OAuth redirect URIs like below and paste into the box URI redirection valid Oauth.
In Small Icon, upload the file for the icon of this account displayed in the frontend.
In Login Button Text, customize the text in social login button.
In Registration Button Text, customize the text in social registration button.
Note: In case you run into the error “Blocked URL” use URI at the link to re-setup the configuration, as follow:
For other social accounts, follow similar steps like the setting for Facebook:
5.4.2. Twitter
5.4.3. Google
5.4.4. LinkedIn
To get Client ID, Client Secret and Redirect URL, please click on "click here" link and follow steps as below:
+ Create new application:
+ Set up Authentication for application: You get Redirect URLs in this step:
+ Copy Client ID and Client Secret to the configuration:
5.4.5. Window-Live
To get Application ID, Application Secret and Redirect URL, please click on "click here" link and follow steps as below:
+ Click on "click here" link to be redirected to Microsoft App register page:
+ Copy & Paste Redirect URL(s) to the app detail page:
+ Copy & Paste Application Id and Secret to Social Login configuration:
5.4.6. Instagram
Note: You need to edit the email after the 1st login.
To get Application ID, Application Secret and Redirect URL, please click on "click here" link and follow steps as below:
+ Create New Client ID:
+ Fill in web information:
+ Get Client ID and Client Secret:
*Note:
- Client status must be Authorized, then you can get the real Instagram account. In case you use sandbox mode, sandbox account is only accepted.
- Sometimes, you might face up to the error like this.
The solution is to copy the Redirect URIs and paste it in the client info page:
5.4.7. Vkontakte
Finally, click Save Config and to complete setting process.
Magento 2 B2B Company Credit supports using Magento 2 purchase order payment method, setting credit limit for credit purchases, and maximizing interactions between customers and admins.
Make good use of the default Magento 2 purchase order functionality now and attract your wholesaler customers with credit sales!
Please Go to Admin ⇒ Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Company Credit.
In Enabled: Choose Yes to enable the extension.
* Note: You need to go to Admin ⇒ Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Payment Methods ⇒ Purchase Order to enable the Purchase Order Payment Method.
In Email Config, choose the sender and templates.
2.2. Credit Limit Configuration
* Note: In the Comment section, you can add some notes for any update in the credit limit configuration, whether you change credit limit, update available credit, or enable/disable credit excess for the customer.
2.2.1. Assign A Credit Limit for Customers
To assign a credit limit for customers, you can either go to the Customer Detail Page or configure right on Customer Grid.
1st way - In Customer Detail Page: Choose tab “Company Credit”: You can assign a credit limit for the customer and choose to allow him/her to exceed the available credit or not. You also can set the payment due date for each customer here.
After you have set the values, hit “Save Customer”.
*Note: In the Customer Detail Page, you can also see the Log Transaction of that customer.
2nd way - In Customer Grid: Choose the customers that you wish to assign a unanimous credit limit:
After clicking “Update Company Credit”, you can assign a credit limit and allow credit access just like in the first way:
2.2.2. Update Customers’ Available Credit
There is only one event that affects the customer’s available credit without the admin’s interference, that is when the customer places an order.
To update the customer’s available credit, that is, the credit left after the customer has placed order(s), you can enter a value in the “Update Available Credit” field, either in the Customer Detail Page (or you also enter in Update Credit column) or Customer Grid Action.
The value you entered will be added to the current available credit.
* Note:
You cannot add an amount to the available credit that makes it greater than the credit limit.
Please add the prefix “-” if you want to subtract the customer’s available credit.
2.2.3. Change Customer’s Credit Limit
Sometimes while working with customers, you may wish to increase or decrease their credit limit. To do so, you can directly enter a value in the credit limit field.
The updated credit limit will be the value you have just entered, not an added value to the former limit.
2.2.4. Assign Payment Due Date For Customers
In the backend, you can assign the payment due date for each customer in the customer detail configuration.
In the Company Credit tab, you can find the Payment Due Date field.
In this field, enter the number of days (integer number) the customer must return the store credit for the admin.
The payment due date is counted from the day the customer places the order.
For example, if you set the payment due date as 30 days. The available credit is $100, and the customer uses a $50 credit in the order. In 30 days from the day they place the order, the customer must return the $50.
*Note:
When the order hasn't changed to Total paid status, the payment due date of the order will still count down in real-time based on the value the admin enters in the Payment Due Date field.
After the order is fully paid, the payment due date will stop counting down at the latest value.
2.3. Configure Admin Actions to Company Credit
If you do not want all admin users to be able to view or change the company credit info of customers, then you can configure the setting in Role Resources.
No tick on View or Save Company Credit:
- Admin users cannot see Allow Exceed & Available Credit info in the customer grid.
- Admin users cannot see the Company Credit tab on the customer detail page, therefore unable to update or create company credit.
Only tick on View Company Credit:
- Admin users cannot save company credit on the customer detail page.
- Admin users receive the notification “Sorry, you need permissions to save company credit" when trying to change credit info.
- In Mass Actions, admin users still see the “Update Company Credit” option but will be redirected to the permission page when hitting “Save” credit.
Tick on both View and Save Company Credit: Admin users can both see and edit company credit of customers that he/she has access to.
3. In the Frontend
After you have assigned the customer a credit limit, he can see it in My Account → My Company Credit. Available Credit and Credit Excess info are also displayed in the Company Credit Information section.
For each action affecting the credit information, the customer can track them in the Log Transaction:
The customer can use his available credit to checkout, even for a sum larger than his available credit, if he is allowed to exceed it:
* Note: This module does not support checkout with multiple addresses
Magento 2 Order Processing Solution Kit delivers a satisfying user experience and retains them to stay longer with your business by offering a smooth order placement process.
This kit includes 4 main extensions to fasten Magento bulk order processing.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. Quick Order
2.1.1. Fast Order CMS Page
We have already built a Fast Order CMS Page for you.
To check, please go to Content ⇒ Pages ⇒ Fast Order
Expand the Search Engine Optimization section to fill in the meta-information.
In URL Key, there is an auto-generated key. Copy the key to use in the fast order form configuration.
Remember to Save Page if you make any changes.
2.1.2. Backend configs
In Admin Panel, please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Fast Order.
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module or No to disable it.
In Fast Order Form Template, choose either Search box in row or Search box out row.
In Number of Lines: set the number of lines of Fast Order auto shown on the CMS page.
In Autocomplete Minimum Characters: set the minimum characters typed in the search box so that the result can appear.
In Max Results to Show: set the number of results displayed in the autocomplete box
In Main Color, pick the color of header and buttons that fits the design of the whole website.
In Shortcut URL Key, enter the URL key of the Fast Order CMS Page. This field is filled in advance, so skip if you do not change anything in the CMS Page.
In Position of Fast Order Shortcut, choose where to display the shortcut link.
Near mini cart
In top menu
In footer
In Enable for customer groups: choose groups to enable Wholesale Fast Order function.
Our extension supports a smart algorithm to pre-load multiple products based on customers’ order history whenever they access the fast order form.
In Enabled, choose Yes to activate this smart feature.
In Action, choose either Automation or Manual.
If you choose Automation, the pre-populated products are auto-loaded by two criteria:
+ 5 out of the Bestseller list according to default report, or
+ Most frequently ordered products from the customer's account.
+ Enter Max results to show. 5 is recommended.
+ Remember to Reindex data so that the automotive pre-populated products can be shown.
*Note:
+ For Logged-in customers: the module shows products in orders completed during the past 90 days. If orders were completed more than 90 days ago, the module displays best-seller products of the store during the past 90 days.
+ For Not Logged-in customers: the module displays best-seller products of the store during the past 90 days.
If you choose Manual, you can add a list of products at will
Click the left icon and select products IDs, or enter multiple IDs separated by commas without spaces.
In the end, save and flush the Cache.
2.1.3. In the Frontend
TEMPLATE 1 - SEARCH BOX IN ROW
TEMPLATE 2 - SEARCH BOX OUT ROW
2.2. Add Multiple Products to Cart
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Ajax Add Multiple Products Cart.
2.2.1. General Configs
In Enabled: Choose Yes to enable the module or choose No to disable it.
In Enable for Customer Group(s): Only chosen groups are allowed to add multiple products to cart.
In Apply “Add Multiple Products”: Select class and ID to be applied to the module (separated by a comma).
For example: .cms-home .products-grid,.catalog-category-view .productsgrid,.catalogcategory-view .products-list
In Default Qty: Select default quantity displaying in quantity box.
*Note:
This “Add Multiple Products” configuration only works with the product list having a similar structure to the product list page on the default category page or default widget.
If you want to apply the functions to other lists, such as Wishlist page or Compare page, you need to fix the HTML structure.
The extension works well with all product types, except for products having the type of custom options to be File.
2.2.2. Button, Checkbox, Qty Box
In Position of “Add all products” button: Choose where to display the Add all to cart button, as long as it is convenient for your customers: Top, Bottom, Both (Top and Bottom) or Right (Scroll)
Here is an example of the button in the Top position.
In Display Total Product or Total Qty: Choose to display the total number of selected products in the Add all to cart button.
In Show Product checkbox: Choose Yes to show checkbox next to each product.
In Show Selected Icon: Choose Yes to show an icon to mark selected products.
In Selected Icon Image: Upload the icon you want to display. The recommended dimension is 30x30px.
2.2.3. Popup Setting
Please define:
Image size (px) – For single product successfully added to Cart, shown in the success pop-up in case of adding only one product to cart.
Image size (px) – For multiple products successfully added to Cart, shown in the success pop-up in case of adding multiple products to cart.
Image size (px) – For selection popup: Choose the image size of the product in the popup shown to specify options and quantity
Number of Items displayed in one success popup for desktop screens. The default Number of Items for the tablet is 2 and for mobile is 1.)
Also, choose the effect of slide in popup:
Slide Speed: choose the transition duration of the slide in a millisecond.
Auto Slide: choose Yes for the slide in the success pop-up to be moved automatically.
Show Product Price: choose Yes show product price when adding only one product to cart.
Show Product Image: choose Yes to show the products’ images in the success popup.
Show “Continue” Button: choose Yes to show the continue shopping button at the success popup.
Countdown Time on Button: choose either View cart Button or Continue Button to show the countdown time. Choose No if you do not want to display the countdown time.
Countdown Time: …(s): Choose the period of time to countdown until redirecting to either View cart or Continue shopping.
Show Mini Cart: choose Yes to display the mini cart on the success pop-up.
Checkout Link in Mini Cart: choose Yes to show checkout link in the mini cart.
2.2.4. Popup Design
In Text on “Add Multiple to Cart” Button: Enter the content of the button
In Color of Text on Button: Pick the color of text in buttons.
In Text on “Continue” Button: Enter the content of “Continue” button.
In “Continue” Button Color: Pick the color of “Continue” button.
In “Continue” Button Color on Hover: Pick the color of “Continue” button when hovering.
In Text on “View Cart” Button: Enter the content of “View Cart” button.
In “View Cart” Button Color: Pick the color of “View Cart” button.
In “View Cart” Button Color on Hover: Pick the color of “View Cart” button when hovering.
2.3. Reorder Product List
2.3.1. In the frontend
This is how the Reorder Product List for Magento 2 is displayed in the frontend:
List all purchased products in one place for fast reordering
Choose which information to show: SKU, product image, price, ordered quantity, stock status, quantity box to reorder.
Search items by any piece of information above. The search autocomplete makes it faster.
Support Quick View to see the current price of items and choose product options in the popup
Add multiple ordered products to cart and redirect to checkout.
Support adding multiple purchased items to the wishlist
2.3.2. in the backend
2.3.2.1. General Options
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module
In Redirect to Cart after Adding Products to Cart: choose Yes to allow customers to redirect to cart after they add products to cart, if not, choose No.
In Redirect to Wishlist after Adding Products to Wishlist: choose Yes to allow customers to redirect to wishlist after they add products to wishlist, if not, choose No.
In Ignore Buy Request Param: Tick to ignore the param of items after the checkout.
2.3.2.2. List
In Enable to Add All Products to Wishlist: choose Yes so that customers can add all ordered products to the wishlist.
In Default Column(s) Displayed: choose which columns you want to show as default in the frontend:
+ Checkbox: allow choosing multiple items.
+ Image
+ Product Name
+ Ordered Price: showing price of items at that time they ordered
+ Quantity: this will allow customers to choose the number of products to reorder
+ Ordered Quantity: showing the number of the ordered product
+ Ordered Date: column showing the date customers ordered products
+ Stock Status
+ Add to Cart
Show Quick View Button in Column:
+ Image: choose Image if you want to show the Quick View button on the image of items.
+ Name: choose Name if you want that your customers can click into items’ names. Then, when customers click images, they can be zoom in/out.
Show Quantity: Choose Yes to show the stock number of products, choose No if you want to hide it.
Show SKU: Choose Yes to show SKU of products.
Products per Page on List Allowed Values: type numbers separated by commas to set the number of products shown per page.
Products per Page on List Default Values: choose one of the numbers you set on the above box to set the number of product will be displayed as default.
Products Listing Sort by: choose one of these below:
+ Name
+ Price
+ Ordered Date
+ Ordered Quantity
Allow Showing All Products per Page: choose Yes to show "All" option in the "Show X Per Page" dropdown, if not then choose No.
Click Import Old Orders to update all previous orders placed before installing our extension into the Reorder Product List.
2.4. Multiple Wishlists
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Multiple Wishlist.
In Enable: Choose Yesto enable the module or choose No to disable it.
In Redirect to My Wish List Page: Choose Yesto redirect customers to My Wish List Page after a product is added to wishlist. Otherwise, choose No.
In Remove Items after Adding to Cart: Choose Yes to keep items in Wish Lists after being added to Cart. Otherwise, choose No.
2.4.1. Create Wishlist/Add to Wishlist
In the frontend, customers can create any wishlist within clicks.
Accordingly, whenever they click on the "wishlist" icon, there is a popup shown accordingly. Customers can choose existing wishlists or create a new wishlist to add products to.
An item can be added to multiple wishlists from the product page, category page, search result page, compare page, the shopping cart page, homepage, CMS page, related product block, and cross-sell product block (in cart.)
*Notes:
When you add a product that has the custom option in File type, that product will be added directly to the main wishlist and you will be redirected to the Wish List page.
Also, a success notification will be shown.
2.4.2. Multiple-wishlist page
To check and manage items in wishlists, please go to My Wish List under Account or navigate to My Account ⇒ My Wishlist.
Here you can:
Create a new wishlist
Delete any wishlist
Edit the name of specific wishlist
Share wishlist with specific emails, along with the message
Add all items in the wishlist to cart with the defined quantity
2.4.3. Manage Items in Wishlists
To make any changes for specific items in the wishlist, please hover across that product.
As can be seen, you can:
Edit the product (quantity, custom options, etc.)
Add comment to the product
Change the quantity of the product
Add the product to cart
Remove the product from the wishlist
Copy or Move the product to other wishlists
Accordingly, there is a popup shown to choose where you want to copy or move the product.
* Note: This PWA addon does not work with custom options.
2. How Does It Work?
Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Configurable Grid Table View.
Enable the extension
In Enabled: Choose Yes to enable the module or choose No to disable it.
2.1. Set up the grid table view
First off, we provide advanced features to improve the display of the Configurable Grid Table View.
In Display Stock Availability: choose Yes to display stock availability in the grid table as "In Stock" or "Out of Stock." Otherwise, choose No.
In Display Stock Number: Choose Yes to show the number of products available instead of "In Stock." Otherwise, choose No.
In Display Out of Stock Products: choose Yes to show "Out-of-stock" products in the table, too. Otherwise, choose No.
In Display Product SKU: choose Yes to show SKU of child products. Otherwise, choose No.
In Subtotal: Choose Yes to show the subtotal column in the table. Otherwise, choose No.
In Show Unit Price:
Choose Yes to display the column of Unit price in the grid table
Choose No to hide the Unit Price column
Choose Only Different Price to show the price of child products having different prices. If all child products of a configurable product have the same price, the unit price column will be hidden.
In Show Detailed Total: Choose Yes to display the total quantity and total price at the bottom of the table in detail.
Here is an example of the Configurable Grid Table View product page.
2.2. Set up advanced tier prices
Enable advanced tier price for the configurable product
When it comes to tier price, you can:
Choose Yes to enable Advanced Tier Price on the configurable product pages.
Choose Yes to enable Table Tier Price so that customers get information about tier prices at a glance.
Choose Yes to enable Tooltip Tier Price. A note will be shown in the tooltip when customers hover on a specific child product.
In the storefront, the tier prices are shown accordingly:
and ...
2.3. Set up the table view per group and device
In Disable for Customer Group: Choose specific customer groups to disable the grid table view. Those restricted customers can only see the default configurable product pages.
In Hide Columns on Tablet/Mobile: choose the columns you do not want to show on small screens so that the grid table view is more user-friendly.
2.4. Enable/disable the grid table view per configurable product
If you want to disable the grid table view for any configurable products, please to Catalogs => Products => Product Edit Page => Grid Table View General tab.
Magento 2 Import Export module CAN ONLY WORK smoothly when you do the exact 2 steps below:
Always backup your database before using the extension for importing orders.
Always follow the user guide step-by-step while preparing for your importation.
1.Export Order
To export orders, follow this chain:
System -> Export by BSS -> Set Entity to Order
Here, you can choose the time window in which you want to extract and download the order from.
2.Import Order
In the admin panel, go to System -> Import by BSS -> Set Entity Type to Order.
2.1 Understand The Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There are 3 options for you to select.
+ Add: This option allows administrators to add new order into Magento 2 database.
+ Update: The module will update the existing order with the new information you’ve prepared with the CSV file.
+ Delete: This option allows the system to get orders based on the entity_id in the CSV file, then delete items that are available in the database.
Validation Strategy: select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
+ Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
+ Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds the maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
Multiple value separator: Accept the default value of a comma (,). A comma is the default separator in a CSV file. If you want to use a different character, please make sure that the data in the CSV file matches the character that you specify.
2.2 Prepare The CSV File
Before you import orders via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking View sample data next to the Entity Type field, or click here. After that, fill in your CSV accordingly.
+ For Update or Delete behavior, the best way to do this is to export the data first. This step will save you time on matching information in the filling CSV file.
+ For Delete behavior, if your intention is to delete the orders, all you need is a CSV file fills with the entity ID of said orders and you’re ready to go.
While importing, if the system encounters a similar increment_id in the database, it will automatically add in increment suffix (default: BSS) and proceed to continue the import. Or you can add your custom suffix at the Suffix config. Please use only letters (a-z or A-Z), numbers (0-9) or underscore (_) in this field, and the first character should be a letter.
2.2.2 Note while preparing CSV file each type of product
a. The least fields required to import order: you can download the file 1 in Sample Data. They include information for:
-Order
-Order Item (fields with prefix as item:)
-Payment (fields with prefix as payment:)
-Address (fields with prefix as address:)
b. For Physical Products, besides all the fields above, you need to have both shipping address and billing address in order to import orders.
c. For Virtual Products, besides all the fields in a., you need to have the billing address in order to import orders. In case you also fill in the shipping address, it will still proceed to import orders.
d. For Downloadable Products, you need to have download_link and download_link_item in addition to all the fields in a. to import order.
2.3 Load File To Import
After you finish the CSV file, tab the Choose File button to select the file to import.
2.4 Check data and import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click the Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and the Import button now appears to click.
You click the Import button to start importing order in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about the results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
3. Permission
You can set permission to use this extension for a specific admin user.
To grant Import permission, go to:
System > Permissions > User roles > Pick one admin user> Role Resources > Custom> System > Transfer Data -> Import by Bss -> Import Order
To grant Export permission, go to: System > Permissions > User roles > Pick one admin user >Role Resources > Custom> System > Transfer Data -> Export by Bss -> Export Order
Magento 2 B2B Registration & Login Combo is a complete solution to restrict access to non-logged-in customers and encourage them to create a B2B registration, with which the admin can review and approve/disapprove the account.
Check now!
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. Force Login
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Force Login
2.1.1. General configs
In Enable: choose Yes to enable the Force Login functions.
In Disable Registration: choose Yes to disable the Registration link on the top link and login page, or No to enable it for the customer to sign up.
2.1.2 Enable “Force Login” When users visit pages
In Alert Message: edit a force login message to be shown on the restricted page.
Select types of page to force login to access:
Product PageCategory PageCart PageCheckout PageSearch Term Page
Other Pages are custom pages created by third-party extensions, for example, the FAQs
We support specific CMS Page to force login: 404 Not Found; Home Page; Enable Cookies; Privacy Policy; About us; Customer Service.
2.1.3 Redirect users after successful login
It is important to streamline the experience of users after “force-login” requirement. You can choose among 4 redirect options.
Default: redirect users to the page after login like default Magento 2
Home Page: redirect users to Home Page after login
Previous Url: redirect users to the page they are trying to access when they are forced to login
Custom Url: Enter the page URL that you want to send your customers to after login
*Notes:
With custom pages by third-party extensions, if you select this option, you will be redirected to the previous page of the force login page.
For example: You require a login to access the FAQs page.
A customer goes to the Home page ⇒ Women (category page) ⇒ FAQs page and login. He/She is redirected to Women (category page).
Remember to Save Config on completing
2.1.4 Google reCAPTCHA & 2FA installation
Magento is adding Google reCAPTCHA and 2FA functionality to all Magento Commerce and Open Source versions 2.1 and above to reduce unauthorized access and spam.
Google reCAPTCHA technology is to ensure the access attempt by humans only, not bots. Compared with Magento CAPTCHA module, the reCAPTCHA enhances security with additional benefits includes support for invisible reCAPTCHA.
2FA Authentication adds support for software authentication apps and hardware authentication devices provided by Google Authenticator, Authy, U2F devices, and Duo Security, among others.
Hence, BSS Commerce strongly recommends installing these functions for your Magento 2 Website.
The admin can include a B2B Registration form besides the default form. This form has additional fields to get to know more about B2B customers.
More importantly, the admin can review and approve or reject the B2B registration instead of activating the account automatically like the default.
When the users complete the B2B registration form, a pending message is shown.
An email will be sent to the admin’s email to inform of the new B2B registration. Then, admin can manage over that account.
If the admin approves the registration, an email will be sent to the user’s email.
If the admin rejects the registration, a disapproval email is sent respectively. And, an error message is shown when the users try to access the account in the frontend.
2.2.2. In the backend
GENERAL CONFIGURATION
Go through Stores ⇒ Settings ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ B2B Registration.
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module.
Register settings
In B2B Account Page URL: enter URL of the customer registration page
In Shortcut Link in Header: select Yes to enable the shortcut link in the header. So customers can click this shortcut link to navigate the registration page.
In Shortcut Link Text: enter the title of the shortcut link in the header.
In Form Title: enter the title of the B2B registration form
Choose additional fields in the B2B Registration form. If you do not want any fields to show up, choose No.
Please ensure that by default, these fields are not required. Go to Configuration ⇒ Customer Configuration⇒ Name and Address Options to check.
Customer groups
In Default Customer Group: choose a group which you want to add the customer into.
In Disable Regular Registration: select Yes to disable the normal “Create an Account” link in the header, “Create an Account” button in Sign-in Page and checkout page.
Choose No to enable both “B2B Registration link” and the default “Create an Account link.”
Approval settings
In Auto Approve Accounts: Choose Yes if you want to accept new B2B accounts automatically or No if you want to approve accounts manually
NOTE: Even when you approve the B2B registration requests automatically, you can still change their status in the backend.
In Pending Message: enter Pending message.
In Disapproval Message: enter Disapproval message.
Admin email settings
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable configurations below.
In Email Sender: enter the name of the sender from Store Email Address of the default.
In Email Templates: choose among available email templates of websites to notify the admin of new B2B account
In Recipients: enter emails, separated by commas, to receive notification about new accounts created.
Customer email settings
In Enabled: choose Yes to send notification emails to customer
In Email Sender: enter the name of the sender from Store Email Address of the default.
In Approval Email Templates: select among available email templates of your site to send an email after the admin approves the B2B registration
In Disapproval Email Templates: select among available email templates of your site to send an email after the admin rejects the B2B registration
DEFAULT CAPTCHA SUPPORT
To enable Captcha in the B2B Registration form, please follow Stores ⇒ Configurations ⇒ CUSTOMERS ⇒ Customer Configuration ⇒ CAPTCHA
Set Enable CAPTCHA on Storefront to Yes.
In Form, choose Create User form to enable the CAPTCHA
Set Display Mode to either Always to After number of attemps to login.
Define CAPTCHA settings.
MANAGE B2B REGISTRATION REQUESTS
In Customer Grid:
There is an additional Status column in Customer Grid in the backend so that the admin can check the status of B2B accounts and make adjustments accordingly.
The admin can edit the status of single B2B account by double-clicking in any position in the row:
or, multiple B2B accounts:
or in Account Information of specific account:
*Note:
If the admin creates an account in the backend for a customer, there will be an approval notification email sent to the customer after finish creating this account.
However, that account has Normal status, admin can change into B2B Approval status, there also a notification email sent to that customer.
2.3. Customer Attributes
2.3.1 General config
Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Customer Attributes.
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it.
*Note: The Enable config only affects frontend display. Other backend functions aren’t affected by this config.
In Allow Dowload Customer Attribute File: choose Yes to allow downloading the file uploaded to customer attribute or No to restrict downloads.
In Title of Customer Attributes, enter the name for the customer attributes block. This title will be displayed in Registration Form and My Account Page.
In Set Default Required Attributes for Existing Customer, choose Yes if you want required attributes to be applied for existing customers. Otherwise, choose No.
2.3.2 Create new attributes
Go to Customers ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Customer Attributes.
Customer Attributes Grid which displays all customer attributes created by admin. The Customer Attributes Grid is equipped with all function like a default Magento 2 grid, including filter, column, mass action (delete, update status).
Click Add New Attribute button to create a new customer attribute. Then, you will see 3 tabs: Properties, Manage Labels, and Display Configuration.
Later, you can also remove Magento 2 customer attributes, as wished.
PROPERTIES
Attribute Properties:
In Default Label, enter a name for the customer attribute.
In Input Type, choose 1 of the 9 input types: Text Field, Text Area, Date, Yes/No, Multiple Select, Dropdown, Checkbox and Radio Button, File (Attachment).
*Note:
If you choose Multiple Select, Dropdown, Checkbox or Radio Button, add options for the customer attribute in Manage Options.
In Values Required, choose Yes to make the customer attribute compulsory to fill in; otherwise, choose No.
Advanced Attribute Properties:
In Attribute Code, enter a code for the customer attribute. No space allowed and no more than 30 symbols.
*Note: In case none value is entered for Attribute Code, the extension will automatically get the value of Default Label as value for this field.
In Maximum File Size (bytes), enter a number to define the largest file size possibly uploaded.
In File Extensions, type allowed file extension that can be uploaded to the customer attribute. Each is separated by a comma.
In Default Value Required for Existing Customer, enter a value if the attribute is set as Required. This field will be only shown when the Values Required is Yes and the Input Type is text field, area, datetime, or file.
In Input Validation for Customer, set a type of data allowed in the field. The available values depend on the Input Type specified.
None—The field has no input validation during data entry.
Decimal number—Accepts only decimal number during data entry.
Integer Number—Accepts only integer number during data entry
Email—Accepts only an email address during data entry.
URL—Accepts only a URL during data entry
Letters—Accepts only letters during data entry
Letters (a-z, A-Z) or Numbers (0-9)—Accepts any combination of numbers (0-9) and alphabetic characters (a-z, A-Z) during data entry.
MANAGE LABELS
Customer Attributes for Magento 2 extension supports multiple store view, so you can display different customer attribute labels per store view.
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
In Sort Order, set the order of appearance for the customer attribute in the Registration form.
*Note: The sort order set here will also decide the order of appearance of the attributes in the backend.
In Status, enable or disable the customer attribute.
In Display in Registration Form, choose Yes to add the customer attribute to Registration Form.
In Display in My Account Page, choose Yes to add the customer attribute to My Account Page.
Especially, when Customer Attributes and B2B Registration are installed together, there will be 2 additional display properties as shown in the image:
In Display in B2B Registration Form, choose Yes to add the attribute to the B2B registration form.
In Display in B2B Account Page, choose Yes to add the attribute to the B2B account page.
In Display in Order Detail Page, choose Yes to add the customer attribute to Order Detail Page under Sales of Admin Panel.
In Display in Customer Grid, choose Yes to add the customer attribute to Customer Grid.
In Add to Order Confirmation Email, choose Yes to display the customer attribute in the Order Confirmation email.
In Add to New Account Email, choose Yes to display the customer attributes in New Account email.
In Add to Order Frontend, choose Yes to display the customer attributes on Order Detail Page under My Account.
*Note: You need to reindex data of Customer Grid whenever you make any change in Display in Customer Grid config.
In Display on Checkout Page, choose Yes to show added customer attributes in the checkout page – under the shipping address or the payment method (with the virtual cart.) All filled information is saved upon order placement.
*Note: Attributes of all input types, except for “File”, are supported at the checkout page.
In Hide If Filled Before, choose Yes to hide the customer attributes at the checkout page if they are filled before.
In Show Attribute in, choose where to show the attribute in the registration form, among Customer Attribute Section, Sign-in Information Section, and Personal Information.
2.3.3 Create a new email template
As above, customer attributes are possibly set to display on Order Confirmation email and New Account email.
First off, you need to create a new template which includes customer attributes variable. Please follow Marketing Email Templates Add New Template.
New Order Confirmation email template
In Template section of Load default template, you can select among various default email templates, for example, New Order. Then, hit on Load template button.
Under Template Information, select Insert Variable… to add customer attributes to new order confirmation template.
Do not forget to enter Template Name and Save the new template.
Secondly, set this new template as the Order Confirmation email by going to StoresConfiguration Sales Sales Emails Order.
In New Order Confirmation Template, uncheck Use system value box and choose the newly created email template.
On completing, please Save Config.
New Account email template
Similarly, you can create a new template with customer attributes for New Account email.
In Template of Load default template section, choose New Account (Default) template and hit Load Template.
Under Template Information, enter Template Name and select Insert Variable… to add customer attributes to New Account template.
Then, Save Template.
To set this new template as the New Account template, please follow Stores Configuration Customers Customer Configuration and expand Create New Account Options.
In Default Welcome Email, unmark Use system value box. Then choose the newly created template. Save Config to complete the settings.
2.3.4 Display Customer Attributes
FRONTEND
Display customer attributes in Registration Page:
*Note: Customer Attributes for Magento 2 extension only supports checkbox in the frontend while in the backend, the checkbox is displayed in multiple-selection type.
A New Account email will be sent to the register, which includes the customer attributes based on the admin’s configuration.
Display Customer Attribute in Account Information of My Account Page:
At Checkout page:
Customer attributes can also be displayed on Order Confirmation email:
And on Order Detail Page under My Account.
BACKEND
Go to Customers ⇒ All Customers.
Display customer attribute in Customer Grid:
Display customer attribute in Customer Detail Page:
Go to Sales Orders.
Display customer attribute in Order Detail Page:
2.3.5. Import Customer with Attributes
Customer Attributes for Magento 2 extension allows importing customer with the created customer attributes by using the .csv file.
Firstly, prepare the file of customer information with customer attributes to import. All created customer attributes must be included in the import file with each customer attributes code listed in separate columns. Please make sure that all customer attribute codes are the same as attribute codes of existing customer attributes.
For customer attributes with the input type is a checkbox or radio button, use option’s ID instead of options’ value. For customer attributes with the input type is a dropdown or multiple select, fill in with correct options’ value.
Admins can also download the sample file by following System Import.
In Entity Type, choose Custom Main File to import new customers with customer attributes.
In Import Behavior, select one of the following actions:
Add/Update complex data: New data is added to the existing attributes in the database.
Delete Entities: Any existing data of entities in the import file is removed from the database of the stores.
Custom Action: Admins can also override the import behavior by writing a custom option.
In Select file to Import, upload the file prepared earlier. Make sure that the size of the uploaded file is not more than 3M.
On completing, tap Check Data button in the upper-right corner. Wait for few seconds for the validation to perform.
If the import data is valid, the successful message will be displayed as in the screenshot. Click on Import button to process the import to the end of the data. Otherwise, there is any problem in data, the error message will appear. Just correct the invalid data and re-upload the file.
As its name suggests, Magento 2 Sales Rep extension allows creating a team of sales representatives to keep in touch with specific customers in terms of orders and quotes.
Keep scrolling down to figure out how our solution works, especially for the B2B business.
2. How Does It Work?
Enable Sales Rep and Set up email notifications
Please go to Stores => Configurations => Sales Rep.
First off, set Enable to Yes so that the store admin can start creating new sales representatives per customer.
In the Sales Rep Email Config:
Email Sender: Pick up a sender you have created in advance.
Send Email Copy to: Enter multiple emails separated by a comma. We suggest sending email copies of "Assign Sales Rep to Customer" and "Unassign Sales Rep to Customer" emails to your sales rep so that they can get updated in real-time.
Assign Sales Rep to Customer: Choose an available template, for example, our built-in "Assign Sales Rep to Customer (Default)" template.
Unassign Sales Rep to Customer: Choose an available template, for example, our built-in "Unassign Sales Rep to Customer (Default)" template.
2.1. Create roles of Sales Rep
Create the roles of sales rep
When this extension is installed completely, there are NO created roles of the admin sales rep and sales rep. Hence, the admin needs to create the new role first before assigning a user as a sales rep.
Follow the below guide:
Navigate to Systems => Permissions => User Roles.
Simply put, choose Add New Role.
Add the new role of Sales rep
Under Role Information:
Role Name: Enter a role for easy management
Sales Rep Role: Choose either Admin Sales Rep or Sales Rep
+ Sales Rep: Users with this role can access a tab in the admin panel to manage customers, orders, and quotes assigned to them.
+ Admin Sales Rep: Users with this role can manage customers, orders, and quotes assigned to all sales representatives.
Your Password: Enter the login password to confirm the action
Under Role Resources:
Assign resources to the role
Tick on Sales Rep resource, then users with the role can access the Customers, Orders, and Quotes grids assigned to them.
+ We have developed the Sales Rep resources with all information required by a sales rep to manage their customers.
Sales Rep permissions
+ You can also assign Sales Rep users to other resources.
+ When a customer is assigned to another sales rep, orders and quotes assigned the former sales rep will remain under the control of that sales rep rather than of the new one.
Save the new role and click back on the created role, the Role Users session will appear.
Under Role Users, choose available users or create a new one later.
Assign users to a role
2.2. Create users of Sales Rep roles
Manage all users in the grid
Navigate to Systems => Permissions => All Uses. Choose Add New User.
Create a new sales rep user
Under User Info, fill in the user's information and enter your password to confirm the action.
Assign a role to the user
Under User Role, pick up an available role, in this case, either Sales Rep or Admin Sales Rep.
Add information to the sales rep user
Under Additional Information, you can add information to the sales rep user in WYSIWYG editor. This information will be visible under My Account of the customer.
2.3. Assign customers to sales rep users
Customers under the store admin's view
At first, all customers are recorded in the Customer grid and available under the admin store's view.
In this grid, the store admin can assign a customer to a specific Sales Rep user by going to the customer edit page.
Scroll down to the Sales Rep tab to assign the Sales Rep user to the customer. The information of that user is shown accordingly.
2.4. Notify the customers
When a Sales Rep user is assigned or unassigned to a customer. The email notifications will be sent to the customers and the CC email (say, the sales rep users.)
and ...
2.5 My Account Dashboard, Sales Rep user's view, and Admin Sales Rep user's view
2.5.1 My Account Dashboard
When a sales rep user is successfully assigned to a customer. She/He now can check the information of the sales rep user under My Account.
2.5.2. Sales Rep user's view
As we mentioned, the Sales Rep user now can access the information of assigned customers and take actions accordingly.
In the Customers grid:
Customers under Sales Rep user's view
In the Orders grid:
Orders under Sales Rep user's view
In the Quotes grid:
Quotes under Sales Rep user's view
2.5.3 Admin Sales Rep user's view
The Admin Sales Rep user can also access the information of customers assigned to all sales reps. However, they can only view the information and can't take further action.
Please note that the Admin Sales Rep users can not create or view customers, orders, and quotes. When clicking on Create New Order or on action View/Edit, the Admin Sales Rep users are redirected to an error page.
Error page
In the Customers grid:
Customers under Admin Sales Rep user's view
In the Orders grid:
Orders under Admin Sales Rep user's view
In the Quotes grid:
Quotes under The Admin Sales Rep user's view
3. API Support
BSS is now providing several API heads to help you use our extension better & faster!
Then, the company admin - who first registered for the company account, can create and share access to the account for multiple users with different roles/permissions.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. General settings
Company Account general settings
Please go to Stores => Configurations => Magento 2 Company Account.
Set Enable Company Account to Yes.
In Email Config, choose the sender and templates.
Notes:
In "Send Active Email Copy to" and " Send Deactive Email Copy to", input multiple emails separated by commas.
In Update User And Role Notifications section, choose the email template sent to the admin to notify the updated information of role and sub-user.
In Order Approval Notifications section, choose the email template sent to:
Admin: notify about the order request/newly created order from the sub-user.
Sub-user: notify about the status of order request (approve or reject) from admin/Approve Order Waiting sub-user.
2.2. A customer registers for an account in the storefront.
Customers register for an account and wait for the admin to switch it into a company account.
To start with, a customer will sign up for a new account via the default registration form.
Then, he/she needs to contact the store admin to switch the created account to the company account in the backend.
2.3. Approve/Reject company accounts in the backend
Manage all registered accounts in Customers grid
All registered accounts, including company accounts, are reported in the Customers grid. Upon contact with the customer, the admin then switches a normal account to the company account in 2 ways:
on the Customer Edit page
Under Account Information, there is a new field "Is Company Account".
By setting this field to Yes, a company account is now available.
Setting it to No means the account is just a normal account.
Mass action is allowed
Otherwise, the store admin can change multiple accounts to company accounts or remove them from company accounts with the mass action.
Magento 2 B2B Registration helps create an additional registration for company account so that you can divide company accounts and normal accounts into separate groups for better management.
More importantly, company accounts are pending for the store admin to review and approve/reject.
Pending message for Company Account registration
Registered accounts are recorded in Customers grid for further action.
Switch the registered accounts to company accounts in grid
With Magento 2 Customer Attributes, you can add fields to both default sign form and B2B registration form to get to know your customers.
Create customer attributes to add fields in the sign-up form.
Information filled is visible in the Customers grid. The store admin can switch an account to the company account without having to wait for the customers to contact in advance.
Customer attributes in Customers Grid
2.4. Create users, roles and permissions in the storefront
Company Account Welcome email
When the store admin switches an account to the company account, a notification email is sent accordingly. Then, the company admin can login to his/her account.
Company Account dashboard
From now on, you must get familiar with three new roles:
The store admin: It is the person who will review, approve, or disapprove the company account registration
Company admin: One who registers the company account in the first place and who is assigned the role "Admin."
Sub-users: Sub-users are created by company admin or store admin under Account management. They have limited roles and permissions.
2.4.1. Create and manage new roles
Manage roles and permissions
Go to Manage Role under Account Dashboard, the company admin can add new role for users.
Please note that the Admin role is available in advance. Those assigned the Admin role will have permissions as the company admin.
Assign permissions to the roles
Choose to add New Role and assign built-in permissions to the role.
In Role Name: input the role
In Permissions: Among available resources, choose what information can be accessed and managed by the role.
In Max Order per Day: input an amount. Skip this field if you do not want to set an order amount limitation.
In Min Order per Day: input an amount. Skip this field if you do not want to set an order amount limitation
Remember to Save the settings.
2.4.2. Create and manage new sub-users
Manage users of company account
Now, go to Manage Sub-users to create new sub-users.
Create a new sub-user and assign a role
Choose to add New Sub-user and assign a built-in role to the sub-user.
In Status: choose to Enable or Disable the sub-user
In Sub-user Name: Input name of the user
In Sub-user Email: input an email which is not added before.
In Role: pick up an available role
Remember to Save the settings.
An email will be sent to the sub-user.
Sub-user Welcome email
2.5. Create a company account, roles and permissions, and sub-users in the backend
The admin can also create a company account, sub-users and assign roles/permissions to the users.
2.5.1. Create a new company account
2.5.2. Create and manage roles
2.5.3. Create and manage sub-users
If you have any questions about this Magento 2 Company Account extension, feel free to contact us.
Magento 2 Import Export extension combo frees yourself from all default Magento limitations. Every Import and export features now stays in one place and you can enjoy speeding up adding or getting data on your website.
I. Import by BSS
Navigate to System ⇒ Import by BSS and select an Entity Type from the drop-down list.
1.Import CMS Page
1.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There are 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new CMS Page of the website. In addition, it also updates CMS Pages if these pages already exist in the database and have the same URL keys (identifier) as data in the CSV file.
+ Replace: The module will delete old CMS pages and then add new ones.
+ Delete: This option allows the system to get CMS pages based on URL keys in the CSV file, then delete pages which are available in the database.
Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
+ Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
+ Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds the maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
1.2. CSV File Preparation
Before you import CMS pages via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields:
1.3. In File to Import
After you have finished the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
1.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing CMS pages in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
2. Import Categories
2.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There are 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new categories of the website. In addition, it also updates categories if these categories already exist in the database and have the same category _id as data in the CSV file.
+ Replace: The module will delete old categories and then add new ones.
+ Delete: This option allows the system to load categories based on category_id in the CSV file, then delete these categories which are available in the database.
Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
+ Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
+ Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds the maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
2.2. CSV File Preparation
Before you import categories via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File.
Then you open this file and fill in fields:
category_id: Complete category id which is saved in the database.
+ Value of category_id to enter is a Natural number.
+ If you leave it blank, a new category is added.
+ If you enter a value that exists, the module will update data to the category with corresponding ID.
store_id: Store Id which is available in the store.
+ Value of store_id to enter is a Natural number
+ If you leave it blank, store_id will get the value of 0 (store _id=0). You don't need to fill store_id when adding a new category.
parent_id: is an ID of the existing category in the database
+ Value of parent_id to enter is a Natural number.
+ If you enter the ID which does not exist, the module will notify as an error in the Check data process.
* Note: If you are using 1.0.1 version: In case you have to import a new parent category and new children category in the same CSV, take some notices as below:
+ In parent category: enter new category_id.
+ In children category: enter parent_id which is the same as new category_id of the parent category. As a result, children categories will be imported to the right parent category. In addition, after importing, IDs of parent category and children category can be different from new category_id which is entered in the CSV file.
path: This is the path from the root category to the current category.
+ path is a string of characters.
+ When importing, you don't need to enter data for this column.
name: Name of the category.
+ If you leave it blank, the module will notify as an error in the Check data process.
description: Detailed description about the category.
custom_design: Enter ID of the theme used in the category
+ Value of custom_design to enter is a Natural number.
category_products: Enter SKUs of products assigned to the category. For group products, bundle products, and configurable products, you need to enter SKUs of parent products.
+ If SKU is wrongly entered, the module will skip this SKU and continue to import other SKUs.
+ If SKU has existed in the category, the module will skip this SKU.
+ If the SKU has not yet existed, the module will add it as a new one.
+ category_products has a format as SKU1|SKU2|SKU3.
*Note: You just can add new SKUs to the category in this column, but cannot remove existed SKUs from the category.
attribute_set_id: ID of attribute set.
+ Value of attribute_set_id to enter is a Natural number.
+ If you leave it blank, the module will take ID of the default attribute set.
position: Postion of the category in the parent category.
+ Value of position to enter is a Natural number.
url_key: URL key of the category.
+ If you leave it blank, a new URL key for this category is created based on its name.
url_path: URL path of the category.
image_name: Name of image file of the category. Category image should be uploaded to pub/media/catalog/category folder of Magento folder.
is_active: Enable the category.
+ You enter 0 or 1 for this column. If you enter 1, it means the category status is enabled.
include_in_menu:
+ You enter 0 or 1 for this column. If you enter 1, the category will be displayed in the menu.
display_mode: display mode of the category.
+ You can choose one of these values to enter: PRODUCTS, PAGE, and PRODUCTS_AND_PAGE.
page_layout: choose layout for the category.
+ Values of layout include: 1column, 2columns-left, 2columns-right, 3columns và empty.
custom_design_from: Time when custom design begins.
+ Standard format is: yyyy-mm-dd or yyyy/mm/dd
custom_design_to: Time when custom design ends.
+ Standard format is: yyyy-mm-dd or yyyy/mm/dd
default_sort_by: Select how to sort products of the category on the frontend. For example: sort by name, position, and price.
available_sort_by: Sorting type can be allowed to use in the category. They can be name, position or name or you can combine all of them.
+ Standard format is: sort1|sort2|sort3
is_anchor: You can enter 0 or 1 in this column.
custom_use_parent_settings: Select whether applying parent category's settings or not.
layered_navigation_price_step:
+ value of layered_navigation_price_step is a decimal number.
custom_apply_to_products: You can enter 0 or 1 in this column.
If you want to use exported categories to import into another website with Delete import behavior, you need to remove rows of system root category (ID=1) and store root category in the CSV file because default Magento doesn't allow you to delete root category.
If you want to import the whole category tree, you need to arrange parent category and children categories to the right order in the CSV file. The first is the parent category, and the next are children categories.
2.3. In File to Import
After you have finished the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
2.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing categories in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
3. Import Newsletter Subscribers
3.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There are 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new newsletter subscribers. In addition, it also updates newsletter subscribers if these subscribers already exist in the database.
+ Replace: The module will delete old newsletter subscribers and then add new ones.
+ Delete: This option allows the system to get newsletter subscribers based on customer_ID in the CSV file, then delete items which are available in the database.
Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
+ Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
+ Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds the maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
3.2. CSV File Preparation
Before you import newsletter subscribers via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File.
Then you open this file and fill in fields:
Field
Format
Meaning
ID
Natural numbers
ID number of the newsletter subscriber.
email
Email
Customer email – which is used to subscribe to newsletters.
type
String
Type of emails: customer or guest.
customer_first_name
String
The first name of the customer. For guests, enter "---"
customer_last_name
String
The last name of the customer. For Guests, enter "---"
status_id
Natural numbers
+ Not Activated: Value = 2.
+ Subscribed: Value = 1.
+ Unsubscribed: Value = 3.
+ Unconfirmed: Value = 4.
(If you don’t enter the status or you enter the wrong value, the default value is 1).
change_status_at
yyyy/m/d hh:mm:ss
The time when customers subscribe to the newsletter.
web_site
String
Website where customers subscribe to the newsletter.
store
String
Store where customers subscribe to the newsletter.
store_view_code
String
Store view where customers subscribe to the newsletter. If you enter the wrong value, it is changed into Default.
3.3. In File to Import
After you finish the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
3.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing newsletter subscribers in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
4. Import Product Attributes
4.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There is 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new attributes into the website. In addition, it also updates attributes if their attribute_codes exist.
+ Replace: This option allows administrators to add new attributes into the website. In case attribute _ codes in the import data match with attribute_codes of existing attributes, these attributes are deleted and new records are created using the CSV data.
+ Delete: This option allows administrators to remove attributes in case their attribute_codes exist.
Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
+ Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
+ Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds that maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
Multiple value separator: Choose a character to separate data in a field column. In our CSV sample file, the vertical bar ( | ) is set up as default value.
Option value separator: separator between store view ID and values of attribute options.
Store view separator: separator between values of different store views.
For example:
4.2. CSV file preparation
Before you import product attributes via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File.
Then you open this file and fill in fields:
Data
Format
Meaning
attribute_code
A string of characters
Required to enter data. Notify errors if you leave it blank.
attribute_set
attribute_set1|attribute_set2...
+ When attribute_set of an attribute is left blank, this attribute is added as a new one which does not belong to any attribute sets or any attribute groups.
+ When attribute_set doesn't exist in the database, a new attribute set is created.
attribute_group_name
A string
The name of the attribute group to which the attribute is assigned after importing.
+ when you leave it blank, the attribute is added to the last attribute group of the assigned attribute set. + when attribute_group_name doesn't exist in the database, a new one is auto created.
attribute_group_code
(not required): It is auto-created based on the attribute group name. If attribute_group_code is similar to attribute_group_code of an available group in the database, you will face an error.
is_global
0,1,2
0 ~ Store View
1 ~ Global
2 ~ Website If it is left blank or wrong, it auto turns 0.
is_user_defined
0, 1
0 ~ attribute is defined as system attribute.
1 ~ attribute is not system attribute. Admin can delete it.
is_filterable
0,1,2
Corresponding to the Use in Layered Navigation config in the StoreFront Properties tab of the attribute:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Filterable (with results)
2 ~ Filterable (no results) If you enter the wrong value, the config auto gets 0 after importing.
is_visible
0,1
Determines whether the attribute is visible in the grid or not:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_required
0,1
Corresponding to the Value Required config of the attribute
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_visible_on_front
0,1
Corresponding to the Visible on Catalog Pages on Storefront config:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_searchable
0,1
Corresponding to the Use in Search config:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_unique
0,1
Corresponding to the Unique Value config:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
frontend_class
Optional. Database value
is_visible_in_advanced_search
0,1
Determines whether the attribute is shown in advanced search or not:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_comparable
0,1
Corresponding to the Comparable on Storefront config of the attribute
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_filterable_in_search
0,1
Corresponding to the Use in Search Results Layered Navigation config: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
is_used_for_price_rules
0,1
Determines whether the attribute is used for price rules or not:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_used_for_promo_rules
0,1
Corresponding to the Use for Promo Rule Conditions config:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
sort_order
Natural numbers
Smaller value, higher priority
position
Natural numbers
The display position of the attribute in layered navigation.
frontend_input
Corresponding to Catalog Input Type for Store Owner:
text – Text Field textarea – Text Area texteditor - Text Editor (from Magento 2.3) date – Date
boolean – Yes/No multiselect – Multiple Select
select – Dropdown, Visual or Text Swatch price – Price media_image– Media Image
wee – Fixed Product Tax (Notify errors and skip them when entering wrong values)
backend_type
Optional. Database value
backend_model
Optional. Database value
source_model
Optional. Database value
frontend_label
label|store_code1:label|store_code2:label
Label for the attribute, you can import label for many store views. (Notify errors and skip them when you leave it blank)
Your CSV file must include enough the number of columns like the sample file so that you can successfully import. (If the number of columns is greater or fewer than those in the sample file, the system will notify you about errors).
You can assign 1 attribute for many attribute sets in only 1 row in the CSV file. The format of the attribute set column is attributeSet1|attributeSet2|...
If you enter the wrong product type in the "apply_to" column, the value of this column is changed into NULL.
For columns with values as 0 or 1: if you enter the wrong value, the system will change into default value as 0.
For columns including multiple values, you need to add multiple separators in the end. For example: 0:KBowl1;2:Elongated;1:Allong|
You mustn't leave backend_type column empty:
+ if backend_type is static, you need to create a column in the catalog_product_entity. If you don't do this one, you cannot save attribute's value when saving the product. However, it's better that you shouldn't select backend_type as static.
+ If backend_type is varchar, int, decimal, text, or data time, you can definitely save attribute's value.
If your CSV file includes special characters that belong to your own language (in case you do not use English), you need to convert your CSV file to UTF-8 format. You can read the instructionHERE.
4.3. In File to Import
After you finish the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
4.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If you CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing product attributes in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. To check these imported attributes, you navigate to Stores → Products Attributes to see them in a grid view:
If your CSV file includes errors, Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is notification about these problems.
*NOTE: You had better take a notice about these following issues in the CSV file which affect data checking.
Errors in the CSV file make you not successfully import:
+ Leave attribute_code as blank.
+ Enter the wrong Entity Type ID.
+ Enter a number of columns which are greater or less than those in the sample CSV file. (Please follow the sample file we provide you and don't add more columns or remove).
+ Enter the wrong value in the"is_global" column. (Please remember the standard values just includes 1,2 and 3).
However, there some specific errors in your CSV file, but the system will skip and continue to import as well as still notifies you about problems. Let's check these skipped errors as below:
+ Enter the wrong backend_type or frontend_input.
+ Enter the wrong attribute_code when you choose Import behavior as Delete.
+ Enter the different multiple value separator from the one set up in the backend.
+ Enter the wrong fomat in the "attribute_option"or "attribute_option_swatch" columns. When you are in this situation, your CSV file is still imported but it contains errors. Therefore, thank to notification about these errors, you can edit the file and also do it better for the next time.
*Tips
You can quickly import attributes with many options using source_model of attributes.
+ Create a source file in the module: Bss_ProductAttributesImportExport - this source file can be similar as the following file:
The path is Bss\ProductAttributesImportExport\Model\Attribute\Source\Label. Enter this path to the source_model of the CSV file.
5. Import Product Reviews
Before you import product reviews via CSV file, you need to prepare a CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File.
Then you open this file and fill in fields:
There are required data fields for you to complete such as review titles, review details, status, customer nicknames, product SKU and rating options.
If you don't finish this information, you cannot import product reviews at all.
For Date: Follow the right format "dd/MM/yyyy HH:mm:ss".
ForStatus: Enter Approved/ Disapproved. If you don't enter the right format, status is automatically Disapproved after being imported.
ForRating options: fill in ratings for products with the format: "rating_code1:number, rating_code2: number, rating_code3: number". For example: "Quality:5, Price:4, Service:4".
(*Note: In case you enter a new rating code that is not available in Ratings section of the backend, you can still import reviews and this rating type is automatically created in the backend.)
For Type: there are 3 types - Admin, Customer, and Guest. If you don't enter the right format, the module will change customer type into Guest or the review is created by a Guest.
For Customer ID: If you don't enter customer ID or enter the wrong format, the module will change customer type into Guest.
For Store View Code: Fill in store view code.
*Note: If you want to import product reviews for multiple store views, just separate them by character | For example: default|eng
For Review ID:
You cannot import reviews if you enter the wrong format.
In case you leave Review ID of a review blank and all of its remaining data is not similar to those of the available reviews shown in the frontend, the module will add this review with a new Review ID. (If there are some similar data to those of available reviews, the module still adds this review with a new Review ID).
In case you leave Review ID of a review blank and all of its remaining data is the same as those of available reviews, the module will take it as an existing row.
In case you enter a Review ID that is similar to an existed Review ID, the module will automatically update the product review based on one review ID.
If Review ID is greater than the maximum review ID in the database, the module will atill add this new review.
For Store View Code: you enter the code of store view you want to add reviews into. If you enter the wrong format, the module will change into Default Store View.
*Note: The CSV file size does not exceed 2MB. When you finish the CSV file, just select it and click Import Product Reviews to import them into Magento 2 sites.
After you import the CSV file, there are messages to notify:
Successfully import with the number of inserted rows
The number of existing rows or invalid rows
After importing, you can manage these added reviews in:
Admin → Product page →Product reviews
Admin → Customer page → Product reviews
Admin → Marketing → User content → Reviews
Admin → Report → Reviews
*NOTE: You can also import product reviews by using this following method:
Upload the CSV file to "var/import/reviews" folder
Import Behavior: There is 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new URL rewrites into the website. In addition, it also updates URL rewrites if their request_paths already exist in the database.
+ Replace: If the request_path does not exist in the database, you are notified about this non-existence and the module will add a new URL rewrite. If the request_path already exists in the database, the module will delete old URL and add a new URL rewrite.
+ Delete: This option allows administrators to remove URL rewrite according to the request_path.
Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
+ Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
+ Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds that maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
6.2. CSV file preparation
Before you import URL rewrites via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields:
*NOTES:
Your CSV file must include enough the number of columns like the sample file so that you can successfully import. (If the number of column is greater or less than those in the sample file, the system will notify you about errors occurring).
It is unnecessary to enter target_path if entity_type is product, category or cms-page because target_path in these cases are automatically generated according to corresponding ID.
When you enter entity_type into the CSV file:
+ if entity_type is product: enter product_ID with category_ID that includes this product or you also don't need to enter category_ID for the product.
+ if entity_type is category: enter category_ID.
+ if entity_type is cms-page: enter cms_page_ID. + if entity_type is custom: no need to enter ID but you have to enter target_path to redirect.
For current_request_path: enter the current path of the product or category or you can enter a new path if you want to add a new URL
For new_request_path: enter the new path which replaces the current_request_path.
For target_path: enter the internal path that is used by the system to point to the destination of the redirect
For redirect_type: enter 0, 301 or 302. In case you enter the wrong redirect_type, it will be automatically changed into 0.
6.3. In File to Import
After you finish the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
6.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing URL rewrites in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
7. Import Wishlist Item
7.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There is 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new items to wishlist of the website. In addition, it also updates wishlist products if these products already exist in the database and have the same user_email and product_sku as data in the CSV file.
For Configurable product: If configurable_product_info in the CSV file is the same as the configurable_product_info of an available wishlist item in the database, this wishlist item will be updated.
If user_email and product_sku in the CSV file are similar to user_email and product_sku in the database, but the configurable_product_info does not exist in the database, this item is still added as a new one into the wishlist.
For Grouped product and Bundle product: If user_email and product_sku of parent products in the CSV file are the same as these in the database, the group and bundle product in the wishlist will be updated.
+ Replace: The module will delete old wishlist items and then add new ones. + Delete: This option allows the system to get wishlist items based on user_email and product_sku in the CSV file, then delete items which are available in the database.
*Note: In case, you are using Multiple Wishlists, this option also allows the system to get wishlist items based on user_email, product_sku, and wishlist_name of each wishlist product.
Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
+ Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
+ Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds the maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
7.2. CSV File Preparation
Before you import products to wishlist via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields:
In the following image, you can know data fields in the CSV file and also their meanings.
*Note:
Your CSV file must include enough number of columns like the sample file so that you can successfully import. (If the number of columns is greater or less than those in the sample file, the system will notify you about errors occurring).
For Configurable products: the format of configurable_product_info is attribute1:value1|attribute2:value2.
+ attribute: is attribute_code of an option
+ value: is the corresponding value
For example: size:S|color Black (If one of the attribute codes is wrongly entered in the CSV file, you can still import and the system will skip this wrong attribute.)
For Grouped products: the format of grouped_product_info is product_sku1:qty1|product_sku2:qty2
+ product_sku: SKU of children product.
+ qty: quantity of the children product with corresponding SKU.
For Bundle products: the format of bundle_product_info is product_sku1:qty1|product_sku2:qty2
+ product_sku: SKU of children product.
+ qty: quantity of the children product with corresponding SKU.
7.3. In File to Import
After you have finished the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
7.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing products in the CSV file into the wishlist of Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
8.Import Order
Magento 2 Import Export module CAN ONLY WORK smoothly when you do the exact 2 steps below:
a. Always backup your database before using the extension for importing orders.
b. Always follow the user guide step-by-step while preparing for your importation.
In the admin panel, go to System -> Import by BSS -> Set Entity Type to Order.
8.1 Understand The Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There are 3 options for you to select.
+ Add: This option allows administrators to add new order into Magento 2 database.
+ Update: The module will update the existing order with the new information you’ve prepared with the CSV file.
+ Delete: This option allows the system to get orders based on the entity_id in the CSV file, then delete items that are available in the database.
Validation Strategy: select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
+ Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
+ Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds the maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
Multiple value separator: Accept the default value of a comma (,). A comma is the default separator in a CSV file. If you want to use a different character, please make sure that the data in the CSV file matches the character that you specify.
8.2 Prepare The CSV File
Before you import orders via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking View sample data next to the Entity Type field, or click here. After that, fill in your CSV accordingly.
+ For Update or Delete behavior, the best way to do this is to export the data first. This step will save you time on matching information in the filling CSV file.
+ For Delete behavior, if your intention is to delete the orders, all you need is a CSV file fills with the entity ID of said orders and you’re ready to go.
While importing, if the system encounters a similar increment_id in the database, it will automatically add in increment suffix (Default: BSS) and proceed to continue the import.
Or you can add your custom suffix at the Suffix config. Please use only letters (a-z or A-Z), numbers (0-9) or underscore (_) in this field, and the first character should be a letter.
8.2.2 Note while preparing CSV file each type of product
a. The least fields required to import order: you can download the file 1 in Sample Data. They include information for:
-Order
-Order Item (fields with prefix as item:)
-Payment (fields with prefix as payment:)
-Address (fields with prefix as address:)
b. For Physical Products, besides all the fields above, you need to have both shipping address and billing address in order to import orders.
c. For Virtual Products, besides all the fields in a., you need to have the billing address in order to import orders. In case you also fill in the shipping address, it will still proceed to import orders.
d. For Downloadable Products, you need to have download_link and download_link_item in addition to all the fields in a. to import order.
8.3 Load file to import
After you finish the CSV file, tab the Choose File button to select the file to import.
8.4 Check data and import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click the Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and the Import button now appears to click.
You click the Import button to start importing order in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about the results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
8.5 Permission
You can set permission to use this extension for a specific admin user.
To grant Import permission, go to:
System > Permissions > User roles > Pick one admin user> Role Resources > Custom> System > Transfer Data -> Import by Bss -> Import Order
To grant Export permission, go to: System > Permissions > User roles > Pick one admin user >Role Resources > Custom> System > Transfer Data -> Export by Bss -> Export Order
II. Export by BSS
Navigate to System ⇒ Export by BSS and select an Entity Type.
You choose CSV in the Export File Format field.
1. Export CMS Page
In Filter Store: You choose Store or store view to export CMS pages.
In Exclude Entity Attributes: you can select which data to be excluded from the CSV file after exporting.
2. Export Categories
In Export Related SKUs: You choose Yes to export SKUs of products in the categories; otherwise, you choose No.
In Export By: You can select exporting all categories or export them by Store ID or Category ID.
3. Export Newsletter Subscribers
In Export By section: you can export all available newsletter subscribers by choosing All from the drop-down list or export them based on store IDs or Subscriber type.
Export by Store ID:
When exporting by Store ID, you need to select a store to export from.
Export by Subscriber type:
4. Export Product Attributes
In Entity Attributes and Export
In Entity Type section: you can export all available product attributes by choosing All from the drop-down list or export each attribute set.
Then click Continue button to export chosen items in a CSV file.
*Note: The admin can export product attributes which are not assigned to any attribute sets. (Update from version 1.0.9).
5. In Export Product Reviews
Just click Export Product Reviews button to get a CSV file with all data of product reviews on the Magento 2 website.
6. Export URL Rewrites
In Export By section: you can export all available URL rewrites by choosing All from the drop-down list or export URL rewrites based on each attribute.
Export by Entity Type:
When exporting by Entity Type, you need to select all or which specific Entity type to export URL rewrites.
Export by Store View:
When exporting by Store View, you need to select all or which specific Store view to export URL rewrites of this store view.
Export by Redirect Type:
When exporting by Redirect Type, you need to select all or which specific Redirect type to export URL rewrites.
Then click Continue button to export chosen items in a CSV file.
*NOTE: If your site includes more than 50,000 URL Rewrites, this extension will export into different CSV files and each file can contain a maximum number as 50,000 URL rewrites. Therefore, there are also many links for you to download.
7. Export Wishlist Items
In Export By section: you can export all available wishlist items by choosing All from the drop-down list or export them based on customer email or product SKU.
Export by Customer Email:
When exporting by Customer Email, you need to enter a specific email of a customer in Input Email.
Export by Product SKU:
When exporting by Product SKU, you need to enter a specific SKU of a product in Input SKU. Then click Continue button to export wishlist items in a CSV file.
*Note: If you enter a customer email or a product SKU that is not available in the database, the system will export an empty CSV file.
8. Export Order
To export orders, follow this chain:
System -> Export by BSS -> Set Entity to Order
Here, you can choose the time window in which you want to extract and download the order from.
Magento 2 Import Export extension combo frees yourself from all default Magento limitations. Every Import and export features now stays in one place and you can enjoy speeding up adding or getting data on your website. I. Import by BSS Commerce Navigate to System ⇒ Import by BSS Commerce and select an Entity type:
1. Import CMS Page
1.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There are 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new CMS Page of the website. In addition, it also updates CMS Pages if these pages already exist in the database and have the same URL keys (identifier) as data in the CSV file. + Replace: The module will delete old CMS pages and then add new ones. + Delete: This option allows the system to get CMS pages based on URL keys in the CSV file, then delete pages which are available in the database. Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process. + Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors. + Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds the maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
1.2. CSV File Preparation
Before you import CMS pages via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields: In the following image, you can know data fields in the CSV file and also their meanings.
1.3. In File to Import
After you have finished the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
1.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing CMS pages in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
2. Import Categories
2.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There are 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new categories of the website. In addition, it also updates categories if these categories already exist in the database and have the same category _id as data in the CSV file. + Replace: The module will delete old categories and then add new ones. + Delete: This option allows the system to load categories based on category_id in the CSV file, then delete these categories which are available in the database. Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process. + Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors. + Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds the maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
2.2. CSV File Preparation
Before you import categories via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields:
category_id: Complete category id which is saved in the database.
+ Value of category_id to enter is a Natural number. + If you leave it blank, a new category is added. + If you enter a value that exists, the module will update data to the category with corresponding ID.
store_id: Store Id which is available in the store.
+ Value of store_id to enter is a Natural number + If you leave it blank, store_id will get the value of 0 (store _id=0). You don't need to fill store_id when adding a new category.
parent_id: is an ID of the existing category in the database
+ Value of parent_id to enter is a Natural number. + If you enter the ID which does not exist, the module will notify as an error in the Check data process. * Note: If you are using 1.0.1 version: In case you have to import a new parent category and new children category in the same CSV, take some notices as below: + In parent category: enter new category_id. + In children category: enter parent_id which is the same as new category_id of the parent category. As a result, children categories will be imported to the right parent category. In addition, after importing, IDs of parent category and children category can be different from new category_id which is entered in the CSV file.
path: This is the path from the root category to the current category.
+ path is a string of characters. + When importing, you don't need to enter data for this column.
name: Name of the category.
+ If you leave it blank, the module will notify as an error in the Check data process.
description: Detailed description about the category.
custom_design: Enter ID of the theme used in the category
+ Value of custom_design to enter is a Natural number.
category_products: Enter SKUs of products assigned to the category. For group products, bundle products, and configurable products, you need to enter SKUs of parent products.
+ If SKU is wrongly entered, the module will skip this SKU and continue to import other SKUs. + If SKU has existed in the category, the module will skip this SKU. + If the SKU has not yet existed, the module will add it as a new one. + category_products has a format as SKU1|SKU2|SKU3. *Note: You just can add new SKUs to the category in this column, but cannot remove existed SKUs from the category.
attribute_set_id: ID of attribute set.
+ Value of attribute_set_id to enter is a Natural number. + If you leave it blank, the module will take ID of the default attribute set.
position: Postion of the category in the parent category.
+ Value of position to enter is a Natural number.
url_key: URL key of the category.
+ If you leave it blank, a new URL key for this category is created based on its name.
url_path: URL path of the category.
image_name: Name of image file of the category. Category image should be uploaded to pub/media/catalog/category folder of Magento folder.
is_active: Enable the category.
+ You enter 0 or 1 for this column. If you enter 1, it means the category status is enabled.
include_in_menu:
+ You enter 0 or 1 for this column. If you enter 1, the category will be displayed in the menu.
display_mode: display mode of the category.
+ You can choose one of these values to enter: PRODUCTS, PAGE, and PRODUCTS_AND_PAGE.
page_layout: choose layout for the category.
+ Values of layout include: 1column, 2columns-left, 2columns-right, 3columns và empty.
custom_design_from: Time when custom design begins.
+ Standard format is: yyyy-mm-dd or yyyy/mm/dd
custom_design_to: Time when custom design ends.
+ Standard format is: yyyy-mm-dd or yyyy/mm/dd
default_sort_by: Select how to sort products of the category on the frontend. For example: sort by name, position, and price.
available_sort_by: Sorting type can be allowed to use in the category. They can be name, position or name or you can combine all of them.
+ Standard format is: sort1|sort2|sort3
is_anchor: You can enter 0 or 1 in this column.
custom_use_parent_settings: Select whether applying parent category's settings or not.
layered_navigation_price_step:
+ value of layered_navigation_price_step is a decimal number.
custom_apply_to_products: You can enter 0 or 1 in this column.
If you want to use exported categories to import into another website with Delete import behavior, you need to remove rows of system root category (ID=1) and store root category in the CSV file because default Magento doesn't allow you to delete root category.
If you want to import the whole category tree, you need to arrange parent category and children categories to the right order in the CSV file. The first is the parent category, and the next are children categories.
2.3. In File to Import
After you have finished the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
2.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing categories in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
3. Import Newsletter Subscribers
3.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There are 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new newsletter subscribers. In addition, it also updates newsletter subscribers if these subscribers already exist in the database. + Replace: The module will delete old newsletter subscribers and then add new ones. + Delete: This option allows the system to get newsletter subscribers based on customer_ID in the CSV file, then delete items which are available in the database. Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process. + Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors. + Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds the maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
3.2. CSV File Preparation
Before you import newsletter subscribers via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields:
Field
Format
Meaning
ID
Natural numbers
ID number of the newsletter subscriber.
email
Email
Customer email – which is used to subscribe to newsletters.
type
String
Type of emails: customer or guest.
customer_first_name
String
The first name of the customer. For guests, enter "---"
customer_last_name
String
The last name of the customer. For Guests, enter "---"
status_id
Natural numbers
+ Not Activated: Value = 2. + Subscribed: Value = 1. + Unsubscribed: Value = 3. + Unconfirmed: Value = 4. (If you don’t enter the status or you enter the wrong value, the default value is 1).
change_status_at
yyyy/m/d hh:mm:ss
The time when customers subscribe to the newsletter.
web_site
String
Website where customers subscribe to the newsletter.
store
String
Store where customers subscribe to the newsletter.
store_view_code
String
Store view where customers subscribe to the newsletter. If you enter the wrong value, it is changed into Default.
3.3. In File to Import
After you finish the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
3.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing newsletter subscribers in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
4. Import Product Attributes
4.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There is 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new attributes into the website. In addition, it also updates attributes if their attribute_codes exist. + Replace: This option allows administrators to add new attributes into the website. In case attribute _ codes in the import data match with attribute_codes of existing attributes, these attributes are deleted and new records are created using the CSV data. + Delete: This option allows administrators to remove attributes in case their attribute_codes exist. Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process. + Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors. + Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds that maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
Multiple value separator: Choose a character to separate data in a field column. In our CSV sample file, the vertical bar ( | ) is set up as default value.
Option value separator: separator between store view ID and values of attribute options.
Store view separator: separator between values of different store views.
For example:
4.2. CSV file preparation
Before you import product attributes via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields:
Data
Format
Meaning
attribute_code
A string of characters
Required to enter data. Notify errors if you leave it blank.
attribute_set
attribute_set1|attribute_set2...
+ When attribute_set of an attribute is left blank, this attribute is added as a new one which does not belong to any attribute sets or any attribute groups. + When attribute_set doesn't exist in the database, a new attribute set is created.
attribute_group_name
A string
The name of the attribute group to which the attribute is assigned after importing. + when you leave it blank, the attribute is added to the last attribute group of the assigned attribute set. + when attribute_group_name doesn't exist in the database, a new one is auto created.
attribute_group_code
(not required): It is auto-created based on the attribute group name. If attribute_group_code is similar to attribute_group_code of an available group in the database, you will face an error.
is_global
0,1,2
0 ~ Store View 1 ~ Global 2 ~ Website If it is left blank or wrong, it auto turns 0.
is_user_defined
0, 1
0 ~ attribute is defined as system attribute. 1 ~ attribute is not system attribute. Admin can delete it.
is_filterable
0,1,2
Corresponding to the Use in Layered Navigation config in the StoreFront Properties tab of the attribute: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Filterable (with results) 2 ~ Filterable (no results) If you enter the wrong value, the config auto gets 0 after importing.
is_visible
0,1
Determines whether the attribute is visible in the grid or not: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
is_required
0,1
Corresponding to the Value Required config of the attribute 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
is_visible_on_front
0,1
Corresponding to the Visible on Catalog Pages on Storefront config: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
is_searchable
0,1
Corresponding to the Use in Search config: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
is_unique
0,1
Corresponding to the Unique Value config: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
frontend_class
Optional. Database value
is_visible_in_advanced_search
0,1
Determines whether the attribute is shown in advanced search or not: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
is_comparable
0,1
Corresponding to the Comparable on Storefront config of the attribute 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
is_filterable_in_search
0,1
Corresponding to the Use in Search Results Layered Navigation config: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
is_used_for_price_rules
0,1
Determines whether the attribute is used for price rules or not: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
is_used_for_promo_rules
0,1
Corresponding to the Use for Promo Rule Conditions config: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
sort_order
Natural numbers
Smaller value, higher priority
position
Natural numbers
The display position of the attribute in layered navigation.
frontend_input
Corresponding to Catalog Input Type for Store Owner: text – Text Field textarea – Text Area texteditor - Text Editor (from Magento 2.3) date – Date boolean – Yes/No multiselect – Multiple Select select – Dropdown, Visual or Text Swatch price – Price media_image– Media Image wee – Fixed Product Tax (Notify errors and skip them when entering wrong values)
backend_type
Optional. Database value
backend_model
Optional. Database value
source_model
Optional. Database value
frontend_label
label|store_code1:label|store_code2:label
Label for the attribute, you can import label for many store views. (Notify errors and skip them when you leave it blank)
Determines product type which the attribute is used for
is_wysiwyg_enabled
0,1
Corresponding to the Enable WYSIWYG config: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
is_required_in_admin_store
0,1
0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
is_used_in_grid
0,1
Determines whether the attribute is used in the product grid or not: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
is_visible_in_grid
0,1
is_filterable_in_grid
0,1
Determines whether the attribute is used to filter in the product grid or not: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
search_weight
Defines the weight of the attribute in search.
is_html_allowed_on_front
0,1
Corresponding to the Allow HTML Tags on Storefront config. 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
used_in_product_listing
0,1
Corresponding to the Used in Product Listing config: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
used_for_sort_by
Corresponding to the Used for Sorting in Product Listing config: 0 ~ No 1 ~ Yes
swatch_input_type
Visual or text
Determines style of attribute having Catalog input type as select: visual ~ attribute has visual swatch text ~ attribute has text swatch
attribute_options
admin:Label;store_code1:Label1|admin:Label2 Example: admin:Hike;default:Hike default;test:Hike New|admin:Outdoor;test:Outdoor Test
Enters labels for the attributes with select type: + Admin ~ required + Store_code ~ not required. ('|' is corresponding to the Multiple value separator. ':' is corresponding to the Option Value Separator.)
+ Value: is the value of swatch (it can be the image link or color code). + Type: is specified in the database. 1 is corresponding to visual color type and 2 is corresponding to visual image type. For example: +Visual color type: 0:#000000:1 + Visual image type: 0:a/_/a.jpg:2
+ admin: required to enter. + store_code1, store_code2: not required+ Value: is the value of swatch.+ Type: is always 0.For example: 1:S:0;2:Small:0
*Notes:
Your CSV file must include enough the number of columns like the sample file so that you can successfully import. (If the number of columns is greater or fewer than those in the sample file, the system will notify you about errors).
You can assign 1 attribute for many attribute sets in only 1 row in the CSV file. The format of the attribute set column is attributeSet1|attributeSet2|...
If you enter the wrong product type in the "apply_to" column, the value of this column is changed into NULL.
For columns with values as 0 or 1: if you enter the wrong value, the system will change into default value as 0.
For columns including multiple values, you need to add multiple separators in the end. For example: 0:KBowl1;2:Elongated;1:Allong|
You mustn't leave backend_type column empty:
+ if backend_type is static, you need to create a column in the catalog_product_entity. If you don't do this one, you cannot save attribute's value when saving the product. However, it's better that you shouldn't select backend_type as static. + If backend_type is varchar, int, decimal, text, or data time, you can definitely save attribute's value.
If your CSV file includes special characters that belong to your own language (in case you do not use English), you need to convert your CSV file to UTF-8 format. You can read our instructionHERE.
4.3. In File to Import
After you finish the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
4.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If you CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing product attributes in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. To check these imported attributes, you navigate to Stores → Products Attributes to see them in a grid view:
If your CSV file includes errors, Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is notification about these problems.
*NOTE: You had better take a notice about these following issues in the CSV file which affect data checking.
Errors in the CSV file make you not successfully import:
+ Leave attribute_code as blank. + Enter the wrong Entity Type ID. + Enter a number of columns which are greater or less than those in the sample CSV file. (Please follow the sample file we provide you and don't add more columns or remove). + Enter the wrong value in the"is_global" column. (Please remember the standard values just includes 1,2 and 3).
However, there some specific errors in your CSV file, but the system will skip and continues to import as well as still notifies you about problems. Let's check these skipped errors as below:
+ Enter the wrong backend_type or frontend_input. + Enter the wrong attribute_code when you choose Import behavior as Delete. + Enter the different multiple value separator from the one set up in the backend. + Enter the wrong fomat in the "attribute_option"or "attribute_option_swatch" columns. When you are in this situation, your CSV file is still imported but it contains errors. Therefore, thank to notification about these errors, you can edit the file and also do it better for the next time. Please go to System ⇒ Data Transfer ⇒Import/Export Product Reviews.
5. Import Product Reviews
Before you import product reviews via CSV file, you need to prepare a CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields: There are required data fields for you to complete such as review titles, review details, status, customer nicknames, product SKU and rating options. If you don't finish this information, you cannot import product reviews at all. For Date: Follow the right format "dd/MM/yyyy HH:mm:ss". ForStatus: Enter Approved/ Disapproved. If you don't enter the right format, status is automatically Disapproved after being imported. ForRating options: fill in ratings for products with the format: "rating_code1:number, rating_code2: number, rating_code3: number". For example: "Quality:5, Price:4, Service:4". (*Note: In case you enter a new rating code that is not available in Ratings section of the backend, you can still import reviews and this rating type is automatically created in the backend.) For Type: there are 3 types - Admin, Customer, and Guest. If you don't enter the right format, the module will change customer type into Guest or the review is created by a Guest. For Customer ID: If you don't enter customer ID or enter the wrong format, the module will change customer type into Guest. For Store View Code: Fill in store view code. *Note: If you want to import product reviews for multiple store views, just separate them by character | For example: default|engFor Review ID:
You cannot import reviews if you enter the wrong format.
In case you leave Review ID of a review blank and all of its remaining data is not similar to those of the available reviews shown in the frontend, the module will add this review with a new Review ID. (If there are some similar data to those of available reviews, the module still adds this review with a new Review ID).
In case you leave Review ID of a review blank and all of its remaining data is the same as those of available reviews, the module will take it as an existing row.
In case you enter a Review ID that is similar to an existed Review ID, the module will automatically update the product review based on one review ID.
If Review ID is greater than the maximum review ID in the database, the module will atill add this new review.
For Store View Code: you enter the code of store view you want to add reviews into. If you enter the wrong format, the module will change into Default Store View. *Note: The CSV file size does not exceed 2MB. When you finish the CSV file, just select it and click Import Product Reviews to import them into Magento 2 sites. After you import the CSV file, there are messages to notify:
Successfully import with the number of inserted rows
The number of existing rows or invalid rows
After importing, you can manage these added reviews in:
Admin → Product page →Product reviews
Admin → Customer page → Product reviews
Admin → Marketing → User content → Reviews
Admin → Report → Reviews
*NOTE: You can also import product reviews by using this following method:
Upload the CSV file to "var/import/reviews" folder
Import Behavior: There is 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new URL rewrites into the website. In addition, it also updates URL rewrites if their request_paths already exist in the database. + Replace: If the request_path does not exist in the database, you are notified about this non-existence and the module will add a new URL rewrite. If the request_path already exists in the database, the module will delete old URL and add a new URL rewrite. + Delete: This option allows administrators to remove URL rewrite according to the request_path. Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process. + Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors. + Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds that maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
6.2. CSV file preparation
Before you import URL rewrites via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields: *NOTES:
Your CSV file must include enough the number of columns like the sample file so that you can successfully import. (If the number of column is greater or less than those in the sample file, the system will notify you about errors occurring).
It is unnecessary to enter target_path if entity_type is product, category or cms-page because target_path in these cases are automatically generated according to corresponding ID.
When you enter entity_type into the CSV file:
+ if entity_type is product: enter product_ID with category_ID that includes this product or you also don't need to enter category_ID for the product. + if entity_type is category: enter category_ID. + if entity_type is cms-page: enter cms_page_ID. + if entity_type is custom: no need to enter ID but you have to enter target_path to redirect.
For current_request_path: enter the current path of the product or category or you can enter a new path if you want to add a new URL
For new_request_path: enter the new path which replaces the current_request_path.
For target_path: enter the internal path that is used by the system to point to the destination of the redirect
For redirect_type: enter 0, 301 or 302. In case you enter the wrong redirect_type, it will be automatically changed into 0.
6.3. In File to Import
After you finish the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
6.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing URL rewrites in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
7. Import Wishlist Item
7.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There is 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new items to wishlist of the website. In addition, it also updates wishlist products if these products already exist in the database and have the same user_email and product_sku as data in the CSV file. For Configurable product: If configurable_product_info in the CSV file is the same as the configurable_product_info of an available wishlist item in the database, this wishlist item will be updated. If user_email and product_sku in the CSV file are similar to user_email and product_sku in the database, but the configurable_product_info does not exist in the database, this item is still added as a new one into the wishlist. For Grouped product and Bundle product: If user_email and product_sku of parent products in the CSV file are the same as these in the database, the group and bundle product in the wishlist will be updated. + Replace: The module will delete old wishlist items and then add new ones. + Delete: This option allows the system to get wishlist items based on user_email and product_sku in the CSV file, then delete items which are available in the database. *Note: In case, you are using Multiple Wishlists, this option also allows the system to get wishlist items based on user_email, product_sku, and wishlist_name of each wishlist product. Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process. + Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors. + Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds the maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
7.2 CSV File Preparation
Before you import products to wishlist via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields: In the following image, you can know data fields in the CSV file and also their meanings. *Note:
Your CSV file must include enough number of columns like the sample file so that you can successfully import. (If the number of columns is greater or less than those in the sample file, the system will notify you about errors occurring).
For Configurable products: the format of configurable_product_info is attribute1:value1|attribute2:value2
+ attribute: is attribute_code of an option + value: is the corresponding value For example: size:S|color Black (If one of the attribute codes is wrongly entered in the CSV file, you can still import and the system will skip this wrong attribute.)
For Grouped products: the format of grouped_product_info is product_sku1:qty1|product_sku2:qty2
+ product_sku: SKU of children product. + qty: quantity of the children product with corresponding SKU.
For Bundle products: the format of bundle_product_info is product_sku1:qty1|product_sku2:qty2
+ product_sku: SKU of children product. + qty: quantity of the children product with corresponding SKU.
7.3. In File to Import
After you have finished the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
7.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing products in the CSV file into the wishlist of Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
2.2. Export CMS Page
You go to System ⇒ Data Transfer ⇒ Export CMS Page. You select CMS Page in the drop-down list of Entity Type. You choose CSV in the Export File Format field. In Filter Store: You choose Store or store view to export CMS pages. In Exclude Entity Attributes: you can select which data to be excluded from the CSV file after exporting.
2.2. Export Categories
You go to System ⇒ Data Transfer ⇒ Export Categories. You select Category in the drop-down list of Entity Type. You choose CSV in the Export File Format field. In Export Related SKUs: You choose Yes to export SKUs of products in the categories; otherwise, you choose No. In Export By: You can select exporting all categories or export them by Store ID or Category ID.
1. Overview
Magento 2 Import Export Newsletter Subscribers is an ideal extension for all administrators to import multiple newsletter subscribers to Magento 2 websites via a CSV file. Besides, exporting all newsletter subscribers or export by store ID and customer type into a CSV file also becomes extremely simple and easy; especially admins can save a lot of time and efforts. More Magento 2 Import Export extensions from BSSCommerce are useful for your work:
You go to System ⇒ Export Newsletter Subscribers. You select Newsletter subscribers in the drop-down list of Entity Type. You choose CSV in the Export File Format field. In Export By section: you can export all available newsletter subscribers by choosing All from the drop-down list or export them based on store IDs or Subscriber type.
Export by Store ID:
When exporting by Store ID, you need to select a store to export from.
Export by Subscriber type:
1. Overview
Import/Export Product Attributes for Magento 2 extension helps administrators to quickly import product attributes into websites via a standard CSV file. Admin need to prepare this CSV file with all necessary information about product attributes, then import by only one click. Moreover, the extension also supports exporting all available attributes into a CSV file conveniently. Import/Export Product Attributes for Magento 2 extension is often used in case store owners want to change their Magento 2 websites into new ones or change from another platform to Magento 2. Therefore, installing this module, they don't take them much time and human resource to do manually as before.
2. How Does It Work?
2.2. Export Product Attributes
You go to System ⇒ Data Transfer ⇒Export.
In Export Settings
You select Product Attributes in the drop-down list of Entity Type. You choose CSV in the Export File Format field.
In Entity Attributes and Export
In Entity Type section: you can export all available product attributes by choosing All from the drop-down list or export each attribute set. Then click Continue button to export chosen items in a CSV file. *Note: The admin can export product attributes which are not assigned to any attribute sets. (Update from version 1.0.9)
3. Tips
You can quickly import attributes with many options using source_model of attributes. + Create a source file in the module: Bss_ProductAttributesImportExport - this source file can be similar as the following file: The path is Bss\ProductAttributesImportExport\Model\Attribute\Source\Label.
1. Overview
Import/Export Product Reviews for Magento 2 extension helps store owners to quickly import and export all product reviews via a CSV file. This CSV file includes a lot of necessary information such as customer names, review titles, review details, product SKUs, rating options and so on. Therefore, store owners can assign reviews for each customer, each product and also determine review status when importing. After importing, reviews are displayed in the front end and store owners can easily manage reviews in some sections of the backend.
2. How Does It Work?
2.2. In Export Product Reviews
Just click Export Product Reviews button to get a CSV file with all data of product reviews on the Magento 2 website. Enter this path to the source_model of the CSV file.
1. Overview
Import Export URL Rewrites for Magento 2 extension allows admins to quickly import multiple URL Rewrites via a CSV file which includes all necessary data of URL rewrites. In addition, this module also supports conveniently exporting every available URL rewrites into a CSV file. Therefore, admin can save a lot of time and efforts instead of doing all manually. *Note: You can read this document from Magento to get more knowledge about URL Rewrites in the default Magento 2:
You go to System ⇒ Data Transfer ⇒ Export URL Rewrite. After you select Entity Type to export and click Continue button, links of the export CSV files are displayed for you to download to your computer.
2.2.1. In Export Settings
You select URL Rewrite in the drop-down list of Entity Type. You choose CSV in the Export File Format field.
2.2.2. In Entity Attributes
In Export By section: you can export all available URL rewrites by choosing All from the drop-down list or export URL rewrites based on each attribute.
Export by Entity Type:
When exporting by Entity Type, you need to select all or which specific Entity type to export URL rewrites.
Export by Store View:
When exporting by Store View, you need to select all or which specific Store view to export URL rewrites of this store view.
Export by Redirect Type:
When exporting by Redirect Type, you need to select all or which specific Redirect type to export URL rewrites. Then click Continue button to export chosen items in a CSV file. *NOTE: If your site includes more than 50,000 URL Rewrites, this extension will export into different CSV files and each file can contain a maximum number as 50,000 URL rewrites. Therefore, there are also many links for you to download.
3. Module updates
3.1. Version 1.0.3
If target_path does not exist, the module will display a notification message and skip that row when importing. (only apply to the entity type as custom).
3.2. Version 1.0.5
For entity_type as product, category, and cms-page: If you choose redirect_type as 301 or 302, the target path which is redirected to is URL key of a product, a category or a CMS page. For example: We have a CSV file as below: The link: http://domain/magento2-import-export-url-rewrites/test-new-bag-url is redirected to: http://domain/magento2-import-export-url-rewrites/strive-shoulder-pack.html (Before this update, this link is redirected to: http://domain/magento2-import-export-url-rewrites/catalog/product/view/id/2 - the original link of the product).
1. Overview
Magento 2 Import Export Wishlist Item is an ideal extension for all administrators to import multiple products to wishlist via a CSV file. Besides, exporting wishlist items by product SKU or customer email into a CSV file also becomes extremely simple and easy, especially admins can save a lot of time and efforts.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1.
2.2. Export Wishlist Item
You go to System ⇒ Data Transfer ⇒ Export Wishlist Item.
2.2.1 In Export Settings
You select Wishlist Item in the drop-down list of Entity Type. You choose CSV in the Export File Format field.
2.2.2. In Entity Attributes
In Export By section: you can export all available wishlist items by choosing All from the drop-down list or export them based on customer email or product SKU.
Export by Customer Email:
When exporting by Customer Email, you need to enter a specific email of a customer in Input Email.
Export by Product SKU:
When exporting by Product SKU, you need to enter a specific SKU of a product in Input SKU. Then click Continue button to export wishlist items in a CSV file. *Note: If you enter a customer email or a product SKU that is not available in the database, the system will export an empty CSV file. More Magento 2 Import Export extensions from BSSCommerce are useful for your work:
Show associated products in a grid table with custom options, for example, color and size
Show SKU, Availability, Unit Price, Tier Price, and Subtotal in this grid table. Especially, Tier Price is shown in tooltips when hovering.
Work well with the Color swatch function of Magento default with clickable options.
Support all types of custom options.
Allow sorting the Wholesale Display table by click on the attribute
Enable/disable the Wholesale Display table for each product
2.1.2 In the backend
Go through Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Configurable Product Wholesale Display.
Enable: choose Yes to enable the extension.
Enable Sorting: choose Yes to allow sorting attributes in the column of the wholesale display grid
Enable Custom Options of the Child Product: choose Yes to display custom options of the child product based on the selected options.
Display Attributes: choose attributes to show in the grid table as wished.
Display StockNumber: choose Yes to show the number of stock in the grid table. Choose No, it will show stock status: In stock or Out of stock.
Advanced TierPrice:
+ Choose Yes then the total amount is based on tier price of the total quantity of children products added to cart.
This feature is only applied if all added children products having the same tier prices.
For example, the tier price of buying 1-9 Black-S shirt, 1-9 Gray-S shirt is similarly $45. Tier price of buying 10-more for every children product is $40. If you buy 3 Black-S shirts and 7 Black-XL shirts, tier price is now $40/shirt. The total amount is now $400.
+ Choose No: total quantity will take the default tier price. The total amount is calculated by tier prices of each children product multiply to the total quantity of each chosen children product.
For the above example, when using Magento default tier price calculation, the total amount is determined as $450 because it is calculated based on each tier price of each children product (Tier price is equal to $45/shirt)
PriceRange: choose Yes if you want to display Price Range for the configurable product above the table.
Ajax Load: choose Yes to load wholesale display table by using Ajax
*Note:
Set Enable Wholesale Display to Yes or No to enable or disable the wholesale display per specific configurable product.
In BSS Configurable Product Wholesale Ajax Load, the extension takes priority to the configuration for each product over the general setting.
Also, choose groups to enable Configurable Product Wholesale Display
Hide Price on Table for Customer Groups: choose which customer groups you want to hide price.
Enable for Customer Groups: choose which customer groups to show this wholesale display.
You can also custom the design of the table (for responsive purposes)
Header Row Background Color: pick one color that suits your page’s design
Header Row Text Color: pick the color of the text
Enabled Mobile Display: choose Yes to make the table responsive on mobiles
Display Mobile Attributes: choose attributes to show in the grid table view for mobiles
Enabled Tablet Display: choose Yes to make the table responsive on tablets.
Display Tablet Attributes: choose attributes you want to show in the grid table on tablets.
Sorting the Wholesale Display table: by clicking on the attribute of the table.
Enable/disable the Wholesale Display table per Product: in the product edit page, scroll down to CPWD General. Choose Yes to enable the table and No to disable the display.
2.1.3. Choose the order of attributes
The order of custom attributes shown in configurable product wholesale display is based on the order of selected attributes when you create the configurable product.
For example, you create the Hero Hoodie with two custom options: size and color. Here you see the size is arranged above the color:
Hence, in the product page, size options are above the color options.
If you want to change this order, just move the color to above the size to below. Remember to Save changes.
2.2. Simple Details on Configurable Product
2.2.1 In the frontend
This is how Simple Details on Configurable Product is displayed in the frontend:
Show child product names at Dynamic Category/Product Listing Update & show review swatch accordingly.
Set Custome options for child products
Show details of children items of the configurable product, such as name, SKU, tier price, stock status, stock number, reviews, description, additional information and metadata.
Get URL for each child product with pre-selected options.
URL: URL will change as chosen options. If customers access to the URL, options are also selected on the product page. Besides, you can get URL included category path as wish
Custom URL has a form: …/Product-Name+attr1-Value1+attr2-Value2 (For instance: …/hero-hoodie+color-Black+size-S), it changes when choosing attributes of product.
Support minimum quantity for product separately added to cart instead of the default of Magento 2, which only allows for configurable products.
Support quantity increment for children products. This function outweighs the default with the ability to set increment for each associated product of the configurable product. For example, if you set 5 for quantity increment for a skirt-red-L, then your customers cannot buy this item with quantity 1-2-3 or 6-7-8, they only choose this product with 5-10-15 etc in quantity box.
Even better, customers can check simple details right on categories and product listing.
2.2.2 In the backend
2.2.2.1 GENERAL CONFIGS
Go through Stores ⇒ Settings ⇒ Configuration⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Simple Details on Configurable Product.
In General:
Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module.
NOTE:
You can also enable/disable this module for a particular configurable product in SDCP General in the product edit page easily.
In case, in General configuration you set No, and in the SDCP General you still choose Yes, the module won’t be enabled.
In Attributes Display Config: choose Yes to show the attributes you want in the frontend:
SKU
Name
Description
Tier Price
Stock Status
Gallery Switch Strategy:
Replace: replace all parent product’s images by child product’s images
Prepend: add child product’s images at the beginning of parent product’s images
Disable: display only parent product’s images even when customers select the child product option
Child Product Image When Not Have Images Itself (from v1.1.7):
Use Parent Product Image: display parent product’s images
Use Default Placeholder: display default placeholder of Magento
Additional Info: show swatch additional information in the More Information tab when customers choose all options of the parent product.
Meta Data: auto-create meta data (meta description, title, meta keyword) of child products when choosing all options of the parent product.
In Advanced Settings:
Custom URL: choose Yes to enable the child product’s URL to change when the option is selected. The format of this URL is: …/Product-Name+attr1-Value1+attr2-Value2 (For instance: …/hero-hoodie+color-Black+size-S). Note: you should not include characters such as “-“, “~” or “+” in the attribute labels since it might hard to read the URL
Add custom child products’ URLs to XML sitemap: If choose Yes, custom child products’ URLs will be added to XML sitemap and Google can index/follow these custom URLs
NOTE: we have fix this child product’s URL format so you cannot change it even in Product Page Details ⇒Search Engine Optimization ⇒ URL Key
2.2.2.2 DETAILED CONFIGURATION
Go to Catalog > Products > {configurable-product} details page in the backend.
In Visibility, there is one new option - Only display product page: This option will hide this configurable product on the frontend category page and search page but you can still enter the product page by direct URL.
*Note: This option doesn’t work with mass action. This option can be used when you want to hide the configurable product, but still show all the children products individually, then redirect customer to the configurable product page when they click on a child product.
In SDCP General tab
Pre-select: the attributes are pre-selected in the product detail page in the backend.
Enacle Module: enable the module on this product
Enabled Ajax Load Detail
In SDCP Preselect tab: display the pre-selected attributes
NOTE: in Magento 2.0.x version, there will be a separate Pre-select tab in product detail page:
Next, go to Catalog > Products > {child-product} details page in the backend.
In SDCP Redirect (on the bottom page), you will see Redirect to configurable product configuration. You can choose:
Yes: If visibility of the child product is category/search, you will be redirected to the parent configurable product page when selecting the child product at the frontend.
No: Work as default Magento - redirect to the child product page when selecting this one.
*Note: This config works with mass action.
Frontend result:
2.2.2.3 IMPORT PRE-SELECT
Go to System ⇒ Data Transfer ⇒ Import SDCP Preselect
In Import Settings, select SDCP Pre-select in the drop-down list of Entity Type
In Import Behavior:
Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new pre-selected attributes the website. In addition, it also updates attributes if their pre-selected attributes exist.
Replace: This option allows administrators to add new pre-selected attributes into the website. In case pre-selected attributes in the import data match with pre-selected attributes of existing attributes, these attributes are deleted and new records are created using the CSV data.
Delete: This option allows administrators to remove pre-selected attributes in case their pre-selected attributes exist.
Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors
Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds that maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing
Filed separator: Choose a character to separate two field column (sku & preselect). In our CSV sample file, the comma (,) is set up as default value
Multiple value separator: Choose a character to separate multiple attributes in a field column. In our CSV sample file, the comma (,) is set up as default value
CVS file preparation
Before you import product attributes via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking “Download Sample File”. Then you open this file and fill in fields:
In “sku” column: enter the SKU of the configurable products
In “preselect” column: enter the attributes with their value
2.2.2.4 SET CUSTOM OPTIONS FOR CHILD PRODUCTS
In the product edit page of the associated product of choice, scroll down to Customizable Options.
Click on Import Options to use the custom option you previously set.
Choose Add Option button to create a new custom option of your choice.
Option Title: Name of the option.
Option Type: The type of the custom option. You have 10 types under 4 categories to choose from.
Required: Tick to mark as a requirement, customer can not add the product to cart without specifying the custom option.
Being an owner of a global Magento 2 store, you must know better than anyone the challenges of running a multiple store view ecommerce. GEOIP Store Switcher for Magento 2 will bring up user experiences in multi-store website to a whole new level. The extension helps detect user’s IP location and redirect them to the appropriate store view.
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE and start the configuration.
Before enabling the extension, you should update the GEOIP database for both IPv4 and IPv6. Please choose one of the 3 options in each database update.
1.1. In Update Database GEOIP
In Upload Custom File, you can upload a custom file (such as a paid database version from MaxMind) to be the database. However, in case the uploaded file is larger than the limit of the server, this option will be not available.
* Note: When you upload the file, you need to rename it and use the right format so that the file can be uploaded successfully and then the system runs cron. The file format must be the .zip file (This .zip file includes CSV files). After finishing uploading, choose Save Config then click Upgrade Data.
In Upload Custom URL, you can fill in the URL of the database file if you cannot upload it in the Custom File option (when the file is larger than the limit of the server). After completing, choose Save Config then click Upgrade Data.
In Update Database from MaxMind, please click in Upgrade Data to automatically download the Database from MaxMind or to use the uploaded file. After the file is extracted, a notification “Waiting for Cron run!” will be shown, and please wait for the database to be updated.
*Note: If Upload Custom File and Upload Custom URL are left blank, the module will use the Country Lite Database in MaxMind page. Hence, not all IP countries are available in this database.
On the other hand, the extension also uses another tool named IPinfo to identify the IP country in case it cannot be found in the database.
In the following configuration, please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE GEOIP Switch Store
1.2.GeoIP Switch Store
1.2.1. IN GENERAL
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the module and please note that you need to Upgrade Data before using this extension.
In Allow Manual Switch after Redirect: Choose Yes to allow customers to switch store view after being redirected, otherwise choose No.
In Redirect Scope: There are 3 options: Global, Website, and Store. To explain how to configure this correctly, we will use the following website hierarchy as an example.
+ If you choose Store as Redirect Scope, the visitors will be redirected within the store views under the same store. For example, Canada customers will always be redirected to Canada Store View when they go to the American Store. If they go to the rest 2 stores (French, UK), they will not be redirected.
+ It’s similar for Website as Redirect Scope. Visitors will be redirected when they access any of your store views under the same website. For example, Canada customers will always be redirected to Canada store view when they go to any of the store views and store under the English website. If they go to the French website, they will not be redirected.
+ For Global Scope, visitors will be redirected when they enter any store views. For example, Canada customers will always be redirected to Canada store view in any case.
In Enable Popup: Choose Yes to enable this function; otherwise, choose No.
When you select Yes, this Popup appears for customers to switch store view as wanted with the first choice is the current IP of the visitor:
*Note: The Popup configuration needs to work well with settings in the Redirect Scope sections:
+ If you select Redirect Scope as Store, a popup is shown when users access a store view under the same store with the intended store view. For example, Canada customers can receive a popup when they come to the US store view. (The intended store view is Canada store view).
+ If you select Redirect Scope as Website, a popup is shown when users access a store view under the same website with the intended store view. For example, Canada customers can receive a popup when they come to the UK store view.
+If you select Redirect Scope as Global, a popup is shown when users access to any store views under the global installation. (It is not the intended store view, of course).
Furthermore, you need to navigate to each store view in the website and make more configurations for this option. When you change the scope, you can also see 2 settings for the popup which ask customers whether they want to switch store view or not (as we mentioned above). You need to configure these 2 sections according to each store view.
+ Notification message for customers on popup: enter a message to notify customers on the popup.
+ Label of "Switch store" button: enter a wanted label for the "Switch Store" button for customers to click.
In Skip Redirect withIP: Enter one IP per line to set the IPs to be excepted from redirection. Visitors from these IPs are not redirected to setup store views.
In Skip Redirect with URL: Enter one URL path per line to set the URL to be excepted from redirection. When visitors access these URLs, they will stay in the default store view.
+ For homepage: enter /
+ This function works with store view URL under the format: _store=us, for instance.
In Default Redirect URLs: This is an additional configuration you need to set up in case you select Yes in the above Allow Manual Switch after Redirect field. It means if customers go to this default redirect URL, they are always redirected to the setup store view (in Apply Redirect Country field), even when they switch to other stores/ store views.
For example: Admin enter a default redirect URL as https://domain.com
+ Set up country code as Singapore. Customers from Singapore are redirected to Singapore store view: https://domain.com/sg.
+ When customers go to the https://domain.com from Singapore, they are redirected to https://domain.com/sg. Then, they switch to the US store view https://domain.com/us. However, when they access to https://domain.com again, they are still redirected to https://domain.com/sg. (In case admin choose store view scope as Singapore and set Apply Redirect Country as Singapore - this configuration is explained later).
+ If you leave it blank (no default redirect URL), customers from Singapore, in this case, stay on https://domain.com/us when they visit https://domain.com because the system only redirects them once.
In Skip Redirect User Agent: Select user agents to prevent them from being redirected when crawling to your site. Please note that bots are not redirected if your website does not have the URL with store code.
*Note: If you select Agent as Google, you need to resubmit Google Ads to be approved again.
In Enable Cookie: Choose Yes to enable saving cookies about GEOIP data, otherwise choose No. In case the cookies are enabled, the data about GEOIP will be saved. When visitors go to your site, the GEOIP data will be taken from the previous visit.
In Time Save Cookies: Enter the time duration for the cookies to be saved. Please note that you mustn't enter a number exceeding 300 years (equal to 109,500 days); otherwise, you will face with an error.
*Note: The popup asking customers to switch store view also disappears when this cookie saving time terminates.
In Enable Switch Website: choose Yes to show a dropdown list of websites to switch conveniently.
For example:
*Note: For flags to describe websites, you need to add flags to this folder: /Bss/SwitchWebsite/view/frontend/web/images/flags.
Image should be named under the format as flag_<store_view_code>.png
For testing purposes, we come up with URL for Tester and IP for Tester as follow:
Enter the URL in URL for Tester and IP address in IP for Tester.
Note:
If you cannot use IP or Fake IP, it is possible to enter URL or IP of any country and check the module.
Our Magento 2 GEOIP Store Switcher extension works well with both Ipv4 and Ipv6 address.
The IP for Tester feature will redirect users to store view assigned by the IP entered.
Hit Get URL button.
Copy the URL. Open an incognito tab to check whether you are redirected to the right store view.
1.2.2. IN APPLY REDIRECT FOR COUNTRY
Please change the scope to Store View of the website and start configuration. You can select one or multiple countries so that customers coming from these chosen countries will be redirected to each corresponding store view. For countries that are not assigned to any store view, visitors from those will be redirected to the default store view. In case one country is assigned to 2 store views, customers are redirected to the store view with lower ID.
For example: If you want customers from Canada to be redirected to Canada store view, you need to change the scope to Canada store view and select Canada as Apply Redirect for Country.
1.2.3. IN GEOIP BLOCK
This feature allows admins to block specific IPs and countries from access to your site. The blocked IPs and countries will be redirected to an assigned URL only.
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable GEOIP Block, otherwise choose No.
In IP Blacklist: Enter one IP per line to set the IPs to be blocked. Then, visitors from these IPs cannot access your site. When trying to do so, they will only be redirected to an URL you set below.
In Countries Blacklist: Select countries to be blocked from your site. Then, visitors from these countries cannot access your site. When trying to do so, they will only be redirected to an URL you set below.
In Redirect Visitor to URL: Enter URL including http:// or https:// to redirect blocked users to a page. If you want to redirect blocked visitors to a CMS page, please enter URL key of the page. If you leave this option blank, visitors will be redirected to Homepage.
1.2.4. VARNISH CONFIGURATION
This is the configuration to make GEOIP work with Varnish Cache.
You can read more about how to configure Magento to use Varnish HERE.
*Note: before you exporting VCL for Varnish 3 and 4, you need to save all configs.
After exporting the Varnish Configuration file, you need to modify it as below:
At sub vcl_rev , find the following code snippet:
# collect all cookies
std.collect(req.http.Cookie);
# collect all cookies
std.collect(req.http.Cookie);
if (req.http.Cookie !~ "country_code" && req.url !~ "^/(pub/)?(media|static)/.*\.(ico|css|js|jpg|jpeg|png|gif|tiff|bmp|mp3|ogg|svg|swf|woff|woff2|eot|ttf|otf)$") {
return (pass);
}
At sub vcl_hash, find the following code:
if (req.http.cookie ~ "X-Magento-Vary=") {
hash_data(regsub(req.http.cookie, "^.*?X-Magento-Vary=([^;]+);*.*$", "\1"));
}
Then under the found code, insert this code:
if (req.http.cookie ~ "country_code=") {
hash_data(regsub(req.http.Cookie, "^.*?country_code=([^;]*);*.*$", "\1"));
}
1.3. GeoIP Switch Currency (from v1.1.8)
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable this function. It only works when you select No for Enable Popup settings (in 2.2.1 part).
If you choose No, currency works as default.
In Setting list: click Add and then enter the information of country, country code, and currency code.
For example:
It means that US visitors accessing the website are redirected to US store view and Display currency is also switched to USD if USD is included in Allowed Currency of the US store view.
II. Multiple Store View Pricing
Multiple Store View Pricing for Magento 2 extension helps store owners to set up different prices for the same product in various store views of a store while Magento 2 default does not support this function. For example, you want to sell a table at £50 in English store view but in the French store view, the price you want customers to pay is €80. Therefore, it totally depends on the demands of store owners as well as business strategies for each local target customers.
Moreover, this module also allows administrators to set up base currency for each store view so that customers can easily checkout with the currency of store view. It can be said that this is really another very outstanding feature of Multiple Store View Pricing for Magento 2 to make more convenient for both customers and store owners.
*Note: This user guide is applied to Magento 2 Multiple Store View v2.1.4 and above. If you want to read user guides of other versions, please contact us!
In Catalog Price Scope, there are 3 options for admin to choose: Global, Website and Store View. You choose Store View to enable the module.
Then you click Save Config and begin to customize prices of products in each store view of each store.
*Note: After saving config, you need to do the following things:
+ Reindex catalog price by running php bin/magento indexer:reindex catalog_product_price so that prices can be reindexed according to each store.
+ Reindex catalog price rules.
In addition, you go to BSSCommerce ⇒ Multiple Store View Pricing in Configuration also to select how to set up tier prices.
There are 2 options for using tier prices:
Merge Tier Price and Tier Price for Store View: It means that the product will take tier price set up for both website and store view.
Use Only Tier Price for Store view: The product only takes tier prices set up for store view.
→ In this case, we select "Use only tier price for store view".
(This configuration is explained in details section 3 at the end of User Guide. Please take a look for better understanding).
2. Set up base currency for each store view
2.1 Set up base currency for English store view
In Configuration, you go to General ⇒ Currency Setup to set up base currency for English store view.
Choose English store view from Store View Section.
In Base Currency: Choose British Pound Sterling as base currency and customers will use this one to checkout.
In Default Display Currency: you can choose British Pound Sterling or any other currency because this one is only displayed in the product or category page, not used in the checkout.
In Allowed Currencies: Choose British Pound Sterling.
Then, click to Save config button.
2.2. Set up base currency for French store view
In Configuration, you go to General ⇒ Currency Setup to set up base currency for French store view.
Choose French store view from Store View Section.
In Base Currency: Choose Euro as base currency and customers will use this one to checkout.
In Default Display Currency: you can choose Euro or any other currency because this one is only displayed in the product or category page, not used in the checkout.
In Allowed Currencies: Choose Euro.
Then, click to Save config button.
3. Set up different prices for the same product per store view
3.1. Set up product price in English store view
Step 1: Choose English in Store View box.
Step 2: In Price section, you unmark “Use Default Value” and add your wanted price for the product in this English store view: £100, for instance.
Step 3: You can also set up Special Prices and Tier Prices for this product by clicking Advanced Pricing.
Step 4: You save configuration and see changes in the frontend.
Price of Put It Messeger Bag in the English store view:
3.2. Set up product price in French store view
Step 1: Choose French in Store View box.
Step 2: In Price section, you unmark “Use Default Value” and add your wanted price for the product in this French store view: €200, for instance.
Step 3: Set up Special prices and Tier prices for product in French store view.
Step 4: You save configuration and go to the frontend to see the changes:
Price of Put It Messenger Bag in the French store view:
As a result, you can successfully set up different prices for a product in two store views.
4. Explanation about Tier Price Config
When you edit tier prices for product in each store view, there are 2 options for you to choose in Tier Price Config and it determines how tier prices are displayed in the frontend.
Merge Tier Price and Tier Price for Store View: It means that the product will take tier price set up for both website and store view.
Use Only Tier Price for Storeview: The product only takes tier prices set up for store view.
Let's take an example: You have a product with the following settings as below:
Website tier price: buy 7 for $7 each.
Store view tier prices:
+ Default store view: buy 5 for $10 each.
+ French store view: buy 10 for $5 each.
Tier Price Config:
+ Default store view: choose Merge Tier Price and Tier Price for Store View.
+ French store view: choose Use Only Tier Price for Store view.
In the frontend, we have results as below:
+ In Default store view:
+ In French store view:
*Note: You want to set up tier prices for the same customer group in Customer Group Price and Tier Price for Store View configuration at the same quantity but different prices, tier prices displayed in the frontend are the lowest values.
+ To make Catalog Price Rule per Store View work with Multiple Store View Pricing, you go to the app/etc/config.xml file of Magento, find this line 'Bss_MultiStoreViewPricingCatalogRule' => 1 and then you replace this line by another line 'Bss_MultiStoreViewPricingCatalogRule' => 0
+ Flush cache
+ You should reindex after setting up or editing catalog price rules.
When you add a new store, you also need to reindex.
When you edit prices of simple products of bundle products and group products in each store and then go to the category including these products, the prices are not changed. Because it is the way that the core is solving.
When you sort by or filter, default Magento does not take special price of simple products of configurable products. It will sort or filter based on the original price of configurable products.
Set up shipping cost (Table Rate, Free Shipping and Flat rate) for store view level. It means that admin can change shipping cost, shipping condition and handling fee of these shipping methods for each store view. You can take a look the following examples:
+ Flat Rate:
+ Free Shipping:
+ Table Rate:
Set up Minimum order amount for each store view.
For custom options that are set up for products.
Custom options will similarly work to default Magento, which means prices of custom options don't change and just currency changes.
You can take a look at the following example:
The module works well with Promotion rule
In case you select discount as fixed amount, the module will convert amount based on currency of the default config and base currency of store view.
The option "Use default Value" is always ticked for Special price and Normal price and if you haven't yet unticked, special price and normal price take values of default configs.
In addition, there are some more important issues you should take a look at. Read all HERE!
5. Note to install module
Before installing this extension, you had better take a look at the following table to select the suitable module version from the package, corresponding to your Magento Version and Edition. It is extremely important to install the right extension because you can avoid conflicts during the usage period.
After installing the module, you need to implement a solution HERE.
However, if you are using M2.2.0, please follow another solution.
M2.2.4 - M2.2.5
v2.1.7
v2.1.5
M2.2.6 and over
v2.2.0
v2.1.9
M2.3.0
v2.2.0
v2.1.9
Follow this solution after installing the module on M2.3.0 CE.
M 2.2.8, M2.3.1 and M2.3.2
v2.2.0
v2.1.9
For example: if you are using Magento 2.1.x, Community edition, then you install the module v2.1.2.
III. Catalog Price Rule per Store View
As you know, default Magento just allows creating catalog price rules for the whole website. It means that a rule will be set up and applied for all stores or store views of a website. Therefore, Catalog Price Rule per Store View for Magento 2 is developed to help administrators to set up catalog price rules for each store view easily, which can offer different promotion programs for customers in particular areas and generate sales more effectively.
After installing this module, you will select store views to set up cart price rules when you create new rules.
You go to MARKETING ⇒ Catalog Price Rules ⇒ Add New Rule.
You fill in the necessary information in sections of Rule information. Especially, in Store View section, you will select store views to set up this rule and apply it in the frontend. You can select multiple store views to carry out set up at one time.
Take 2 following examples to see how Shopping Cart Price Rule per Store View for Magento 2 can function in details.
Example 1:Set up a rule “20% OFF for all products belonging category Bag” for English store view.
In Rule Information:
Fill in Rule name and Description.
Set Yes for Active.
Select English of Main Website Store in Store View section.
Select customer groups to apply.
Fill in other information: time and priority
In Conditions: Set up the right condition for this rule.
In Actions: Choose suitable actions for the rule.
Finally, you Save and Apply the rule and then see how it is applied in the frontend of the English store view:
Example 2:Set up a rule “10% discount for all products belonging category Bag” for the French store view.
You do the same steps as in Example 1 but you need to choose French store view to set up in Store Views section.
In Conditions:
In Actions:
Finally, you Save and Apply the rule and then see how it is applied in the frontend of French store view:
Shopping Cart Price Rule per Store View for Magento 2 helps administrators to set up shopping cart price rule for store views, instead of the whole website as Magento default. Therefore, store owners can provide their local customers with particular promotions programs to encourage them to purchase more and enhance sales effectively.
After installing this module, you will select store views to set up cart price rules when you create new rules.
You go to MARKETING ⇒ Cart Price Rules ⇒ Add New Rule.
You fill in the necessary information in sections of Rule information. Especially, in Store View section, you will select store views to set up this rule and apply in the frontend. You can select multiple store views to carry out set up at one time.
Take 2 following examples to see how Shopping Cart Price Rule per Store View for Magento 2 can function in details.
Example 1:Set up a rule “20% OFF for orders including 3 or more products” for English store view.
In Rule Information:
+ Fill in Rule name and Description.
+ Set Yes for Active.
+ Select English of Main Website Store in Store View section.
+ Select customer groups to apply.
+ Set up Coupon, Uses per Customers, Valid Time and Priority for this rule.
In Conditions: Set up the right condition for this rule.
In Actions: Choose suitable actions for the rule.
In Labels: Write a label for each store view to specify which promotion is being applied.
Finally, you save the rule and see how it is applied in the frontend:
Example 2: Set up a rule “30% OFF for orders which have subtotal greater than $500” for French store view.
You do the same steps as in Example 1 but you need to choose French store view to set up in Store Views section.
In Conditions:
In Actions:
Finally, you save the rule and see how it is applied in the frontend:
Tax per Store View for Magento 2 extension helps admin to set different taxes for a product per store view by changing the scope of Tax class attribute into Store View. Therefore, this module is really a good solution for Magento 2 stores with multiple store views to charge local customers particular taxes.
To Enable/Disable the extension, please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Tax per Store View:
+ Set Yes to enable the module or set No to disable.
This extension solves tax issues for each store view by allowing admin to select different Tax Classes with specific tax rates to apply for each product in the store view level, instead of the website level as in default Magento.
Therefore, we will follow 4 steps:
Set scope for Tax Class as Store View.
Create Tax Rate (if necessary).
Create tax rules to apply for each tax class along with wanted tax rates. Tax rate in each rule will be applied for products in each store view as you want.
Edit Product tax class of each product per store view.
1. Set Scope for Tax Class attribute
You go to Store⇒ Attributes ⇒ Product and find Tax Class attribute.
*Note: You should search the attribute code of Tax Class or Attribute Label that you name when creating it. In this case, we search attribute code of Tax Class as tax_class_id and click to edit.
In Properties, you go to Advanced Attribute Properties and change Scope into Store View:
Then click Save Attribute.
2. Create Tax Rates
You go to Store ⇒ Taxes ⇒Tax Zones and Rates to add new tax rates with different rates that are suitable for your store views.
To help you understand better, we take two examples: we add 2 new tax rates as below:
UK-*-Rate 1: This tax with a rate of 8% is used for the United Kingdom.
FR-*-Rate 1: This tax with a rate of 10% is used for France.
3. Create Tax Rules
After creating suitable tax rates for each country (corresponding to each Store View), you need to add tax rules as you want.
You go to Store → Taxes → Tax Rules and click Add New Tax Rule.
In our examples, we will create 2 tax rules for 2 store views as below:
Tax rule is applied for the English store view with a rate of 8%:
In Rule Information:
+ Name: fill in the name of your rule.
+ Tax Rate: select wanted tax rates for this rule. In this case, we select the rate as UK-*-Rate1.
*Note: You can also add new tax rates here by clicking Add New Tax Rate button and there is a popup appeared for you to create. In addition, you can quickly import/export tax rates in Additional Settings:
Hence, there are 3 ways for you to add new tax rates.
In Additional Settings:
+ Customer Tax Class: Select wanted customer class to apply this rule. If you want to create new customer tax classes to apply, let's click Add New Class button.
+ Product Tax Class: select a product tax class or multiple product tax classes to set for products. If you want to create new ones, let's click Add New Tax Class button.
In this example, we create a new one called Taxable Goods - English and select it for this tax rule.
+ Priority: enter a number to indicate the priority of this tax, when more than one tax applies
+ Calculate Off Subtotal Only: tick this box if you want taxes to be based on the order subtotal.
+ Sort Order: enter a number to indicate the order of this tax rule when listed with others.
Then Save Rule.
Tax rule is applied for the Frech store view with a rate of 10%
You follow the same above steps by selecting the tax rate as FR-*-Rate 1, creating a new Product Tax Class as Taxable Goods - French and choose it for this tax rule.
As a result, we have 2 tax rules used for the English store view and French store view. Each rule has its own rate and is used for particular product tax class.
4. Apply different product tax class
After you set up tax rules as you want, you need to edit the tax class of each product in each store view.
You go to Products ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Choose a product to edit ⇒ Price and switch store view to select product tax class with your wanted tax rates set up in the tax rules.
In this case, we choose Strive Shoulder Pack product with the original price in default store view as $32.
In English store view: we select Tax Class as Taxable goods - English (this product tax class is included in the Tax rule "Tax for English store view" with the tax rate of 8%.
In French store view: we select Tax Class as Taxable goods - French (this product tax class is included in Tax rule "Tax for French store view" with the tax rate of 10%.
Then you go to the frontend, add this product to cart and see the results:
In English store view: the product is taxed at the rate of 8%. You add this product to cart and see how the tax is applied as below:
In French store view: the product is taxed at the rate of 10%.
You should clear all products in the shopping cart, then switch to French store view and add Strive Shoulder Pack to cart:
VI. Storeview Flags
Magento 2 Storeview Flags extension helps to increase visuality of the whole website by adding nice flats next to store view’s names or replacing these names with flags only. This makes customers easily recognize where to switch stores as well as improve convenience of your multilingual websites.
You go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Storeview Flags to start making configuration.
In Storeview Flags: Set Yes to enable the extension or choose No to disable the function on your website.
*Note: You need to change the scope to configure these settings for each store view.
In Hide Storeview Names:
Select Yes to hide store view names in the drop-down menu. Only flags are displayed.
Select No to show flags along with store view names.
In Upload:
Flag: Upload image of flag for each store view.
You can freely set up flag width and height depending on your website.
Magento 2 Improved Admin Product Grid allows you own three practical extensions in one, including:
Magento 2 Admin Product Grid with Category
Magento 2 Product Grid Inline Editor
Magento 2 Admin Product Preview Plus
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 Admin Product Grid with Category
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Admin Product Grid with Category.
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
2.1.1 Show/hide category & category ID in the product grid
Navigate your way through Catalog ⇒Products
Once Magento 2 Admin Product Grid with Category extension is enabled, Category and Category ID are shown in the Column box at the top-right corner.
To show these two columns in the product grid, please check the relevant boxes or uncheck to hide them.
Feel free to arrange the columns in the grid by dragging the selected column, for example, Category ID, and dropping it at the new position.
Furthermore, if you click on the top of the Category or Category ID column, the data are sorted from high to low so that you can find the product at the convenience.
2.1.2 Filter product by single or multiple categories
The purpose of Magento 2 Admin Product Grid with Category extension is to allow filtering products by their categories right in the backend grid. Hence, Category and Category ID are included in filter options.
In Filters, the admin can get product collection by multiple categories in two ways:
Filter Or: Products assigned to any of the entered category/category ID are filtered.
+ In Category, enter: “categoryName1,categoryName2,etc”
+ In Category ID, enter: “categoryId1,categoryId2,etc”
Note: It is possible to enter “categoryName1,categoryName2, categoryId1,categoryId2,etc” in Category.
Filter And: Only products assigned to the entered category/category ID are filtered.
+ In Category, enter: “&,categoryName1,categoryName2”;or
+ In Category ID, enter: “&,categoryId1,categoryId2”
Note:
+ It is possible to enter “&,categoryName1,categoryName2, &,categoryId1,categoryId2” in Category.
+ Do not filter by Category column and Category ID columne at the same time.
2.1.3 Update category for bulk products
With Magento 2 Admin Product Grid with Category extension, the management of products and categories becomes more simplified.
In Product grid, Category and Category ID are clickable links, meaning that you can immediately go to the category edit page without going to the default Categories page.
What’s more, this module gives the ability to edit the categories of multiple products using mass action.
Firstly, select products that need updating categories
In Actions, click on Update Category
In Update Category page:
+ Select Category to assign the selected products.
+ Turn on Unlink old category button to remove all categories preciously assigned to products.
Finally, Save the updates.
2.2 Product Grid Inline Editor
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Product Grid Inline Editor.
n Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
In Allow Editing Content of Input Types: multi-select product attribute input types including Text Field, Text Area, Date, Yes/No, Multiple Select, Dropdown, and Price to allow editing in the grid.
Note:
If the Date input type is allowed editing, the default format in the grid for you to customize is mm/dd/yyyy.
Quantity is considered as Text Field input type, so you can edit product quantity only when the Text Field is picked.
In Edit Multiple Rows: choose Yes to allow editing multiple rows (products) in the grid at once, or No to not allow.
In Edit Single Cell: choose Yes to only edit a cell is clicked at once, or No to take action on all editable fields in a row.
* Note: Edit Multiple Rows and Edit Single Cell function can’t work together. If you turn both configs to Yes, only Edit Single Cell function will be enabled. Although Edit Multiple Rows is Yes, you are not allowed to take action on multiple rows.
After selecting all configs, press Save Config button, and flush cache to start using this module.
2.2.1 Edit Attributes in admin product grid
Please navigate to Catalog ⇒ Products, the admin product grid is displayed on this page. You can add columns (both default and custom columns) to product grid.
a, Edit a product in a raw
To edit a product which is displayed on a particular row, please click on the row (except first tick-box and links).
The selected row is enabled and the editable information and attributes are included in boxes, which are available for you to change their values. After editing, you need to hit one of the following buttons to complete:
Cancel: cancel all your recent adjustments on this row, and all values in the row won’t be changed.
Save: save your changes.
*Note: You are not allowed to:
Edit Quantity of these product types: configurable, grouped, and bundle product.
Edit cells in Price attribute input type of these product types: configurable product, grouped product, and bundle product with dynamic price.
Edit ID, Thumbnail, Type, Attribute Set, Websites, Action (link) of all product types.
b, Edit multiple rows
To edit multiple rows at once, please follow this instruction:
Step 1: Choose a row
Step 2: Select other rows to be edited together by checking box, an additional row including editable boxes that are correlative to the selected rows will be enabled.
Step 3: enter the custom values to the All in Column boxes
Step 4: Choose Apply button in the additional row to apply new attribute values to all chosen products.
Step 5: Choose Save Edits or Cancel button to complete.
Note: You can edit multiple products in different types, but the new values can be applied to only allowed editing input types.
2.2.2. Edit a single cell only
When you set to allow edit single cell only, you need to click on the cell you want to edit and enter the new value, then press Save button.
2.3 Admin Product Preview Plus
Please navigate to Stores ⇒Settings⇒Configuration => BSS Commerce
In General Configuration:
In Enabled Admin Preview, choose Yes to enable the module or choose No to disable the module.
In Product Grid Preview Button Position, set position of product grid preview button by choosing In New Column or In Action Column.
In Customer Grid Login Button Column, set position of column of customer Log-in button by choosing In New Column or In Action Column.
In Product Preview Link Type, choose Frontend or Backend to decide the navigation of preview links.
In Disable Page Cache For Admin User, choose Yes to activate automatic cache flush before admin log in as customer and set show Product Preview Link Type to Frontend, otherwise choose No.
In Show Edit Link In Frontend For, choose one or multiple pages to place Edit Page buttons which directs admin to backend Edit Page from the frontend.
2.3.1 In Sales
Please go to Sales ⇒ Operations ⇒ Orders.
Then check the Sales Order Grid table consisting of various columns, in which Bill-to-namecolumn presenting names of customers who have placed orders on site, and Item Ordered column displaying brief information of ordered product (SKU, name, image…)
Click the name of the customer to navigate to Customer Information section in the backend to check or make changes if needed.
Click the name of the product to see the preview of Product Page in the frontend or the Product Detail Page in the backend. This will be determined by your setting at STORES -> Configuration -> BSS Commerce -> Admin Preview -> Product Preview Link Type :
Choose Backend to see the Product Detail Page once click on the preview product link at sales.
Choose Frontend to preview the Product Page at the frontend.
2.3.2 In Products
a, Preview products
To get preview of products, please navigate to Products ⇒ Catalog
Click Preview button in the product grid view in Catalog section to see the preview of Product Page in the frontend, make changes in product information in Edit if necessary and click Save.
Admin need to enable the product to use the Preview button; however, you can decide to show that product to customers or not by using the Admin Preview attribute on Product Edit Page in the backend.
If choose Yes for the Admin Preview attribute, only you can see the preview of that product by clicking the Preview button. Customers can’t search or see that product.
2.3.3 Preview categories
To get the preview of categories, please go to Products ⇒Categories
Check the list of Category Pages, make changes if needed, click Save then use Preview button to check the frontend display of the chosen Category Page.
2.3.4 In Customers
Please go to Customers ⇒ All customers
Click Login button to log in customer account from the backemd.
The module will permit admins to log in as customer in frontend page.
In Customers ⇒ Login As Customer Log to shows history of how many times admin has logged in as customer in the frontend.
2.3.5 In Content
Please go to Content ⇒ Elements ⇒ Pages.
Check the list of CMS Pages, click select and choose Edit to make changes in the content of CMS Pages, then click Save.
In Edit CMS page, make changes if necessary, click Save Page and use Preview button to check frontend display of the edited page.
Magento 2 Advanced Custom Option Package is a comprehensive solution to help you knock out the limitations of custom options by default. It includes these extensions below:
Custom option template
Custom option image
Dependent custom option
Custom option absolute price and quantity
2. How Does It Work?
To enable features of B2B Package in your Magento 2 website, please go to
Stores → Configuration → BSS COMMERCE
2.1. Custom option template
Choose Custom Option Template under BSS COMMERCE tab
2.1.1. Custom Options Template Grid
In ID column: choose the ID of the template
In Title column: choose the title of the custom option template
In Is Active column: the status of the template. “Yes” means that the custom option is enabled in the frontend and “No” means that it is disabled.
In Description column: description of the template
In Applied Product Qty column: stated the number of products that have been applied to the displayed template.
In Create At column: specific date and time that the custom options template was created.
In Update At column: specific date and time of the last edition.
In Action column: choose Edit to go to the custom options template edit page, or choose Delete to delete the template.
Note:
Only count the products that are within the template applied rule, the product that isn't supported (E.g. Group products) won't be counted.
The above information isn’t displayed in the frontend.
2.1.2. Create Custom Option Template
Please click on Add New Template button to create new custom options template.
2.1.2.1. Custom Option Template Information
In TemplateInformation tab, you can edit the general information for the template.
In Title, edit a title for the template.
In Is Active, choose Yes to enable the template in the frontend, or No to disable it.
In Description, edit the description for the template that is being created.
In Applied Products: Add the right condition to apply the custom options template to products. Don’t set any condition to apply the template to all products.
After assigning custom option template, the custom options are immediately inserted to the Customizable Options tab in each product edit page in the backend and they will be displayed in the frontend.
2.1.2.2. Create Custom Options
To edit custom options of a template, please open Custom Option tab in Custom Option Template Edit page.
In this tab, you can create unlimited custom options by all input types. This section is the same as the Customizable Options tab on the product edit page.
After setting, you need to save to complete. There are 5 buttons for you to press:
Save: save all settings and then you will be redirected to the custom option template grid
Duplicate: duplicate the custom option template. The duplicate template is removed the selected products of the original one.
Save and Continue: save the template and continue staying in the edit page.
Delete: delete the template
Back: back to the template grid.
Note:
When the custom option template is deleted or set from Yes to No in Is Active field, the custom options assigned to the product using that template is removed.
After the custom option template is assigned to the product,
If there are new options added to the template, then those new options are also added to the product.
If the admin edits any option of the template, the relevant option of the product is also updated.
If the admin deletes any option of the template, the relevant option of the product is also removed.
Custom Options assigned to the product using the template will be associated with that template.
However, Magento 2 Custom Option Template allows you to exclude a product from a custom options template in the product edit page.
To exclude a product from one custom option template, click the template title in Excluded from Custom Option Template(s) multiple select box.
Magento 2 Custom Option Template extension allows that one product can be assigned to multiple templates.
Currently, the module supports assigning the template to products by the product’s conditions in the Template Edit Page. It means the template can not be assigned to products on the Product Edit Page.
When the custom option template is duplicated, assigned products will not be duplicated in the new template.
Note: When a product was excluded from a template, then rechoosing the template again, then it will be considered as a newly added custom options template.
2.1.3. Manage Admin User Roles
Please go to System ⇒ Permissions ⇒ User Roles to restrict other admin accounts accessing the custom options template management.
2.1.4. Choose Save Mode
Navigate to Admin ⇒ Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Bss Commerce ⇒ Custom Option Template ⇒ Advanced Setting.
In the Save Mode, you can select the template save format.
Update on Save: When clicking on the Save or Save and Continue button, that custom option product data will be updated right away. You should use this option when 1 template is assigned for a few products.
Update by schedule: When clicking on the Save or Save and Continue button, that custom option product data will be updated via cron qua cron, and you can check the process in Bulk Action (System > Action Logs). You should use this option when 1 template is assigned for a bulk of products to avoid connect timeout issue.
2.2. Custom option image
2.2.1. General Configs
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
Note: The module works with simple product, configurable product, bundle product (without dynamic pricing), downloadable and virtual product.
It only supports adding images for products that can have custom options by Magento default so the extension does not work with the grouped product. In case of bundle product, it only supports uploading images for the custom options created by admin, not the bundle items.
2.2.2. Frontend View Settings
In Drop-down Option View, choose one of the following options.
Show image when selected: Image is only displayed when the custom option is selected.
For example:
Show all images: All images are displayed in each custom option. If a customer selects an option, its image will be highlighted.
In Multiple Select Option View, choose one of the following options:
Show image when selected: Image is only displayed when the custom option is selected.
Show all images: All images are displayed in each custom option. If a customer selects an option, its image will be highlighted.
For example:
2.2.3 Image Size Settings
In Drop-down Option Image Height, set image height for drop-down option type.
In Drop-down Option Image Width, set image width for drop-down option type.
In Radio Buttons Option Image Height, set image height for radio buttons option type.
In Radio Buttons Option Image Width, set image width for radio buttons option type.
In Checkbox Option Image Height, set image height for checkbox option type.
In Checkbox Option Image Width, set image width for checkbox option type.
In Multiple Select Option Image Height, set image height for multiple select option type.
In Multiple Select Option Image Width, set image width for multiple select option type.
2.2.4. Upload Image for Custom Options
Go to Products ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Choose one product ⇒ Find Customizable Options
Click the Image icon to insert the custom option’s image.
Click on the Swatch Image icon to insert the swatch image to the custom option.
Only the drop-down and radio button option type have swatch images.
When hovering over the chosen image, the Delete and Edit icon will appear. Click icons to delete or edit the images and swatch images.
When finished inserting the images and swatch images, click the Save button to save the configurations.
Note: Don’t delete the custom option before save configuration or the images uploaded for options won’t be saved.
2.3. Dependent custom options
2.3.1. General Configuration
Please go to Store ⇒Configuration⇒BSSCommerce⇒ DependentCustom Option
In Enable: choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
*Note: When you enable/disable the module, you need to check again and set up required configs of options. It is a must to enter values for Required Options only when editing Required Options on the frontend is possible (not to be hidden or disabled).
In ChildrenOptionValuesDisplay:
BeEnabledOnlyIftheParentOptionValueisSelected: choose this option to set the children options are hidden and they will be enabled only when their parent option is picked.
AlwaysbeDisplayedbutCustomersCan’tPickIftheParentOptionValueisn’tSelected: choose this option to set the children options always be shown but the checkboxes aren’t enabled until the parent option is selected.
In ChildrenOptions’ValuesDependonMultipleParentValues: this configuration is applied when the child options depend on multiple parent options.
BeEnabledIfAtLeastOneParentValueisSelected: the child options will be enabled if at least one parent option is chosen.
BeEnabledOnlyIfAllParentValuesareSelected: the child options will be enabled only when all parent options are chosen.
Note:
The display of children options is dependent on the setting in Children OptionValuesDisplay config.
The Children Options’ Values Depend on Multiple Parent Values can be configured in the Product Edit Page for custom options at the product level.
After setting, please press SaveConfig button and flush cache to start using the module.
2.3.2. Set Dependent Custom Options
Note:
Only after you have created the child options,their names would appear on the dependent option list, and you can set the dependent options.
Please go to Admin Panel ⇒ Catalog, then pick a product, and go to Customizable Options section.
Create both parent and child custom options, then in Dependent Options, pick the custom options’ titles.
You can change the configs of Child values that have multiple parent values on the product edit page for custom options at product level, which means only the custom options of that product are applied by this config.
The configuration options are the same as the Children Options’ Values Depend on Multiple Parent Values under Store ⇒ Configurations section.
Note:
The custom options depended on other options are called children options and the option values added dependent custom options are called parent options
Only the custom option values in Select input types (Drop-down, Checkbox, Radio Buttons, and Multiple Select) can be the parent options.
All custom options and option values in any input type can be the child options.
The parent options and child options must be in the same product.
The configuration Enable child values when all parent values are selected will not show children options with parent options in the drop-down or radio button type.
A children option can be dependent on multiple parent options.
When the dependent options and also the values of the custom option are both chosen, they can't be displayed in the frontend. In order for this to not happens, you should choose the parent option as the dependent instead.
After finishing the setting, press Save button on the product page.
2.3.3. Frontend Display
Depends on the configs you set in the backend, the frontend product page will look like this:
2.4. Custom option with absolute price and quantity
2.4.1. General Configs
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Custom Option Absolute Price and Qty
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
In Allow To Manage Custom Option Qty Report, choose Yes to enable the Custom Option Stock Changes Report section, No to disable it.
Tooltip Config: The tooltip that notifies customers about custom options with absolute pricing is enabled when users hover over the absolute price option. This extension allows you to customize the tooltip.
In Enable Tooltip: choose Yes to enable the tooltip, or No to disable it.
In Message in Tooltip Box: edit a message to be shown on the tooltip.
After completely setting, please press Save Config button to save your customization.
2.4.2. Apply Absolute Price to Custom Options
Please go to the edit page of a product then press the Customizable Options tab to create custom options for the product.
This module adds a new option “Absolute” to Price Type selection. Choose “Absolute” to set absolute pricing for the option you want.
Two new configs when enabling Magento 2 Custom Option Absolute Price and Quantity:
Position: Product > Customizable options > “Description Type” and “Short Description”: Allow you to show description for each custom option at the frontend product page.
Description Type: select one of 3 values - None/ Tooltip/ Small text
- If you select "None", Short description is not shown on the frontend.
- If you select "Tooltip/ Small text" but "Short description" is empty, Short description is not shown on the frontend.
- If you select "Small text", Short description will show a small text on the frontend, under the title of custom option.
Short Description: can change following store view.
2.4.3. Quantity Select Box for Custom Options
Check the “Qty” box to enable the Quantity Selection Box for custom options.
Here is how the absolute price and quantity of custom options are displayed in the frontend:
2.4.4 Set tier pricing for custom options
Choose the Tier Pricing icon in Customizable Option of a custom option to set the tier prices to custom options. An Advance Pricing window will open for you to edit the pricing information.
Click Add to include a new tier pricing to the chosen custom option.
In Website, set the website that the tiered pricing will be applied.
In Customer Group, choose the customer groups that the tier price will be applied to.
In Quantity: Determine the number of options bought to get the tiered price.
In Price, choose Fixed for a fixed price, and discount for a discount percentage when buying certain custom options.
Note: Make sure to press Save after finishing setting up the configuration. The set price and quantity won’t be displayed until you click Save.
How does the tiered pricing show in the frontend:
2.4.5 Manage Stock Option Changes Report
Before access to the Custom Stock Options Change Report, make sure to enable the Allow To Manage Custom Option Qty Report in Configuration section.
Please go to Admin Panel ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Custom Option Qty Report to access the Manage Stock Option Changes grid.
In ID column: Shows the custom options SKUs
In Product ID column: The ID of the product which the custom option belongs to.
In Option Title: The title of the custom option.
In Option Value: Shows the values of the custom option
Options Price: Shows the price set for the custom options
In Qty column: Displays the Qty changes of the chosen custom option
In Create At column: specific date and time that the custom options were created.
In Action column: View the order and credit memo of the custom option.
Note:
When there is someone purchase a custom option, the Qty Change will decrease by the number of custom options bought.
When a product is refunded, the Qty change in Manage Options Stock Change Report will increase by the number of products that get refunded.
Short Description and Description Types configs also work with Magento 2 Custom Option Template. However, it can not change the description by store view at the template yet.
Optimized one-page checkout using Magento 2 Checkout Suite
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. Magento 2 One Step Checkout
One Step Checkout for Magento 2 extension helps customers to checkout simply and quickly by displaying all elements in 1 page only. They do not need to experience two parts (Shipping Address and Reviews & Payments) as in default Magento 2 but fill all information in one place conveniently. Therefore, the checkout process becomes more user-friendly, which can reduce the abandonment rate and bring a higher conversion rate for online stores.
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ One Step Checkout.
2.1.1 In General
In Enable:
Choose Yes to enable Magento 2 One Step Checkout extension.
Choose No to disable this module.
In Allow Creating Account On Checkout Page:
Choose Yes to allow customers to create their accounts right on the checkout page.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Title: Write your wanted title for the checkout page.
In Router Name: Choose a URL name for your checkout page.
2.1.2 In Fields Display
In Show Order Comment:
Choose Yes to show a text box for customers to leave their comments for orders.
Choose No to exclude this box from the checkout page
In Show Discount Code:
Choose Yes to display a discount code box for entering coupon codes.
Choose No to hide it.
2.1.3 In Newsletter
In Show Subscribe Newsletter:
Choose Yes to allow customers to subscribe to the newsletter on the checkout page.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Auto Check Newsletter Sign up Box: Choose Yes to automatically tick the Newsletter Sign up box or choose No to uncheck.
2.1.4 In Tracking Address by Google
In Enable Tracking Address by Google:
Choose Yes: Auto-detect and pre-fill customers' country, state/province, city - Google Suggest to autocomplete shipping address while typing.
Choose No: Customers have to find all street addresses and location information themselves.
In Google API Key: Fill in your API Key. In case you haven’t yet had an API Key, please click the link after this configuration to get it.
In Tracking Address from Applicable Countries: This configuration determines which countries to apply auto-suggesting customer addresses. There are 2 options to select:
If you choose All Allowed Countries: auto-suggesting address function is applied to every country.
If you choose Specific Countries: there is a list of countries in Tracking Address from Specific Countries and the maximum number of countries you can select is 5. Moreover, when you choose this option, Google just auto-suggests city name and country, not street name. This is the default function of Google auto-suggest.
*Admin has to work with Google and pay for Google Maps to activate the address autocompleting feature.
2.1.5 In Order Delivery Date
Set up delivery date options by navigating to Order Delivery Date tab under Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE.
2.1.6 In Gift Message
In Show Gift Message on Order Level:
Choose Yes to allow customers to send a gift message to other people.
Choose No to disable this function.
* Gift Message config is applied only when the corresponding default config is enabled. To enable the default config, please go to Stores⇒ Sales ⇒ Sales ⇒ Gift Options and choose Yes to the suitable gift message level:
In Gift Wrap:
Choose Yes to allow customers to request a gift wrap for their order.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Type: This function currently supports gift wrap for each order only, so the value is Per Order by default.
In Gift Wrap Fee: Fill the price for gift wrap service. The entered value is a positive number and automatically rounded to two decimal places. If left empty or filled with a negative number, the value would turn to be 0.
In Checkout Step Number Color: you choose the color for the checkout number steps.
In Checkout Step Background Color: Choose a color for the background of checkout number steps.
In Custom Code: you can add more code to customize about background color for the checkout page, “Sign in” button or text color and so on.
2.1.9 Somes notes
Notes about custom code
+ Change background of the checkout page, you need to add more code:
body { background-color: #333333;
}
(#33333 is the color code which is corresponding to Black).
+ Change text color of the checkout page, you need to add more code:
body { color: #ffffff;
}
(#fffff is the color code which is corresponding to White).
+ Change Sign in to a button, you add more code:
.authentication-wrapper button{
padding: 15px;
background: #6D268A;
color: #fff;
}
.authentication-wrapper button:hover{
text-decoration: unset;
background: #FF0000;
color: #fff;
}
Note about configuring payment method
You need to configure all payment methods that default Magento supports.
2.1.10. Add Payment Trust Badges
Step 1: Go to Content⇒ Blocks ⇒ Add New Block to create a new block for payment trust badge.
Step 2: Go to Content⇒ Widgets ⇒ Add Widget to choose a certain place to display the block of payment trust badge.
Note about adding header/footer for the checkout page: Upload folder bss_onestepcheckout to app/design/frontend/theme_space/theme.
2.2. Magento 2 Customer Attributes
Customer Attributes for Magento 2 extension adds customer attributes to the Registration Form to collect customer information. The value from the custom customer attributes will be displayed on My Account Page and added to Customer Detail Page, Customer Grid as well as Order Detail in the backend, and more importantly, at Checkout.
2.2.1. General configurations
Navigate to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Customer Attributes.
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it.
*Note: The Enable config only affects frontend display. Other backend functions aren’t affected by this config.
In Allow Dowload Customer Attribute File: choose Yes to allow downloading the file uploaded to customer attribute or No to restrict downloads.
In Title of Customer Attributes, enter the name for the customer attributes block. This title will be displayed in the Registration Form and My Account Page.
In Set Default Required Attributes for Existing Customer, choose Yes if you want required attributes to be applied for existing customers. Otherwise, choose No.
2.2.2 Create new attributes
Go to Customers ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Customer Attributes.
Customer Attributes Grid which displays all customer attributes created by admin. The Customer Attributes Grid is equipped with all functions as a default Magento 2 grid, including filter, column, mass action (delete, update status).
Click Add New Attribute button to create a new customer attribute. Then, you will see 3 tabs: Properties, Manage Labels, and Display Configuration.
2.2.2.1 Properties
Attribute Properties:
In Default Label, enter a name for the customer attribute.
In Input Type, choose 1 of the 9 input types: Text Field, Text Area, Date, Yes/No, Multiple Select, Dropdown, Checkbox and Radio Button, File (Attachment).
*Note:
If you choose Multiple Select, Dropdown, Checkbox or Radio Button, add options for the customer attribute in Manage Options.
In Values Required, choose Yes to make the customer attribute compulsory to fill in; otherwise, choose No.
Advanced Attribute Properties:
In Attribute Code, enter a code for the customer attribute. No space allowed and no more than 30 symbols.
*Note: In case none value is entered for Attribute Code, the extension will automatically get the value of Default Label as value for this field.
In Maximum File Size (bytes), enter a number to define the largest file size possibly uploaded.
In File Extensions, type allowed file extension that can be uploaded to the customer attribute. Each is separated by a comma.
In Default Value Required for Existing Customer, enter a value if the attribute is set as Required. This field will be only shown when the Values Required is Yes and the Input Type is text field, area, datetime, or file.
In Input Validation for Customer, set a type of data allowed in the field. The available values depend on the Input Type specified.
None—The field has no input validation during data entry.
Decimal number—Accepts only decimal number during data entry.
Integer Number—Accepts only integer number during data entry
Email—Accepts only an email address during data entry.
URL—Accepts only a URL during data entry
Letters—Accepts only letters during data entry
Letters (a-z, A-Z) or Numbers (0-9)—Accepts any combination of numbers (0-9) and alphabetic characters (a-z, A-Z) during data entry.
2.2.2.2 Manage labels
Customer Attributes for Magento 2 extension supports multiple store view, so you can display different customer attribute labels per store view.
2.2.2.3 Display configuration
In Sort Order, set the order of appearance for the customer attribute in the Registration form.
*Note: The sort order set here will also decide the order of appearance of the attributes in the backend.
In Status, enable or disable the customer attribute.
In Display in Registration Form, choose Yes to add the customer attribute to Registration Form.
In Display in My Account Page, choose Yes to add the customer attribute to My Account Page.
In Display in Order Detail Page, choose Yes to add the customer attribute to Order Detail Page under Sales of Admin Panel.
In Display in Customer Grid, choose Yes to add the customer attribute to Customer Grid.
In Add to Order Confirmation Email, choose Yes to display the customer attribute in the Order Confirmation email.
In Add to New Account Email, choose Yes to display the customer attributes in New Account email.
In Add to Order Frontend, choose Yes to display the customer attributes on Order Detail Page under My Account.
*Note: You need to reindex data of Customer Grid whenever you make any change in Display in Customer Grid config.
In Display on Checkout Page, choose Yes to show added customer attributes in the checkout page - under the shipping address or the payment method (with the virtual cart.) All filled information is saved upon order placement.
*Note: Attributes of all input types, except for "File", are supported at the checkout page.
In Hide If Filled Before, choose Yes to hide the customer attributes at the checkout page if they are filled before.
2.2.3 Create a new email template
As above, customer attributes are possibly set to display on Order Confirmation email and New Account email.
First off, you need to create a new template that includes customer attributes variable. Please follow Marketing Email Templates Add New Template.
New Order Confirmation email template
In Template section of Load default template, you can select among various default email templates, for example, New Order. Then, hit on Load template button.
Under Template Information, select Insert Variable… to add customer attributes to new order confirmation template.
Do not forget to enter Template Name and Save the new template.
Secondly, set this new template as the Order Confirmation email by going to StoresConfiguration Sales Sales Emails Order.
In New Order Confirmation Template, uncheck Use system value box and choose the newly created email template.
On completing, please Save Config.
New Account email template
Similarly, you can create a new template with customer attributes for New Account email.
In Template of Load default template section, choose New Account (Default) template and hit Load Template.
Under Template Information, enter Template Name and select Insert Variable… to add customer attributes to New Account template.
Then, Save Template.
To set this new template as the New Account template, please follow Stores Configuration Customers Customer Configuration and expand Create New Account Options.
In Default Welcome Email, unmark Use system value box. Then choose the newly created template. Save Config to complete the settings.
2.2.4 Display Customer Attributes
2.2.4.1 Frontend
Display customer attributes in Registration Page:
*Note: Customer Attributes for Magento 2 extension only supports checkbox in the frontend while in the backend, the checkbox is displayed in multiple-selection type.
A New Account email will be sent to the register, which includes the customer attributes based on the admin’s configuration.
Display Customer Attribute in Account Information of My Account Page:
At Checkout Page:
Customer attributes can also be displayed on Order Confirmation email:
And on Order Detail Page under My Account.
2.2.4.2 Backend
Go to Customers ⇒ All Customers.
Display customer attribute in Customer Grid:
Display customer attribute in Customer Detail Page:
Go to Sales Orders.
Display customer attribute in Order Detail Page:
2.2.5. Import Customer with Attributes
Customer Attributes for Magento 2 extension allows importing customer with the created customer attributes by using the .csv file.
Firstly, prepare the file of customer information with customer attributes to import. All created customer attributes must be included in the import file with each customer attributes code listed in separate columns. Please make sure that all customer attribute codes are the same as attribute codes of existing customer attributes.
For customer attributes with the input type is a checkbox or radio button, use option's ID instead of options' value. For customer attributes with the input type is a dropdown or multiple select, fill in with correct options' value.
Admins can also download the sample file by following System Import.
In Entity Type, choose Custom Main File to import new customers with customer attributes.
In Import Behavior, select one of the following actions:
Add/Update complex data: New data is added to the existing attributes in the database.
Delete Entities: Any existing data of entities in the import file is removed from the database of the stores.
Custom Action: Admins can also override the import behavior by writing a custom option.
In Select file to Import, upload the file prepared earlier. Make sure that the size of the uploaded file is not more than 3M.
On completing, tap Check Data button in the upper-right corner. Wait for few seconds for the validation to perform.
If the import data is valid, the successful message will be displayed as in the screenshot. Click on Import button to process the import to the end of the data. Otherwise, there is any problem in data, the error message will appear. Just correct the invalid data and re-upload the file.
2.3. Magento 2 Checkout Custom Fields
Checkout Custom Field for Magento 2 extension helps admins collect additional information from customers by letting them fill in custom fields during the checkout process. Admin can create these custom fields and include them in Shipping or Review and Payments of the checkout page.
2.3.1. General Configurations
Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Checkout Custom Field.
In Enable Checkout Custom Field, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it.
In Custom Field Title, enter the title for custom fields which are displayed in order detail, PDF invoice and email.
In FormatDate, choose the format for the date input type to display on the checkout. There are 2 options:
Show Date and Time: Both date and time are included in the calendar view.
Only Date: the Only date is included in the calendar view.
In Show in PDF Documents, choose Yes to include custom fields in PDF documents or NO to exclude them.
In Show in Email, choose Yes to include custom fields in the email sent to customers or NO to exclude them.
2.3.2 Manage custom fields
Go to Sales ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Manage Checkout Custom Fields.
To create a new custom field, click Add New Attribute.
In Attribute Information ⇒ General Information ⇒ Attribute Properties.
In Default Label, enter the name of the new custom field.
In Input Type for Store Owner, choose one of the following input types for the custom field: Text Field, Text Area, Date & Time, Yes/No, Checkbox, Radio Button, and Dropdown.
In Values Required, choose Yes to make the custom field compulsory to fill in; otherwise, choose No.
In Visibility, select which store view the custom field is available.
In Attribute Information⇒ General Information⇒ Advanced Attribute Properties.
In Attribute Code, enter a code for the new custom field. No space allowed and no more than 30 symbols.
In Sort Order, decide the order of displayed custom fields in checkout.
In Default Value, set default value for the custom field so that if customers don’t fill in that field, the default value will be applied.
In Input Validation for Store Owner, choose one of the following input types to be validated for the custom field: Decimal Number, Integer Number, Email, URL, Letters, and Letters (a-z, A-Z) or Numbers (0-9).
In Frontend Visibility, choose Yes to display the field in the frontend; otherwise choose No.
In Backend Visibility, choose Yes to display the field in the backend; otherwise choose No.
In Show in Checkout, display custom field in Shipping Address, Shipping Method or Review & Payments of the checkout page.
In Add to Order Grid, choose Yes to add the custom field to the order grid; otherwise, choose No.
In Add to Order Detail, choose Yes to add the custom field to order detail; otherwise, choose No.
In Add to PDF Documents, choose Yes to add the custom field to PDF documents; otherwise, choose No.
In Add to Email, choose Yes to add the custom field to email; otherwise, choose No.
2.3.3. Checkout custom fields at checkout
2.3.4 Orders
Go to Sales ⇒ Orders.
Custom fields are added to the Order grid.
BSSCommerce Checkout Custom Field for Magento 2 extension also supports you to get order information from API.
Custom fields are displayed on theOrder Detail page.
In PDF invoice:
In order to include custom field value in PDF invoice, you need to enable config Show in PDF Documents (see 2.1, page 3), and enable config Add to PDF Documents (see 2.2, page 6) before placing the test order.
Custom fields are displayed in PDF invoice.
2.3.5 Email
Go to Marketing ⇒ Communications ⇒ Email Templates ⇒ Add New Template.
After loading the default template, in Template Information, click Insert Variable.
Add the variable Checkout Custom Field to any place in the template content, then click Save Template.
Then go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Sales Emails.
In Order New Order Confirmation Email Template, choose Email template you have just created.
When you send an email to the customer using the new template that has been created, the custom field value will be included.
2.4. Order Delivery Date
With the help of Order Delivery Date for Magento 2 extension, shipment information for every order from your Magento 2 based websites will be more detailed and clearer than ever.
2.4.1 Set up the delivery date
Order Delivery Date for Magento 2 offers store owners an easy way to set up and control advanced delivery time choices for their customers’ orders. In Admin Panel, navigate to the section of this extension: Stores ⇒Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Order Delivery Date.
Enabled: select Yes/No to turn on or off this extension from taking effects.
Display At: this section lets you decide where the part for customers fill in details about delivery dates will be shown: Shipping method and Shipping Address.
*Note: When using 3rd-party payment methods, customers can modify delivery date/comment when in Review Order tab.
It is required to Update Delivery Date to save changes before selecting Place Order button.
Processing Time: the number of days from the time an order is placed on the website until when the delivery can begin. If you set it as 1 day, then a customer placing an order today has his options of delivery date start from tomorrow.
Cut Off Time: set up as a point of time in the day when the order made after that will be counted as being made on the next day.
Holidays/Exclude Days/Blackout Days: These are the days that are not available for delivery picked in the calendar by admin. They will be faded in the delivery calendar shown for customers and of course, they cannot be selected. Admin can add more unavailable days like that by clicking the button “Add” or delete them by clicking on the trash bin icon under column “Action”. Content for each one may be filled in, the reason for its out-of-options status for instance.
Time Slots: set up delivery time more exactly by hours in the day. You can also add new time slots or Delete them, and write a note for each one just in a similar way to what you do with Holidays/Exclude Days/Blackout Days before.
Enable Shipping Arrival Comment: choose Yes if you want to show a comment box for customers. If not, choose No.
Disable Delivery Date: you can fix the days in every week that are not available for choosing delivery dates.
Date Fields: you can choose which format as you want for Delivery Date.
Icon Calendar: you can choose the icon of the calendar as you wish.
Add Holiday/Disable Days to Processing Day:
Let’s take an example:
The order date is Monday, June, 4th 2018. Sunday is a disable day while Wednesday, June, 6th 2018 is set as a holiday. The processing time is ten days.
Yes: Disable Days and Holidays will not be counted as the processing days in delivery time.
Then, the earliest day is June, 16th 2018 since the processing days include 04, 05, 07, 08, 09, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15.
No: Disable days and holidays will be still counted as process days.
This time, the earliest day is June, 14th 2018 since the processing days include 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13.
The admin can set Date/Time Slots/Comment field as the required field if wanted.
2.4.2 Insert info to sales emails
Besides allowing a very detailed timing customization, Order Delivery Date for Magento 2 extension also adds customers’ Delivery Date, Time Slots and Arrival Comments Information directly to Orders/Invoices/Shipments/Credit Memos info in the backend for admin to keep tracking more easily. To check it, from Admin Panel you go to Sales section and choose which one you want to see. Opening every single order/invoice/ shipment/credit memo you will see the added part of this module.
As for Emails, Order Delivery Date for Magento 2 Extension automatically adds Delivery Date, Time slots and Arrival Comments as given by customers into email variables so that when creating an email template, you can use this information if needed. To do so, from Admin Panel you go to Marketing ⇒Email Templates ⇒Add new template:
Step 1: Choose a template from the list and tap Load Template to edit the template as wanted.
Step 2: Enter Template Name, for example, “New Order for Guest.”
Step 3: Choose where in template content you want to display new variables value and click Insert Variable…
Here is the list of variables you can freely pick from.
Click on the variable to insert it into the template, as below:
Step 4: Save Template on completing the insert of the variables.
Step 5: Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Sales Emails
In New Order Confirmation Template under Order settings, choose the new created email template and Save Config.
When you continue to send emails to your customers as usual using the templates that were just created, Delivery Date, Delivery Time Slot and Shipping Arrival Comment will be included.
2.5. Shipping/Payment Methods per Customer Group
Please go to STORES ⇒ Methods for Customer Group by BssCommerce ⇒Payment / Shipping
2.5.1. IN PAYMENT
In Payment Methods, choose one or multiple customer groups in each of the enabled payment methods available.
Then, click Submit button to save all figuration.
2.5.2. IN SHIPPING
In Shipping Methods, select one or multiple customer groups in each of the enabled shipping methods available.
Then, click the Submit button to save all figuration.
2.6. Pre-select Shipping and Payment Methods
Pre-select Shipping/Payment for Magento 2 extension is a simple solution to speed up customers’ purchasing process by pre-filling the shipping method and payment method on the checkout page based on their availability and configured position.
Follow Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Pre-select Shipping/Payment.
2.6.1. Auto Shipping Config
In Enable, choose Yes to have Auto Shipping Config enabled on the websites; or No to disable this feature.
In Auto Select Shipping Method: Admins can pick a given shipping method to be automatically filled.
If admins want to have more methods to select, please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Shipping Methods and enable needed methods.
In Shipping Method Position: If the shipping method auto-selected above is not available, one of three following options is applied.
None: Shipping Method is under customers’ decision as the default Magento 2.
Last Method: Auto-apply the last shipping method on the checkout page.
First Method: Auto-apply the first shipping method on the checkout page.
2.6.2. Auto Payment Config
In Enable, choose Yes to have Auto Payment Config enabled on the websites; or No to disable this feature.
In Auto Select Payment Method: Admins can pick a given payment method to be automatically filled.
If admins want to have more methods to select, please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Payment Methods and enable needed methods.
In Payment Method Position: If the payment method auto-selected above is not available, one of the three following options is applied.
None: Payment Method is under customers’ decision as the default Magento 2.
Last Method: Auto-apply the last payment method on the checkout page.
First Method: Auto-apply the first payment method on the checkout page.
2.7. Checkout Success Page
Magento 2 Checkout Success Page is an extension that allows store owners to customize Checkout Success Page (known as Thank You Page) as they want, display order details and style success page with a thank you message, a coupon code, CMS blocks, suggested products, etc.
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Checkout Success Page
2.7.1 General
In General, choose Yes to enable the module, No to disable it.
2.7.2 Order Information Section
In Enable, choose Yes to enable section, or No to disable it
In Show Order Status, choose Yes to enable order status, or No to disable it
In Show Product Thumbnail, choose Yes to enable product image, or No to disable it
In Show Reorder Button, choose Yes to enable, or No to disable it
In Show Print Button, choose Yes to enable, or No to disable it
Note: Other order information like shipping address, shipping method, payment method, billing address and order summary are set to enable/disable with the whole section.
2.7.3 Thank You Message
In Enable, choose Yes to enable Thank you message on the success page, or No to disable it.
In Message, you can edit the Thank you message.
In Background Image, insert background image for Thank you message.
Note: In case you don’t add the background image, this module still supports displays the text message well.
2.7.4 Coupon Code Section
In Enable, choose Yes to enable coupon code section, or No to disable it.
In Sort Order, select number (1 to 6) to set the position of this section in the frontend.
In Enable for Customer Groups, choose customer groups who can see the coupon code.
In Description, input the description for the coupon code.
In Use Coupon Code, choose available coupon code in the database or choose “Custom Coupon Code” to enter a coupon code not been in the sale rules database.
Note: The Custom Coupon Code field and Min Subtotal field only appear when you select Custom Coupon Code option.
In Custom Coupon Code, enter a coupon code. This coupon code can be from the third party extension or from another store.
In Min Subtotal, set the minimum amount of merchandise that the customer must purchase to qualify for the discount. This feature is valid only for the coupon entered in Custom Coupon Code field above.
In Background Image, click Choose File button to insert background image for the coupon code.
2.7.5 Social Network Sharing Section
In Enable, choose Yes to enable social networks sharing section, or No to disable it.
In Sort Order, select number (1 to 6) to set the position of this section in the frontend.
Note: this module shares the website homepage on social networks instead of the success page.
2.7.6 Subscription Section
In Enable, choose Yes to enable subscription section, or No to disable it.
In Sort Order, select number (1 to 6) to set the position of this section in the frontend.
2.7.7 CMS Block Section
In Enable CMS Block, choose Yes to enable CMS Block, or No to disable.
In CMS Block, select available CMS Block in your store.
In Sort Order CMS Block, select a number (1 to 6) to set the position of sections in the frontend.
In Enable Custom Block, choose Yes to enable custom Block, or No to disable.
In Custom Block, edit a new CMS Block.
In Sort Order Custom Block, select a number (1 to 6) to set the position of sections in the frontend.
2.7.8 Products Suggestion Section
In Enable, choose Yes to enable social network sharing buttons, or No to disable it.
In Sort Order, select number (1 to 6) to set the position of this section in the frontend.
In Product Type, choose Related Products, Cross-sell Products or Up-sell Products to be displayed in success page.
2.7.9 Frontend Preview
In Order Number, enter order number of an order that you want to watch its success page.
In Preview Here, click on the link to go to success page in the frontend of that order. In case the order number that you fill in does not exist, the success page of the latest order will be presented when you click on the link.
Note: You need to save config before clicking on the link to preview the success page of the order.
2.7.10 Custom Style
Change style of buttons: Print order, Re-order, Continue Shopping, and Subscribe.
In Button Text Color, set the color for text in buttons.
In Button Background Color, set the background color for buttons.
Custom Success title
In Success Icon, upload an icon to be displayed along with the success title
In Success Text, edit a short title for the success page.
Change the style of title boxes, including Shipping address, Shipping method, Billing address, Payment method, Order summary, and Recommended products.
In Title Background Color, choose the background color for the title box.
In Title Text Color, choose text color
In Title Border Color, choose border color for the title box.
Note:
Because the scope of the module configuration is store view, you can customize the success page for each store view.
After setting, you need to save your configuration then flush cache to start using the module.
Magento 2 Reward Point extension is an effective tool to increase customer interaction with websites, encourage customers to purchase products by giving them reward points to their accounts when they place orders, add reviews, sign up, and so on. These points are used to spend on purchasing products/services right on stores conveniently, which improves customer loyalty and closely tight buyers with your business, leading to a long relationship between stores and customers.
2. How does it work?
As an administrator for a Magento 2 store, you can do some following actions with the module’s functions:
Create earning rule to determine how the points are earned
Manage and adjust points for customer accounts
Specify the exchange rate between points and currency for each customer group
Track and manage transactions using reward points made by each customer
2.1. Earning rules
Go to Customer ⇒ BSS Reward Points ⇒ Earning Rules.
There are two types of rules you can create depending on your purpose: Add new cart rule (related to products) and Add new custom rule (related to customer behavior). You click the arrow next to the Add New Rule button and select the desired option.
2.1.1. Add a New Cart Rule
In Rule Information:
Rule name: enter a name for the new rule. For example, we create a rule as “Buy watches to receive points”.
Active: set status for the rule.
From-To: specify a period of time when this rule can be valid.
Websites: select websites to apply the rule.
Customer Groups: assign the rule for suitable one or multiple customer groups.
In Conditions: Based on the specific purpose of the rule, you can set up conditions by selecting from the list.
In Actions:
For this kind of rule, you can choose to give customers X points or give them X points for Y spent. Then you need to indicate the number of points rewarding for customers after they meet conditions.
If you select the type as Give customer X points for Y spent, you have to enter a specific amount buyers need to reach and receive X points in the section of Spent Amount.
Also, it is easy to add more notes to various store views.
2.1.2. Add a New Custom Rule
You follow similar steps to the process when adding a new cart rule, but the only difference stays in the condition section.
InRule Information:
In Conditions:
There is a list of engagement activities related to customer behaviors for you to select.
In Actions:
After creating earning rules, you can manage all of them in the grid table:
2.2. Exchange Rates
In this section, the admin determines the exchange rate between points and the base currency so that customers use points to make transactions.
Go to Customer ⇒ BSS Reward Points ⇒ Exchange Rates ⇒ Add New Rate:
In Website: select a website to apply this rate. Each website can have different exchange rates.
In Customer Group: choose a group whose customers can use points based on this exchange rate. You can add various rates for different customer groups.
In Status: Enable/Disable the rate.
In Exchange rate: specify the number of points to be corresponding to 1 unit of the base currency. For example: 10 means that 10 points = $1 (the default base currency is USD)
*Note: Although you can select All Websites and All Customer Groups to apply this exchange rate, the rates for each website and each customer group has higher priority.
All exchange rates are displayed in the grid for better management as below:
2.3. Transactions
Go to Customer ⇒ BSS Reward Points ⇒ Transactions to track histories of point changes on your website.
In which:
Changed Point: specify the number of points are received or are reduced from their accounts.
Balance: total current points in customer account after changes happen.
Point Expired: update the number of points expiring after a period of time.
2.4. Import and Export Transactions
In case you have a huge amount of transaction data and want to update to the new website, we offer the advanced function to quickly import multiple transactions via a CSV file.
Go to Customer ⇒ BSS Reward Points ⇒ Import/Export Transactions.
You download the sample CSV file to your computer and complete every information as instructed. Then, upload it and start import data to the system.
*Note:
Besides, it is extremely convenient to export available transactions on your site into a CSV file as well.
2.5. Reward Points reports
Our module offers the reward points report function to help you easily keep track of all earned and spent reward points in your store.
To check the Earned Points Report, go to Customer ⇒ BSS Reward Points ⇒ Earned Points Report.
In the report header, you can filter the data based on Websites (all website or a specific website), Customer group (all customer groups or a specific customer group), Period (Day, Week, Month, Year, Overall), and Time (From - To). Click the Refresh button to refresh data after changing the filter.
You can also export this report to a CSV file by clicking the Export button.
Under the header, you will see the Points Earned by Events (%) pie chart. This color pie chart shows the % contribution of each earning events to the total number of points received by the customer. Check the color annotation to find the color of the earning event you want to see and hover over the section with the corresponding color to show the percentage of the earning event.
Then in the table grid below shows the following information:
Period: The survey period that has been configured in the filter bar
Total Earned: Number of points customer has earned in total
Number of points customers has earned from each event
To check the Earned Points Report, go to Customer ⇒ BSS Reward Points ⇒ Spent Points Report.
In the report header, you can filter the data based on Websites (all website or a specific website), Customer group (all customer groups or a specific customer group), Currency (choose the displayed currency of the data in the report), Period (Day, Week, Month, Year, Overall), and Time (From - To). Click the Refresh button to refresh data after changing the filter.
*Note: Only currencies that have the currency rates set will appear in the drop-down list of the Currency filter. To configure currency rates, please go to Stores > Currency > Currency Rates or check this blog for a full tutorial.
Under the header, you will see the Earned Points vs Spent Points (%) pie chart. This color pie chart compares the ratio of spent points to earned points. Check the color annotation and hover over the section with the corresponding color to show the percentage of the information.
Then in the table grid below shows the following information:
Period: The survey period that has been configured in the filter bar
Total Spent: Total spent points customers used
Number of Orders: Number of orders that customers has spent reward points on
Discount for spending points (displayed currency): Order value that has been reduced by spending points, display in currency format configured on the filter bar
Discount for spending points (%): Order value that has been reduced by spending points, display in % format compared to total value of order using points
Total Value of Order Using Points: Total value of orders that customers has spent reward points on
You can also export this report to a CSV file by clicking the Export button.
2.6. Assign points for each product
In addition to creating earning rules, you can also determine the number of points customers can receive when purchasing a product.
Go to Catalog ⇒ Products and choose a product: Joust Duffle Bag, for example.
In Assign by:
No Point: It means customers get no points for this product purchase
Exchange rate: Customers can get points based on the exchange rate created in the Exchange Rate section.
For example:
Exchange rate: 10 points = $1
Product price= $56
=> The number of points customers have: 56*10=560 points.
Fix amount: customers get a fixed number of points.
In Number Point: enter the number of points to reward for customers in case you select Fix amount.
In Dependent on qty:
Choose Yes: Points = X * Qty
Choose No: Point = X
(X as the number of points).
*Note: You need to take notice in the following case:
Suppose that you assign 5 points for product A in the product edit page.
Also, you create an earning rule which gives customers 10 points when they buy products belonging to category Men. Product A is included in the category Men.
⇒ In this case, customers can get a total of 15 points from both purchase rules.
* Note: For fast implement, you can import and export Reward Points via a CSV file.
To import reward points, you add the additional 3 columns to a CSV file of the default and the system will import products with points based on SKU.
assign_by: no point/exchange rate/fix amount.
receive_point: enter a natural number
dependent_qty: yes/no
2.7. Manage Reward Points
As a store admin, you are able to track reward points of each customer by navigating to their accounts in the backend.
Go to Customers ⇒ All Customers and select a customer to see details. Reward Points are placed in a separate section for easy management. Detailed information of points
2.8. Module configuration
Go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce Reward Points to start configuring.
2.8.1. In General
Enable: Set Yes/No to enable/disable the extension
Minimum redeem threshold: the minimum number of points customers need to reach so that they can use these points for transactions.
Maximum reward threshold: the maximum number of points customers can get in their accounts.
Expiry period (days): how long reward points becomes expiry.
2.8.2. Earning points
Allow earning points from tax paid: customers can (cannot) receive points from tax payment based on exchange rates.
Allow earning points from shipping fee: customers can (cannot) receive points from shipping fee based on exchange rates.
Allow earning points from order already paid by points: set Yes/No to enable/disable giving points for customers who place orders by using available points in their accounts.
Maximum points can earn per order: specify the maximum number of points can be given to customers when they place an order.
Maximum points can earn by review: indicate the maximum number of points customers can receive after writing reviews corresponding to the period of time. This function is used in case you create a “Submit Review” custom rule and desire to separate the points and time writing reviews.
For example: a customer submits reviews right after 1 day of purchase could get more points than another one submits after one week.
Select Day/Month/Year from the drop-down list.
Choose a number to indicate a period of time.
Determine the maximum number of points given to customers.
Auto refund order to point balance: set Yes/No to enable/disable refunding order to the point balance in customer accounts.
If you set Yes, a number of points corresponding to the order value are added to customer accounts. (based on the exchange rate).
2.8.3. Spending points
Maximum points can spend for order: specify the maximum number of points customers can use for payment.
Allow spending points on tax: Set Yes/No to enable/disable using points to pay for the tax.
Allow spending points on shipping fee: Set Yes/No to enable/disable using points to pay for shipping fees.
Restore spent points if order is refunded: set Yes to allow returning the number of points already used for placing an order in case this order is refunded.
2.8.4. Display message on points to be rewarded
Message icon: upload an icon to symbolize for points.
Show point balance on header: set Yes/No to show/hide point balance on the website header.
On account page: set Yes to display the number of points customers can get after creating an account.
On subscription block: set Yes to show the number of points customers can get after subscribing newsletter.
On Cart and order summary block: set Yes to display the number of points customers can get.
At review tab on product page: set Yes to show the number of points customers can get after submitting a review and the review is approved by the store owner.
On specific product page: set Yes to display the number of points customers can get when purchasing products.
*Note:
For simple, virtual and downloadable products: display the number of points set up in each product edit page.
For configurable and grouped products: display the number of points according to each children product.
For bundle products:
On catalog page: set Yes to show the number of points can be given.
Use points with slider: display a slider of points to determine how many point to spend on the shopping cart or checkout page.
2.8.5. Email Notification
Email sender: select an email as the sender.
Earn point email: select an email template to notify customers about receiving points.
Spend point email: select an email template to notify customers about spending points.
Reward points expiry warning email: select an email template to notify customers about point expiry.
Send warning before expiry (days): before points become expiry, stores need to send a warning to customers before a number of days.
Subscribe customer by default: set Yes/No to
3. How customers use reward points?
When customers complete some actions such as registering, purchasing products, submitting reviews, and so on, they are rewarded points to their accounts. These points can be used for payment during the checkout process or refund the order.
3.1. In the shopping cart
In the shopping cart, there are 2 ways to redeem reward points to receive discount.
Use slider to determine how many points to redeem.
Enter a number to specify the number of points.
3.2. In the checkout page
3.3. In customer account
Customers can track point history and transactions using points in separate Reward points section of My Account:
Point balance.
Information about exchange rates.
Transactions: display info about transaction type, point changes, point balance after each transaction, point expiry dates. Customer can click View to know more details of each one.
4. API Support
We provide you lists of Restful API and GraphQL API that our Magento 2 Reward Point extension supports.
*Note:
Restful API support is included in the main module package (from M2 Reward Point v1.0.3).
GraphQL API support is included in the GraphQL package, acting as an add-on for anyone who needs to use GraphQL.
Magento 2 Improved Product Sorting extension adds more attributes to help customers to sort products more conveniently. Such product attributes as Most Viewed, Top Rating, Recent Ordered, Best Selling or Average View Per Sale enhances sorting process, providing customers the most matched results on the Magento store.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Improved product Sorting to start making configuration
Select Enabled in the first section to make this module work
In Most Reviewed:
+ Choose Yes to allow sorting products by the number of reviews.
+ Choose how to sort results: Ascending or Descending.
(Apply for parent products of Bundle, Configurable and Grouped products).
In Top Rating:
+ Choose Yes to allow sorting products by ratings.
+ Choose how to sort results by choosing Ascending or Descending.
(Apply for parent products of Bundle, Configurable and Grouped products)
In Newest:
+ Choose Yes to allow sorting products by creation date or date when product information is modified.
+ Choose how to sort results: Ascending or Descending.
(Apply for children products of Bundle, Configurable and Grouped products)
In Recent Ordered:
+ Choose Yes to allow sorting products by creation date of the latest order.
+ Choose how to sort results: Ascending or Descending.
(Apply for children products of Configurable and Grouped products and apply for parent product of Bundle products).
In On Sale:
+ Choose Yes to allow sorting products by discount value.
+ Discount Sort: Choose a type of discount to be sorted (Amount or Percent).
+ Choose how to sort results: Ascending or Descending.
In Best Selling:
+ Choose Yes to allow sorting products by the number of orders placed in a specific period of time.
+ Period: choose a period of time.
+ Choose how to sort results: Ascending or Descending.
In Most Viewed:
+ Choose Yes to allow sorting products by the number of page views.
+ Period: choose a period of time.
+ Choose how to sort results: Ascending or Descending.
(Apply for parent products of Bundle, Configurable and Grouped products).
In Average View per Sale:
+ Choose Yes to sort products by the average number of product page view per order.
+ Choose how to sort results: Ascending or Descending.
In Arrange Sort: In the sort by box in the frontend, you can see a drop-down list of sorting option.
To change the position of these options, you just need to drag and drop them easily:
Other configurations can be made like the following instructions:
You configure Meta Robot Tag and Canonical Tag for SEO purposes.
*Note:
When using this module, you should ensure these configurations be active:
- Recently Viewed/Compared Products: Yes
Go to Stores > Configuration > Catalog > Catalog > Recently Viewed/Compared Products.
- Enable Report: Yes
Go to Stores > Configuration > General > Reports > General Options
If there are no changes in the category page or the dashboard after loading, you need to follow these steps:
Magento 2 Custom Shipping Method allows you to add new shipping methods in a simple way. You can take advantage of available delivery service at your local or any type of delivery service that suits your customers’ demand for shipment.
2. How Does It Work
2.1 In the backend
2.1.1 General Configuration
Go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Shipping Methods ⇒ Custom Shipping Carriers
Enable: choose Yes to use this extension
Title: type the general title for all custom shipping methods
Allowed Methods: click on “Go to Methods” you will be directed to the Custom Shipping Method managerial grid table
Show Method if Not Applicable: choose to show the method when it’s not available for the shipping address or not
Display Errors Message: type the message to notify your customers when there is a shipping method not available with their shipping address
Sort Order: choose the order of the custom shipping carrier amongst a list of shipping methods
2.1.2 Custom Method managerial grid table
To open this table, there are two ways:
Way 1: Go to Sales => Custom Shipping Method
Way 2: Go to Stores => Configuration => Sales => Shipping Methods => Shipping Carriers => Custom Shipping Carrier => Allowed Methods => Go to Methods
Then click on Create New Shipping Method
Enabled In: choose to display the custom method in admin/ frontend/ both admin and frontend or disable it when needed
*Note: You can test the custom shipping method shown only on the admin page in the Sales section. Visit Sales -> Order -> Create New Order. Then click to one user name, and choose the store view that you have configured in your custom shipping method.
Name: type the name of the custom method
Type: choose between “per item” and “per order”. This configuration will decide your customer will be charged per item or per order with the shipping price which is on the below configuration
Price: type the price (note this price is not the final price of the shipping method which can be higher with the handling fee
Calculate Handling Fee: choose to calculate the handling fee by a fixed price or by a percentage of the Price
Handling Fee: set the number to apply the handling fee with the calculating method above
Ship to Applicable Countries: choose the country/countries to which customer can use the shipping method to deliver
Minimum Order Amount: set the maximum amount of the order with which customers could use the shipping method
Maximum Order Amount: set the maximum amount of the order with which customers could use the shipping method
Sort Order: choose the position in which the shipping method is displayed at the checkout page
Store View: choose the store view for the shipping method
2.2 In the frontend
At the checkout page, the custom shipping method will appear in this way.
Magento 2 Storeview Flags extension helps to increase visuality of the whole website by adding nice flats next to store view’s names or replacing these names with flags only. This makes customers easily recognize where to switch stores as well as improve convenience your multilingual websites.
2. How Does It Work?
You go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Storeview Flags to start making configuration.
In Storeview Flags: Set Yes to enable the extension or choose No to disable the function on your website.
*Note: You need to change the scope to configure these settings for each store view.
In Hide Storeview Names:
Select Yes to hide store view names in the drop-down menu. Only flags are displayed.
Select No to show flags along with store view names.
In Upload:
Flag: Upload image of flag for each store view.
You can freely set up flag width and height depending on your website.
Magento 2 Login as Customer is a convenient tool which allows admin to login as his customer from the backend. This extension helps admin to detect such problems related to his customers’ account on the Magento store without asking for their username and password. All of the information of the customers’ account will be kept safe but admin is still able to take necessary actions as his customers usually do. How does it work?
Note: From the M2.4.0 version and above, default Magento support Login as customer function, you should disable function default then turn on the module to avoid conflict.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. In All Customers
Please go to Customers ⇒ All customers
Click Login button to log in a customer account from the backend.
Or click Login As Customer button while editing customer’s information.
The module will permit admins to log in as a customer in the frontend page:
2.2. In Login As Customer Log
Please go to Customers ⇒ Login As Customer Log.
Login As Customer Log shows the history of how many times admin has logged in as customer in the frontend.
Magento 2 Simple Details on Grouped Product extension displays attributes of simple products as a list or grid view on the grouped product page. Hence, store owners can provide more information about children product, such as SKU, thumbnail, stock number, stock status, short description, tier price, and additional attributes.
2. How Does It Work?
Go to Admin ⇒ Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Simple Details on Grouped Product.
Enable: choose Yes to enable the module.
Show SKU: select one of 4 options below in order to decide how SKU of children product is displayed.
+ Do not show
+ In new column:
+ In product name column:
+ When hovering over tooltip:
Show Thumbnail: choose one of these options to decide how Thumbnail of children products is shown.
+ Do not show
+ In new column:
+ In product name column:
+ When hover over tooltip:
Show Short Description: decide how Short Description of children product is shown by selecting one of these options below:
+ Do not show
+ In new column:
+ In product name column:
+ When hovering over tooltip:
Show Stock Number/Status: choose one of these options to decide how Stock Number of children items is displayed. In case, the children product is out of stock, it will show Stock Status, do not display Stock Number.
+ Do not show
+ In new column:
+ In product name column:
+ When hovering over tooltip:
Show Tier Price: choose one of these options to decide how Tier Price of children items is displayed.
+ Do not show
+ In new column:
+ In product name column:
+ When hovering over tooltip:
Show Additional Attributes: all selected attributes will be shown on the grouped product page as the below configuration.
Only Display Attributes With Value: decide whether to display the chosen attributes without value.
+ Yes: Only display the chosen attributes if they have at least one value.
+ No: Display all selected attributes as configurations.
Show Styles: choose one of the options below to decide how the chosen additional attributes will be displayed
+ Do not show
+ In new column:
+ In product name column:
+ When hovering over tooltip:
Show Product URL: Choose Yes to display the product’s URL when this children item is currently visible.
Enable Fix Column Width:
+ Yes: The width of each column will be adjusted equally.
+ No: The width of each column is displayed as default.
Magento 2 Duplicate Category saves much time for shop owners by allowing them to easily duplicate Categories just by one click. Shop owners now just need a few clicks, then “Duplicate Category” will do the rest in just a few moments instead of manually editing and copying. Besides, you can customize your duplicate categories upon your request
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Admin ⇒ Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Duplicate Category to enable this module.
“Duplicate Button” will appear immediately in Catalog ⇒ Categories.
*Note: you cannot duplicate default category
After you have selected a category, click on “Duplicate Button”. A new custom option modal will appear which allows you editing new duplicate category.
New Category Name: name of your new duplicate category. Please note that: A new name for the duplicate category. If you leave it blank, a default name will be set (Duplicate of …)
Duplicate Assigned Products: Choose if you want to add products in the selected category.
Duplicate Subcategories: Choose if you want to add subcategories in the selected category.
Select parent category: Select parent category. In case of no selected parent category, this new category will belong to the default category. If you don’t choose parent category, the duplicate category will belong to default category (id:2).
A successful message will appear if a new duplicate category is created.
Important Notes:
When you duplicate a category, disabled sub-categories from the original one will not be shown in the new copied category.
If you want to show new duplicate categories in frontend, you have to re-index by: go to Magento Root -> run command: php bin/magento indexer:reindex
If your website has a variety of root category, you have to assign root category for a store. You can duplicate after that.
You should not create the same name for duplicate category. Because new URL Key will be duplicated, you can’t create a new one.
If an admin is not assigned to use this function, it won’t work when clicking on “duplicate button”.
In default Magento, customers always have to check out with base currency of the whole website no matter which store view they are staying. Therefore, this module will make the checkout process more convenient when customers use their own currencies corresponding to their store view in order to pay.
2. How Does It Work?
You go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Checkout with Display Currency to start settings.
2.1. General Configuration
In Enabled: Choose Yes to enable the module or choose No to disable it.
In Show Message in Order Summary: Choose Yes to display the message below and No to not display it.
2.2. Set up Display Currency for a store view
Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ General ⇒ Currency Setup ⇒ Currency Option.
Then select each store view in Scope to set up display currency for your wanted storeview.
Example: Set up display currency for English store view
In Store View: Choose English.
In Default Display Currency: choose British Pound Sterling.
In Allowed Currencies: choose British Pound Sterling also.
Then save the config.
When customers buy products in the frontend of English store view and go to checkout, they can checkout easily with British Pound Sterling.
You can see this image:
For checking out via online payment methods such as PayPal:
* Note:
You should test with your PayPal test account on Test Mode to see how it pays with display currency of store views.
The module does not work with currencies that online payment methods don’t support.
The display currency of the store view can be also shown in Order details, Invoices, Shipment, Credit Memo, and confirmation emails.
Customers who already installed the old version of Checkout with Display Currency (from v1.0.0 to v1.0.8), please remove the old versions and reinstall the new version (v2.0.0 and over) to make it work well. Don’t update the extension.
3. API support
3.1 RESTful API
You can use RESTful APIs Get Order in default Magento to get full order information.
3.2 GraphQL API
Now support get store config of the module using GraphQL API.
Note: GraphQL package is an add-on for customers who need to use GraphQL API. If you don't have the need for GraphQL, you don't have to install GraphQL package.
This CSV file includes a lot of necessary information such as customer names, review titles, review details, product SKUs, rating options, and so on. Therefore, store owners can assign reviews for each customer, each product, and also determine review status when importing.
After importing, reviews are displayed in the front end and store owners can easily manage reviews in some sections of the backend.
Please go to System ⇒ Import by BSS and select Product Review in the drop-down list of Entity Type.
2.1. In Import Product Reviews
Before you import product reviews via the CSV file, you need to prepare a CSV file with enough necessary information.
You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields:
There are required data fields for you to complete such as review titles, review details, status, customer nicknames, product SKU, and rating options. If you don't finish this information, you cannot import product reviews at all.
For Date: Follow the right format "dd/MM/yyyy HH:mm:ss".
ForStatus: Enter Approved/ Disapproved. If you don't enter the right format, status is automatically Disapproved after being imported.
ForRating options: fill in ratings for products with the format: "rating_code1:number, rating_code2: number, rating_code3: number".
For example: "Quality:5, Price:4, Service:4".
(*Note: In case you enter a new rating code that is not available in Ratings section of the backend, you can still import reviews and this rating type is automatically created in the backend.)
For Type: there are 3 types - Admin, Customer, and Guest. If you don't enter the right format, the module will change customer type into Guest or the review is created by a Guest.
For Customer ID: If you don't enter customer ID or enter the wrong format, the module will change customer type into Guest.
For Store View Code: Fill in store view code.
*Note: If you want to import product reviews for multiple store views, just separate them by character |
For example: default|eng
For Review ID:
You cannot import reviews if you enter the wrong format.
In case you leave Review ID of a review blank and all of its remaining data is not similar to those of the available reviews shown in the frontend, the module will add this review with a new Review ID. (If there are some similar data to those of available reviews, the module still adds this review with a new Review ID).
In case you leave Review ID of a review blank and all of its remaining data is the same as those of available reviews, the module will take it as an existing row.
In case you enter a Review ID that is similar to an existed Review ID, the module will automatically update the product review based on one review ID.
If Review ID is greater than the maximum review ID in the database, the module will still add this new review.
For Store View Code: you enter the code of store view you want to add reviews into. If you enter the wrong format, the module will change into Default Store View.
*Note: The CSV file size does not exceed 2MB.
When you finish the CSV file, just select it and click Check Data to validate the CSV file.
If your file does not contain any errors, the Import Product Reviews button appears to click and start the import process.
After you import the CSV file, there are messages to notify:
Successfully import with the number of inserted rows
The number of existing rows or invalid rows
After importing, you can manage these added reviews in:
Admin → Product page →Product reviews
Admin → Customer page → Product reviews
Admin → Marketing → User content → Reviews
Admin → Report → Reviews
*NOTE: You can also import product reviews by using this following method:
Upload the CSV file to "var/import/reviews" folder
Product Tags for Magento 2 extension allows you to add multiple tags to products. By using these tags, you can keep your customers stay longer on your site and make purchases.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 General Configs
You go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Product Tags to start setting up.
Enable: choose Yes to enable this extension
Use “Meta keywords” as Tag: when this configuration is enabled, the meta keywords of products will be used as a tag which is displayed on the product page and on the “Tags” page.
Title of Tags List on Product Page: choose the name for the tag section on the product page
Enable Tags on Product Page: choose Yes to display tags on product page
Tag Keywords Sort by: choose the order to display tags on both product page and “Tags” page
2.2 Create tags in Product Tags (Tags Management)
Go to Catalog ⇒ Product Tags ⇒ Add New Tag
In Tag Info tab:
Status: choose Enable to use this tag
Tag: name of the tag
Customize Router: enter the router of the product tag page that you want to customize.
Store View: choose the store view for the tag
In Select Product section, there is a grid table to choose products. You can search product by assignment (yes/no/any), ID, name, SKU, visibility, and price. After filtering out the products, tick “Select all” checkbox or single checkbox off to assign products.
2.3 Create tags in the Product Detail Page
Go to Catalog ⇒ Product ⇒ Product Detail Page, scrolling down to the end of this page, you will find Product Tags section. Under this section, you fill in the field with multiple tags (tag keyword), each keyword is separated from each other by a comma.
Note: tags created by this method work independently with tags created in Catalog Product Tags section and will not be shown in the Tags management
3. In the Frontend?
3.1 On product pages
All the tags created in both Product Details Page and Tags Management will be displayed on the product page
3.2 On “Tags” page
After customers click on one tag on the product page, they will be directed to “Tags” page:
Tags created by both two methods will be displayed
FREE Magento 2 Facebook Pixel extension provides an easy way to add Facebook Pixel code to your Magento 2 website. This piece of code allows you to check and measure 9 standard events: product view, category view, add to cart, initiate checkout, purchase, add to wishlist, registration, subscribe and search.
That way, you can track the results of Facebook Ads campaign and optimize it to reach potential audiences and convert them into sales. Even if you do not run Ads, Facebook Pixel is still an effective tool to track events on the site.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 General configurations
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒Facebook Pixel
Before you begin, please ensure that:
You have a Facebook Pixel ID. If not, create one here.
You know how to check the results triggered by Facebook Pixel. There are three common ways:
Inspecting the web page and opening the Network tab
Tracking statistics in Facebook Analytics
Now back to the general configurations:
In Enable Facebook Pixel: Choose Yes to enable the extension as your settings. Set to No to disable it.
In Pixel ID: Input your Facebook Pixel ID.
2.2 Event settings
First, you can select which page to disable Facebook Pixel tracking. Multiple selections are allowed.
Our FREE extension supports 9 standard events on Magento 2 website, which can be either resulted from Facebook Ads or organic reaches.
Set any event to Yes to track that event via Facebook Pixel code.
Product View: Track product information (name, price, SKU, currency) viewed by users.
Category View: Track category information (name, ID, currency) viewed by users
Add to Cart: Track information (name, base price, SKU, added quantity, currency) when products are added to the shopping cart. For example, they click on Add to Cart button.
*Note: This module supports param value for Add to cart event. Tier price, special price, catalog price rule and cart price rule are not supported.
Initiate Checkout: Track information (SKU, name, qty, price, subtotal, currency) when customers enter the checkout flow. For example, they click on the Checkout button.
Purchase: Track information (SKU, product name, quantity, price order grand total, currency) when customers check out successfully. For example, they land on the “Thank You” page. Personal such as email, phone, first name, last name, city, country, zipcode will be encoded.
Add to Wishlist: Track information of products (name, SKU, price) added to a wishlist.
Registration: Track when an account is created successfully. Please note that some personal information (email, first name, last name) tracked by Facebook Pixel will be encoded.
Subscribe: Track when a newsletter subscription is created successfully. Email is also encoded to secure personal information.
Search: Track searches on your website, for example, product searches.
*Note: This module supports normal price only. It doesn't support dynamic price, tier price, special price and will not be affected by the catalog price rule or cart price rule.
Magento 2 Import Export Newsletter Subscribers is an ideal extension for all administrators to import multiple newsletter subscribers to Magento 2 websites via a CSV file. Besides, exporting all newsletter subscribers or export by store ID and customer type into a CSV file also becomes extremely simple and easy; especially admins can save a lot of time and effort.
You go to System ⇒ Data Transfer ⇒ Import by BSS and select Newsletter Subscribers in the drop-down list of Entity Type.
2.1.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There are 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new newsletter subscribers. In addition, it also updates newsletter subscribers if these subscribers already exist in the database.
+ Replace: The module will delete old newsletter subscribers and then add new ones.
+ Delete: This option allows the system to get newsletter subscribers based on customer_ID in the CSV file, then delete items which are available in the database.
Validation Strategy: select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
+ Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
+ Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds the maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
Accept the default value of a comma (,) for the Multiple value separator. A comma is the default separator in a CSV file. If you want to use a different character, please make sure that the data in the CSV file matches the character that you specify.
2.1.2. CSV File Preparation
Before you import newsletter subscribers via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields:
Field
Format
Meaning
ID
Natural numbers
ID number of the newsletter subscriber.
email
Email
Customer email – which is used to subscribe to newsletters.
type
String
Type of emails: customer or guest.
customer_first_name
String
The first name of the customer. For guests, enter "---"
customer_last_name
String
The last name of the customer. For Guests, enter "---"
status_id
Natural numbers
+ Not Activated: Value = 2.
+ Subscribed: Value = 1.
+ Unsubscribed: Value = 3.
+ Unconfirmed: Value = 4.
(If you don’t enter the status or you enter the wrong value, the default value is 1).
change_status_at
yyyy/m/d hh:mm:ss
The time when customers subscribe to the newsletter.
web_site
String
Website where customers subscribe to the newsletter.
store
String
Store where customers subscribe to the newsletter.
store_view_code
String
Store view where customers subscribe to the newsletter. If you enter the wrong value, it is changed into Default.
2.1.3. In File to Import
After you finish the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
2.1.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing newsletter subscribers in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
2.2. Export Newsletter Subscribers
You go to System ⇒ Export by BSS and select Newsletter subscribers in the drop-down list of Entity Type.
You choose CSV in the Export File Format field.
In Export By section: you can export all available newsletter subscribers by choosing All from the drop-down list or export them based on store IDs or Subscriber type.
Export by Store ID:
When exporting by Store ID, you need to select a store to export from.
Export by Subscriber type:
More Magento 2 Import Export extensions from BSSCommerce are useful for your work:
Being an owner of a global Magento 2 store, you must know better than anyone the challenges of running a multiple store view ecommerce. GEOIP Store Switcher for Magento 2 will bring up user experiences in multi-store website to a whole new level. The extension helps detect user’s IP location and redirect them to the appropriate store view.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE and start configuration.
Before enabling the extension, you should update GEOIP database for both IPv4 and IPv6. Please choose one of the 3 options in each database update.
2.1. In Update Database GEOIP
In Upload Custom File, you can upload a custom file (such as a paid database version from MaxMind) to be the database. However, in case the uploaded file is larger than the limit of the server, this option will be not available.
* Note: When you upload the file, you need to rename it and use the right format so that the file can be uploaded successfully and then the system runs cron. The file format must be the .zip file (This .zip file includes CSV files). After finishing uploading, choose Save Config then click Upgrade Data.
In Upload Custom URL, you can fill in the URL of the database file if you cannot upload it in the Custom File option (when the file is larger than the limit of the server). After completing, choose Save Config then click Upgrade Data.
In Update Database from MaxMind, please click in Upgrade Data to automatically download the Database from MaxMind or to use the uploaded file. After the file is extracted, a notification “Waiting for Cron run!” will be shown, and please wait for the database to be updated.
*Note: If Upload Custom File and Upload Custom URL are left blank, the module will use the Country Lite Database in MaxMind page. Hence, not all IP countries are available in this database.
On the other hand, the extension also uses another tool named IPinfo to identify the IP country in case it cannot be found in the database.
In the following configuration, please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE GEOIP Switch Store
2.2.GeoIP Switch Store
2.2.1. In General
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the module and please note that you need to Upgrade Data before using this extension.
In Enable Popup: Choose Yes to enable this function; otherwise, choose No.
When you select Yes, this Popup appears for customers to switch store view as wanted with the first choice is the current IP of the visitor:
*Note: The Popup configuration needs to work well with settings in the Redirect Scope sections:
+ If you select Redirect Scope as Store, a popup is shown when users access a store view under the same store with the intended store view. For example, Canada customers can receive a popup when they come to the US store view. (The intended store view is Canada store view).
+ If you select Redirect Scope as Website, a popup is shown when users access a store view under the same website with the intended store view. For example, Canada customers can receive a popup when they come to the UK store view.
+If you select Redirect Scope as Global, a popup is shown when users access to any store views under the global installation. (It is not the intended store view, of course).
+ On the frontend, if customers close the popup and not proceeding with changing to a storeview, they will stay in the current storeview.
From the 1.3.9 version moving forward, the popup only shows storeviews that assigned to the visitor's country (determined via the visitor's IP).
Furthermore, you need to navigate to each store view on the website and make more configurations for this option. When you change the scope, you can also see 2 settings for the popup which ask customers whether they want to switch store view or not (as we mentioned above). You need to configure these 2 sections according to each store view.
+ Notification message for customers on popup: enter a message to notify customers on the popup.
+ Label of "Switch store" button: enter a wanted label for the "Switch Store" button for customers to click.
In Allow Manual Switch after Redirect: Choose Yes to allow customers to switch store view after being redirected, otherwise choose No.
Ver 1.3.9 update:
Given customer on the A page, after choosing redirect, they will be redirected to the same version of the A page on the destination storeview.
In all cases of on/off manual, customers can't access other storeview via URL with store code.
Once customers are on your website with a specific storeview, they can only switch to another storeview via a manual switch. If customers enter your site via a random URL of your site on another tab (given cookie is not expired), then they will always get redirected to the last storeview they previously switched to arrive.
In Default Redirect URLs: This is an additional configuration you need to set up in case you select Yes in the above Allow Manual Switch after Redirect field. It means if customers go to this default redirect URL, they are always redirected to the setup store view (in Apply Redirect Country field), even when they switch to other stores/ store views.
Note: If Add Store Code to URLs is set to Yes, in the Default Redirect URLs function, you need to enter a URL that includes the store code for it to work correctly.
For example: Admin enter a default redirect URL as https://domain.com
+ Set up country code as Singapore. Customers from Singapore are redirected to Singapore store view: https://domain.com/sg.
+ When customers go to the https://domain.com from Singapore, they are redirected to https://domain.com/sg. Then, they switch to the US store view https://domain.com/us. However, when they access to https://domain.com again, they are still redirected to https://domain.com/sg. (In case admin choose store view scope as Singapore and set Apply Redirect Country as Singapore - this configuration is explained later).
+ If you leave it blank (no default redirect URL), customers from Singapore, in this case, stay on https://domain.com/us when they visit https://domain.com because the system only redirects them once.
In Redirect Scope: There are 3 options: Global, Website, and Store. To explain how to configure this correctly, we will use the following website hierarchy as an example.
+ If you choose Store as Redirect Scope, the visitors will be redirected within the store views under the same store. For example, Canada customers will always be redirected to Canada Store View when they go to the American Store. If they go to the rest 2 stores (French, UK), they will not be redirected.
+ It’s similar for Website as Redirect Scope. Visitors will be redirected when they access any of your store views under the same website. For example, Canada customers will always be redirected to Canada store view when they go to any of the store views and store under the English website. If they go to the French website, they will not be redirected.
+ For Global Scope, visitors will be redirected when they enter any store views. For example, Canada customers will always be redirected to Canada store view in any case.
In Enable Switch Website: choose Yes to show a dropdown list of websites to switch conveniently.
For example:
*Note: For flags to describe websites, you need to add flags to this folder: /Bss/SwitchWebsite/view/frontend/web/images/flags.
Image should be named under the format as flag_<store_view_code>.png
In Enable Cookie: Choose Yes to enable saving cookies about GEOIP data, otherwise choose No. In case the cookies are enabled, the data about GEOIP will be saved. When visitors go to your site, the GEOIP data will be taken from the previous visit.
In Time Save Cookies: Enter the time duration for the cookies to be saved. Please note that you mustn't enter a number exceeding 300 years (equal to 109,500 days); otherwise, you will face with an error.
*Note: The popup asking customers to switch store view also disappears when this cookie saving time terminates.
For testing purposes, we come up with URL for Tester and IP for Tester as follow:
Enter the URL in URL for Tester and IP address in IP for Tester.
Note:
If you cannot use IP or Fake IP, it is possible to enter URL or IP of any country and check the module.
Our Magento 2 GEOIP Store Switcher extension works well with both Ipv4 and Ipv6 address.
The IP for Tester feature will redirect users to store view assigned by the IP entered.
Hit Get URL button.
Copy the URL. Open an incognito tab to check whether you are redirected to the right store view.
2.2.2. In Apply Redirect for Country
Please change the scope to Store View of the website and start configuration. You can select one or multiple countries so that customers coming from these chosen countries will be redirected to each corresponding store view. For countries that are not assigned to any store view, visitors from those will be redirected to the default store view. In case one country is assigned to 2 store views, customers are redirected to the store view with lower ID.
From ver 1.3.9: The module prioritizes the Store view with a smaller sort storeview. If the sort storeviews are similar then the priority shifts for storeview with smaller ID number.
For example: If you want customers from Canada to be redirected to Canada store view, you need to change the scope to Canada store view and select Canada as Apply Redirect for Country.
2.2.3. In GeoIP Blacklist/ Skip
This feature allows admins to block specific IPs and countries from access to your site. The blocked IPs and countries will be redirected to an assigned URL only.
In Enable Blacklist: Choose Yes to enable GEOIP Blacklist, otherwise choose No.
In IP Blacklist: Enter one IP per line to set the IPs to be blocked. Then, visitors from these IPs cannot access your site. When trying to do so, they will only be redirected to an URL you set below.
Ver 1.3.9 update: If 1 country/IP get set in numerous configuration then the prioritized check sequence is processed as followed: Blacklist (P0) => skip redirect => default redirect => main redirect
In Countries Blacklist: Select countries to be blocked from your site. Then, visitors from these countries cannot access your site. When trying to do so, they will only be redirected to an URL you set below.
In Redirect Visitor to URL: Enter URL including http:// or https:// to redirect blocked users to a page. If you want to redirect blocked visitors to a CMS page, please enter the URL key of the page. If left blank or the URL entered is invalid, customers can enter whatever page they want.
In Skip Redirect with IP: Enter IP addresses that will not be redirected when access your website. Enter one IP per line. Work only when "Enable Popup = No".
In Skip Redirect with URL: Enter one URL path per line to set the URL to be excepted from redirection. When visitors access these URLs, they will stay in the default store view. Work only when "Enable Popup = No".
+ For homepage: enter /
+ This function works with store view URL under the format: _store=us, for instance.
In Skip Redirect User Agent: Select user agents to prevent them from being redirected when crawling to your site. Please note that bots are not redirected if your website does not have the URL with store code.
*Note: If you select Agent as Google, you need to resubmit Google Ads to be approved again.
2.2.4. Varnish and Fastly CDN Configuration
Configuration to make GEOIP work with Varnish Cache:
You can read more about how to configure Magento to use Varnish HERE.
*Note: before you exporting VCL for Varnish 3 and 4, you need to save all configs.
Step-by-step process:
1. Login Magento as admin
2. Access config: STORES > Settings > Configuration > ADVANCED > System > Full Page Cache.
3. At config Caching Application, choose Varnish Caching.
At sub vcl_hash , find the following code snippet:
if (req.http.cookie ~ "X-Magento-Vary=") { hash_data(regsub(req.http.cookie, "^.*?X-Magento-Vary=([^;]+);*.*$", "\1")); }
Then under the found code, insert this code:
if (req.http.cookie ~ "country_code=") { hash_data(regsub(req.http.cookie, "^.*?country_code=([^;]+);*.*$", "\1")); } if (req.http.cookie ~ "currency_status=") { hash_data(regsub(req.http.cookie, "^.*?currency_status=([^;]+);*.*$", "\1")); } if (req.http.cookie ~ "last_store_id_visited=") { hash_data(regsub(req.http.cookie, "^.*?last_store_id_visited=([^;]+);*.*$", "\1")); } if (req.http.cookie ~ "last_full_url_visited=") { hash_data(regsub(req.http.cookie, "^.*?last_full_url_visited=([^;]+);*.*$", "\1")); } if (req.http.cookie ~ "customer_has_redirected=") { hash_data(regsub(req.http.cookie, "^.*?customer_has_redirected=([^;]+);*.*$", "\1")); } if (req.http.cookie ~ "customer_has_open_popup=") { hash_data(regsub(req.http.cookie, "^.*?customer_has_open_popup=([^;]+);*.*$", "\1")); }
With version 1.3.9, there are changes regarding file varnish vcl's content, hence, you should follow the instructions below:
With customers that installed the module previously and used the old config varnish, you need to fix the file varnish vcl as follow:
+ at block config sub vcl_recv, find and delete this old config snippet:
If any redirect issue happens, this function will help store admin to check the change logs of redirects, or currency changes from certain IPs. They will be stored in code file
In Enable Debug Mode: choose Yes to enable or No to disable this function
In Debug IP:
Fill in the IPs that you want to run debug mode for,
Or leave the field blank to run debug mode for all IPs.
2.3. GeoIP Switch Currency (from v1.1.8)
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable this function. It only works when you select No for Enable Popup settings (in 2.2.1 part).
If you choose No, currency works as default.
Ver 1.3.9 Update: This function works with both Enable/ Disable Popup.
In Setting list: click Add and then enter the information of country, country code, and currency code.
For example:
It means that US visitors accessing the website are redirected to US store view and Display currency is also switched to USD if USD is included in the Allowed Currency of the US store view.
Guest to Customer for Magento 2 extension allows automatically converting guest users to real customers after they finish the checkout process. This module also gives more options for admin to choose by showing a Guest management grid table in case they don't want to auto convert guests to customers. Previous orders are placed by the same email of guest users before are also assigned to converted customers. Moreover, assigning guest users to customer groups is also very easy because admin can assign right in the extension configuration or make mass actions in the Guest Management Grid.
2. How Does It Work?
To configure the extension, please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Guest to Customer.
2.1 General configs
In Enabled: set Yes to enable or set No to the module.
In Assign Orders with The Same Checkout Email to Customer: Choose Yes to enable this function and choose No to disable it. The logic of this config is presented as follow:
Config status
Customer behaviors
Result
Yes
Create an account right after the purchase using this button on the checkout success page:
The order gets assigned to the customer profile both frontend and backend.
Yes
Create an account using after the purchase using the button on the header:
Due to complications regarding time delay between orders and the relation with the invoice, credit memo,... outside of a sheer order => Currently, in this case, the extension doesn't support assigning orders with the same email to the new account.
Yes
Checkout using the registered email but not login
The order gets assigned to the customer profile both frontend and backend
Config: Yes. The customer creates an account right after their purchase using the button => The orders get assigned to the customer profile both frontend and backend.
Config: Yes.
In Sync address, choose Yes to synchronize customer's address when the billing address and shipping address are the same.
In Auto Convert to Customer: there are 2 options to select.
+ If you set Yes, guests are automatically converted to real customers after they finish their checkout.
In Customer Group: select customer group to assign converted customers.
+ If you set No, guest users after checkout will be included in a Guest Management grid table. Then, you can make mass actions to assign them to customer groups. This action also means that you manually convert them to real customers and create accounts for them.
For guests placing orders before you install this extension, you can still import them to the Guest Management grid, and convert them into customers automatically or manually.
Accordingly, pick a period time to import guest in From and To.
Then, click Import button to import guests.
2.2. Guest Management
You go to Customers ⇒ Guest ⇒ Guest Management to check this table:
If you want to convert any guest to a customer, you tick in the box and then choose Assign a Customer Group. Specific customer groups are displayed to select:
After choosing customer group and submit the request by click OK in the popup, guests are converted to customers.
2.2 Notification email
In Enable Notification Email to Customer: choose Yes to enable this function or choose No to disable it.
In Email Sender: select one store email to send notification emails to customers. These emails confirm customer account information to login into store website.
In Email Templates: select email template. This extension provides a default email template and you can easily customize in Marketing ⇒ Communications ⇒ Email Templates.
After converting, new customers will receive an email with templates as configured:
Customer Approval for Magento 2 extension outweighs the default of Magento 2 by allowing admins to approve or disapprove new accounts as they want. This definitely helps store owners to manage new customer accounts.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 In the frontend
After a customer creates an account, there will be a Pending message shown up:
Next, a notification email will be sent to admin:
Then admin accepts or declines new accounts, there will be Approval or Disapproval emails sent to customers.
Here is a Successful Registration email:
Here is an Approval email:
Here is a Disapproval email:
When this customer signs in, if his account is still pending, then the Pending message will be displayed. In case his account is disapproved, there will be a Disapproved message:
2.2 In the backend
2.2.1 General configuration
Go through Stores ⇒ Setting ⇒ Configuration⇒ BSS Commerce Customer Approval
In General Configuration:
Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module.
Auto Approve Accounts:
Choose Yes if you want to accept new accounts automatically.
*NOTE: The difference between this Auto Approve Accounts function and the default is that you still can change customer account status in the backend, whereas the default cannot.
Choose No if you want to approve accounts manually.
In Admin Emails Settings:
Enabled: choose Yes to enable configurations below.
Email Templates: choose one of the available email templates of websites. This selected template will be used to send notifications about new accounts created for admin.
Email Sender: choose a name and email sender from Store Email Address of the default.
In Customer Email Settings:
Enabled: choose Yes so that all configurations below can work.
Email Sender: choose name and email of the sender from Store Email Address of the default.
Registration Successful Email Template: select one of the available email templates for your site. This template will be send after the customer registered an account. Customer does not receive this email if the config Auto Approve Accounts is Yes.
Approval Email Templates: select one of the available email templates for your site. This template will be used if admin changes account status to Approved.
Disapproval Email Templates: select one of the available email templates for your site. This template will be used if admin changes account status to Disapproved.
*NOTE in Email sender (for both Admin and Customer Email Settings):
If you use SMTP to send mails then it just allows you to register the sender’s name. This Email Sender function gets email only in email configuration of the SMTP module. Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Advanced ⇒ System ⇒ Gmail/Google Apps SMTP Pro in order to change email sender as you want.
If your server is not registered via SMTP to send emails then this configuration will get both name and email of the sender.
*NOTE for 'Login as Customer' function: By default, admins cannot login as customer with accounts that are in Pending or Disapproval status.
2.2.2 Customer Attributes in the backend
In Customer Grid:
After installing Customer Approval for Magento 2 extension, there is a Status column in Customer Grid in the backend:
In addition, admin can edit this status conveniently right in Customer Grid:
Moreover, admin can have mass action: choose multiple customer accounts to approve or disapprove them at once:
In Customer Information:
Status information is included in Customer View:
Admin can change an account status as wish in Account Information:
2.2.3. Required Email Confirmation
After installing this extension, in case admin sets Yes in Require Emails Confirmation, then when a customer creates an account, he cannot use his account and will be redirected to login page. A confirmation email will be sent to this customer so as to confirm his email and admin will also receive a notification about new accounts at the same time.
Next, this customer confirms his email then he will redirect to the login page. Pending message will be shown and still cannot use his account until the admin changes its status into Approved.
2.3 Notes for Installation
Copy all folders of the module into the root folder
Name the folder: Bss/CustomerApproval
Run: php bin/magento setup:upgrade in order to setup the module
Run: php bin/magento cache:flush to clear cache
Run: php bin/magento setup:static-content:deploy
Run: php bin/magento indexer:reindex customer_grid to reindex the customer grid
If the customer grid does not show users then you need to reindex the customer grid by php bin/magento indexer:reindex customer_grid
Customer Attributes for Magento 2 extension adds customer attributes to the Registration Form to collect customer information. The value from the custom customer attributes will be displayed on My Account Page and added to Customer Detail Page, Customer Grid as well as Order Detail in the backend, and at Checkout.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 General config
Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Customer Attributes.
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it.
*Note: The Enable config only affects frontend display. Other backend functions aren’t affected by this config.
In Allow Dowload Customer Attribute File: choose Yes to allow downloading the file uploaded to customer attribute or No to restrict downloads.
In Title of Customer Attributes, enter the name for the customer attributes block. This title will be displayed in Registration Form and My Account Page.
In Set Default Required Attributes for Existing Customer, choose Yes if you want required attributes to be applied for existing customers. Otherwise, choose No.
In Enable Customer Attribute Dependency, YES means you turn on the dependent attribute function. On the other hand, NO refers to turning off this feature.
2.2 Create new customer attributes
Go to Customers ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Customer Attributes.
Customer Attributes Grid which displays all customer attributes created by admin. The Customer Attributes Grid is equipped with all functions like a default Magento 2 grid, including filter, column, mass action (delete, update status).
Click Add New Attribute button to create a new customer attribute. Then, you will see 4 tabs: Properties, Manage Labels, Display Configuration, and Manage Relation.
Later, you can also remove Magento 2 customer attributes, as wished.
2.2.1 Properties
Attribute Properties:
In Default Label, enter a name for the customer attribute.
In Input Type, choose 1 of the 9 input types: Text Field, Text Area, Date, Yes/No, Multiple Select, Dropdown, Checkbox and Radio Button, File (Attachment).
*Note:
If you choose Multiple Select, Dropdown, Checkbox or Radio Button, add options for the customer attribute in Manage Options.
In Values Required, choose Yes to make the customer attribute compulsory to fill in; otherwise, choose No.
Advanced Attribute Properties:
In Attribute Code, enter a code for the customer attribute. No space allowed and no more than 30 symbols.
*Note: In case none value is entered for Attribute Code, the extension will automatically get the value of Default Label as value for this field.
In Maximum File Size (bytes), enter a number to define the largest file size possibly uploaded.
In File Extensions, type allowed file extension that can be uploaded to the customer attribute. Each is separated by a comma.
In Default Value Required for Existing Customer, enter a value if the attribute is set as Required. This field will be only shown when the Values Required is Yes and the Input Type is text field, area, datetime, or file.
In Input Validation for Customer, set a type of data allowed in the field. The available values depend on the Input Type specified.
None—The field has no input validation during data entry.
Decimal number—Accepts only decimal number during data entry.
Integer Number—Accepts only integer number during data entry
Email—Accepts only an email address during data entry.
URL—Accepts only a URL during data entry
Letters—Accepts only letters during data entry
Letters (a-z, A-Z) or Numbers (0-9)—Accepts any combination of numbers (0-9) and alphabetic characters (a-z, A-Z) during data entry.
2.2.2 Manage labels
Customer Attributes for Magento 2 extension supports multiple store view, so you can display different customer attribute labels per store view.
2.2.3 Display configuration
In Sort Order, set the order of appearance for the customer attribute in the Registration form.
*Note: The sort order set here will also decide the order of appearance of the attributes in the backend.
In Status, enable or disable the customer attribute.
In Display in backend customer detail page, choose which customer group you want to display the customer attribute for. There are 3 options to choose:
All accounts: If you choose this option, a list of depending configs will show up (Display in B2B Registration Form, Display in B2B Account page, Display in Registration Form, Display in My Account Page). Choose Yes/No to each depending config to display/hide the customer attribute on the according page.
Normal accounts: If you choose this option, a list of depending configs will show up (Display in Registration Form, Display in My Account Page). Choose Yes/No to each depending config to display/hide the customer attribute on the according page.
B2B accounts: If you choose this option, a list of depending configs will show up (Display in B2B Registration Form, Display in B2B Account page). Choose Yes/No to each depending config to display/hide the customer attribute on the according page.
*Note: The Display in backend customer detail page config is an additional function that only enables when you install both BSS's Magento 2 Customer Attributes & Magento 2 B2B Registration Form.
In Display in Registration Form, choose Yes to add the customer attribute to Registration Form.
In Display in My Account Page, choose Yes to add the customer attribute to My Account Page.
In Display in Order Detail Page, choose Yes to add the customer attribute to Order Detail Page under Sales of Admin Panel.
In Display in Customer Grid, choose Yes to add the customer attribute to Customer Grid.
In Add to Order Confirmation Email, choose Yes to display the customer attribute in the Order Confirmation email.
In Add to New Account Email, choose Yes to display the customer attributes in New Account email.
In Add to Order Frontend, choose Yes to display the customer attributes on Order Detail Page under My Account.
*Note: You need to reindex data of Customer Grid whenever you make any change in Display in Customer Grid config.
In Display on Checkout Page, choose Yes to show added customer attributes in the checkout page - under the shipping address or the payment method (with the virtual cart.) All filled information is saved upon order placement.
*Note: Attributes of all input types, except for "File", are supported at the checkout page.
In Hide If Filled Before, choose Yes to hide the customer attributes at the checkout page if they are filled before.
In Show Attribute in, choose where to show the attribute in the registration form, among Customer Attribute Section, Sign-in Information Section, and Personal Information.
2.2.4. Manage Relation
Then, with Manage Relation, you can set up dependent attributes with catalog input type Yes/No, Dropdown, Radio Button, and Checkbox.
Attribute Value—The value of parent attributes.
Dependent Attribute— The child attribute.
Dependent Value— The value of child attribute.
Action—Delete newly created attribute relation.
Add— Add new attribute relation.
Three display options must be considered: Display at registration form, Display On Checkout page, and Display in B2B Registration Form.
If the you enable parent attribute but disable the child attribute, the child attribute will not display even when the parent attribute is selected.
On the contrary, both parent and child attributes will not be displayed.
Regardless of these three options above, other display settings show separately following each parent and child attributes.
*Note:
In case there are duplicate relations, the module allows to Save and use the duplicate result.
With Customer Attribute, the Dependent Attribute column will only display and allow to select typical Customer Attributes, yet not display Customer Address Attribute.
2.3. Create a new customer address attribute
Go to Customers ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Customer Address Attributes.
Click Add New Attribute button to create a new customer address attribute.
Like adding customer attributes in the section 2.2, there are also 3 tabs: Properties, Manage Labels, Display Configuration, and Manage Relation.
In each tab, you do the same steps as creating customer attributes to fill information in each field.
In Display Configuration tab, you set Yes/No to decide whether to show customer address attributes in these positions or not.
In the Manage Relation section, it will be similar to Customer Attribute.
2.4 Create a new email template
As above, customer attributes are possibly set to display on Order Confirmation email and New Account email.
First off, you need to create a new template which includes customer attributes variable. Please follow Marketing Email Templates Add New Template.
New Order Confirmation email template
In Template section of Load default template, you can select among various default email templates, for example, New Order. Then, hit on Load template button.
Under Template Information, select Insert Variable… to add customer attributes to new order confirmation template.
Do not forget to enter Template Name and Save the new template.
Secondly, set this new template as the Order Confirmation email by going to StoresConfiguration Sales Sales Emails Order.
In New Order Confirmation Template, uncheck Use system value box and choose the newly created email template.
On completing, please Save Config.
New Account email template
Similarly, you can create a new template with customer attributes for New Account email.
In Template of Load default template section, choose New Account (Default) template and hit Load Template.
Under Template Information, enter Template Name and select Insert Variable… to add customer attributes to New Account template.
Then, Save Template.
To set this new template as the New Account template, please follow Stores Configuration Customers Customer Configuration and expand Create New Account Options.
In Default Welcome Email, unmark Use system value box. Then choose the newly created template. Save Config to complete the settings.
2.5 Display Customer Attributes
2.5.1 Frontend
Display customer attributes on Registration Page:
*Note: Customer Attributes for Magento 2 extension only supports checkbox in the frontend while in the backend, the checkbox is displayed in multiple-selection type.
A New Account email will be sent to the register, which includes the customer attributes based on the admin’s configuration.
Display customer attributes on Checkout Page:
*Note: If the customer unchecks the option My billing and shipping address are the same in the payment step, all the customer address attributes will display once again when they create a new billing address for each payment method.
Display Customer Attribute in Account Information of My Account Page:
At Checkout page: You can display both customer attributes and customer attribute address on this page.
Customer attributes and customer address attributes can also be displayed on Order Confirmation email:
And on Order Detail Page under My Account.
Regarding the Dependent Attribute function, child attributes will only appear when the customer fills in a specific value in the parent attribute.
2.5.2 Backend
Go to Customers ⇒ All Customers.
Display customer attributes in Customer Grid:
Display customer attributes in Customer Detail Page:
Go to Sales Orders.
Display customer attribute in Order Detail Page:
Display customer address attribute in Address Information:
2.6. Import Customer with Attributes
Customer Attributes for Magento 2 extension allows importing customer with the created customer attributes by using the .csv file.
Firstly, prepare the file of customer information with customer attributes to import. All created customer attributes must be included in the import file with each customer attributes code listed in separate columns. Please make sure that all customer attribute codes are the same as attribute codes of existing customer attributes.
For customer attributes with the input type is a checkbox or radio button, use option's ID instead of options' value. For customer attributes with the input type is a dropdown or multiple select, fill in with correct options' value.
Admins can also download the sample file by following System Import.
In Entity Type, choose Custom Main File to import new customers with customer attributes.
In Import Behavior, select one of the following actions:
Add/Update complex data: New data is added to the existing attributes in the database.
Delete Entities: Any existing data of entities in the import file is removed from the database of the stores.
Custom Action: Admins can also override the import behavior by writing a custom option.
In Select file to Import, upload the file prepared earlier. Make sure that the size of the uploaded file is not more than 3M.
On completing, tap Check Data button in the upper-right corner. Wait for few seconds for the validation to perform.
If the import data is valid, the successful message will be displayed as in the screenshot. Click on Import button to process the import to the end of the data. Otherwise, there is any problem in data, the error message will appear. Just correct the invalid data and re-upload the file.
2.7. Notes for Disabling/Deleting the Extension
Please pay attention to:
Disable the customer attributes created by the extension when disabling it
Also, delete the customer attributes created by the extension should you want to delete it
This clearance is important because disabling/deleting the extension might interfere with the performance of orders or customer accounts. For example, a required customer attribute may disrupt the checkout/registration process if the extension is no longer working.
With help of Order Delivery Date for Magento 2 extension, shipment information for every order from your Magento 2 based websites will be more detailed and clearer than ever. In the frontend, customers can choose the exact date and time slots; even leave a comment about it. In the backend, website admin can easily control his own conditions to build timing options for customers, including Processing Time, Cut-off Time, Holidays/Exclude days/Blackout days, Time slots, Disable Delivery Date.
Note: The extension doesn't work with Multiple Address Checkout.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 Set up delivery date
Order Delivery Date for Magento 2 offers store owners an easy way to set up and control advanced delivery time choices for their customers’ orders. In Admin Panel, navigate to the section of this extension: Stores ⇒Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Order Delivery Date.
Enabled: select Yes/No to turn on or off this extension from taking effects.
Display At: this section lets you decide where the part for customers fill in details about delivery dates will be shown: Shipping method and Shipping Address.
*Note: When using 3rd-party payment methods, customers can modify delivery date/comment when in Review Order tab.
It is required to Update Delivery Date to save changes before selecting Place Order button.
Processing Time: the number of days from the time an order is placed on the website until when the delivery can begin. If you set it as 1 day, then a customer placing an order today has his options of delivery date start from tomorrow.
Cut Off Time: set up as a point of time in the day when the order made after that will be counted as being made on the next day.
Holidays/Exclude Days/Blackout Days: These are the days that are not available for delivery picked in the calendar by admin. They will be faded in the delivery calendar shown for customers and of course, they cannot be selected. Admin can add more unavailable days like that by clicking the button “Add” or delete them by clicking on trash bin icon under column “Action”. Content for each one may be filled in, the reason for its out-of-options status for instance.
Time Slots: set up delivery time more exactly by hours in the day. You can also Add new time slots or Delete them, and write a note for each one just in a similar way to what you do with Holidays/Exclude Days/Blackout Days before.
Enable Shipping Arrival Comment: choose Yes if you want to show comment box for customers. If not, choose No.
Disable Delivery Date: you can fix the days in every week that are not available for choosing delivery dates.
Date Fields: you can choose which format as you want for Delivery Date.
Icon Calendar: you can choose the icon of the calendar as you wish.
Exclude Holiday/Disable Days to Processing Day:
Let’s take an example:
The order date is Monday, June, 4th 2018. Sunday is a disable day while Wednesday, June, 6th 2018 is set as a holiday. Processing time is ten days.
Yes: Disable Days and Holidays WILL NOT be counted as the processing days in delivery time.
Then, the earliest day is June, 16th 2018 since the processing days include 04, 05, 07, 08, 09, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15.
No: Disable days and holidays WILL be still counted as process days.
This time, the earliest day is June, 14th 2018 since the processing days include 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13.
The admin can set Date/Time Slots/Comment field as the required field if wanted.
2.2 Insert info to sales emails
Besides allowing a very detailed timing customization, Order Delivery Date for Magento 2 extension also adds customers’ Delivery Date, Time Slots and Arrival Comments Information directly to Orders/Invoices/Shipments/Credit Memos info in the backend for admin to keep tracking more easily. To check it, from Admin Panel you go to Sales section and choose which one you want to see. Opening every single order/invoice/ shipment/credit memo you will see the added part of this module.
As for Emails, Order Delivery Date for Magento 2 Extension automatically adds Delivery Date, Time slots and Arrival Comments as given by customers into email variables so that when creating an email template, you can use this information if needed. To do so, from Admin Panel you go to Marketing ⇒Email Templates ⇒Add new template:
Step 1: Choose a template from the list and tap Load Template to edit the template as wanted.
Step 2: Enter Template Name, for example, “New Order for Guest.”
Step 3: Choose where in template content you want to display new variables value and click Insert Variable…
Here is the list of variables you can freely pick from.
Click on the variable to insert it into the template, as below:
Step 4: Save Template on completing the insert of the variables.
Step 5: Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Sales Emails
In New Order Confirmation Template under Order settings, choose the new created email template and Save Config.
When you continue to send emails to your customers as usual using the templates that were just created, Delivery Date, Delivery Time Slot and Shipping Arrival Comment will be included.
3. API Support
We provide you BSS's list of GraphQL API that our Magento 2 Order Delivery Date extension supports.
One Step Checkout for Magento 2 extension helps customers to checkout simply and quickly by displaying all elements in 1 page only. They do not need to experience two parts (Shipping Address and Reviews & Payments) as in default Magento 2 but fill all information in one place conveniently. Therefore, the checkout process becomes more user friendly, which can reduce the abandonment rate and bring a higher conversion rate for online stores.
*Note: Klarna payment is not yet supported from Magento 2.4.4.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ One Step Checkout.
2.1 In General
In Enable:
Choose Yes to enable Magento 2 One Step Checkout extension.
Choose No to disable this module.
In Allow Creating Account On Checkout Page:
Choose Yes to allow customers to create their accounts right on the checkout page.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Title: Write your wanted title for the checkout page.
In Router Name: Choose an URL name for your checkout page.
2.2 In Fields Display
In Show Order Comment:
Choose Yes to show a text box for customers to leave their comments for orders.
Choose No to exclude this box from the checkout page
In Show Discount Code:
Choose Yes to display a discount code box for entering coupon codes.
Choose No to hide it.
2.3 In Newsletter
In Show Subscribe Newsletter:
Choose Yes to allow customers to subscribe to the newsletter on the checkout page.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Auto Check Newsletter Sign up Box: Choose Yes to automatically tick the Newsletter Sign up box or choose No to uncheck.
2.4 In Tracking Address by Google
In Enable Tracking Address by Google:
Choose Yes: Auto-detect and pre-fill customers' country, state/province, city - Google Suggest to autocomplete shipping address while typing.
Choose No: Customers have to find all street addresses and location information themselves.
In Google API Key: Fill in your API Key. In case you haven’t yet had an API Key, please click the link after this configuration to get it.
In Tracking Address from Applicable Countries: This configuration determines which countries to apply auto-suggesting customer addresses. There are 2 options to select:
If you choose All Allowed Countries: auto-suggesting address function is applied to every country.
If you choose Specific Countries: there is a list of countries in Tracking Address from Specific Countries and the maximum number of countries you can select is 5. Moreover, when you choose this option, Google just auto-suggests city name and country, not street name. This is the default function of Google auto-suggest.
*Notes:
Admin has to work with Google and pay for Google Maps to activate the address autocompleting feature.
Your websites must be "https://" to run the auto-fill function.
Your login customers can checkout with multiple addresses.
2.5 In Order Delivery Date
In Show Delivery Date:
Choose Yes to display Order delivery date in the Shipping method section that allows customers to choose their own suitable dates and times to receive orders.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Show Delivery Comment:
Choose Yes to display a Delivery comment box in the Shipping Method section.
In case M2 Order Delivery Date is installed: All features of M2 Order Delivery Date will be active. Customers can choose the delivery date and admin can give them certain delivery time slots:
In case M2 Order Delivery Date is not installed: All features of One Step Checkout delivery date will be active. Customers can choose whatever delivery date and time they want:
2.6 In Gift Message
In Show Gift Message on Order Level:
Choose Yes to allow customers to send a gift message to other people.
Choose No to disable this function.
* Gift Message config is applied only when the corresponding default config is enabled. To enable the default config, please go to Stores⇒ Sales ⇒ Sales ⇒ Gift Options and choose Yes to the suitable gift message level:
2.7 In Gift Wrap
In Enable:
Choose Yes to allow customers to request a gift wrap for their order.
Choose No to disable this function.
In Type: This function currently supports gift wrap for each order only, so the value is Per Order by default.
In Gift Wrap Fee: Fill the price for gift wrap service. The entered value is a positive number and automatically rounded to two decimal places. If left empty or filled with a negative number, the value would turn to be 0.
M2 Customer Attributes: Carefully config the Customer Attributes function to give your customers the best shopping experience! Go to Customers⇒ Customer Attributes. In each customer attribute, go to Display Configuration:
In Display on Checkout Page: Choose Yes to make customer attributes be shown on the checkout page, choose No to disable this function.
In Hide If Filled Before: Choose Yes so that if customers fill the customer attribute for the first time, it will not display after that. Choose No to always display the customer attribute whenever customers go to the checkout page.
M2 Checkout Custom Field: Go to Sales⇒ Bss Commerce ⇒ Manage Checkout Custom Field ⇒ Add New Field to create a custom field for the checkout page.
M2 Pre-select Shipping/Payment: Go to Stores⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ Pre-select Shipping/Payment to config the default shipping/payment method when customers enter the checkout page.
2.9 In Custom Style
In Checkout Step Number Color: you choose the color for the checkout number steps.
In Checkout Step Background Color: Choose a color for the background of checkout number steps.
In Custom Code: you can add more code to customize about background color for the checkout page, “Sign in” button or text color and so on.
2.10 Somes notes
Notes about custom code
+ Change background of the checkout page, you need to add more code:
body { background-color: #333333;
}
(#33333 is the color code which is corresponding to Black).
+ Change text color of the checkout page, you need to add more code:
body { color: #ffffff;
}
(#fffff is the color code which is corresponding to White).
Step 1: Go to Content⇒ Blocks ⇒ Add New Block to create a new block for payment trust badge.
Step 2: Go to Content⇒ Widgets ⇒ Add Widget to choose certain place to display the block of payment trust badge.
Note about adding header/footer for the checkout page: Upload folder bss_onestepcheckout to app/design/frontend/theme_space/theme.
To log in to Amazon Pay on the One step checkout page, you need to check and change the URL so that the URL of Router Name config in BSS One Step Checkout extension is the same as Magento Checkout Url Path one in Amazon.
With the help of this module, Magento store owners can save up a lot of costs especially shipping costs or package costs. No need to worry about the too small or too large number of order products each category, using this extension, admin can avoid all obstacles in managing order product quantify per categories.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Min/Max Order Quantity per Category for Customer Group to begin setting up.
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the module or choose No to disable it.
In Show Category:
Choose Yes to show product category in the shopping cart. With product belonging to multiple categories, all those categories will be displayed regardless of where customer added the product to cart.
Choose No to hide the product category.
In Messages Limit Max: you can change the notification message when maximum required order quantity per category is not met (This message locates at the top left corner of the Shopping Cart). Without any changes, default message will be shown as: The max quantity allowed for purchase at category{category_name} is {qty_limit} [ Product Name : {product_name} ]
In Messages Limit Min: you can change the notification messages when minimum required order quantity per category is not met. Without any changes, default message will be shown as: The min quantity allowed for purchase at category {category_name} is {qty_limit} [ Product Name : {product_name}]
In Min/Max order quantity:
You can freely choose customer group and category to apply the min/max quantity rule. Click Add button for more options.
After finishing with setup, choose Save Config.
*Note:
For products belong to multiple categories, the order quantity of products needs to meet the min/max requirement of all those categories.
The min/max rule is applied to the total number of products in each category added to cart, not the order quantity of each particular product.
Setting up a limit for order quantity is an essential need for many store owners as it has a remarkable effect on sales policy. However, the default Magento is able to support a few of those demands.
Hence, BSSCommerce has developed Limit Cart Quantity for Magento 2 extension with the hope it will become a useful and effective solution for E-commerce business. The extension helps admin to set a minimum and maximum total quantity of all products in a cart for specific customer groups before checking out successfully. Moreover, the content of the message notifying about quantity error can be customized with expressive choices of words to encourage customers to shop more pleasantly.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ LimitCartQty ⇒ General then set the field Bss_Limitcartqty to Yes.
After that, expand the Product Stock Options and start to configure accordingly.
In Minimum Quantity Allowed for Entire Cart, go to Customer Group column, each line has a drop-down list showing all of your customer groups to select.
In Minimum Qty column, you can set any number you want for the minimum order quantity of all products in the cart for each customer group.
In Action column, click to the trash bin icon to remove the minimum quantity required for any customer group.
Click Add Minimum Qty to add more rows to set the minimum for more customer group.
In Message Alert For Minimum Value, add the message you want to show to your customer, insert "-conf-" for config value and "-cart-" for cart value.
In Maximum Quantity Allowed for Entire Cart, go to Customer Group column, each line has a drop-down list showing all of your customer groups to select.
In Maximum Qty column, you can set any number you want for the maximum order quantity of all products in the cart for each customer group.
In Action column, click to the trash bin icon to remove the maximum quantity required for any customer group.
Click Add Maximum Qty to add more rows to set the maximum for more customer group.
In Message Alert For Minimum Value, add the message you want to show to your customer, insert "-conf-" for config value and "-cart-" for cart value
Checkout Custom Field for Magento 2 extensionhelps admins collect additional information from customers by letting them fill in custom fields during the checkout process. Admin can create these custom fields and include them in Shipping or Review and Payments of the checkout page.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 General settings
Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Checkout Custom Field.
In Enable Checkout Custom Field, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it.
In Custom Field Title, enter the title for custom fields which are displayed in order detail, PDF invoice and email.
In FormatDate, choose the format for the date input type to display on the checkout. There are 2 options:
Show Date and Time: Both date and time are included in the calendar view.
Only Date: the Only date is included in the calendar view.
In Show in PDF Documents, choose Yes to include custom fields in PDF documents or NO to exclude them.
In Show in Email, choose Yes to include custom fields in the email sent to customers or NO to exclude them.
2.2 Manage custom fields
Go to Sales ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Manage Checkout Custom Fields.
To create a new custom field, click Add New Attribute.
In Attribute Information ⇒ General Information ⇒ Attribute Properties.
In Default Label, enter the name of the new custom field.
In Input Type for Store Owner, choose one of the following input types for the custom field: Text Field, Text Area, Date & Time, Yes/No, Checkbox, Radio Button, and Dropdown.
In Values Required, choose Yes to make the custom field compulsory to fill in; otherwise, choose No.
In Visibility, select which store view the custom field is available.
In Customer Group, pick up the group you want to show the checkout custom field.
In Attribute Information⇒ General Information⇒ Advanced Attribute Properties.
In Attribute Code, enter a code for the new custom field. No space allowed and no more than 30 symbols.
In Sort Order, decide the order of displayed custom fields in checkout.
In Default Value, set default value for the custom field so that if customers don’t fill in that field, the default value will be applied.
In Input Validation for Store Owner, choose one of the following input types to be validated for the custom field: Decimal Number, Integer Number, Email, URL, Letters, and Letters (a-z, A-Z) or Numbers (0-9).
In Frontend Visibility, choose Yes to display the field in the frontend; otherwise choose No.
In Backend Visibility, choose Yes to display the field in the backend; otherwise choose No.
In Show in Checkout, display custom field in Shipping Address, Shipping Method or Review & Payments of the checkout page.
In Add to Order Grid, choose Yes to add the custom field to order grid; otherwise, choose No.
In Add to Order Detail, choose Yes to add the custom field to order detail; otherwise, choose No.
In Add to PDF Documents, choose Yes to add the custom field to PDF documents; otherwise, choose No.
In Add to Email, choose Yes to add the custom field to email; otherwise, choose No.
2.3 Orders
Go to Sales ⇒ Orders.
Custom fields are added to the Order grid.
BSSCommerce Checkout Custom Field for Magento 2 extension also supports you to get order information from API.
Custom fields are displayed on Order Detail page.
2.5 PDF invoice
In order to include custom field value in PDF invoice, you need to enable config Show in PDF Documents (see 2.1, page 3), and enable config Add to PDF Documents (see 2.2, page 6) before placing the test order.
Custom fields are displayed in PDF invoice.
2.6 Email
Go to Marketing ⇒ Communications ⇒ Email Templates ⇒ Add New Template.
After loading the default template, in Template Information, click Insert Variable.
Add the variable Checkout Custom Field to any place in the template content, then click Save Template.
Then go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Sales Emails.
In Order New Order Confirmation Email Template, choose Email template you have just created.
When you send an email to the customer using the new template that has been created, the custom field value will be included.
3. API Support
We provide you BSS's list of GraphQL & REST API that our Magento 2 xxx extension supports.
ANZ eGate Payment Gateway for Magento 2 extensionis developed to integrate ANZ eGate into Magento 2 sites to allow credit card processing right on the sites. This module provides one more secure and reliable payment method supporting many credit types for customers to choose.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Payment Method.
In the Payment Method, you go to ANZ Egate to begin setting up:
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable this module or choose No to disable it.
In Title: You type the name of the payment method displayed on your site (in the Payment section of the checkout page).
In Test mode: choose Yes to set up module in the test mode status, otherwise choose No.
In New Order Status: you pick up an order status that is displayed after these orders are successfully placed by customers.
In Merchant Id, Access Code and Secure Hash Secret: These are your account information in ANZ eGate.
In Payment from Applicable Countries: You can select all countries allowed to apply this payment method or select some specific countries.
In Payment from Specific Countries: If you choose some specific countries to apply this payment to in the previous section, you can pick up your own countries from the drop-down list in this filed.
In Instructions: you can type some text to explain or describe more about this payment method. For example: Place Order to redirect to ANZ eGate website.
In Sort Order: you choose the order of this payment method on the checkout page.
Delete Order for Magento 2 extension is a helpful and easy-to-use extension which allows website admin to clear out the backend from all unwanted orders, invoices, shipments, as well as credit memos. Thanks to that, users can effectively keep track on and control over all remaining important orders.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 Delete orders
Please go to Sales ⇒ Orders, a list of all orders will be shown as usual. Tick on the checkbox of unwanted order(s) and choose the action Delete Orders in Select Items box.
Then a pop-up will appear for action confirmation. Select OK to completely delete the order(s).
You can also delete orders from Order View Page by choosing Delete button in the Information tab of a particular order.
Note:
You can delete many delete orders at a time by ticking on their checkboxes.
Once you delete an order, it would be removed permanently from the system and could not be restored. You’d better do it carefully.
When an order is deleted, all of its related information like shipment, invoice, credit memo will be erased too.
2.2 Delete invoices
Go to Sales ⇒ Invoices and select Invoices you want to wipe out of the backend and then choose Delete Invoices in Select Items box. After that, a popup appears and you click OK to confirm removing these selected Invoices.
After Invoices are deleted, order status turns back to Pending (if shipments have not been created) or Processing (if shipments have already created). Credit memos are also removed. Invoices can be also recreated.
You can also delete invoice of a particular order in its Order View Page by going to tab Invoices, click on Delete button or choose Delete Invoices in Actions dropdown box.
2.3 Delete shipments
Similar to deleting orders and invoices, we can erase unneeded shipments by navigating to Sales ⇒ Shipments and select Shipments that you want to rub out. Then, you choose Delete Shipments in Select Items box and press OK in the confirmation popup to finish the process.
Similarly, you can delete shipment from Order View Page under Shipments tab by clicking on Delete button or choose Delete Invoices in Actions dropdown box.
When a shipment is removed, its order status is updated to Pending (if invoices have not been created) or Processing (if invoices have already been created). Admin can totally recreate shipments.
2.4 Delete credit memos
Like Invoices and Shipments, there are two ways to remove redundant Credit memos:
Go to Sales ⇒ Credit memos, select unwanted Credit memo(s), choose Delete Credit memos in Select Items box, then click OK in the popup to completely exclude them from the backend.
Under Credit Memos tab in Order View Page of a particular order, click on Delete or select Delete Credit Memos in Actions dropdown box.
Order Status is altered to Complete (if invoices and shipments have already been generated) or Processing (if only invoices have been created). Credit memos are easily recreated.
Magento 2 Custom Order Number extension allows you to change the order number, invoice number, shipment and credit memo number. You can customize these numbers to make them meaningful and easy to manage.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Custom Order Number
2.1 Custom order number configuration
In Enable: choose Yes to enable customized order number, or No to disable it (the order number is default order number).
In Number Format: enter a format containing letters, numbers as well as variables for the order number.
+ The variables that you can add to the order number format:
{counter}: an incrementing number, is set up in the below configs.
{d}: date with no 0 leading.
{dd}: date, always has 2 digits
{m}: month with no 0 leading
{mm}: month, always has 2 digits
{yy}: year with 2 digits
{yyyy}: year with 4 digits
{storeID}: ID of the Store that customer placed the order in. It should be used in case your website has multiple stores.
{rndNumbers**}: random a number, replace ** by a number to set the padding for a random number. For example, you enter {rndNumber01}: the output of this variable will be the one-digit number, {rndNumber02}: the output of this variable will be the two-digit number...
{rndLetters**}: random letters, replace ** by a number to set the padding of this variable. For example, you enter {rndLetter01}: the output of this variable will be one letter (a, b, c...), {rndNumber02}: the output of this variable will be two letters (ab, mn...)
{rndAlphanumberic**}: random both number and letters, replace ** by a number to set the padding of this variable.
Configuration of {counter} variable:
In Start Counter From: enter a number to set which number the {counter} variable begins counting.
In Counter Increments: enter a number to set the {counter} variable increases by for every new order made. For example, if you set the increments to 5 and the last counter number is 004, the next counter number will be 009.
Note: After setting the new increments, you should reset the counter to be not confused when managing the order document.
In Number Counter Padding: enter a number to set the total of digits for the counter number. For example, if the counter is at 9 and you set padding is 6, it would output 000009 (there are 5 numbers “0” added into the front of the counter number).
In Reset Counter Number: choose an option to reset counter numbers automatically daily (By Day), weekly (By Week), monthly (By Month), yearly (By Year) or choose Never to never reset the counter.
Note: This module will reset counter depending on the time of sever and please make sure that cron job in your website always operates (refer Configure and run cron in MagentoDev Docs).
In Reset Counter Number Now: click on the Reset Now button to reset the {counter} variable immediately. It is just reset for the next increment number.
Note: If your website has multiple store views, you can customize the order number for each store view.
In Configuration Store View, please select a store view. The config “Use Different Counter Numbers for Different Store Views” will appear.
In Use Different Counter Numbers for Different Store Views:
+ Choose Yes to use an individual sequence of the counter for each store view, which means each store view has own sequence. For example, your website has 2 store views A and B.The first order is placed in store A and the sequence of {counter} variable of order number in this store is 1. After that, an order is placed in store B and the sequence of {counter} variable also is 1, because it is not depended on the store A.
+ Choose No to use the sequence of the counter for all store views (like default). In case the below example, the sequence of {counter} of order number in store B is 2, not 1.
Note: If the order number is duplicated, a random number will be added to this number.
2.2 Custom invoice number configuration
In Enable: choose Yes to enable the customized invoice number, or No to disable it (use the default invoice number).
In Similar to Order Number:
+ Choose Yes to use the invoice number same as the order number, which means that the invoice number will use the transaction the order number belongs to. You can replace letters part in order number format by other letters that are more suitable (you can’t replace the variable in order number format:
In Replace Part of Order Number: enter a letters part of order number format that you want to replace it
In Part of Order Number is Replace by: enter the letters that replace with the above part.
+ Choose No to not use the invoice number same as the order number. You can customize an individual invoice number like customizing order number above.
2.3 Custom shipment number configuration
It is the same as the Custom Invoice Number Configuration.
2.4 Custom credit memo number configuration
It is the same as the Custom Invoice Number Configuration.
Note:
- Because the scope of the module configuration is store view, you can customize the numbers for each store view.
- After setting, you need to save your configuration then flush cache to start using the module.
2.5 Set User Role to manage the module
Please go to System ⇒ Permissions ⇒ User Roles⇒ Role Resources.
Auto Invoice for Magento 2 extension allows automatic generation of invoices and shipments after customers’ orders are completed. Admin can save time and effort with the smart mechanism of auto-generation instead of manually creating invoice and shipment document in the backend. Moreover, the invoice and shipment confirmation emails are also automatically sent to customers.
*Note: Klarna payment is not yet supported from Magento 2.4.4.
2. How Does It Work?
Go to Admin Panel ⇒ Store ⇒ Settings ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ Auto Invoice.
In Enabled, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it.
2.1 Select payment method
In Select Payment Methods, select one, multiple or all payment methods to apply auto invoice/shipment generation.
When a customer has successfully placed an order, this order has the order state as "new".
Based on the "new" order state and the selected payment method, Magento 2 Auto Invoice extension will automatically export the order invoice.
This means some online payment methods such as PayPal, Credit Card...which create order state as "processing" and "pending payment" won't work for this logic of Auto Invoice for Magento 2 extension.
Noted:
When customers use Amazon Pay with payment action Charge on Order, the module works as normal.
However if the payment actions is Charge on Shipment, request to create Invoice will get denied by Amazon. Hence, our module does not support this payment action.
NEW: The Magento 2 Auto Invoice extension is now:
Compatible with Klarna payment
Compatible with Paypal express method with action: Sale, Order, Authorize
2.2 Enable automatic invoice/shipment generation
In Enable automatic invoice generation, choose Yes to enable the function then invoices will be generated automatically after orders are completed.
In Select capture status for online payment method(s), choose capture with auto invoice for online payment: + Capture Online: Once auto invoice is created, the amount captured will transfer from customers account to your business account. + Capture Offline: The order amount will not be processed via payment channel , invoice status = Paid + Not Capture: Orders that have not been paid, invoice status = Pending
In Attach PDF File To Invoice Email, choose Yes to add invoice PDF to invoice email. This config will show only when admin Enable Auto Invoice.
In Enable Partial Auto Invoice, choose Yes to auto invoice some products in the order that meet the rule from the Manage Partial Invoice Rule grid. This config will show only when admin Enable Auto Invoice.
In Enable automatic shipment generation, choose Yes to enable the function then shipment will be generated automatically after orders are completed.
Remember that only when automatic invoice generation is enabled, can you enable automatic shipment generation.
In Attach PDF File To Shipment Email, choose yes to enable the function to add shipment PDF to email shipment. This config will show only when admin Enable Auto Shipment.
2.3 Manage partial invoice rule
Go to Admin ⇒ Stores ⇒ Manage Partial Invoice.
Here you will see a grid of existing partial invoice rules and their detailed information:
ID: rule's ID
Rule Name: rule's name
Status: rule's status (active or not active)
Priority: rule's priority (1 is the highest, 0 is the lowest, the default setting is 0)
Store view: the store view that apply the rule
Action: for each rule, you can Edit or Delete it
To create a new partial invoice rule, click on the Add New Rule button on the top right.
Rule Name: enter the name of the new rule
Active: in the dropdown, choose Yes to active the new rule, No to not active it
Priority: enter 1 or 0 to set the priority for the new rule, 1 is the highest, 0 is the lowest
Store view: in the dropdown, choose the store view that the rule is applied
Rule: click the + button to choose and set up conditions for the new rule
2.4 Invoice/Shipment confirmation email
If you enable both the automatic invoice and shipment generations, your customers will receive 3 emails after ordering completely: Order confirmation, Invoice confirmation, and Shipment confirmation.
Check email samples as follow:
Invoice confirmation email
Shipment confirmation email
2.5 Select capture status for online payment methods
In the configuration panel, you can choose to the capture status up to 3 status:
Capture Online
Capture Offline
Not Capture
2.6 Create order shipment independent with order invoice
You can create order shipment independent with the order invoice within the backend configuration. This comes in handy when you want more flexible with your work flow.
For example: You allow customers to pay after they receive their order.
As its name, Auto Cancel Order for Magento 2 extension is to cancel all pending orders automatically after an amount of time set by the admin. Moreover, the admin can also configure different cancelation time for specific payment methods as wanted.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 General configurations
Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Auto Cancel Order.
In Enable, choose Yes to enable or No to disable the extension.
In Consider Cancelation after, pick the day to start the Auto-cancel-order function.
In Order Status Option, choose the order status (Pending, Pending Payment) to apply the automatic cancelation.
In Payment Method Group, specify cancelation time for each payment method.
Payment Group: Choose the payment method. You can select All payment methods and apply the only one cancellation time.
Duration: Enter the period of cancelation.
Unit: Choose hour or day.
Action: Delete the payment method rule.
*Note: Click the Add button to add more payment method rules as wished.
In Apply Now, click the button to apply the auto-cancel-order function without waiting for the cron job.
Please note that the rules above work based on the cron schedule of your site. Hence, if you want the automatic order cancelation to be in effect immediately, then use Apply Now button.
In Show Log, click the button to see the history of all canceled orders.
*Note: You can also access this grid by following Reports ⇒ BSS Auto Cancel Order ⇒ Cancel Log.
2.2 Canceled orders in Orders grid
Please go to Sales ⇒ Orders.
In the Order Grid, the admin can keep track of order and order status. Order in pending/pending payment status will be automatically changed to “Canceled” after a specified period set in Payment Method Group (refer to 2.1 section.)
*Note: The module will automatically restock salable products after the order is canceled.
Tax per Store View for Magento 2 extension helps admin to set different taxes for a product per store view by changing scope of Tax class attribute into Store View. Therefore, this module is really a good solution for Magento 2 stores with multiple store views to charge local customers particular taxes.
2. How Does It Work?
To Enable/Disable the extension, please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Tax Per Store View:
+ Set Yes to enable the module or set No to disable. This configuration is on the Global scope.
When installed, this extension solves tax issues for each store view by allowing admin to select different Tax Classes with specific tax rates to apply for each product in the store view level, instead of the website level as in default Magento.
Therefore, we will follow 4 steps:
Set scope for Tax Class as Store View.
Create Tax Rate (if necessary).
Create tax rules to apply for each tax class along with wanted tax rates. Tax rate in each rule will be applied for products in each store view as you want.
Edit Produc tax class of each product per store view.
2.1. Set Scope for Tax Class attribute
You go to Store⇒ Attributes ⇒ Product and find Tax Class attribute.
*Note: You should search the attribute code of Tax Class or Attribute Label that you name when creating it. In this case, we search attribute code of Tax Class as tax_class_id and click to edit.
In Properties, you go to Advanced Attribute Properties and change Scope into Store View:
Then click Save Attribute.
2.2. Create Tax Rates
You go to Store ⇒ Taxes ⇒Tax Zones and Rates to add new tax rates with different rates which are suitable to your store views.
To help you understand better, we take two examples: we add 2 new tax rates as below:
UK-*-Rate 1: This tax with a rate of 8% is used for the United Kingdom.
FR-*-Rate 1: This tax with a rate of 10% is used for France.
2.3. Create Tax Rules
After creating suitable tax rates for each country (corresponding to each Store View), you need to add tax rules as you want.
You go to Store → Taxes → Tax Rules and click Add New Tax Rule.
In our examples, we will create 2 tax rules for 2 store views as below:
Tax rule is applied for the English store view with a rate of 8%:
In Rule Information:
+ Name: fill in the name of your rule.
+ Tax Rate: select wanted tax rates for this rule. In this case, we select the rate as UK-*-Rate1.
*Note: You can also add new tax rates here by clicking Add New Tax Rate button and there is a popup appeared for you to create. In addition, you can quickly import/export tax rates in Additional Settings:
Hence, there are 3 ways for you to add new tax rates.
In Additional Settings:
+ Customer Tax Class: Select wanted customer class to apply this rule. If you want to create new customer tax classes to apply, let's click Add New Class button.
+ Product Tax Class: select a product tax class or multiple product tax classes to set for products. If you want to create new ones, let's click Add New Tax Class button.
In this example, we create a new one called Taxable Goods - English and select it for this tax rule.
+ Priority: enter a number to indicate the priority of this tax, when more than one tax applies
+ Calculate Off Subtotal Only: tick this box if you want taxes to be based on the order subtotal.
+ Sort Order: enter a number to indicate the order of this tax rule when listed with others.
Then Save Rule.
Tax rule is applied for the Frech store view with a rate of 10%
You follow the same above steps by selecting the tax rate as FR-*-Rate 1, creating a new Product Tax Class as Taxable Goods - French and choose it for this tax rule.
As a result, we have 2 tax rules used for the English store view and French store view. Each rule has its own rate and is used for particular product tax class.
2.4. Apply different product tax class
After you set up tax rules as you want, you need to edit the tax class of each product in each store view.
You go to Products ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Choose a product to edit ⇒ Price and switch store view to select product tax class with your wanted tax rates set up in the tax rules.
In this case, we choose Strive Shoulder Pack product with the original price in default store view as $32.
In English store view: we select Tax Class as Taxable goods - English (this product tax class is included in the Tax rule "Tax for English store view" with the tax rate of 8%.
In French store view: we select Tax Class as Taxable goods - French (this product tax class is included in Tax rule "Tax for French store view" with the tax rate of 10%.
Then you go to the frontend, add this product to cart and see the results:
In English store view: the product is taxed at the rate of 8%. You add this product to cart and see how the tax is applied as below:
In French store view: the product is taxed at the rate of 10%.
You should clear all products in the shopping cart, then switch to French store view and add Strive Shoulder Pack to cart:
Shopping Cart Price Rule per Store View for Magento 2 helps administrators to set up shopping cart price rule for store views, instead of the whole website as Magento default. Therefore, store owners can provide their local customers with particular promotions programs to encourage them to purchase more and enhance sales effectively.
2. How Does It Work?
After installing this module, you will select store views to set up cart price rules when you create new rules.
Go to MARKETING ⇒ Cart Price Rules ⇒ Add New Rule.
You fill in the necessary information in sections of Rule information. Especially, in Store View section, you will select store views to set up this rule and apply in the frontend. You can select multiple store view to carry out setup at one time.
Take 2 following examples to see how Shopping Cart Price Rule per Store View for Magento 2 can function in details.
Example 1:Set up a rule “20% OFF for orders including 3 or more products” for English store view.
In Rule Information:
+ Fill in Rule name and Description.
+ Set Yes for Active.
+ Select English of Main Website Store in Store View section.
+ Select customer groups to apply.
+ Set up Coupon, Uses per Customers, Valid Time and Priority for this rule.
In Conditions: Set up the right condition for this rule.
In Actions: Choose suitable actions for the rule.
In Labels: Write a label for each store view to specify which promotion is being applied.
Finally, you save the rule and see how it is applied in the frontend:
Example 2: Set up a rule “30% OFF for orders which has subtotal greater than $500” for French store view.
You do the same steps as in Example 1 but you need to choose French store view to set up in Store Views section.
In Conditions:
In Actions:
Finally, you save the rule and see how it is applied in the frontend:
Magento 2 Product Grid Inline Editor extension allows editing product directly on the admin product grid. The admin can edit name, price, quantity and other attributes of one or multiple products without navigating to each product edit page. The module also works well even the product grid is being filtered or redirected from another page.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. General configs
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Product Grid Inline Editor.
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
In Allow Editing Content of Input Types: multi-select product attribute input types including Text Field, Text Area, Date, Yes/No, Multiple Select, Dropdown, and Price to allow editing in the grid.
*Note:
If the Date input type is allowed editing, the default format in the grid for you to customize is mm/dd/yyyy.
Quantity is considered as Text Field input type, so you can edit product quantity only when the Text Field is picked.
In Edit Multiple Rows: choose Yes to allow editing multiple rows (products) in the grid at once, or No to not allow.
In Edit Single Cell: choose Yes to only edit a cell is clicked at once, or No to take action on all editable fields in a row.
* Note: Edit Multiple Rows and Edit Single Cell function can’t work together. If you turn both configs to Yes, only Edit Single Cell function will be enabled. Although Edit Multiple Rows is Yes, you are not allowed to take action on multiple rows.
After selecting all configs, press Save Config button, and flush cache to start using this module.
2.2. Edit Attributes in the admin product grid
Please navigate to Catalog ⇒ Products, the admin product grid is displayed on this page. You can add columns (both default and custom columns) to product grid.
2.2.1 Edit a product in a row
To edit a product that is displayed on a particular row, please click on the row (except first tick-box and links).
The selected row is enabled and the editable information and attributes are included in boxes, which are available for you to change their values. After editing, you need to hit one of the following buttons to complete:
Cancel: cancel all your recent adjustments on this row, and all values in the row won’t be changed.
Save: save your changes.
*Note: You are not allowed to:
Edit Quantity of these product types: configurable, grouped, and bundle product.
Edit cells in Price attribute input type of these product types: configurable product, grouped product, and bundle product with dynamic price.
Edit ID, Thumbnail, Type, Attribute Set, Websites, Action (link) of all product types.
2.2.2. Edit multiple rows
To edit multiple rows at once, please follow this instruction:
Step 1: Choose a row
Step 2: Select other rows to be edited together by checking box, an additional row including editable boxes that are correlative to the selected rows will be enabled.
Step 3: enter the custom values to the All in Column boxes
Step 4: Choose Apply button in the additional row to apply new attribute values to all chosen products.
Step 5: Choose Save Edits or Cancel button to complete.
*Note: You can edit multiple products in different types, but the new values can be applied to only allowed editing input types.
2.2.3. Edit a single cell only
When you set to allow editing single cell only, you need to click on the cell you want to edit and enter the new value, then press Save button.
*Note: With MSI:
You can edit multiple source quantity and status via popup under Edit Single Cell type only.
Can not work with Edit Multiple Rows type.
All enabled Sources will be displayed in the popup (including unassigned Sources); when a Source's quantity is edited, that Source will automatically be assigned for the product.
Multiple Store View Pricing for Magento 2 extension helps store owners to set up different prices for the same product in various store views of a store while Magento 2 default does not support this function.
For example, you want to sell a table at £50 in English store view but in the French store view, the price you want customers to pay is €80. Therefore, it totally depends on the demands of store owners as well as business strategies for each local target customers.
Moreover, this module also allows administrators to set up base currency for each store view so that customers can easily checkout with the currency of store view.
It can be said that this is really another very outstanding feature of Multiple Store View Pricing for Magento 2 to make more convenient for both customers and store owners.
2. How Does It Work?
*Note: This user guide is applied to Magento 2 Multiple Store View v2.1.4 and above. If you want to read user guides of other versions, please contact us!
In Catalog Price Scope, there are 3 options for admin to choose: Global, Website and Store View. You choose Store View to enable the module.
Then you click Save Config and begin to customize the prices of products in each store view of each store.
*Note: After saving the config, you need to do the following things:
+ Reindex catalog price by running php bin/magento indexer:reindex catalog_product_price so that prices can be reindexed according to each store.
+ Reindex catalog price rules.
In addition, you go to BSSCommerce ⇒ Multiple Store View Pricing in Configuration also to select how to set up tier prices.
There are 2 options for using tier prices:
Merge Tier Price and Tier Price for Store View: It means that the product will take tier price set up for both website and store view.
Use Only Tier Price for Store view: The product only takes tier prices set up for store view.
→ In this case, we select "Use only tier price for store view".
(This configuration is explained in detail section 3 at the end of User Guide. Please take a look for better understanding).
2.2. Set up base currency for each store view
2.2.1 Set up base currency for English store view
In Configuration, you go to General ⇒ Currency Setup to set up base currency for the English store view.
Choose English store view from Store View Section.
In Base Currency: Choose British Pound Sterling as the base currency and customers will use this one to checkout.
In Default Display Currency: you can choose British Pound Sterling or any other currency because this one is only displayed in the product or category page, not used in the checkout.
In Allowed Currencies: Choose British Pound Sterling.
Then, click to Save config button.
2.2.2. Set up base currency for French store view
In Configuration, you go to General ⇒ Currency Setup to set up base currency for the French store view.
Choose French store view from Store View Section.
In Base Currency: Choose Euro as the base currency and customers will use this one to checkout.
In Default Display Currency: you can choose Euro or any other currency because this one is only displayed in the product or category page, not used in the checkout.
In Allowed Currencies: Choose Euro.
Then, click to Save config button.
2.3. Set up different prices for the same product per store view
2.3.1. Set up product price in English store view
Step 1: Choose English in Store View box.
Step 2: In Price section, you unmark “Use Default Value” and add your wanted price for the product in this English store view: £100, for instance.
Step 3: You can also set up Special Prices and Tier Prices for this product by clicking Advanced Pricing.
Step 4: You save configuration and see changes in the frontend.
Price of Put It Messeger Bag in the English store view:
2.3.2. Set up product price in French store view
Step 1: Choose French in Store View box.
Step 2: In Price section, you unmark “Use Default Value” and add your wanted price for the product in this French store view: €200, for instance.
Step 3: Set up Special prices and Tier prices for the product in the French store view.
Step 4: You save configuration and go to the frontend to see the changes:
Price of Put It Messenger Bag in the French store view:
As a result, you can successfully set up different prices for a product in two store views.
*NOTE:
You can change the scope of "Special Price From...To..." by setting up the config in default Magento.
Following the below steps:
Stores > Attributes > Product
Find 2 attributes: special_from_date and special_to_date
Click to Advanced Attribute Properties, change the optional scope: Global, Website, Store View.
2.4. Set up different prices for custom options per store view
Select Use Default Value check box to set custom option price with the base currency. Otherwise, deselect this one to set custom option price with the display currency of this store view.
2.5. Explanation about Tier Price Config
When you edit tier prices for the product in each store view, there are 2 options for you to choose in Tier Price Config and it determines how tier prices are displayed in the frontend.
Merge Tier Price and Tier Price for Store View: It means that the product will take tier price set up for both website and store view.
Use Only Tier Price for Storeview: The product only takes tier prices set up for store view.
Let's take an example: You have a product with the following settings as below:
Website tier price: buy 7 for $7 each.
Store view tier prices:
+ Default store view: buy 5 for $10 each.
+ French store view: buy 10 for $5 each.
Tier Price Config:
+ Default store view: choose Merge Tier Price and Tier Price for Store View.
+ French store view: choose Use Only Tier Price for Store view.
In the frontend, we have results as below:
+ In Default store view:
+ In French store view:
*Note: You want to set up tier prices for the same customer group in Customer Group Price and Tier Price for Store View configuration at the same quantity but different prices, tier prices displayed in the frontend are the lowest values.
+ To make Catalog Price Rule per Store View work with Multiple Store View Pricing, you go to the app/etc/config.xml file of Magento, find this line 'Bss_MultiStoreViewPricingCatalogRule' => 1 and then you replace this line by another line 'Bss_MultiStoreViewPricingCatalogRule' => 0
+ Flush cache
+ You should reindex after setting up or editing catalog price rules.
When you add a new store, you also need to reindex.
When you edit prices of simple products of bundle products and group products in each store and then go to the category including these products, the prices are not changed. Because it is the way that the core is solving.
When you sort by or filter, default Magento does not take the special price of simple products of configurable products. It will sort or filter based on the original price of configurable products.
Set up shipping cost (Table Rate, Free Shipping and Flat rate) for store view level. It means that admin can change the shipping cost, shipping condition, and handling fee of these shipping methods for each store view. You can take a look at the following examples:
+ Flat Rate:
+ Free Shipping:
+ Table Rate:
Set up Minimum order amount for each store view.
The module works well with Promotion rule
In case you select a discount as a fixed amount, the module will convert the amount based on the currency of the default config and base currency of store view.
The option "Use default Value" is always ticked for Special price and Normal price and if you haven't yet unticked, special price and normal price take values of default configs.
In addition, there are some more important issues you should take a look at. Read all HERE!
Import prices in storeview scope
The module supports importing prices and tier prices in storeview scope. Please refer to the guides below to import:
Based on popular demand, we've developed and released the API add-on for this extension. The API support is only available when you purchase the Premium API Support in our Pricing Plan.
Following this spreadsheet to see all the API input:
4.1 REST API
The REST APIs below is used for tier price, base price, special price with store view scope:
Magento 2 Inventory Report extension keeps tracking of all inventory adjustments. This module helps you follow the stock change of all products in a grid and view the inventory report of each product in its product edit page.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. Inventory Report for all products
Please go to Admin ⇒ Products ⇒ Inventory ⇒ Inventory Report.
A grid logging all product stock movement will appear.
In ID column: ID of the change in product inventory.
In Product ID column: ID of product that is changed quantity.
In Product Name column: product name linked to product edit page.
In Product SKU: product SKU and it is linked to product edit page.
In Time column: the time that the inventory is modified. It depends on settings in Admin ⇒ Configuration ⇒ General ⇒ Locale Options. Click on the arrow (↑ or ↓) to change the order of time quickly.
In Quantity column: current quantity of product.
In Quantity Change column: quantity of products that are modified.
In Stock Status column: stock status of product (In Stock/Out of Stock)
In Note column: note the action that makes quantity change, such as Order Creation No, Order Cancellation No, Credit Memo Refund No, Import Product, Admin Manual Change and Change stock by REST API. (the order number is attached to the notes relating to order)
In User column: display who makes the product inventory change.
In Source Name column: new function in Magento 2.3 specifies the name of warehourses or physical stores where you get products to ship to customers.
In Action column: click on View Order or View Memo to see the detailed order or detailed credit memo.
New update:
Enable Salable Quantity and Salable Quantity Change column:
In the User column: separate the inventory changemaker: admin, customer, or guest. There is also a quick link to see the customer details.
Note:
This module only works with products having stock management.
All actions with grid in Magento 2 are also valid with this grid. You are able to sort, filter, search, show/hide columns, pagination and export data.
You can delete inventory log by selecting wanted logs and click Action box to remove.
2.2. Inventory Report for each product
Please go to Admin ⇒ Products ⇒ Inventory ⇒ Catalog, click on Edit to go to product edit page.
In BSS Inventory Report section, there is a grid table showing all stock changes of this product.
You can also navigate to product edit page by click on the product name or SKU in the inventory report grid of all products.
2.3. Actions make quantity change
Admin manual change
+ Change quantity in product edit page
+ Add new product
Create order
+ Customers create order from the frontend
+ Admin Create order in the backend
Please go to Sales ⇒ Orders ⇒ Create New Order.
Cancel the order and show the quantity change
Create an invoice for the downloadable, virtual product, source quantity
Create credit memo: Refund (full/partial)
This module only logs the quantity change due to creating credit memo if you select the “Return to Stock” option.
Import product (in case import new product or update quantity for product)
Go to System → Import, in Entity Type, select Products to import products.
Note: This module can also track if the order is backorder.
2.4. Disable Inventory Report
Because you can’t enable/disable the module by configuration, to disable the module, you need to:
+ Run php bin/magento module:disable Bss_InventoryReport
+ Run php bin/magento cache:flush to flush cache.
3. APIs
Based on popular demand, we've developed and released the API add-on for this extension.
Following this spreadsheet to see all the API input:
3.1 REST API
The REST APIs below are used to create order, invoice order, create shipment, etc.:
Magento 2 Import Export Wishlist Item is an ideal extension for all administrators to import multiple products to the wishlist via a CSV file. Besides, exporting wishlist items by product SKU or customer email into a CSV file also becomes extremely simple and easy, especially admins can save a lot of time and effort.
You go to System ⇒ Import by BSS and select Wishlist Item in the drop-down list of Entity Type.
2.1.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There are 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new items to the wishlist of the website. In addition, it also updates wishlist products if these products already exist in the database and have the same user_email and product_sku as data in the CSV file.
For Configurable product:
If configurable_product_info in the CSV file is the same as the configurable_product_info of an available wishlist item in the database, this wishlist item will be updated.
If user_email and product_sku in the CSV file are similar to user_email and product_sku in the database, but the configurable_product_info does not exist in the database, this item is still added as a new one into the wishlist.
For Grouped product and Bundle product: If user_email and product_sku of parent products in the CSV file are the same as these in the database, the group and bundle product in the wishlist will be updated.
+ Replace: The module will delete old wishlist items and then add new ones.
+ Delete: This option allows the system to get wishlist items based on user_email and product_sku in the CSV file, then delete items which are available in the database.
*Note: In case, you are using Multiple Wishlists, this option also allows the system to get wishlist items based on user_email, product_sku, and wishlist_name of each wishlist product.
Validation Strategy: select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
+ Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
+ Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds the maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
2.1.2. CSV File Preparation
Before you import products to wishlist via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields:
In the following image, you can know data fields in the CSV file and also their meanings.
*Note:
Your CSV file must include enough number of columns like the sample file so that you can successfully import. (If the number of columns is greater or less than those in the sample file, the system will notify you about errors occurring).
For Configurable products: the format of configurable_product_info is attribute1:value1|attribute2:value2
+ attribute: is attribute_code of an option
+ value: is the corresponding value
For example: size:S|color Black
(If one of the attribute codes is wrongly entered in the CSV file, you can still import and the system will skip this wrong attribute.)
For Grouped products: the format of grouped_product_info is product_sku1:qty1|product_sku2:qty2
+ product_sku: SKU of children product.
+ qty: quantity of the children product with corresponding SKU.
For Bundle products: the format of bundle_product_info is product_sku1:qty1|product_sku2:qty2
+ product_sku: SKU of children product.
+ qty: quantity of the children product with corresponding SKU.
2.1.3. In File to Import
After you have finished the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
2.1.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing products in the CSV file into the wishlist of Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about the results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
2.2. Export Wishlist Item
You go to System ⇒ Export by BSS and select Wishlist Item in the drop-down list of Entity Type.
You choose CSV in the Export File Format field.
In Export By section: you can export all available wishlist items by choosing All from the drop-down list or export them based on customer email or product SKU.
Export by Customer Email:
When exporting by Customer Email, you need to enter a specific email of a customer in Input Email.
Export by Product SKU:
When exporting by Product SKU, you need to enter a specific SKU of a product in Input SKU.
Then click Continue button to export wishlist items in a CSV file.
*Note: If you enter a customer email or a product SKU that is not available in the database, the system will export an empty CSV file.
More Magento 2 Import Export extensions from BSSCommerce are useful for your work:
Import Export URL Rewrites for Magento 2 extension allows admins to quickly import multiple URL Rewrites via a CSV file which includes all necessary data of URL rewrites. In addition, this module also supports conveniently exporting every available URL rewrites into a CSV file. Therefore, admin can save a lot of time and effort instead of doing all manually.
*Note: You can read this document from Magento to get more knowledge about URL Rewrites in the default Magento 2:
You go to System⇒ Import by BSS and select URL Rewrite in the drop-down list of Entity Type.
2.1.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There are 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new URL rewrites to the website. In addition, it also updates URL rewrites if their request_paths already exist in the database.
+ Replace:
If the request_path does not exist in the database, you are notified about this non-existence and the module will add a new URL rewrite.
If the request_path already exists in the database, the module will delete old URL and add a new URL rewrite.
+ Delete: This option allows administrators to remove URL rewrite according to the request_path.
Validation Strategy: select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
+ Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
+ Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds that maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
2.1.2. CSV file preparation
Before you import URL rewrites via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields:
*NOTES:
Your CSV file must include enough the number of columns like the sample file so that you can successfully import it. (If the number of columns is greater or less than those in the sample file, the system will notify you about errors occurring).
It is unnecessary to enter target_path if entity_type is product, category, or cms-page because target_path in these cases are automatically generated according to corresponding ID.
When you enter entity_type into the CSV file:
+ if entity_type is product: enter product_ID with category_ID that includes this product or you also don't need to enter category_ID for the product.
+ if entity_type is category: enter category_ID.
+ if entity_type is cms-page: enter cms_page_ID.
+ if entity_type is custom: no need to enter ID but you have to enter target_path to redirect.
For current_request_path: enter the current path of the product or category or you can enter a new path if you want to add a new URL
For new_request_path: enter the new path which replaces the current_request_path.
For target_path: enter the internal path that is used by the system to point to the destination of the redirect
For redirect_type: enter 0, 301 or 302. In case you enter the wrong redirect_type, it will be automatically changed into 0.
2.1.3. In File to Import
After you finish the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
2.1.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing URL rewrites in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about the results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
2.2. Export URL Rewrites
You go to System ⇒ Data Transfer ⇒ Export URL Rewrite. After you select Entity Type to export and click Continue button, links of the export CSV files are displayed for you to download to your computer.
2.2.1. In Export Settings
You select URL Rewrite in the drop-down list of Entity Type.
You choose CSV in the Export File Format field.
2.2.2. In Entity Attributes
In Export By section: you can export all available URL rewrites by choosing All from the drop-down list or export URL rewrites based on each attribute.
Export by Entity Type:
When exporting by Entity Type, you need to select all or which specific Entity type to export URL rewrites.
Export by Store View:
When exporting by Store View, you need to select all or which specific Store view to export URL rewrites of this store view.
Export by Redirect Type:
When exporting by Redirect Type, you need to select all or which specific Redirect type to export URL rewrites.
Then click Continue button to export chosen items in a CSV file.
*NOTE: If your site includes more than 50,000 URL Rewrites, this extension will export into different CSV files and each file can contain a maximum number as 50,000 URL rewrites. Therefore, there are also many links for you to download.
3. Module updates
3.1. Version 1.0.3
If target_path does not exist, the module will display a notification message and skip that row when importing. (only apply to the entity type as custom).
3.2. Version 1.0.5
For entity_type as product, category, and cms-page: If you choose redirect_type as 301 or 302, the target path which is redirected to is URL key of a product, a category or a CMS page.
For example: We have a CSV file as below:
The link: http://domain/magento2-import-export-url-rewrites/test-new-bag-url
(Before this update, this link is redirected to: http://domain/magento2-import-export-url-rewrites/catalog/product/view/id/2 - the original link of the product).
More Magento 2 Import Export extension from BSSCommerce are useful for your work:
Admin needs to prepare this CSV file with all necessary information about product attributes, then import by only one click. Moreover, the extension also supports exporting all available attributes into a CSV file conveniently.
Import/Export Product Attributes for Magento 2 extension is often used in case store owners want to change their Magento 2 websites into new ones or change from another platform to Magento 2.
Therefore, installing this module, they don't take them much time and human resources to do manually as before.
You go to System⇒ Import by BSS and select Product Attributes in the drop-down list of Entity Type.
2.1.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There are 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new attributes to the website. In addition, it also updates attributes if their attribute_codes exist.
+ Replace: This option allows administrators to add new attributes to the website. In case attribute _ codes in the import data match with attribute_codes of existing attributes, these attributes are deleted and new records are created using the CSV data.
+ Delete: This option allows administrators to remove attributes in case their attribute_codes exist.
Validation Strategy: select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
+ Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
+ Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds that maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
Multiple value separator: Choose a character to separate data in a field column. In our CSV sample file, the vertical bar ( | ) is set up as the default value.
Option value separator: separator between store view ID and values of attribute options.
Store view separator: separator between values of different store views.
For example:
2.1.2. CSV file preparation
Before you import product attributes via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields:
Data
Format
Meaning
attribute_code
A string of characters
Required to enter data.
Notify errors if you leave it blank.
attribute_set
attribute_set1|attribute_set2...
+ When attribute_set of an attribute is left blank, this attribute is added as a new one that does not belong to any attribute sets or any attribute groups.
+ When attribute_set doesn't exist in the database, a new attribute set is created.
attribute_group_name
A string
The name of the attribute group to which the attribute is assigned after importing.
+ when you leave it blank, the attribute is added to the last attribute group of the assigned attribute set.
+ when attribute_group_name doesn't exist in the database, a new one is auto created.
attribute_group_code
(not required): It is auto-created based on the attribute group name.
If attribute_group_code is similar to attribute_group_code of an available group in the database, you will face an error.
is_global
0,1,2
0 ~ Store View
1 ~ Global
2 ~ Website
If it is left blank or wrong, it auto turns 0.
is_user_defined
0, 1
0 ~ attribute is defined as system attribute.
1 ~ attribute is not system attribute. Admin can delete it.
is_filterable
0,1,2
Corresponding to the Use in Layered Navigation config in the StoreFront Properties tab of the attribute:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Filterable (with results)
2 ~ Filterable (no results)
If you enter the wrong value, the config auto gets 0 after importing.
is_visible
0,1
Determines whether the attribute is visible in the grid or not:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_required
0,1
Corresponding to the Value Required config of the attribute
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_visible_on_front
0,1
Corresponding to the Visible on Catalog Pages on Storefront config:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_searchable
0,1
Corresponding to the Use in Search config:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_unique
0,1
Corresponding to the Unique Value config:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
frontend_class
Optional. Database value
is_visible_in_advanced_search
0,1
Determines whether the attribute is shown in advanced search or not:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_comparable
0,1
Corresponding to the Comparable on Storefront config of the attribute
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_filterable_in_search
0,1
Corresponding to the Use in Search Results Layered Navigation config:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_used_for_price_rules
0,1
Determines whether the attribute is used for price rules or not:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
is_used_for_promo_rules
0,1
Corresponding to the Use for Promo Rule Conditions config:
0 ~ No
1 ~ Yes
sort_order
Natural numbers
Smaller value, higher priority
position
Natural numbers
The display position of the attribute in layered navigation.
frontend_input
Corresponding to Catalog Input Type for Store Owner:
text – Text Field
textarea – Text Area
texteditor - Text Editor (from Magento 2.3)
date – Date
boolean – Yes/No
multiselect – Multiple Select
select – Dropdown, Visual or Text Swatch
price – Price
media_image– Media Image
wee – Fixed Product Tax
(Notify errors and skip them when entering wrong values)
backend_type
Optional. Database value
backend_model
Optional. Database value
source_model
Optional. Database value
frontend_label
label|store_code1:label|store_code2:label
Label for the attribute, you can import label for many store views.
(Notify errors and skip them when you leave it blank)
+ admin: required to enter.
+ store_code1, store_code2: not required+ Value: is the value of swatch.+ Type: is always 0.For example: 1:S:0;2:Small:0
*Notes:
Your CSV file must include enough the number of columns like the sample file so that you can successfully import it. (If the number of columns is greater or fewer than those in the sample file, the system will notify you about errors).
You can assign 1 attribute for many attribute sets in only 1 row in the CSV file. The format of the attribute set column is attributeSet1|attributeSet2|...
If you enter the wrong product type in the "apply_to" column, the value of this column is changed into NULL.
For columns with values as 0 or 1: if you enter the wrong value, the system will change into default value as 0.
For columns including multiple values, you need to add multiple separators in the end. For example: 0:KBowl1;2:Elongated;1:Allong|
You mustn't leave backend_type column empty:
+ if backend_type is static, you need to create a column in the catalog_product_entity. If you don't do this one, you cannot save the attribute's value when saving the product. However, it's better that you shouldn't select backend_type as static.
+ If backend_type is varchar, int, decimal, text, or data time, you can definitely save the attribute's value.
If your CSV file includes special characters that belong to your own language (in case you do not use English), you need to convert your CSV file to UTF-8 format. You can read our instructionsHERE.
2.1.3. In File to Import
After you finish the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
2.1.5. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and the Import button now appears to click.
You click the Import button to start importing product attributes in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. To check these imported attributes, you navigate to
Stores → Products Attributes to see them in a grid view:
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
*NOTE: You had better take notice about these following issues in the CSV file which affect data checking.
Errors in the CSV file make you not successfully import:
+ Leave attribute_code as blank.
+ Enter the wrong Entity Type ID.
+ Enter a number of columns that are greater or less than those in the sample CSV file. (Please follow the sample file we provide you and don't add more columns or remove).
+ Enter the wrong value in the"is_global" column. (Please remember the standard values just includes 1,2 and 3).
However, there some specific errors in your CSV file, but the system will skip and continues to import as well as still notifies you about problems. Let's check these skipped errors as below:
+ Enter the wrong backend_type or frontend_input.
+ Enter the wrong attribute_code when you choose Import behavior as Delete.
+ Enter the different multiple value separator from the one set up in the backend.
+ Enter the wrong format in the "attribute_option"or "attribute_option_swatch" columns.
When you are in this situation, your CSV file is still imported but it contains errors. Therefore, thanks to notification about these errors, you can edit the file and also do it better for the next time.
2.2. Export Product Attributes
You go to System⇒Export by BSS and select Product Attributes in the drop-down list of Entity Type.
You choose CSV in the Export File Format field.
In Entity Attributes and Export
In Entity Type section: you can export all available product attributes by choosing All from the drop-down list or export each attribute set.
Then click Continue button to export chosen items in a CSV file.
*Note: The admin can export product attributes that are not assigned to any attribute sets. (Update from version 1.0.9)
3. Tips
You can quickly import attributes with many options using source_model of attributes.
+ Create a source file in the module: Bss_ProductAttributesImportExport - this source file can be similar as the following file:
The path is Bss\ProductAttributesImportExport\Model\Attribute\Source\Label.
Enter this path to the source_model of the CSV file.
More Magento 2 Import Export extension from BSSCommerce are useful for your work:
Admins just need to prepare a CSV file with all necessary information about CMS pages such as title, page layout, meta keywords, meta description, identifier, content, and so on.
Then they make Import settings like the default function, validate the CSV file, and start import CMS pages to websites.
Besides, this extension also helps to export available CMS pages by stores, and especially admins can select which data is excluded from export.
You go to System ⇒ Data Transfer ⇒ Import by BSS and select CMS Page in the drop-down list of Entity Type.
2.1.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There are 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new CMS Page of the website. In addition, it also updates CMS Pages if these pages already exist in the database and have the same URL keys (identifier) as data in the CSV file.
+ Replace: The module will delete old CMS pages and then add new ones.
+ Delete: This option allows the system to get CMS pages based on URL keys in the CSV file, then delete pages that are available in the database.
Validation Strategy: Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
+ Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
+ Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds the maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
Accept the default value of a comma (,) for the Field separator.
Accept the default value of a comma (,) for the Multiple value separator. A comma is the default separator in a CSV file. If you want to use a different character, please make sure that the data in the CSV file matches the character that you specify.
In case you desire to enclose any special characters that might be found in the data as an escape sequence, select the Fields Enclosure checkbox
2.1.2. CSV File Preparation
Before you import CMS pages via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields:
2.1.3. In File to Import
After you have finished the CSV file, tab Choose File button to select the file to import.
2.1.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and Import button now appears to click.
You click Import button to start importing CMS pages in the CSV file into Magento 2 website. There is also a notification about results of the import process.
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click and there is a notification about these problems.
2.2. Export CMS Page
You go to System ⇒ Data Transfer ⇒ Export by BSS and select CMS Page in the drop-down list of Entity Type.
You choose CSV in the Export File Format field.
In Filter Store: You choose Store or store view to export CMS pages.
In Exclude Entity Attributes: you can select which data to be excluded from the CSV file after exporting.
More Magento 2 Import Export extension from BSSCommerce are useful for your work:
Admin just needs to prepare a CSV file with all necessary information about categories such as categories id, store id, patent id, name, description, category products, and so on.
Then they make Import settings like the default function, validate the CSV file, and start import categories to websites.
Besides, this extension also helps to export available categories by store ID and category id or even export all categories at once.
Important note:
- If you want to import multiple level categories in 1 file, you need to make sure ALL rows parent category are above rows subcategory.
- Category id in the CSV file will set a temporary relation with parent id. After importing to the new site, the system will automatically generate the new category id ascendingly. However, the category id and parent id columns CAN NOT be the same value as the new category id that will be generated by the system. (So you better add 000 after the numbers in the category id column and parent id column).
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. Export Categories
You go to System⇒ Export by BSS and select Category in the drop-down list of Entity Type.
You choose CSV in the Export File Format field.
- Step 1: Entity Type choose Category
- Step 2: Export File Format - Choose the file format to export (CSV)
- Step 3: Export Related SKUs - Choose Yes to export including the SKUs of the products from category; if not, choose No
- Step 4: Export By
+ Choose All - Export all categories in the database
+ Choose Store ID - Export following Store ID which is selected from dropdown
+ Choose Category ID - Export following category ID which is entered.
- Step 5: Click to button Continue to process Export
2.2. Import Categories
You go to System⇒ Import by BSS and select Category in the drop-down list of Entity Type.
2.2.1. In Import Behavior
Import Behavior: There are 3 options for you to select.
+ Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new categories of the website. In addition, it also updates categories if these categories already exist in the database and have the same category _id as data in the CSV file.
+ Replace: The module will delete old categories and then add new ones.
+ Delete: This option allows the system to load categories based on category_id in the CSV file, then delete these categories which are available in the database.
Validation Strategy: select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
+ Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
+ Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import.
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds the maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
2.2.2. CSV File Preparation
Before you import categories via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking Download Sample File. Then you open this file and fill in fields:
category_id: Complete category id which is saved in the database.
+ Value of category_id to enter is a Natural number.
+ If you leave it blank, a new category is added.
+ If you enter a value that exists, the module will update data to the category with corresponding ID.
store_id: Store Id which is available in the store.
+ Value of store_id to enter is a Natural number
+ If you leave it blank, store_id will get the value of 0 (store _id=0). You don't need to fill store_id when adding a new category.
parent_id: is an ID of the existing category in the database
+ Value of parent_id to enter is a Natural number.
+ If you enter the ID which does not exist, the module will notify as an error in the Check data process.
* Note: If you are using 1.0.1 version:
In case you have to import a new parent category and new children category in the same CSV, take some notices as below:
+ In parent category: enter new category_id.
+ In children category: enter parent_id which is the same as new category_id of the parent category.
As a result, children categories will be imported to the right parent category.
In addition, after importing, IDs of parent category and children category can be different from new category_id which is entered in the CSV file.
path: This is the path from the root category to the current category.
+ path is a string of characters.
+ When importing, you don't need to enter data for this column.
name: Name of the category.
+ If you leave it blank, the module will notify as an error in the Check data process.
description: Detailed description of the category.
custom_design: Enter ID of the theme used in the category
+ Value of custom_design to enter is a Natural number.
category_products: Enter SKUs of products assigned to the category. For group products, bundle products, and configurable products, you need to enter SKUs of parent products.
+ If SKU is wrongly entered, the module will skip this SKU and continue to import other SKUs.
+ If SKU has existed in the category, the module will skip this SKU.
+ If the SKU has not yet existed, the module will add it as a new one.
+ category_products has a format as SKU1|SKU2|SKU3.
*Note: You just can add new SKUs to the category in this column, but cannot remove existed SKUs from the category.
attribute_set_id: ID of attribute set.
+ Value of attribute_set_id to enter is a Natural number.
+ If you leave it blank, the module will take ID of the default attribute set.
position: Postion of the category in the parent category.
+ Value of position to enter is a Natural number.
url_key: URL key of the category.
+ If you leave it blank, a new URL key for this category is created based on its name.
url_path: URL path of the category.
image_name: Name of image file of the category. Category image should be uploaded to pub/media/catalog/category folder of Magento folder.
is_active: Enable the category.
+ You enter 0 or 1 for this column. If you enter 1, it means the category status is enabled.
include_in_menu:
+ You enter 0 or 1 for this column. If you enter 1, the category will be displayed in the menu.
display_mode: display mode of the category.
+ You can choose one of these values to enter: PRODUCTS, PAGE, and PRODUCTS_AND_PAGE.
page_layout: choose layout for the category.
+ Values of layout include: 1column, 2columns-left, 2columns-right, 3columns và empty.
custom_design_from: Time when custom design begins.
+ Standard format is: yyyy-mm-dd or yyyy/mm/dd
custom_design_to: Time when custom design ends.
+ Standard format is: yyyy-mm-dd or yyyy/mm/dd
default_sort_by: Select how to sort products of the category on the frontend. For example: sort by name, position, and price.
available_sort_by: Sorting type can be allowed to use in the category. They can be name, position or name or you can combine all of them.
+ Standard format is: sort1|sort2|sort3
is_anchor: You can enter 0 or 1 in this column.
custom_use_parent_settings: Select whether applying parent category's settings or not.
layered_navigation_price_step:
+ value of layered_navigation_price_step is a decimal number.
custom_apply_to_products: You can enter 0 or 1 in this column.
If you want to use exported categories to import into another website with Delete import behavior, you need to remove rows of system root category (ID=1) and store root category in the CSV file because default Magento doesn't allow you to delete root category.
If you want to import the whole category tree, you need to arrange parent category and children categories to the right order in the CSV file. The first is the parent category, and the next are children categories.
2.2.3. Add the new category into a new site
- Step 1: Export Category from the old site
Note:Export By choose Store ID, Choose Store via ALL (Avoid the case of exporting a category having many rows in different store views, when importing will report the URL key existed)
- Step 2: Open file CSV which is exported, edit store_id ALL into 0, delete the Root Catalog lines and then save again.
- Step 3: Admin > System > Data Transfer > Import by BSS
In Entity Type chooses Category, Import Behavior choose Add/Update, click to choose file to upload the edited file.
- Step 4: Click the button check date to check data in the CSV file before importing.
- Step 5: Click the Import/Import By Cron button to process import.
*Note: Read section 2.2.5 to learn the difference between Import and Import By Cron.
2.2.3. Update category following each storeview (If the value is not set differently according to the store view, there is no need to update)
- Step 1:
+ On the site just importing on part I, process Export Category to get the right category id
+ Export By: - choose All if need to update all storeview
- choose Store ID -> Choose Store and storeview which is needed to export
- Step 2: Open the CSV file which is just exported, then process to edit the file:
+ Delete Root Catalog lines
+ Delete Root Category lines (parent_id = 1) (because these lines rarely need to be updated according to the storeview)
- Step 3: Admin > System > Data Transfer > Import by BSS
Entity Type choose Category, Import Behavior choose Add/Update, click choose file to upload edited file
- Step 4: Click the button check date to check the data in the CSV file before importing.
- Step 5: Click the Import/Import By Cron button to process import.
*Note: Read section 2.2.5 to learn the difference between Import and Import By Cron.
2.2.4. Check Data and Import
After you select the CSV file, you need to click the Check Data button to validate data before importing.
If your CSV file is free from errors, there is a message to notify validation results and the Import and Import By Cron button now appears to click.
You click the Import or Import By Cron button to start importing categories in the CSV file into Magento 2 website.
*Note: Read section 2.2.5 to learn the difference between Import and Import By Cron.
Then a notification about the results of the import process will be displayed.
If your CSV file includes errors, the Import button cannot be displayed for you to click, and there is a notification about these problems.
2.2.5. Import & Import by cron
Import: After importing, you will be redirected to the import status page, which only shows the import result.
Import By Cron: After importing, you will be redirected to the import process page. You can reload the result report page to see the import process result in detail.
More Magento 2 Import Export extension from BSSCommerce are useful for your work:
Note: This extension is no longer available. If you need further information and support, please contact us via Sales@bsscommerce.com
1. Overview
GDPR for Magento 2 extension helps store owners comply with GDPR without manual code changes. By allowing customers to request Magento owners to delete or anonymize their accounts and information, this module gives customers the rights to be forgotten as GDPR requires. Therefore, customers have their own rights to decide what to do and how to do with their data on Magento stores. This also increases data safety for customers purchasing on the stores.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 Configuration
Please go to Account Dashboard ⇒ GDPR ⇒ Configuration to start settings.
In Enabled: Choose Yes to enable the module or choose No to disable it.
In Account Data Access Page Title: choose a suitable title for the Account Data Access Page. This page is included in My Account.
In Account Data Access Page Content: customize your content in this page to tell customers more information about deleting and anonymizing accounts or any information you want to let customers know.
In Auto Accept Request:
+ Choose Yes to allow automatically accepting customer requests.
+ Choose No if you don't want to automatically accept requests. In this case, customer requests are displayed in a management grid table view and admin can manually accept, reject or even delete those requests.
Please navigate to Account Dashboard ⇒ GDPR ⇒ Request Management:
New customer requests are displayed in this management grid table and have status of Pending. You can select each request or multiple requests to take actions at once. Click Action box, you can see Delete and Change Status actions which include Accept and Reject.
Delete: you use it to remove customer requests from the management grid table.
Accept: you use it to accept customer requests (delete account or anonymize account). Then, statuses of accepted requests are changed to Accept.
Reject: you use it to reject customer requests, but these rejected requests are still shown in the grid table with status as Reject.
Furthermore, when you choose No for the Auto Accept Request field, you need to configure notifications for customers and admin information as well as admin email.
In Notification When Customer Requests to Anonymize Account and Notification When Customer Requests to Delete Account: add suitable notifications for customers when they make requests. For example:
These notifications let customers know that their requests are sent to admin and will be soon processed.
In Maximum Number of Requests Each Account Can Make: Enter a number that specifies how many times customers can send requests. In case the number of customer requests exceeds this figure set up in the backend, a message will be displayed in customer account to notify them.
In Admin Email: enter the admin email which receives notifications of new requests.
In Admin Name: enter the wanted admin name to be called in the admin notification email.
In Admin Notification Email Template: choose an email template to send to admin and notify about new requests customers have sent.
*Note: In case you choose Yes for the Auto Accept Request field, admin don't receive admin notification email.
In Customer Anonymization Email Template: choose an email template to send to customers and notify about their new anonymous accounts.
In Customer Request Rejection Email Template: choose an email template to send to customers and notify about rejected requests by admin.
In Customer Deleting Email Template: choose an email template to send to customers and notify that their accounts are deleted.
*Note:
These templates are easily customized in Marketing ⇒ Communications ⇒ Email Templates.
For customer reviews, customer names are displayed as anonymous in the frontend and customer data is saved as guests after anonymizing.
2.2 Privacy Policy
Go to GDPR ⇒ Privacy Policy to add a new policy:
All created Privacy Policies are listed in the grid table to manage easily:
Magento 2 Duplicate CMS Page/Block extension saves much time for shop owners by allowing them to easily duplicate CMS Pages and Blocks just by one tap. Instead of manually editing and copying, you just need a few clicks and the extension will do the rest in just a few moments. Your duplicated Pages or Blocks have 100% information of origin with different URL Keys or Identifiers.
2. How Does It Work?
After completed installing, “Duplicate Button” will appear immediately in Content, as below:
In Grid View
In Grid View, you can duplicate with “duplicate button” in the right action-column.
Besides, you are able to duplicate mass Pages/Blocks in the grid view. Firstly, you choose Pages or Blocks which you want to duplicate. Then, you click on “Duplicate Button” in the left Action column.
In Detailed Page/Block
In the detailed view, “Duplicate button” appears on the menu bar.
A successful message will be displayed after the duplicating process.
After being duplicated, the status of your new CMS Page and Block is Disabled, but you can change to “enable” at any time.
A new URL key and Identifier is automatically generated for your duplicated Page/Block. Additionally, you can freely change the URL key or Identifier for your purpose.
As you know, default Magento just allows creating catalog price rules for the whole website. It means that a rule will be set up and applied for all stores or store views of a website. Therefore, Catalog Price Rule per Store View for Magento 2 is developed to help administrators to set up catalog price rules for each store view easily, which can offer different promotion programs for customers in particular areas and generate sales more effectively.
2. How Does It Work?
After installing this module, you will select store views to set up cart price rules when you create new rules.
You go to MARKETING ⇒ Catalog Price Rules ⇒ Add New Rule.
You fill in necessary information in sections of Rule information. Especially, in Store View section, you will select store views to set up this rule and apply in the frontend. You can select multiple store views to carry out setup at one time.
Take 2 following examples to see how Shopping Cart Price Rule per Store View for Magento 2 can function in details.
Example 1:Set up a rule “20% OFF for all products belonging category Bag” for English store view.
In Rule Information:
Fill in Rule name and Description.
Set Yes for Active.
Select English of Main Website Store in Store View section.
Select customer groups to apply.
Fill in other information: time and priority
In Conditions: Set up the right condition for this rule.
In Actions: Choose suitable actions for the rule.
Finally, you Save and Apply the rule and then see how it is applied in the frontend of English store view:
Example 2:Set up a rule “10% discount for all products belonging category Bag” for French store view.
You do the same steps as in Example 1 but you need to choose French store view to set up in Store Views section.
In Conditions:
In Actions:
Finally, you Save and Apply the rule and then see how it is applied in the frontend of French store view:
Admin Product Preview Plus for Magento 2 Extension is an excellent tool that allows administrators to check preview of products/Category Pages/CMS Pages/customer information in the frontend while setting up in the backend panel. This extension offers great flexibility to add preview link of product and customer in order grid view, permission to log in customer account in the frontend with full display of account information; besides, it allows to edit frontend page by navigating to backend Edit Page, and offers backend data linked for both product and customer information.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. In Stores
Please navigate to Stores ⇒Settings⇒Configuration.
In General Configuration.
In Enabled Admin Preview, choose Yes to enable module or choose No to disable module.
In Product Grid Preview Button Position, set position of product grid preview button by choosing In New Column or In Action Column.
In Customer Grid Login Button Column, set position of column of customer Log-in button by choosing In New Column or In Action Column.
In Product Preview Link Type, choose Frontend or Backend to decide the navigation of preview links.
In Disable Page Cache For Admin User, choose Yes to activate automatic cache flush before admin log in as customer and set show Product Preview Link Type to Frontend, otherwise choose No.
In Show Edit Link In Frontend For, choose one or multiple pages to place Edit Page buttons which directs admin to backend Edit Page from the frontend.
2.2. In Sales
Please go to Sales ⇒ Operations ⇒ Orders.
Then check the Sales Order Grid table consisting of various columns, in which Bill-to-namecolumn presenting names of customers who have placed orders on site, and Item Ordered column displaying brief information of ordered product (SKU, name, image…)
Click the name of the customer to navigate to Customer Information section in the backend to check or make changes if needed.
Click the name of the product to see the preview of Product Page in the frontend.
2.3. In Products
2.3.1. Preview Products
To get preview of products, please navigate to Products ⇒ Catalog
Click Preview button in product grid view in Catalog section to see the preview of Product Page in the frontend, make changes in product information in Edit if necessary and click save.
Admin need to enable the product to use the Preview button; however, you can decide to show that product to customers or not by using the Admin Preview attribute on Product Edit Page in the backend.
If choose Yes for the Admin Preview attribute, only you can see the preview of that product by clicking the Preview button. Customers can't search or see that product.
2.3.2. Preview Categories
To get the preview of categories, please go to Products ⇒Categories
Check the list of Category Pages, make changes if needed, click Save then use Preview button to check the frontend display of the chosen Category Page.
2.4. In Customers
Please go to Customers ⇒ All customers
Click Login button to log in customer account from the backend.
The module will permit admins to log in as customer in frontend page.
In Customers ⇒ Login As Customer Log.
Login As Customer Log shows history of how many times admin has logged in as customer in the frontend.
2.5. In Content
Please go to Content ⇒ Elements ⇒ Pages.
Check the list of CMS Pages, click select and choose Edit to make changes in the content of CMS Pages, then click Save.
In Edit CMS page, make changes if necessary, click Save Page and use Preview button to check frontend display of the edited page.
Magento 2 Admin Product Grid with Category extension extends the functionality of the default product grid for even better. Accordingly, the two new columns including Category and Category ID are added to the grid so that the admin can filter product collection by their category in clicks.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. General configs
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Admin Product Grid with Category.
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
In Show Category Path:
Select Full Category Path to display the category path in the product grid.
Select Short Category Path to only display the categories which the product belongs to.
2.2. Show/hide category & category ID in product grid
Navigate your way through Catalog ⇒Products
Once Magento 2 Admin Product Grid with Category extension is enabled, Category and Category ID are shown in the Column box at the top-right corner.
To show these two columns in the product grid, please check the relevant boxes or uncheck to hide them.
Feel free to arrange the columns in grid by dragging the selected column, for example Category ID, and dropping it at the new position.
Furthermore, if you click on the top of the Category or Category ID column, the data are sorted from high to low so that you can find the product at the convenience.
2.3. Filter product by single or multiple categories
The purpose of Magento 2 Admin Product Grid with Category extension is to allow filtering products by their categories right in the backend grid. Hence, Category and Category ID are included in filter options.
In Filters, the admin can get product collection by multiple categories in two ways:
Filter Or: Products assigned to any of the entered category/category ID are filtered.
+ In Category, enter: "categoryName1,categoryName2,etc"
+ In Category ID, enter: "categoryId1,categoryId2,etc"
Note: It is possible to enter "categoryName1,categoryName2, categoryId1,categoryId2,etc" in Category.
Filter And: Only products assigned to the entered category/category ID are filtered.
+ In Category, enter: "&,categoryName1,categoryName2";or
+ In Category ID, enter: "&,categoryId1,categoryId2"
Note:
+ It is possible to enter "&,categoryName1,categoryName2, &,categoryId1,categoryId2" in Category.
+ Do not filter by Category column and Category ID columne at the same time.
2.4. Update category for bulk products
With Magento 2 Admin Product Grid with Category extension, the management of products and categories becomes more simplified.
In Product grid, Category and Category ID are clickable links, meaning that you can immediately go to the category edit page without going to the default Categories page.
What’s more, this module gives the ability to edit the categories of multiple products using mass action.
Firstly, select products that need updating categories
In Actions, click on Update Category
In Update Category page:
+ Select Category to assign the selected products.
+ Turn on Unlink old category button to remove all categories preciously assigned to products.
Admin Email Notification for Magento 2 is an extension that helps you conveniently follow main events of your store. The notification emails about these important events will be automatically sent to you. This module support for 8 key events in a Magento 2 store: New orders, Low stock products, Order Status change, New Review, Customer registration, Newsletter Subscription, Newsletter unsubscription, New wish list.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Admin Email Notification.
2.1.Select Email sender
In Email Sender: choose an email from your system to send notification emails.
2.2. New Order Notification Email
In Enable Notification: choose Yes to enable notification email when a new order has been placed, or Not to disable it.
In Email Template: select email template for new order notification email. This module has a default email template but you can create your new email template to apply to this config. (Marketing → Email Templates)
In Email Receiver: enter email addresses to receive the notifications, the emails are separated by commas (,). This module supports sending multiple emails.
Output Email (default template)
2.4. Low stock products
In Enable Notification: choose Yes to enable notification email when a product becomes low stock, or Not to disable it.
In Notify When Product Qty Falls Below: enter a number to set as low stock value. The notification email will be sent if product quantity falls below this value.
In Email Template: select email template for low stock notification email. This module has a default email template but you can create your new email template to apply to this config. (Marketing → Email Templates)
In Email Receiver: enter email addresses to receive the notifications, the emails are separated by commas (,). This module supports sending multiple emails.
Output email (default template)
2.5. Order status change
In Enable Notification: choose Yes to enable notification email when order status has been changed, or Not to disable it.
In Email Template: select email template for order status change notification email. This module has a default email template but you can create your new email template to apply to this config. (Marketing → Email Templates)
In Status: select statuses that you want to receive email when order status change to what you selected.
In Email Receiver: enter email addresses to receive the notifications, the emails are separated by commas (,). This module supports sending multiple emails.
Output email (default)
2.6. New review
You can customize this section the same as New Order Notification Email.
Output Email (default template)
2.7. New customer registration
You can customize this section the same as New Order Notification Email.
Output email (default template)
2.8. Customer newsletter subscription
You can customize this section the same as New Order Notification Email.
Output email (default template)
2.9. Customer newsletter unsubscription
You can customize this section the same as New Order Notification Email.
Output email (default template)
2.10. New wish list
The new wish list notification email will be sent only when customers add products to wishlist the first time.
You can customize this section the same as New Order Notification Email.
Output email (default template)
Note: After setting, you need to press Save Config button to save your configuration then flush cache to start using the module.
Magento 2 Admin Action Log extension is a very useful tool for websites including an admin team in the backend. This module records all backend login actions, displays history of changes, page visits the history of all sessions and tracks the real-time actions of admin users. The store owners can follow all actions of other backend managers easily and protect your store from hacking.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. General configs
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Admin Action Log.
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
In Automatically Clear Action Logs after…Days: enter a number (days) to set how long the log records will be deleted automatically.
In Enable Objects: Select objects to log actions related to.
2.2. Admin action log
2.2.1 Action Logs Grid
Please go to Amin Panel ⇒ Admin Action Log ⇒ Admin Logs Grid.
In Date column: the date and time when action is performed.
In User Name column: show user name of the admin.
In IP Address column: the IP Address of the corresponding admin user.
In Action Name column: full name of the action.
In Action Type column: display type of action, including Delete, Mass Delete, Save, Edit, Flush, View, Login, Print,…
In Object column: object of the action, this extension only logs actions related to objects selected in the General Configuration above.
In Specific Object column: the specific object was affected by the action.
In Result column: the result of the action, it can be “Success” or “Failure”.
In View column: click on “View” link to preview action log detailed page.
2.2.2. Action Log Details Page
The Action Log Details page displays:
The general information of the action displayed in the grid
A table shows all detailed information about the action, including:
+ Source data (it is the line Magento\Catalog\Model\Product in the screenshot above)
+ Name column: name of item attributes
+ Old Value column: the value of attributes before performing the action
+ New Value column: the value of attributes after performing the action. The changed value is highlighted to realize easily.
Note: The table showing detailed changes in attribute value will be disabled for some action types such as Login, View, Flush, Delete, Mass Delete, Create,...
Revert action
This extension allows you to revert actions affecting configs of System Configuration object change in case these modifications are incorrect. Please notice that you can only restore the changes of configs in Store → Configuration.
2.3. Login action grid
Please go to Admin Panel ⇒ Admin Action Log ⇒ Login Action Grid.
The Login action Grid displays all login attempts of administrators to your store backend.
In Date column: the specific date and time when the user logins to the backend.
In User Name column: the name of the user who logins to the backend.
In IP Address column: IP address of the admin user.
In User Agent column: web-browsers that admin uses to login.
In Status column: the result of login action such as Success Failure, Auto Logout.
2.4. Page visit history
2.4.1. Page Visit History Grid
Please go to Admin Panel ⇒ Admin Action Log ⇒ Page Visit History
The Page Visit History grid shows the browsing history of admins in each session.
In User Name column: the user name of the administrator.
In Full Name column: full name of admin account.
In IP Address column: IP Address of the admin user.
In Session Start column: the specific time when a session started.
In Session End column: the specific time when the session ended. In case the session is currently active, the Session End field will be blank.
In View column: link to Page Visit Details of each session.
2.4.2. Page Visit Details
Please click on “View” link in View column to see the Page Visit Details of a specific session.
The first part is the general information displayed in the Page Visit History Grid.
A table lists all pages that the user visited in a session:
In Page Name column: the title of the visited page
In Page URL column: the URL link of this page
In Stay Duration column: the duration time that the admin user stayed on the page.
2.5. Active session grid
Please go to Admin Panel ⇒ Admin Action Log ⇒ Active Sessions
The Active Sessions Grid lets you know who is online in your backend store.
In Login At column: specific date and time that user logins to the backend.
In User Name column: user name of the admin.
In Full Name column: full name of the admin.
In IP Address column: IP Address of the admin user.
2.6. Admin user roles
Please go to System ⇒ Permissions ⇒ User Roles, press Role Resources tab
In the tree, mark the checkbox related to this module to allow the admin to access the module and action log pages, or don’t mark the checkbox related to this module to disable module settings and action log pages with the admin.
When complete, tap the “Save Role” button.
2.7 Email notification when quantity changes
Here, you can set up:
Email sender: The default is General Contact. If you want to change the config, uncheck the Use system value box then choose from the drop-down field.
Send Email Copy To: Fill in the email you want to recieve the email nofication. You can enter multiple email here, use a comma to separate them.
Qty Change Email Template: The default is Qty Change Notification. If you want to change the config, uncheck the Use system value box then choose from the drop-down field.
Magento 2 Size Chart extension is an essential tool that helps increase remarkably customer experience. The module allows you to create and assign size chart to product conveniently. Moreover, there are three ways to perform size chart if you use this extension. A size chart can be shown in the popup, under Add to Cart button or in the product information tab.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. General Configs
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Size Chart.
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
In Default Display: select an option to set the default performance of size chart, which means that if you don’t set the display for a size chart, this size chart will be presented on the frontend as the default display chosen in this config. There are 3 options for you to select:
Under Add to Cart Button: display size chart right on the product page, under the Add to Cart Button.
In Popup: display size chart in a popup. A popup link will be added to product page then customers can click on this link to view the size chart in the popup. You also can edit link text and color without difficulties.
On Information Section: display size chart on a new tab of product information section.
Customize the popup link:
In Link Popup Text: edit text of popup link.
In Text Color: set the color of the popup link.
In Product Tab Text: edit text of the product tab.
In Icon: upload the icon of size chart popup link.
After complete settings, please press “Save Config” then flush Cache to make these settings come into effect.
Note: Because the scope of the module configuration is store view, you can customize for each store view.
2.2. Size Chart Management
Please go to Catalog ⇒ Size Chart ⇒ Size Chart Management.
A grid listing all size charts will appear.
2.2.1. Edit Size Chart
Click “Add New Size Chart” button to create a new size chart as you want or click “Edit” link on the Action Column to edit available size charts.
In case you add new products, click “Apply size charts” above the size chart grid to update all size charts for them.
Select Edit Size Chart tab to customize the size chart.
In Title: enter the name of the size chart.
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the size chart, or No to disable it.
In Edit Content: edit the content of size chart in the WYSIWYG editor.
In Display: select the ways to perform the size chart on the product page: In Popup, Under Add to Cart Button or On Information Section. You can select more than one option and the size chart will be shown on the product page as all ways you selected.
In Priority: enter a number to set sort order for the size chart. 0 is the highest priority.
In Overwrite: The size chart that is ticked to Overwrite will be shown in the frontend and ignored Priority section. After saving, it will be cleared automatically, then you can tick “overwrite” for other size charts. A size chart can be recorded over other size charts that have the same scope.
In Store View: choose to enable the size chart for the specific store view.
In Override Product Settings: In each Product edit page, you can select a size chart (A) for a product. Also, when creating another size chart (B), you can assign it for this product or even a category by using rules. Therefore, this override setting is useful to determine which size chart the product will use to show in the frontend.
Choose Yes, then the product will use this new size chart (B) and skip the size chart selected in the Product edit page.
Choose No, then the product will use the size chart selected in the product edit page.
After complete all settings, please press “Save Size Chart” button to save the customization for the size chart.
2.2.2. Assign size chart to products
Please press “Assign Products” tab to select condition to apply the size chart to products in size chart edit page.
Click on the (+) icon to explore the condition selection field
In this field, you can choose an option, then easily assign the size chart to multiple products by Categories, Attribute Set, or Product Grid,...
After selecting products, please press Save button to save your setting or press Save and Apply button to save your setting and make it come to effect at the same time.
2.2.3. Assign a size chart to specific product
Please go to Catalog ⇒ Products, in the product grid, select a product that you want to add size chart to.
This module adds a dropdown attribute displaying all created size charts to the product edit page of all products. You can select a size chart option to assign to the product then press “Save” button to complete.
Note: This setting is related to the Override Product Settings configuration in the size chart edit page, so you need to notice both 2 settings to get the result as you need.
3. GraphQL support
Note: In order to use this graphQL, you need to install BSS's Magento 2 Size Chart module.
Simple Details on Configurable Product for Magento 2 supports showing all child products' detailed information when choosing options, namely SKU, name, tier price, stock status, stock number, description, and URL. Therefore, this extension is absolutely suitable for those selling configurable products with many different child products or for the business purpose of each child item.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 In the frontend
This is how Simple Details on Configurable Product is displayed in the frontend:
Show details of children items of the configurable product, such as name, SKU, tier price, stock status, stock number, description, additional information, and meta data.
Show child product names at Dynamic Category/Product Listing Update & render a review swatch accordingly.
Get the URL for each child product with pre-selected options.
URL: URL will change as chosen options. If customers access to the URL, options are also selected on the product page. Besides, you can get URL included category path as wish.
Custom URL has a form: .../Product-Name+attr1-Value1+attr2-Value2 (For instance: .../hero-hoodie+color-Black+size-S), it changes when choosing attributes of product.
Support minimum quantity for the product separately added to cart instead of the default of Magento 2, which only allows for configurable products.
Support quantity increment for children products. This function outweighs the default with the ability to set increment for each associated product of the configurable product. For example, if you set 5 for quantity increment for a skirt-red-L, then your customers cannot buy this item with quantity 1-2-3 or 6-7-8; they only choose this product with 5-10-15, etc in the quantity box.
2.2 In the backend
2.2.1 General configs
Go through Stores ⇒ Settings ⇒ Configuration⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Simple Details on Configurable Product.
In General:
Enabled: Choose Yes to enable the module.
NOTE:
You can also enable/disable this module for a particular configurable product in SDCP General on the product edit page easily.
In case, in General configuration, you set No, and in the SDCP General, you still choose Yes, the module won’t be enabled.
In Attributes Display Config: choose Yes to show the attributes you want in the frontend:
SKU
Name
Description
Tier Price
Stock Status
Gallery Switch Strategy:
Replace: replace all parent product's images by child product's images
Prepend: add child product's images at the beginning of parent product's images.
Disable: display only parent product's images even when customers select the child product option
Child Product Image When Not Have Images Itself (from v1.1.7):
Use Parent Product Image: display parent product's images.
Use Default Placeholder: display default placeholder of Magento
Additional Info:
Show swatch additional information in the More Information tab when customers choose all options of the parent product.
Choose Yes to enable the rating and review feature for each child product (changes apply to the catalog and product pages). Choose No to only enable the rating and review feature for the parent product.
Meta Data: auto-create meta data (meta description, title, meta keyword) of child products when choosing all options of the parent product.
Show Custom Option of Child Products
In the Advanced Settings:
Custom URL: choose Yes to enable the child product's URL to change when the option is selected. The format of this URL is: .../Product-Name+attr1-Value1+attr2-Value2 (For instance: .../hero-hoodie+color-Black+size-S).
Add custom child products' URLs to XML sitemap: If choose Yes, custom child products' URLs will be added to XML sitemap and Google can index/follow these custom URLs
NOTE: we have fixed this child product's URL format so you cannot change it even in Product Page Details ⇒Search Engine Optimization ⇒ URL Key
2.2.2 detailed configuration
Go to Catalog > Products > {configurable-product} details page in the backend.
In Visibility, there is one new option - Only display product page: This option will hide this configurable product on the frontend category page and search page but you can still enter the product page by direct URL.
*Note: This option doesn’t work with mass action. This option can be used when you want to hide the configurable product, but still show all the children products individually, then redirect customer to the configurable product page when they click on a child product.
In SDCP General tab
Pre-select: the attributes are pre-selected in the product detail page in the backend.
Enable Module: enable the module on this product.
Enabled Ajax Load Detail
In SDCP Preselect tab: display the pre-selected attributes.
NOTE: in Magento 2.0.x version, there will be a separate Pre-select tab in product detail page:
Next, go to Catalog > Products > {child-product} details page in the backend.
SDCP Redirect
In SDCP Redirect (on the bottom page), you will see Redirect to configurable product configuration. You can choose:
Yes: If visibility of the child product is category/search, you will be redirected to the parent configurable product page when selecting the child product at the frontend.
No: Work as default Magento - redirect to the child product page when selecting this one.
*Note: This config works with mass action.
Frontend result:
2.2.3 Import Pre-select
Go to System ⇒ Data Transfer ⇒ Import SDCP Preselect
In Import Settings, select SDCP Pre-select in the drop-down list of Entity Type
In Import Behavior:
Add/Update: This option allows administrators to add new pre-selected attributes to the website. In addition, it also updates attributes if their pre-selected attributes exist.
Replace: This option allows administrators to add new pre-selected attributes to the website. In case pre-selected attributes in the import data match with pre-selected attributes of existing attributes, these attributes are deleted, and new records are created using the CSV data.
Delete: This option allows administrators to remove pre-selected attributes in case their pre-selected attributes exist.
Next, you select one option from the drop-down list to determine how the system operates when there are errors in the import process.
Stop on Error: the system stops importing when there are errors.
Skip error entries: the system skips errors and continues to import
Allowed Errors Count: This setting allows you to choose the allowed maximum number of errors when importing. If the number of errors happening in the import process exceeds that maximum number you fill in this field, the system will stop importing.
Filed separator: Choose a character to separate two field column (SKU & preselect). In our CSV sample file, the comma (,) is set up as the default value.
Multiple value separator: Choose a character to separate multiple attributes in a field column. In our CSV sample file, the comma (,) is set up as the default value.
CVS file preparation
Before you import product attributes via a CSV file, you need to prepare the CSV file with enough necessary information. You can download this CSV sample file by clicking “Download Sample File.” Then you open this file and fill in fields:
In “SKU” column: enter the SKU of the configurable products
In “preselect” column: enter the attributes with their value
2.2.4 SET CUSTOM OPTIONS FOR CHILD PRODUCTS
In the product edit page of the associated product of choice, scroll down to Customizable Options.
Click on Import Options to use the custom option you previously set.
Choose Add Option button to create a new custom option of your choice.
Option Title: Name of the option.
Option Type: The type of the custom option. You have 10 types under 4 categories to choose from.
Required: Tick to mark as a requirement, customer can not add the product to cart without specifying the custom option.
*Note:
- Special characters are allowed typing on attribute value: ~`!@#$%^&*()|\/;:'".<>
- With character +, it needs to have space between characters. Example: (3 + 4)
3. API Support
BSS is now providing API support for the Simple Detailed On Configurable Product extension.
3.1 GraphQL API
Check the detailed list & guide on how to use all the GraphQL API heads that BSS creates for this extension:
As Magento 2 default, customers just input number of product they want in a quantity box; however this default function cannot allow store owners to set fix quantity as they want for promoted or marketing campaigns. Regarding to solve this issue for store owners, Quantity Dropdown for Magento 2 extension is developed to help store owners to save more additional costs by showing quantity dropdown list with configured quantity number.
2. How Does It Work?
Go to Admin ⇒ Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Quantity Dropdown.
Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module
Default Quantity Value:
No Default Value: if you choose this configuration, then go to each product page in the backend to set showing quantity dropdown list as you want in Quantity Dropdown Value configuration.
Use Product Quantity Increment Value: choose it if you want to set quantity increment for the quantity dropdown list. Then you go to edit product and input value for quantity increments.
Custom Value: choose it if you want to configure fixed quantities for the quantity dropdown list.
Max Quantity Value: this function is used for Quantity Increment Value configuration.
Custom Value: input number of quantity you want for customers to choose from the list of quantity.
In Enable Qty Option: choose Yes to enable this function or choose No to disable it. In case you choose Yes, you need to enter a sentence to be displayed in the dropdown list. Customers can select another quantity to purchase instead of choosing from the available list.
Display on Product List Page: choose Yes if you want to show quantity dropdown list on the product list page. If not, please choose No.
Show Price In List: choose one of these following options to display the price in the quantity dropdown list
Price Per Item
Total Price
None
Hide Quantity Value Which Is Larger Than Stock Quantity: This configuration only applies for the Custom Value display which you chose in Default Quantity Value setting. Choose one of these options for this configuration:
Show And Can Select
Show But Can’t Select
Hide
* NOTE for update version 1.0.3:
With this update, the extension works with Min Quantity and Max Quantity in the product detail page. The quantity dropdown only displays when 2 conditions (Min Quantity and Max Quantity) are met.
For Quantity Increment: the dropdown quantity using Custom Value only displays if the number is multiple of quantity increment in the product detail page.
The extension supports translating value in the dropdown. Now, it has 3 CSV files of English, French, and Deutsch. If you want to translate into other countries, then create more CSV files.
Magento 2 Product Custom Tabs extension allows you to create new tabs to replace the default tabs on product pages. By arranging tabs, the product content will be improved and displayed effectively.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. General Configs
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Product Custom Tabs.
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
In Enable Product Recommendation Blocks: choose Yes to enable the Related, Cross-sell, and Up-sell Block by default, or No to disable them.
After settings, please press Save Config button and flush cache to start using the module.
2.2. Manage Product Custom Tabs
Go to Catalog ⇒ Product Tabs ⇒ Product Tabs Management, you can see a grid displays all product tabs including default tabs (Details, More Information, and Reviews) with the information about Tab ID, Title, Status, Visible for Purchasing Customers Only, Position and Edit link.
There’re 2 buttons on the top right off the page:
Add New Tab: choose this button to create a new tab, you will be redirected to the tab edit page.
Reindex Rule: Because this module allows you to assign tabs to products by rule, hence, when a product is removed from the rule, you need to press this button to delete the tab of this product.
This grid is enabled by store views, hence, you can take actions on it and edit custom tabs by store view scope. The module allows you to mass delete, enable, and disable multiple product tabs in the grid. Please follow the steps:
Select product tabs by checking box in the first column
Explore the Action field to choose to Delete, Enable, or Disable the selected tabs
Confirm the action
Note: If you edit a tab in All Store Views, the duplicated tabs in all store views will also be changed. And if you edit the duplicated tab in a particular store view, the original tab in All Store Views grid and other store views will not be modified.
2.3. Create & edit product tabs
To create a new tab, please press Add New Tab button.
To edit an available tab, please click on Edit link of this tab on the product tabs grid.
Then, open the Edit Tab page to start designing the tab.
In Active: choose Yes to enable the tab, or No to disable it.
In Title: enter tab title
In Content: edit content to display on the tab. You can add widgets, variables,...by using the WYSIWYG editor.
In Customer Groups: multiple-select customer groups that can view the tab
In Position: enter a number set sort order to the tab. The tab set smaller number will be placed in the front position.
In Visible for Purchasing Customers Only: choose Yes to enable the tab for customers who purchased products only, or No to enable for all customers.
Beside the content and general settings above, you can even add the product recommendation blocks and product attributes to the tab as needed.
In Related, Up-sell, Cross-Sell:
Show Related Products: choose Yes to add Related Products block to the tab, or No to not add.
Show Up-sell Products: choose Yes to add Up-sell Products block to the tab, or No to not add.
Show Cross-sell Products: choose Yes to add Cross-sell Products block to the tab, or No to not add.
In Assign Attributes: choose product attributes in the grid to display the attribute values of product on the tab.
After setting, please press Save Tab button to complete.
2.4. Assign the tab to products
Please press “Assign to Products” tab to select condition to apply the tab to products in the tab edit page.
Click on the (+) icon to explore the condition selection field.
In this field, you can choose an option, then easily assign to multiple products by Categories, Attribute Set, or Product Grid,...
After selecting products, please press Save Tab button to save your settings.
2.5. Frontend Display
Tabs assigned to products will replace with the default tabs to be displayed on the frontend product pages. It means that the default tabs are disabled.
You can totally create the tabs like default. Just simply add the short code to the WYSIWYG editor:
Magento 2 Product Attachments extensionadds more information to products by allowing store owners to upload attachment files and customers can download these file from the frontend.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 General Configs
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Product Attachment
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
In Show on Product Tab: choose Yes to display the file attachments on a new tab in the product page, or No to not display in this position.
In Tab Title: edit the title of the attachment tab.
In Display on A Block: choose Yes to display file attachments on a separate block, or No to not display in this position.
In Block Title: edit title for the attachment block.
In Maximum Upload File Size (MB): enter a number to set the max allowed size for upload files. This value also depends on your server.
In Enable File Size: choose Yes to enable file size along to file name in the frontend, or No to disable the file size.
In Show Number of Downloaded Files: choose Yes to enable the number of downloaded files along to files in the frontend, or No to disable it.
Note:
Because the scope of configs is store view, you can customize for each store view.
After setting, you need to save your configuration, then flush cache to make these settings come into effect.
2.2 File Attachments Management
Please go to Catalog (Product Attachment by Bss Commerce) ⇒ Product Attachments Management
A grid listing all uploaded files will appear, you can edit the setting of uploaded files by clicking on Edit link in the Action column.
Press “Create New Attachment” button to upload and set up a new file.
2.2.1 Attachment edit page
Please press the “General” tab.
In Title: edit the title of file to be shown in the frontend.
In Description: edit description of this file (this text is only shown on the attachment grid in the backend, not in the frontend for customers).
In Status: choose Enabled or Disable the file.
In Upload Type:
Choose File Upload to upload a file from your computer. If you select this option, the Upload File button will be enabled for you to click and upload a file from your computer. This file will be shown on the frontend for customers to directly download.
Choose Link Download to add a URL and display this link to the frontend, customers need to click on this link to view pages or download files.
In URL: enter a URL
In Store Views: choose store views that you want to enable the file.
In Customer Groups: choose customer groups that you want to enable the file.
In Show in Footer: choose Yes to show the file in the footer of your site, or No to hide it.
In Position: enter a number to set sort order for the file attachments. If a product is assigned multiple file attachments, the file with smaller number will have higher position.
In Limit Number of Downloads: enter a number (>0) to specify the maximum number of downloaded files. If this field is blank or filled “0”, the number of downloads will not be limited.
2.2.2 Assign an attachment to multiple products
In Attachment edit page, please press “Assign to Products” tab
In the product grid, you can sort by selected/ unselected products, Product ID/ Name/ SKU, Attribute Set and Price then assign the attachment to products that you want.
After settings, you need to press “Save Attachment” button to save your settings.
2.2.3 Add many attachments to a product
Please go to Catalog ⇒ Products, then select a product in the grid to go to product edit page.
The “File Attachment” attribute is added to product edit page of each product.
In File Attachment: select attachments that you want to assign to product then press Save button.
3. API Support
We provide you BSS's list of GraphQL & REST API that our Magento 2 Product Attachments extension supports.
Minimum Quantity of Configurable Product for Magento 2allows admin to set the minimum quantity of configurable product as the compulsory condition when customers go to the checkout. Admin can totally configure minimum quantity value for a configurable product, several particular configurable products or even a large number of configurable products.
Note:The module only counts the parent products. For example, if you set the minimum quantity to 30, your customers can add as much child products as they wish to the cart. As long as the total of parent products equal and bigger than 30, customers can checkout.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 Set minimum quantity for all configurable products
Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Minimum Qty of Configurable Product.
Module Enable: choose Yes to enable or No to disable the extension.
Minimum Qty of Configurable Product: enter number to set minimum quantity for all configurable products in store.
2.2 Set minimum quantity for specific configurable product
Navigate to Products ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Find the configurable product Advanced Quantity.
In Minimum Qty of CP Allowed in Shopping Cart: use config settings or remove tick to input new number for minimum quantity of chosen configurable product.
NOTE 1: In the edit product page:
Minimum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart: this is default configuration.
Minimum Qty of CP Allowed in Shopping Cart: this is configuration of the extension.
NOTE 2:
Minimum Qty of CP Allowed in Shopping Cart only works on product detail page of parent configurable product. This config does not work on the product page of child product.
The product configuration has higher priority than General configuration. For instance: If you set 3 for Minimum Qty of CP Allowed in Shopping Cart configuration in a configurable product edit page, then regardless of setting 10 in General Configuration, the final minimum value will be 3.
If you disable the module but still set minimum quantity for particular configurable products, they will not work.
3. API Support
We provide you BSS's list of REST API that our Magento 2 Minimum Quantity of Configurable Products extension supports.
Grouped Product is an amazing type of product that supports showing multiple products for order on a single page. However, as you know, the default of Magento only allows admin to add simple products without custom options to a grouped product. Whereas, with Grouped Product with Custom Options for Magento 2supports adding simple products with custom options and configurable products to a grouped product, which makes customers purchase grouped product conveniently when having more choices to select their wanted attributes of products.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 In the Frontend
Here is the frontend of Magento 2 Grouped Product with Custom Options extension:
2.2 In the Backend
2.2.1create simple product with custom options
Go to Product Catalog
Click Add Product, then choose Simple product
Fill in all blanks as you create a Simple product
Then scrolling down to Customizable Options configuration, click Add Option:
Save the product. Now you have a simple product with custom options
2.2.2 add associated products to a grouped product
Go to Product ⇒Catalog
Choose a grouped product you need to add associated items.
At Grouped Products tab, click Add Products to Group, then select simple products with custom options and configurable products you want.
Next, choose Add Selected Products.
Save.
2.2.3 Configuration
Now you enable this module as follow: Go to Stores ⇒Configuration
Enabled:
Choose Yes to enable the module.
Choose No you still can add associated items to grouped products; however, in the frontend, they will be shown as unavailable.
Show Image:
Choose Yes if you want to show the image of simple product with custom options.
If you do not want that, choose No.
Show Product URL:
Choose Yes if you want to link to the product page of associated product with custom options.
Choose No if you do not want.
Always Show Option: Choose Yes to show product options always (not only when users change the quantity to positive number).
Gift Card for Magento 2allows store owners to create gift cards for customers to purchase and give their acquaintances as a present on special occasions.
Create gift cards as a new product type with flexible prices and values
Be able to upload diverse gift card templates
Easily generate or import gift code patterns
Send gift cards via email, post office and even both
Ability to apply gift code on the shopping cart and checkout page
Keep track up gift card purchase and gift card code usage
* Note: Klarna payment is not yet supported from Magento 2.4.4.
2. How to Configure
Navigate to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ BSS Gift Card and start making configuration.
In General:
Enabled: Set Yes to enable this module.
In Email Configuration:
Send Email to Sender: Set Yes to send emails to the senders when gift codes are created.
Email Sender: Choose a list of emails set up for the store.
Email Template to Sender: Select an email template to send to senders.
Email Template to Recipient: Select an email template to send to recipients.
Notification Email Template of Expiration to Recipient: Select an email template to notify recipients that the gift card is expired.
Send Notification Mail of Expiration before number of days: Enter the number of days before the gift card expiry date to send an email notifying recipients that the gift card is expired.
In Gift Card Setting:
Expiry Day: The number of days in which gift cards can be valid. When you create a new gift card, this value is automatically applied. You can configure this expiry day for each gift card when creating.
Number of Characters Shown in Gift Code: Specify the number of characters in Gift codes that are displayed for website visitors. They are shown anywhere except for gift card emails.
Replace Hidden Characters by: Enter characters to replace for hidden ones in the gift codes. For example, NEWYEAR-4-XXX.
AllowedMaximum time(s) to Enter Code Incorrectly: Specify the maximum time(s) that recipients can enter gift codes incorrectly.
Lockout time (s): Set the amount of lockout time in seconds, in which recipients cannot enter gift codes after reaching the maximum times of entering code incorrectly.
3. How to Use
3.1 For Administrators
Before adding a gift card as a new product type, you need to create gift card templates and gift code patterns. They are the required elements of a gift card.
3.1.1 Create a gift card template
Navigate to Catalog ⇒ BSS Gift Cards ⇒ Gift Card Template ⇒ Add New Template.
In Name: Enter a name for the template (eg: Happy New Year, Happy Birthday,...)
In Status: Choose Yes or No.
In Gift Code Color: Select a color for the gift code.
In Gift Card Message Text Color: Select a color for the message sent to recipients.
In Images: Browse gift card images from your computer and upload them. These images are sent to recipients along with other information of the gift card such as gift codes, messages,...
Then, you save the template.
All created templates are displayed in a grid table as below:
3.1.2 Create gift code pattern
Navigate to Catalog ⇒ BSS Gift Card ⇒ Gift Code Pattern.
Here you will see the Gift Code Pattern table, which shows all existing gift code patterns with their detailed information.
To create a new gift code pattern, click Add New Pattern button on the top right of the Gift Code Pattern table.
In Name: Specify a name for each code pattern.
In Pattern: Specify a format for code when generating. You can use dynamic format, for example, {L}: a random letter, {D}: a random number, etc. (When you save, this field cannot be edited).
In Code Quantity: The number of available gift codes. When you add a new pattern, this field has a value as 0 and cannot be edited.
In Unused: The number of codes has not been yet used. When you add a new pattern, this field has a value as 0 and cannot be edited.
Then, you save the code pattern. When a customer purchases a gift card in the frontend, a new gift code is automatically created based on settings of the corresponding gift code pattern. (Of course, the gift code pattern is assigned to the corresponding gift card. For example, you create a Happy New Year gift card, the Happy New Year code pattern will be assigned to this gift card. You can get more details in the next section of creating a gift card product).
In case you want to import or generate gift codes by yourself, you can make more configurations as below:
Method 1: Import Code
In Import Code: Allow importing codes via a CSV file. You download the sample CSV file, complete necessary data, and then upload. After you save the configuration, the module will automatically add the corresponding quantity of gift codes.
Method 2: Generate Code
In Add Code Quantity: Enter the number of codes you want to generate based on the gift code pattern.
In Add Code Value: Enter the value for gift codes.
In Add Code Expiry: Select the expiry date for gift codes.
Then you click Generate button. Gift codes are created based on settings.
*Note: Importing codes or generating codes is not a must-have task. These codes are created by import or generation by admin. They are not gift codes created when gift cards are purchased in the frontend.
To view and edit an existing gift code pattern, click Edit. Then you can scroll down to see the Code List Grid, which shows all gift codes of that pattern.
3.1.3 Create a new gift card product
Navigate to Catalog ⇒ Products ⇒ Add New Products and select BSS Gift Card.
You complete all necessary information on a product such as Attribute set, name, SKU, quantity, and so on. However, the different thing is you need to configure an additional section which is particularly used for Gift Card.
In Type: There are 3 types for you to select:
Virtual: Send gift cards via emails to recipients without shipping information in the checkout.
Physical: Send physical gift cards to recipients and need a shipping address in the checkout.
Combined: Include both virtual and physical gift cards.
In Amount: You set up value and price for the gift card. You can set up many options for customers to select on the frontend. (Values are displayed in a drop-down list when you specify various options).
In Dynamic Price: Set Yes to enable this kind of price or choose No to disable it.
When you choose Yes, you need to choose a range of values for customers to select on the frontend product page by setting up Min Value and Max Value.
In Percentage Price: Specify how the price of the gift card is calculated.
Same as value: The price is similar to the selected amount by customers.
Percentage of value: Price = percentage x selected amount by customers.
If you choose Percentage of value, you have to enter a figure in the Value field.
→ For example, the gift card has a range of values between $200 and $400. A customer selects a value at $300 on the frontend product page.
+ If you choose "Same as Value", this customer has to pay a price of $300 as well.
+ If you choose "Percentage of value" and enter 80% in the Value field, then this customer has to pay as the price of $240. ($300x0.8 = $240).
*Note: Only when you select Dynamic Price, do you have to make those more settings above.
In Template: Select a template for the gift card.
In Gift Code Pattern: Select a gift code pattern for the gift card.
In Message: Select Yes to allow customers to send messages to recipients along with gift cards.
In Expires After (days): Enter a number of days that specify the valid time to use the gift card. Gift codes that are automatically created after customers purchase Gift Cards have valid time auto-following settings of this Expires After (days) section.
Then you save configurations and complete a new gift card.
3.1.4 Manage Gift Code Account
Navigate to Catalog ⇒ BSS Gift Card ⇒ Manage Gift Code Account.
You can see a grid table including all created gift codes with their detailed information. Among them:
Initial value: Initial gift code value, cannot be changed.
Current Value: Current gift code value, can be changed in the backend. When a customer apply gift code, the gift cart value will be based on Current Value.
Expiry Date: The expiry date of the gift code.
You can edit each gift code by click Edit.
In Gift Code Account Details: Show details of the gift code and allow you to adjust some information such as Status, Website, Current Value, and Expiry Date.
In Send Gift Card: Show information related to sender, recipient, and message.
In History Transaction: Show transaction details corresponding to the gift code. Orders recored here are created by recipients. They use this gift code given by the sender and purchase products in the store.
3.2 For Customers (Sender) and Recipients
3.2.1 For customers buying gift cards
Customers or Senders go to the frontend, complete all necessary information of a Gift card, and purchase it.
*Note: Currently, the demo site cannot be set up Run Cron. Thus, when the user purchases a gift code on the demo site, there will be no email sent to them. However, on the real site, the mail-sending function still works perfectly.
→ For example, a customer purchases a Happy New Year Gift card (a virtual gift card). He needs to fill information such as sender name and email, recipient name and email, message, select delivery date, and time zone to send the gift card. In addition, he can also preview the gift card before adding to cart to see how this information is displayed.
After a successful checkout and the store admin creates the invoice for this order, an email with information of the gift card (including a specific gift code as well) is sent to the recipient. Besides, the sender also receives a similar email.
The sender could manage ordered gift cards on My Account page.
In Gift Card Details, the customer can check Gift code details by entering a valid gift code and then clicking Submit.
3.2.2 For recipients using the gift codes
The recipient uses the given gift code to purchase products on Magento stores.
The recipient enters the gift code in the Gift Card Options and checks status before applying. Checking status helps to know the original value, current value, status, and expiry date of the code. When he applies the code successfully, total order amount is automatically recalculated.
Besides, he uses the gift code on the checkout page as well.
4. API Support
We provide you lists of Restful API and GraphQL API that our Magento 2 Gift Card extension supports.
*Note:
Restful API support is included in the main module package (from Gift Card v1.0.5).
GraphQL API support is included in the GraphQL package, acting as an add-on for anyone who needs to use GraphQL.
Please go to Store ⇒Configuration⇒BSSCommerce⇒ DependentCustom Option
In Enable: choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
*Note: When you enable/disable the module, you need to check again and set up required configs of options. It is a must to enter values for Required Options only when editing Required Options on the frontend is possible (not to be hidden or disabled).
In ChildrenOptionValuesDisplay:
BeEnabledOnlyIftheParentOptionValueisSelected: choose this option to set the children options are hidden and they will be enabled only when their parent option is picked.
AlwaysbeDisplayedbutCustomersCan’tPickIftheParentOptionValueisn’tSelected: choose this option to set the children options always be shown but the checkboxes aren’t enabled until the parent option is selected.
In ChildrenOptions’ValuesDependonMultipleParentValues: this configuration is applied when the children options depend on multiple parent options.
BeEnabledIfAtLeastOneParentValueisSelected: the children options will be enabled if at least one parent option is chosen.
BeEnabledOnlyIfAllParentValuesareSelected: the children options will be enabled only when all parent options are chosen.
Note:
The display of children options is dependent on the setting in Children OptionValuesDisplay config.
The Children Options’ Values Depend on Multiple Parent Values can be configured in the Product Edit Page for custom options at the product level.
After setting, please press SaveConfig button and flush cache to start using the module.
2.2. Set Dependent Custom Options
Note:
Only after you have created the child options,their names would appear on the dependent option list, and you can set the dependent options.
Please go to Admin Panel ⇒ Catalog, then pick a product, and go to Customizable Options section.
Create both parent and child custom options, then in Dependent Options, pick the custom options’ titles.
You can change the configs of Child values that have multiple parent values on the product edit page for custom options at product level, which means only the custom options of that product are applied by this config.
The configuration options are the same as the Children Options’ Values Depend on Multiple Parent Values under Store ⇒ Configurations section.
After finishing the setting, press Save button on the product page.
Note:
The custom options depended on other options are called children options and the option values added dependent custom options are called parent options
Only the custom option values in Select input types (Drop-down, Checkbox, Radio Buttons, and Multiple Select) can be the parent options.
All custom options and option values in any input types can be the children options.
The parent options and children options must be in the same product.
The configuration Enable child values when all parent values are selected will not show children options with parent options in the drop-down or radio button type.
A children option can be dependent on multiple parent options.
When the dependent options and also the values of the custom option are both chosen, they can't be displayed in the frontend. In order for this to not happens, you should choose the parent option as the dependent instead.
2.3. Frontend Display
Depends on the configs you set in the backend, the frontend product page will look like this:
Please go to Admin Panel ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Custom Options Template.
2.1 Custom Options Template Grid
In ID column: choose the ID of the template
In Title column: choose the title of the custom option template
In Is Active column: the status of the template. “Yes” means that the custom option is enabled in the frontend and “No” means that it is disabled.
In Description column: description of the template
In Applied Product Qty column: stated the number of products that have been applied to the displayed template.
In Create At column: specific date and time that the custom options template was created.
In Update At column: specific date and time of the last edition.
In Action column: choose Edit to go to the custom options template edit page, or choose Delete to delete the template.
Note:
Only count the products that are within the template apply rule, the product that isn't supported (E.g. Group products) won't be counted.
the above information isn’t displayed in the frontend.
2.2 Create Custom Option Template
Please click on Add New Template button to create new custom options template.
2.2.1 Custom Option Template Information
In TemplateInformation tab, you can edit the general information for the template.
In Title, edit a title for the template.
In Is Active, choose Yes to enable the template in the frontend, or No to disable it.
In Description, edit the description for the template that is being created.
In Applied Products: Add the right condition to apply the custom options template to products. Don’t set any condition to apply the template to all products.
After assigning custom option template, the custom options are immediately inserted to the Customizable Options tab in each product edit page in the backend and they will be displayed in the frontend.
2.2.2 Create Custom Options
To edit custom options of a template, please open Custom Option tab in Custom Option Template Edit page.
In this tab, you can create unlimited custom options by all input types. This section is the same as the Customizable Options tab in the product edit page.
You can click on the eye sign and choose the visibility for option with customer group and store view:
With the button next to the eye sign, you can set title store view for template:
You can also set default value for option type select:
After setting, you need to save to complete. There are 5 buttons for you to press:
Save: save all settings and then you will be redirected to the custom option template grid
Duplicate: duplicate the custom option template. The duplicate template is removed the selected products of the original one.
Save and Continue: save the template and continue staying in the edit page.
Delete: delete the template
Back: back to the template grid.
Note:
When the custom option template is deleted or set from Yes to No in Is Active field, the custom options assigned to the product using that template is removed.
After the custom option template is assigned to the product,
If there are new options added to the template, then those new options are also added to the product.
If the admin edits any option of the template, the relevant option of the product is also updated.
If the admin deletes any option of the template, the relevant option of the product is also removed.
Custom Options assigned to the product using the template will be associated with that template.
However, Magento 2 Custom Option Template allows you to exclude a product from a custom options template in the product edit page.
To exclude a product from one custom option template, click the template title in Excluded from Custom Option Template(s) multiple select box.
You can click on the eye sign and choose the visibility for option with customer group and store view.
Magento 2 Custom Option Template extension allows that one product can be assigned to multiple templates.
Currently, the module supports assigning the template to products by the product’s conditions in the Template Edit Page. It means the template can not be assigned to products on the Product Edit Page.
When the custom option template is duplicated, assigned products will not be duplicated in the new template.
Note: When a product was excluded from a template, then rechoosing the template again, then it will be considered as a newly added custom option template.
2.3 Manage Admin User Roles
Please go to System ⇒ Permissions ⇒ User Roles to restrict other admin accounts accessing the custom options template management.
2.4 Choose Save Mode
Navigate to Admin ⇒ Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Bss Commerce ⇒ Custom Option Template ⇒ Advanced Setting.
In the Save Mode, you can select the template save format.
Update on Save: When clicking on the Save or Save and Continue button, that custom option product data will be updated right away. You should use this option when 1 template is assigned for a few products.
Update by schedule: When clicking on the Save or Save and Continue button, that custom option product data will be updated via cron qua cron, and you can check the process in Bulk Action (System > Action Logs). You should use this option when 1 template is assigned for a bulk of products to avoid connect timeout issue.
Custom Option Image for Magento 2 extension allows admins to add images/swatch images/colors to custom options of products. It supports uploading unlimited images and assigning to custom options of different types, such as drop-down, multiple select, checkbox, radio button.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Custom Option Image.
2.1 General Configs
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
Note: The module works with simple product, configurable product, bundle product (without dynamic pricing), downloadable and virtual product.
It only supports adding images for products that can have custom options by Magento default so the extension does not work with the grouped product. In case of bundle product, it only supports uploading images for the custom options created by admin, not the bundle items.
2.2 Frontend View Settings
a. In Drop-down Option View, choose one of the following options.
Show image when selected: Image is only displayed when the custom option is selected.
For example:
Show all images: All images are displayed in each custom option. If a customer selects an option, its image will be highlighted.
b. In Multiple Select Option View, choose one of the following options:
Show image when selected: Image is only displayed when the custom option is selected.
Show all images: All images are displayed in each custom option. If a customer selects an option, its image will be highlighted.
For example:
2.3 Image Size Settings
In Drop-down Option Image Height, set image height for drop-down option type.
In Drop-down Option Image Width, set image width for drop-down option type.
In Radio Buttons Option Image Height, set image height for radio buttons option type.
In Radio Buttons Option Image Width, set image width for radio buttons option type.
In Checkbox Option Image Height, set image height for checkbox option type.
In Checkbox Option Image Width, set image width for checkbox option type.
In Multiple Select Option Image Height, set image height for multiple select option type.
In Multiple Select Option Image Width, set image width for multiple select option type.
2.4 Upload Image for Custom Options
Go to Products ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Choose one product ⇒ Find Customizable Options
Click the Image icon to insert the custom option’s image.
Click on the Swatch Image icon to insert the swatch image to the custom option.
Only the drop-down and radio button option type have swatch images.
When hovering over the chosen image, the Delete and Edit icon will appear. Click icons to delete or edit the images and swatch images.
When finished inserting the images and swatch images, click the Save button to save the configurations.
Note: Don’t delete the custom option before save configuration or the images uploaded for options won’t be saved.
Magento 2 Custom Option Absolute Price & Quantity extensionhelps admin enhance product custom options through various functions: adding absolute price and quantity for custom options, set tier prices, and managing stock changes report. Using this module, you can develop a flexible pricing strategy for specific items and increase revenue by selling products with multiple custom options.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 General Configs
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Custom Option Absolute Price and Qty
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
In Allow To Manage Custom Option Qty Report, choose Yes to enable the Custom Option Stock Changes Report section, No to disable it.
Tooltip Config: The tooltip that notifies customers about custom options with absolute pricing is enabled when users hover over the absolute price option. This extension allows you to customize the tooltip.
In Enable Tooltip: choose Yes to enable the tooltip, or No to disable it.
In Message in Tooltip Box: edit a message to be shown on the tooltip.
After completely setting, please press Save Config button to save your customization.
2.2 Apply Absolute Price to Custom Options
Please go to the edit page of a product then press the Customizable Options tab to create custom options for the product.
This module adds a new option “Absolute” to Price Type selection. Choose “Absolute” to set absolute pricing for the option you want.
Two new configs when enabling Magento 2 Custom Option Absolute Price and Quantity:
Position: Product > Customizable options > “Description Type” and “Short Description”: Allow you to show description for each custom option at the frontend product page.
Description Type: Select one of 3 values - None/ Tooltip/ Small text
- If you select "None", Short description is not shown on the frontend.
- If you select "Tooltip/ Small text" but "Short description" is empty, Short description is not shown on the frontend.
- If you select "Small text", Short description will show a small text on the frontend, under the title of custom option.
Short Description: can change following store view.
2.3 Quantity Select Box for Custom Options
Check the “Qty” box to enable the Quantity Selection Box for custom options.
Here is how the absolute price and quantity of custom options are displayed in the frontend:
2.4 Set tier pricing for custom options
Choose the Tier Pricing icon in Customizable Option of a custom option to set the tier prices to custom options. An Advance Pricing window will open for you to edit the pricing information.
Click Add to include a new tier pricing to the chosen custom option.
In Website, set the website that the tiered pricing will be applied.
In Customer Group, choose the customer groups that the tier price will be applied to.
In Quantity: Determine the number of options bought to get the tiered price.
In Price, choose Fixed for a fixed price, and discount for a discount percentage when buying certain custom options.
Note: Make sure to press Save after finishing setting up the configuration. The set price and quantity won’t be displayed until you click Save.
How does the tiered pricing show in the frontend:
2.5 Manage Stock Option Changes Report
Before access to the Custom Stock Options Change Report, make sure to enable the Allow To Manage Custom Option Qty Report in Configuration section.
Please go to Admin Panel ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Custom Option Qty Report to access the Manage Stock Option Changes grid.
In ID column: Shows the custom options SKUs
In Product ID column: The ID of the product which the custom option belongs to.
In Option Title: The title of the custom option.
In Option Value: Shows the values of the custom option
Options Price: Shows the price set for the custom options
In Qty column: Displays the Qty changes of the chosen custom option
In Create At column: specific date and time that the custom options were created.
In Action column: View the order and credit memo of the custom option.
Note:
When there is someone purchase a custom option, the Qty Change will decrease by the number of custom options bought.
When a product is refunded, the Qty change in Manage Options Stock Change Report will increase by the number of products that get refunded.
Short Description and Description Types configs also work with Magento 2 Custom Option Template. However, it can not change the description by store view at the template yet.
3. API Support
This module supports custom option quantities via Rest API.
Bundle Option Image for Magento 2 extension allows showing images of children products in Bundle products page. It supports all input types of bundle product options: drop-down, radio button, check box and multiple select. This is the ideal extension for Bundle product type.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Bundle Option Image
2.1 General
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
Note: The module works with only Bundle product.
In Class Options of Bundle Product: in case your website theme was customized, which makes this theme not have classes of bundle product options like default Magento 2, therefore, the module is not compatible with your website. In this situation, you can add classes to theme of your website:
Add class “input.bundle.option” to show product images in radio button option and checkbox option.
Add class “select.bundle.option” to show product images in drop-down option and multiple select option.
Add both 2 classes to show product images for all input types.
Note: if your website does not have theme customized and this module is completely compatible with your website, you needn’t configure this section.
2.2 Image size setting
In Option Image Width (px): set image width for displayed children products.
In Option Image Height (px): set image height for displayed children products.
2.3 Images sliders with Multiple Select
In Number of items per slide: set Number of child product images per slide in the slider of Multiple Select option.
In Slide Speed: set the duration between the transfer of 2 continuous sliders (unit: milliseconds)
In Auto Slider (Yes/No): choose Yes to set the automation of showing sliders (sliders run each 5 seconds) in Multiple Select option, or No to not set it.
Note: After setting, you must save your configuration then flush cache to start using the module.
2.4. Custom CSS
In case you want to make some changes to the bundle product page, you should add custom CSS in this filed. Let's follow our instructions under the box to make the right modification.
Advanced Review for Magento 2 provides product page with an upgrade review function. Customers now can write more detailed reviews by adding Pros and Cons for each of them. Moreover, buyers are able to interact with other reviews by voting or reporting as well as sharing reviews to other social networks. And the feedbacks are displayed in the smartest way with the review rating summary and filter – sort by – pagination function. All of these advanced features are easy to manage at the backend.
2. How Does it Work?
2.1 In Store – Configuration
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Advanced Review and start configuration.
2.1.1 General
In Enable Advanced Review: Choose Yes to enable the module, otherwise choose No to disable it.
2.1.2 Pros and Cons Display Options
In Enable Pros, choose Yes to display the Pros values for customers to select when writing reviews, otherwise choose No.
In Enable Cons, choose Yes to display the Cons values for customers to select when writing reviews, otherwise choose No.
In Number of Pros to display, choose the number of Pros values you want to display.
In Number of Cons to display, choose the number of Cons values you want to display.
In Enable User-defined items, choose Yes to enable customers to add new values for Pros and Cons attributes when submitting a review.
All Pros and Cons are shown in grid tables. Go to Marketing Manage Pros and Manage Cons to see submitted pros and cons. They have status as Disable when customers submit.
To let these pros and cons be displayed and auto-selected in the Edit review page, you have to change status to Enable. Select pros and cons, then choose Action box and update status to Enable. Only when staus of Pros and Cons is Enable, they are shown in the drop-down list Pros and Cons in the Edit Review page.
After the review is approved, these pros and cons are also shown in the frontend for other customers to select when they submit new reviews.
2.1.3 Helpfulness Display Options
In Show Helpfulness, choose Yes to enable displaying helpfulness vote in each product, otherwise choose No.
In Allow Guest Vote, choose Yes to enable not logged in customers to vote for helpfulness, otherwise choose No.
2.1.4 Abuse Report
In Enable Report, choose Yes to enable customers to report inappropriate review or spams, otherwise choose No.
In Allow Guest Report, choose Yes to enable not logged in customers to report inappropriate review or spams, otherwise choose No.
Here is how Helpfulness and Abuse report will be displayed in reviews.
2.1.5 Review Summary Block
In Enable, choose Yes to display Review Summary block, otherwise choose No.
Module allows to display the percentage, total votes of each rating value, rating stars.(1-5 stars).
2.1.6 Recommend to a Friend
In Enable, choose Yes to enable Recommend to a Friend feature for each review.
In Answer Options, enter the value for the answers of Recommend to a Friend box.
In Answer Options to Display in Summary Graph, enter the value for the answers which will be used to calculated the percentag for summary graph in the below section.
2.1.7 Access Options
In Who Can Review The Product?, choose either All, Only customer or Only registered customers who bought the product can review it to select customer groups you want to enable review.
If you chooose Only registered customers who bought the product can review it option, an additional config name Order state to post review will show up.
In Order state to post review, you can choose in which order state (Complete, On Hold, Pending, Processing) the customers are allow to review the product.
2.1.8 Social Sharing
In Enable, choose Yes to enable Social Sharing, otherwise choose No.
In Add Social Network, choose the Type of social networks you want to display along with the Images for them. The image can be uploaded at store backend or other hosting. The best image size for display is 40x40.
Click Add to add more social networks.
2.1.9 Sorting and Filter
In Enable, choose Yes to enable Sorting and Filter, otherwise choose No.
In Available Page Limiter, choose the number of reviews available for customers to choose to be displayed in a sorting and filter page.
In Default Page Limiter, choose the default number of reviews to be displayed in a sorting and filter page. The default limiter must be among the above available limiter.
Allow Sorting by, choose among Date, Rating or Helpfulness for sorting options.
In Allow Filter Review, choose Yes to enable Filter Review, otherwise choose No.
In Filter by Pros, choose Yes to enable Filter by Pros, otherwise choose No.
In Filter by Cons, choose Yes to enable Filter by Cons, otherwise choose No.
When admins enable filter and sorting, customers can easily search for reviews.
2.1.10 Email Notification
In Enable New Reviews Notification, choose Yes to enable sending notification via email when there are new reviews, otherwise choose No.
In Send Emails to, select the email receiving the notification.
In Email Sender, select the email sending the notification.
In Email Template, select the email template for the notification.
2.1.11 AntiSpam Protection
In Enable, choose Yes to enable anti-spam protection, otherwise choose No.
In Site Key, click on Create a site key and get the Site Key to create reCAPTCHA for your site fill in the configuration.
In Secret Key, click on Create a site key and get the Site Key to create reCAPTCHA for your site then fill in the configuration.
2.2 In Marketing – Advanced Review
Please go to Stores ⇒ Marketing ⇒ Advanced Review and start configuration.
2.2.1 Manage Pros
Tick on the Pros value and click on the Actions box to choose either Delete or Update Status.
Click on Add New Pros to add more Pros value.
In Edit Pros, admin can assign Name, choose Status and the Visibility of each Pros value.
2.2.2 Manage Cons
Tick on the Cons value and click on the Actions box to choose either Delete or Update Status.
Click on Add New Cons to add more Cons value.
In Edit Cons, admin can assign Name, choose Status and the Visibility of each Cons value.
2.3 In Store - Rating
Click on Add New Rating to new Rating Value.
In Default Value, enter the default value for the new rating. If you are using multiple store view, fill in the value for each store view below.
In Visibility, set the visibility for the store views you want to show the rating
In Is Active, check to active the value.
In Sort Order, enter the order of the rating value in the frontend.
Quick View for Magento 2 Extensionallows customers to check preview of products and add products to cart in Quick View popup without visiting the product page. Besides, customers can also execute other actions just like in a real product page, such as: add products to compare, wish list, send email, write review and check related/up-sell products. Admin can easily settings and design of Quick View Popup.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Ajax Quick View.
2.1 General Configs
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it.
In Show Related Product Block, choose Yes to include related product block in Quick View popup, or No to exclude this information.
In Show Up-sell Product Block, choose Yes to include up-sell product block in Quick View popup, or No to exclude this information.
In Show Mail-to, choose Yes to enable mail-to option in Quick View popup, or No to leave it out.
In Show Add to Wishlist, choose enable add to wish list option in Quick View popup, or No to leave it out.
In Show Add to Compare, choose enable add to compare option in Quick View popup, or No to leave it out.
In Show Review and Ratings, choose Yes to include review and ratings in Quick View popup, or No to exclude this information.
In Show Additional Information, choose Yes to include additional information (product detail block) in Quick View popup, or No to exclude this information.
In Show Go To Product Link, choose Yes to enable Show Go To Product link in Quick View popup, or No to leave it out.
2.2 Quick View Popup Design
In Button Text Color, set color for text on Quick View button.
In Button Text, enter text for Quick View button. Eg: Quick View, View Product…
Push Notifications for Magento 2 extension allows admin to reach customers in the fastest way by sending a message in small popup form even if they are offsite or even when the browser isn’t open.
*Note: The extension doesn’t support push notifications on tablets and mobiles.
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
In order to get Server Key and Sender ID of Firebase project, follow this instruction:
Go to https://firebase.google.com/, then log in your Gmail account or register a new Google account if you haven’t got one. Click the GetStarted button.
*Note:
If changing Sender ID or Server Key, all previous subscription can’t be normally operated.
Add a new project by click Add Project button.
Enter ProjectName, then Project ID will be automatically created and fill in the Country/Region option. Click the Create Project button.
On the ProjectOverview section, select Projectsettings.
In Settings, choose Could Messaging. Then you can get the Server Key and Sender ID.
*Note:
Magento 2 Push Notification extension can only be used for https website.
The reason is clearly stated: “The FCM SDK is supported only in pages served over HTTPS. This is due to its use of service workers, which are available only on HTTPS sites.”
In case you have further questions on Firebear, please read the document.
2.2 Push Notifications Configs
2.2.1 Dashboard Push Notifications
The Push Notifications Dashboard provides a report with a full statistic of:
Subscriber information: number of subscribers from each browser, a total of subscribers, and unsubscribed.
Notification information: total sent, delivered, fail, clicked, message, date, and status.
2.2.2 Manage Notifications
The NotificationsGrid allows admin to add new, edit, and manage notifications. In Action column, after clicking Select, you can see Edit and Delete.
To create New Notification, follow these steps:
Click AddNotification button.
You will be redirected to Edit Notification Page, fill in the required fields to create a new push notification.
In Active, select Yes to enable the notification, No to disable it.
In Title, enter the title of the notification.
In Description, enter the content for the notification.
In DestinationURL, fill in the link you want to redirect customers after they click the notification.
In Icon, upload icon image.
In Image, upload an image to display on the notification.
In Tags, enter tags of the notification. This is optional.
In Send Time, schedule the time to send push notifications to subscribers.
In Store View, select which store views you want to display the notification.
Click Save button to save all configurations.
*Note:
After a notification is sent based on the Send Time config, the status of that notification will be automatically changed to “Disable” on Manage Notifications grid. You can perform mass action to send the notifications with “Disable” status.
2.2.3 Manage Subscribers
The Subscribers Grid allows you to keep track of the customers who receive the push notification. The Subscribers Grid contains Subscriber ID, Name, Browser, Store View, Created, Subscribe and Action.
In Action, you delete the subscriber.
You can use mass action to send notifications to selected subscribers.
Magento 2 Product Images by Customer extension allows your buyers to upload pictures of products to Magento stores. This will increase your reliability and encourage next customers to buy with validated preferences from other real customers.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 Configuration
Please go to Admin Panel ⇒ Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Product Images By Customer
2.1.1 General Configs
In Enabled, choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
In Allow Guests to Upload Images, choose Yes to allow both guests and registered customers to upload images, or No to not allow.
In Email Required, choose Yes to force users to submit emails to upload images, or No to not require.
In Tab Title, edit tile for the tab that displays images uploaded by customers on the product page.
In Tab Description, edit a message for customer product images.
2.1.2 Display settings
In Slideshow Speed, enter the transition duration (in seconds) between two continuous slides.
In Number of Images per Slider: limit the number of images to be shown on the customer product image tab.
In Limit Number of Uploaded Images at Once: enter the maximum number of images that users can upload at once.
In Horizontal Image Dimension (in slider), set the width (px) of images displayed in the slider. The maximum number allowed is 200px.
In Vertical Image Dimension (in Slider), set the height (px) of images displayed in the slider. The maximum number allowed is 200px.
To see the full size of images, users need to click on an image in slider then it will be shown in a popup. The user can zoom in this image by hover over it.
In Horizontal Image Dimension (Zoom Image), set the width (px) of the image when it is zoomed in.
In Vertical Image Dimension (Zoom Image), set the height (px) of the image when it is zoomed in.
2.1.3 Set up email notification
The admin can set up to receive notification emails whenever customers have uploaded images to the website.
In Enable Email Notification to Admin, choose Yes to send emails to admin when a customer has uploaded images, or No to not send.
In Email Sender, select an email sender.
In Email Receiver, enter email address to be sent notification emails.
In Email Templates, select a template of the notification email.
Note: After settings, you need to press “Save Config” button to make your configuration be effective.
The scope of all config is store view, so you can setup for each one.
2.2 Customer Product Images Management
Please go to Marketing ⇒ Product Images by Customer ⇒ Customer Product Images Management
2.2.1 Image Management grid
This grid display information of uploaded images.
ID column: image’s ID
Status column: the status of uploaded images. It can be Approved or Not Approved. The default status of pictures that have just been uploaded is Not Approved.
Image column: image thumbnails
Product SKU column: the SKU of product that is added image to.
Customer Email column: email that customer submitted when uploading images.
Action column: linked to the image details page.
You can approve/ disapprove/ delete multiple images right in the grid easily:
Select the images that you want to add mass action.
In Actions drop-down: choose Approved to enable images in the frontend, Not Approved to disable them or Delete to delete them from your site.
2.2.2 Image details page
Please click on Edit link in the Action column to go to the image details page.
In Approve: choose Yes to enable the image in the frontend, or No (set as default) to disable it.
In Customer Email: the image that customer submitted. You are not allowed to edit this field.
In Image: the uploaded image. You can click on the image to view the full size pic, Image Size, and Image Resolution.
In SKU: product SKU. You are not allowed to edit this field.
In Store Views: select store views to enable the image.
3. Upload Images
3. 1 Upload images from the frontend
In order to upload images from the frontend, please go to Customer Images tab in a product page and follow the instructions:
In Your Name: enter your name in this field.
In Your Email: enter your email in this field.
In Choose Image: click on the button to select an image from your database.
Click on Add more image to choose more images to be uploaded at once.
Finally, Press UPLOAD button to complete
Note:
* means Required Fields
The maximum allowed size for uploaded images is 2MB.
3.2 Upload images from the backend
To upload images from the backend, please press the Add New Image button on the Image Management page.
In Image Edit page, you can upload multiple pictures and assign to a product.
In Approved, choose Yes to enable the uploaded images in the frontend, or No to disable them.
In Customer Email, enter an email address
In Image, upload images, you can browse to find or drag image to this field.
In SKU, enter a product SKU that you want to assign images to.
In Store View, select store views that the images are enabled.
Previous/Next Product Page for Magento 2 extension helps customers to navigate previous or next products within the same category conveniently. Normally, customers have to go back to the category to navigate other previous/next products, which leads to waste a lot of ordering time and might dissatisfy your customers. Meanwhile, with our module, it can totally solve this default issue. Customers now can browse previous/next products easily. Furthermore, the more conveniently they see your items, the more orders they can place.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 In the frontend
This is how Magento 2 Previous/Next Product Page Extension is displayed in the frontend:
Allow customers to navigate next/previous product pages with buttons.
Show popup when hovering on Previous/Next buttons.
NOTE: If customers navigate a product page directly without via category or search result page, Previous/Next buttons will not be shown on this product page.
2.2 In the Backend
Go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Previous/Next Product
In Enabled, choose Yes to enable this module.
In Use Layer Navigation:
If you choose Yes, previous/next product page function would be applied to the products which are filtered in the layer navigation.
If you choose No, Sort by configuration will be immediately shown in the backend. Choose one of those options below to decide the order of the products when using previous/next product page function in the frontend:
Position: products will be navigated in the order of the product ID in the backend.
Product Name: products will be navigated in the order of product name.
Price: products will be navigated in the order of product price.
Current Sort Order: if you choose this option, products will be navigated in the default order.
In Display Popup When Hovering Previous/Next Button:
Choose Yes to show a popup with thumbnail when customers hover on Previous/Next button.
In Show Thumbnail Image of Product on Popup, choose Yes to show the image of product on popup. If not, choose No.
In Number of Characters Displayed on Popup, set number of characters of name shown on the popup.
In Width of Thumbnail Image on Popup, set width of thumbnail image of items as pixel.
In Height of Thumbnail Image on Popup, set height of thumbnail image of items as pixel.
In Position of Button, choose one of these positions:
Previous | Back | Next: Back button will be displayed between 2 other buttons.
Back | Previous | Next: Back button will be shown on the left of the page and Previous/Next button will be on the right.
In Button Background Color, choose a color for background of all buttons.
In Button Text Color, choose a color for text of all buttons.
In Label of “Back to Category” Button, type label of Back to Category button as wish.
In Label of “Back to Result Search” Button, type label of Back to Result Search button as wish.
In Label of Previous Button, type label of Previous button as wish.
In Label of Next Button, type label of Next button as wish.
Refund Request by Customer for Magento 2 extension allows customers to submit a refund request on the Customer Account Page. Admins receive the notification of new refund request and accept or reject that request on the Refund Request Grid.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 General Configs
2.1.1 General
Go toStores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Refund Request by Customer.
In Enabled, choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
In Apply Refund Request for Orders, choose the types of orders to apply the refund function.
2.1.2 Refund Request Popup
In PopupTitle, fill in the name of the Refund Popup.
In Popup Description, fill in the description of the Refund Popup. This section is located under the Popup Title.
Refund Popup consists of title, description, and other fields (dropdown, yes/no, text area field) to effectively collect customers’ refund request.
In Enable Dropdown Field, choose Yes to enable this field.
In Title of Dropdown Field, fill in the title of this field.
Then go to Sales ⇒Refund Request Dropdown Options to create the options for the dropdown field. See tutorial in 2.4.
In Enable Yes/No Field, choose Yes to enable this field.
In Title of Yes/No Field, fill in the title of this field.
In Title of Refund Reason Field, fill in the tile for this field. This is actually the text area field for customer to state the detailed reason why they want to refund.
Let’s see an example to understand the component of Refund Popup:
2.1.3 Email Configs
In Admin Email, enter the mail of admin who will receive the notification email each time the new refund request is submitted. In case you want to enter various admin emails at the once, please use comma to separate each email address.
In Email Sender, select a person who is entitled for sending email.
In Notify Email Template, select a template for email notifying new refund request to admin.
In Approve Email Template, select a template for email notifying customers that their refund request is accepted.
In Reject Email Template, select a template for email notifying customers that their refund request is rejected.
See the tutorial in 2.5 to create the email template.
2.2 Order Grid
Go to Sales ⇒ Orders ⇒ Order Grid.
A new column named Refund Status is added to the Order Grid. This column reflects the status of refund for the orders, which includes 2 statuses: Reject and Accept.
2.3 Refund Request Grid
Go to Sales ⇒ Refund Request by Customer ⇒ Refund Request Grid.
The Refund Request Grid displays all refund requests collected from the Refund popup form. This grid consists of information of customers and their refund request, including Customer Name, Customer Email, Increment ID, Type of Refund, Product is Opened, Detailed Reason, Refund Date, and Status.
You can accept or reject the refund request here. Click on the request (you can choose multiple requests), then click on the Action dropdown to select 1 of 3 actions: Accept, Reject, and Delete.
2.4 Refund Request Dropdown Options
Go to Sales ⇒ Refund Request Dropdown Options
The Refund Request Dropdown Options Grid allows you to create new options for the dropdown field of Refund Popup.
Click Add New Option to create a new option.
In Option, fill in the name of the new dropdown option.
In Status, choose Enable to make the option active.
Click Save button to save the configuration.
2.5 Email Template
Please navigate to Marketing ⇒ Email Templates
Click Add New Template button to create a new email template.
In Template, select the option under Bss_Refund Request. Then click Load Template button.
In Template Name, fill in the name for the template.
The other fields are automatically filled in after you load the template. These following are three types of emails.
Review Reminder for Magento 2 extensionis an easy solution to collect reviews from customers who have ordered products on sites, then to effectively boost websites’ content. This Magento 2 module supports sending automated review reminder emails to the chosen customer groups.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 General Configs
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce Review Reminder and start configuration.
In Enable, choose Yes to have Magento 2 Review Reminder extension worked on sites, or choose No to disable the module.
In Send Email After X Days, admins can set the days after which the first review reminder email will be sent. Fill “0”, then the reminder notification is immediately delivered after customers complete their orders.
In Customer Groups, please select customer group to apply automated reminder emails. Admin can choose multiple groups by holding Ctrl and click.
In Maximum Number Of Email Per Order, insert a number to configure the limitation of sent emails. Magento 2 Review Reminder extension will stop sending notifications when customers submit reviews for all ordered items or sent counts reach the maximum.
In Email Sender, choose Sender email to send review reminder emails.
In Email Templates, one template is selected to apply to reminder notifications.
In BCC field, insert various emails to send reminder message without customers knowing other recipients.
In Clear Log Record after X Days, insert a number to automatically remove emails from Review Reminder Logs when it reaches the specific time. Filling “0” means disabling log auto clearing feature.
In Order Status, select Order status that the module will send review reminder emails to customers when their orders have such status.
You can easily import old orders which are available before you install this module so that the review reminder function can be applied to these orders.
Note:
When pressing on Import old order all the order dated before you install the module will be loaded into Review Reminder Logs. You can also exclude orders that you don't want to send out the email using filter and time window then running Delete action. Once you're ready, you need to run cron to send out the email reminder.
In Test Email, insert an email to send a test reminder message.
Coupon is one of the most outstanding features making Review Reminder for Magento 2 extension different from other competitors.
In Enable Sending Coupon: Choose Yes to enable this function. Store owners can send emails with coupon codes to rewared customers for the first reviews.
In Coupon, choose Review Reminder Cart Rule to enable rewarded code to be sent in default template as a gift for customers’ first review submission, or choose No to disable this function.
This rule is automatically created when you install this extension. Coupon code is auto-generated with default discount as 10% and no expired date.
After customers submit reviews and store owners approve these reviews, emails including the coupon code are sent to customers.
If admins want to add a new coupon rule or change existing rule, please go to Marketing ⇒ Promotions ⇒ Cart Price Rules, click and edit.
In Send coupon email based on Review Status: choose order status to send customers the coupon emails
In Customer: Select the type of customers to whom you will send the emails.
*Note: Only customers go to the product page and submit reviews by clicking the product link in the review reminder email, coupon emails can be sent to them.
In Email Templates, we have created Review Reminder Send Coupon Email Template (Default) in advance for admins to apply. For a new email template, admins can follow Marketing ⇒ Communications ⇒ Email Templates and select Add New Template button to open New Template tab.
2. 2 Review Reminder Logs
Please go toMarketing ⇒ Review Reminder
To make it more convenient for the management of orders and review reminder emails, Magento 2 Review Reminder extension provides admins with Review Reminder Logs. In this grid, admin can track order information, preview, manually send reminder message, and delete emails from logs.
If admins schedule a specific time in Clear Log Record after X Day of General Configuration, then emails will be automatically removed set days after being included in Review Reminder Logs.
The core aspect of an easy-to-use, outstanding online store is the ability to show customers their desired products instantly. And a flexible Magento 2 Layered Navigation is the key to this problem. The extension by BSS helps your buyers filter products by attribute in Magento 2. The fast-loading Ajax layered navigation allows customers easily search for any items with multi-select among a wide range of attributes.
2. How Does It Work?
Before going into details of the configuration, we want to remind you about some terms we will use in the User Guide.
About Attributes: Attributes are the building blocks of your product catalog, and describe specific characteristics of a product.
There are 2 terms will be used in the User Guide: Attribute Block and Attribute Option.
2.1. Layered Navigation Configs
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ LayeredNavigation.
Here you will see 2 sections: Layered Navigation Configuration & Layered Navigation Custom Css.
Expand the Layered Navigation Configuration section.
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the module, otherwise choose No.
In Rating Attribute Block, choose Yes to enable filter by rating attribute, otherwise choose No. Multiple select is disabled for rating attribute block, and users can only select one rating attribute option at a time.
In Category Tree Level, enter the number of category tree level to be displayed in Category attribute block. Enter 0 to display the default Category.
Let’s take the following example:
If you enter 0: only show category A
If you enter 1: show category A and sub-categories of the category A (B and C)
If you enter 2: show category A, B, C and also sub-categories of category B.
In Use Ajax, choose Yes to enable loading layered navigation result by Ajax, otherwise choose No.
In "Apply Filter" Button, choose Yes to display Apply Filter button on the frontend, otherwise choose No.
If you choose Yes: customers can select wanted attribute options, and click Apply Filter button. Then, customers can get corresponding search results with their selected options.
For example:
Customer select options as below:
Results are generated:
To clear filters, customers click to Clear All.
*Note: We will have some logic for filtering here:
Filter by category: If you select 2 categories, only products belonging to either of 2 categories are displayed in the filter results (OR condition).
Eg: You select Jackets and Tees categories. Product A belongs to Jackets. Product B also belongs to Tees
→ Hence, product A and B will be displayed after filtering.
Filter by attribute input type (Multiple select, Dropdown, and Swatch):
If you choose 2 options in an attribute, the results will show all products satisfying 1 or 2 of these 2 options (OR logic).
Eg. You select Insulated and Hooded in the style option. After filtering, you will get all products with Insulated OR Hooded style.
If you choose 2 options in 2 different attributes, the results will show all products satisfying both of these 2 options (AND logic).
Eg. You select Mesh and Fleece in the material option and select XS in the size option. After filtering, you will get all products with Fleece OR Mesh material AND with size XS.
Filter by Price: you are allowed to filter Price by the only one range.
Eg: you can filter products with price from $20 to $50. It is impossible to filter products with 2 price ranges: $20-S50 and $70-$100.
Note:
+ Function Filter by price DOES NOT depend on the config default Price Navigation Step Calculation - set up 3 options in the configuration will not result in bug of displaying price in Layer Navigation.
+ If Price is set to be seen as List, the price range will not be influenced by default config set up at Configurations. However, it will get influenced by the config "Layered Navigation Price Step" set up at the backend Category page.
Filter by Rating: you are allowed to filter by the only one rating option.
In Expand/Collapse, choose Expand to expand the attribute options after loading the page or filtering results (only applied to the Vertical layered navigation). Choose Collapse to collapse the attribute options.
In Show Navigation: Choose the display of layered navigation. There are 3 options - Vertical, Horizontal, Both.
Choose Vertical to display the layered navigation vertically on the left side of the page.
Choose Horizontal to display the layered navigation horizontally at the top of the page.
Choose Both to display the layered navigation in both way at the same time.
In Show More/Less, fill in a number (X). If the number of attribute options is bigger than X, the Show More/Show Less buttons will be displayed. Enter 0 if you want to disable the Show More/Show Less button.
If you want to add custom CSS to the layered navigation, you can do it in the Layered Navigation Custom Css section.
Expand the section and in the Custom Css field, you can enter your custom CSS.
2.2. Product Attribute Settings
Please go to Stores ⇒ Attributes ⇒ Product Edit Product Attribute and start configuration.
2.2.1.Storefront Properties
In Storefront ⇒ Properties Use in Layered Navigation, choose one of the two options below
Filterable (with results): Layered navigation includes only those filters for which matching products can be found. Any attribute option that already applies to all products shown in the list does not appear as an available filter. Attribute options with a count of zero (0) product matches are also omitted from the list of available filters.
Filterable (no results): Layered navigation includes filters for all available attribute options and their product counts, including those with zero (0) product matches. If the attribute option is a swatch, the value appears as a filter, but is crossed out.
Please note that Use in Layered Navigation is only available to catalog input type Dropdown, Multiple Select and Price.
2.2.2. Storefront Proper
Go to Attribute ⇒ Information ⇒ BSS Layered Navigation to start configuration.
In Display Option Settings, there are 8 display options to choose. But the options are available to specific catalog input types, here are how you can set up.
Display Option
Catalog Input Type
Label with checkbox
Multiple Select + Dropdown
Label with radio box
Visual swatch
Dropdown
Visual swatch with label
Text swatch
Price slider (from-to)
Price
Price range (automatic calculator)
Price input box (from-to)
In Show More/Less, there are 2 options:
No: disable Show More/Show Less button of the attribute block.
Use General Setting: follow the general settings at Stores Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE Layered Navigation ⇒ Show More/Less.
In Expand/Collapse, there are 3 options:
Expand: expand the attribute options after showing filtered results.
Collapse: collapse the attribute options after showing filtered results.
Use General Setting: follow the general settings at Stores ⇒ Configuration BSSCOMMERCE Layered Navigation ⇒ Expand/Collapse.
Click Save and flush the cache to complete the configuration.
NEW UPDATE: Show/hide count in the layer by following this path config Catalog > Catalog > Layered Navigation > Display Product Count.
In Magento 2 default, in product pages such as catalog or search result, pagination will be displayed at the end of each page as an option to load the next pages. With this function, users only can load the next page one by one. In general, it is not convenient for users if there are great numbers of pages. To optimize the searching experience for Magento users, BSSCommerce quickly develops Infinite Scroll for Magento 2 Extension- providing new functions that give admin more choices in setting up how to load the next pages: automatically load with Ajax when customers scroll down to the end of pages, free to customize Load More button/ Back to Top button, lazy loading image. Besides, admin can choose which categories the module will work for. Our extension will contribute to making your site become more professional and user-friendlier.
2. How Does It Work?
To make configuration of this module, follow this following instruction:
Step 1: Go to Admin Panel ⇒ Stores ⇒ Configuration
Step 2: At the left side of the page, find BSS Commerce select Infinite Scroll
There are 3 main parts you can fix as your wishes: General, Go To Top, Button Load More.
2.1 General Configs
In Enabled, choose Yes/ No to enable/ disable module
In Loading Icon, click button Choose File Select an image file from your computer location. This image will be used as icon displayed while loading product with Ajax. Click Delete Image if you want to use the default icon
In Show load more button pages, add a page number into this field. Once set up, when auto ajax loading till this page number, a button will be displayed for users to load the next pages manually.
If you set up this field to 0, there will be no Load More button.
If you set up this field to 1, Load More button will be displayed right on the first page. You can customize Load More button in the following box.
In Exclude Category, add the ID of categories which you don’t want the module work for
In Enabled Lazy Loading, choose Yes to enable Lazy Loading function, which will delay image loading until users scroll down to the images, which help enhance loading speed for your site
In Enabled Search Result Page, choose Yes to enable the module to work on the search result page
2.2 Button Go To Top
You can set up button Go To Top as wish in term of:
Guiding texts
Background color
Trigger
Location
Speed
2.3 Button Load More
You can set up button Load More as your wish in term of guiding texts and background color for the button.
Gallery for Magento 2 extensionallows admin to create image gallery from scratch, including uploading images, adding new albums, and configuring each image and album regarding its content, layout and display effect. This is an optimal tool to help admin manage all products’ images and provide better visualization of product for customer thanks to widget support and full responsiveness.
2. How Does it Work?
2.1 General Configs
Go to Stores ⇒ Settings ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Gallery
In Enabled Gallery, choose Yes to enable the gallery, otherwise choose No
In Image Per Page, limit the display of number of items for each page
In Album Layout, choose one of the two available of album layout: Ajax or Standard
In Popup Auto Play, choose Yes to enable automatic next image for the gallery as you might want
In Popup Auto Play Speed, choose the speed for auto play
In Popup Title Position, choose the position of fancybox title in with 3 options: Over, Inside, and Outside.
In Popup Transition, choose the effect of image display with 2 options: Fade or None
In Disable Fancybox of Extension, choose Yes to disable the fancybox function or No to enable it
Note: You should only set Disable Fancybox of Extension to No for theme which has already installed Fancybox function or you might come across some errors.
2.2 Content Management
2.2.1 Manage Item
Go to Content ⇒ BSS Gallery Manage ⇒ Manage Item. See the list of items here with information
Click Add New Item to a new item into one album
In Item Title, pick title for the new item
In Image, upload image for the new item
In Video, if your item is a video which has already been uploaded on YouTube, add the embed url key
For example:
In Status, choose Enabled to use this image
In Sort Order, fill in the order of this image
In Select Albums, choose one or multiple albums to assign your new item
In Description, write its description if needed
Note: If you delete an item, please clear the cache to ensure the number of items is updated in frontend albums.
2.2.2 Manage Album
Go to Content ⇒ BSS Gallery Manage ⇒Manage Album. See the list of albums here with information.
In Add New Album, add new albums into the gallery
In New Gallery Album ⇒ Album Information⇒ General, you can edit these following field.
In General Information, decide Album Title, write Album Description if needed, then write metadata in Meta Keywords and Meta Description to support SEO.
In Layout: choose album layout type in : Standard or Slider.
If you want to set automatic sliding action for your album then choose Yes in Slide Auto Play, otherwise choose No.
In Status, choose Enabled to activate the new album otherwise choose Disabled.
In Assign to Store Views: select store view to display the album.
In New Gallery ⇒ Album⇒ Album Information⇒ Manage Item
In Manage Item, choose one or several items to add to the new album, then in AlbumThumbnail, choose an item to be album thumbnail.
2.2.3 IMPORT
Please navigate to Content ⇒ BSS Gallery ⇒ Manage Import. You can import/ export multiple albums/ items at the same time by using CSV files.
To import albums through CSV, you need a CSV file as below:
Album ID: Album ID will be auto-counted with the existing Album ID. If you leave the field blank or enter an ID that does not match the previously existing IDs, a new album will be added to the Gallery. In case of filling an ID with the same existing ID, this means you will edit album with this ID.
Album Title: Type the names of new albums. This field is required.
Album Description: Type the description of new albums.
Meta Key: Type the meta keywords of new albums.
Meta Description: Type the meta description of new albums.
Layout: This field has two values: 1 means Standard, 2 means Slider. In case of filling other values or leaving blank, Layout is set to Standard.
Auto Play: This field has two values: 1 means Yes, 0 means No. In case of filling other values or leaving blank, Auto Play is set to Yes.
Status: This field has two values: 1 means Enable, 0 means Disable. If you enter other values or leave blank, Status is set to Yes.
Item IDs: Items with IDs added to the column will be assigned to the corresponding album.
To import albums, click button Choose File and select CSV file, then click Import Album.
To export album, click button Export Album, select the file location and click Save.
To import items through CSV, you need a CSV file as below:
Item ID: If you leave the field blank or enter an ID that does not match the previously existing IDs, a new item will be added to the Gallery. In case of filling an ID with the same existing ID, this means you will edit item with this ID.
Item Name: Type the names of new items. This field is required.
Item Description: Type the description of new items. This field is required.
Image Path: After uploading item images onto Magento site, you need to copy the sources of these images and paste them into this field. The folder to upload images in the computer is /pub/media/Bss/Gallery/Item/image.
Video URL: You can show a video by copy URL link of the video on Youtube and paste it into this field.
Sort Order: Type the display order of each item.
Status: This field has two values: 1 means Enable, 0 means Disable. If you enter other values or leave blank, Status is set to Yes.
Album IDs: Albums with IDs added to the column will contain the corresponding items.
To import items, click button Choose File and select CSV file, then click Import Item.
To export items, click button Export Item, select the file location and click Save.
2.2.4 Manage Config
This will direct you to the general configuration under Stores ⇒ Settings ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Gallery. So, check section 2.1 out.
2.3 Widgets
Go to Content ⇒Elements ⇒Widgets.
Click Add Widget button to add a new widget.
In Type, choose BSS Gallery Widget.
In Design Theme, select your website theme.
Click on Continue button
You will two tabs to configure here, which are: storefront properties and widget options
2.3.1 Storefront Properties
In Storefront Properties, choose a title for the widget in Widget Title, and pick which store view to place widget
In Layout Updates, you can configure the following field.
Display On to choose which category/product type/page for gallery displaying
Container to choose an option among the available list of positions in the drop-down to place the widget on the page.
*Note:
- Only CMS pages of default Magento are displayed as the options in Layout Updates, the admin-created CMS page does not appear in the Specific Page list.
- To add a gallery album to these custom pages, in the page management grid, select Edit page > Insert Widget > Bss Gallery Widget.
2.3.2 Widget Options
In Widget Description, write a description for the widget.
In Widget Album, choose which album to be displayed on the widget.
In Widget Layout, choose one of the 2 layout types for the widget including slider and standard.
If choose Slider for Widget Layout, select True to enable Auto Play, otherwise select False, then fill out the Auto Play Time if needed.
In Enable Repeated Images: choose Yes to allow repeating images; otherwise choose No. If you select No, there appears the two following cases:
+ The number of images is less than or equal to 5: customers cannot click Next/Previous.
+ The number of images is greater than 5: there is an image slider but images cannot be repeated.
As you know, the default of Magento does not allow customers to cancel orders from the frontend, which causes some inconvenience for them when shopping; hence, our Frontend Cancel Order for Magento 2 module totally completes this missing feature of Magento. The extension is developed to help customers cancel their orders with Pending status from My Account dashboard and My Order page in the frontend. Frontend Cancel Order for Magento 2 definitely brings more convenience for customers and enhances their shopping experiences.
2. In the Frontend?
This extension allows customers to cancel orders from the frontend: Customers need to login, then go to My Account ⇒ Account Dashboard or My Orders.
Allow customers to add comments in a confirmation popup: When customers click Cancel Order button, there will be a confirmation popup which allows them to enter comments.
If they click Yes, orders will be canceled.
If they still do not want to cancel orders, they can choose No
Send Notification Emails to admins automatically after customers canceled orders
Note: The comment is displayed in the order details in the backend.
Change order status from Pending to Canceled and auto restock products
3. Configs in the Backend
Go through System ⇒ Configuration ⇒BSSCommerce ⇒ Cancel Order
In Status Module, choose Enable to activate the module
In Email Sender, set which email will be email sender
In Email Address to receive notification, enable to set which email will receive notification emails
In Choose Email Template, configure to choose email template for the notification emails.
In Notice when customers click cancel orders, customize Notice Note in the confirmation popup when customers click cancel orders.
In Label for button cancel order, change the label of Cancel Order button
Note: If you want to customize Email Template to have more choices in Choose Email Template, follow these steps:
Go to Marketing ⇒ Communications ⇒ Email Templates ⇒ Add New Template
In Load default template, choose Template you want, then click Load Template
In Template Information, enter text as you want in Template Name, Template Subject.
In Template Content and Template Styles, you can edit HTML or css as you want.
FAQs for Magento 2 extensionallows admin to create and customize frequently asked questions in the backend so that customers easily find the questions. As you know, the default of Magento 2 does not support this necessary function, so installing FAQs extension is absolutely a smart decision. Your Magento 2 store will be functional when your customers can find the answers for FAQs and also make questions conveniently right on the product page
2. In the Frontend
Navigate to FAQs main page via shortcut URL on the website header and footer in the frontend.
On the header:
On the footer:
On the FAQs main page:
Show FAQs categories
Display Most FAQs, Category list and Tag list on the left sidebar.
Present an image of a category on the category box.
On each category box, the answer per question can be collapsed or expanded. When customers click into the question, then there will a short answer displayed with the author’s name and time created. If customers want to see the full answer, just click into “See more"
When navigating a FAQs category page, all questions in this category will be revealed here.
On the question detail page:
Customers are able to vote helpful/unhelpful for the answer
Right sidebar and related tags under the answer conveniently
On the product page, FAQs tab is added to the additional information block, so that customers easily see the FAQs and also submit questions.
3. Configs in the Backend
3.1 General Configs
3.1.1 General
Go to Stores ⇒Configuration ⇒BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ FAQs
In Enable, choose yes to enable our module.
In Add Roboto Font, choose Yes if you want to add this Roboto font. Choose No if you don’t want or already had it.
In Add Font Awesome, choose Yes if you want to add this Font Awesome. Choose No if you don’t want or already had it.
3.1.2 FAQ Display
In Show Most FAQs Box, choose Yes if you want to show the Most FAQs block in the FAQs Main Page.
In A Number of Questions in Most FAQs Box, set a number of questions for the Most FAQs block.
In Show Related Questions, choose Yes to show Related Questions in the question detail page.
In A Number of Questions Per Category, set a limitation for a number of questions will be shown in categories in the FAQs main page.
In Sort By, choose one of 3 options below to sort FAQs in the main page.
Time created
Title
Number of Vote Helpful
In Question Block Display, choose one of 2 options below to show the questions in the block in a short form.
Expand: all the questions in the box will be always displayed.
Collapse: when customers click into the question, the answer will be shown (and will be closed when they click into another question).
In Product Page Full Question, choose Yes if you want to show full details including answer of each question on the product page.
In Require Login to Vote, choose Yes if you only want the logged-in customers can vote.
In Show Social Button, choose Yes if you want to show the social button for customers to share the question via Twitter and Facebook
In Background Color of Sidebar Header, pick a color you want the sidebar header to be more attractive.
3.1.3 Notify Message
In Message in Search Result Page, input the message you want to notify the search result.
In Message in Question with Tag Page, input the message you want to notify the results of choosing a tag.
In Like Button Message, input the message you want to show when customers vote helpful.
In Unlike Button Message, input the message you want to show when customers vote unhelpful.
3.2 FAQs configs
3.2.1 FAQs
Go to Marketing ⇒ FAQs ⇒ FAQs, there will be a grid for you. Then you navigate to each question to edit or click into Add FAQ button so as to create a new question.
In General, you can edit these following fields.
In MostFAQ, choose Yes to show this question in the most FAQs.
In Answer, input the answer for the question. Besides, admin can customize the answer as conveniently as in Words.
In Show Full Answer, choose Yes if you want to show full answer when customers click into the question without navigating its own page.
In Short Answer, edit the short answer displayed when customers click into the question.
In Tag, input the tag related to the question. They are separated by a comma.
In Using Real Voting Data:
If you select Yes, FAQ module will get the real data of helpful/unhelpful votes.
If choosing No, there will be 2 configurations for you to set a number you want for the data helpful/unhelpful votes.
A Number of Helpful Votes
A Number of Unhelpful Votes
In Store, choose the store view you want to show the question.
In Customer, customize the name of the customer as you might want
In Time Created, choose the day when the question is created as wish.
In URL Key, set URL for the question, if let it be blank, our module will use the ID to navigate to the question detail page.
In Category Assign, select the category you want to assign the question.
InProduct Assign ⇒ Assign All Products, choose Yes if you want to assign the question to all of your products.
In Related FAQ Assign, select other FAQs which are related to this question.
In Mange Labels, you can set the title of question per store view.
3.2.2 FAQs category
Go to Marketing ⇒ FAQs ⇒ FAQs Category, there will be a category grid. Then you navigate to each category to edit or click into Add new category button in order to create a new category.
In General, you can edit these following fields.
Category Title to input the name of the category ( 255 characters maximum)
Show in Main Page to choose Yes if you want to show this category in the FAQs Main Page
URL Key to set URL key for the category
In Category Image, click into Choose File button to upload the image
Title Color to choose the color you want for the title of the category
Background Color to choose the color you want for the background of the image category
In FAQs Assign, there is a grid of question assigned to the category. Admin just needs to search the question and select the tick box to add to the category.
In Manage Labels, you can set the title of FAQs category per store view.
3. API Support
We provide you BSS's list of GraphQL API that our Magento 2 FAQs extension supports.
Magento 2 Cookie Notice extensionallows showing a cookie notification for to website visitors. This module is a simple way to help you comply with the Cookie Laws especially the EU Cookie Law.
The cookie notice will be displayed on the frontend like this:
2. How Does it Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Cookie Notice
2.1 General Configs
In Enabled, choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
In Auto Hide Message (seconds), enter a number to set the duration that the cookie notice is displayed. When the time is over, the notification is hidden automatically.
In Position, select an option (Bottom Left, Top Left, Bottom Right, Top Right) to set the position of the notice to be shown in your website pages.
2.2 Notice Message Configs
In Message Title, edit a title for the notice.
In Title Text Color, select color text for Message Title.
In Message, edit a message to offer information about your website cookies.
In Message Text Color, select color for the message text.
In Background Color, select background color for the notification.
2.3 Acceptance Button Configs
An acceptance button is presented for customers to confirm that they have understood the notice. If they click on this button, the notice is hidden immediately. If they don’t, the notice will be displayed every time they change pages on the website or refresh a page.
In Text, edit text on the acceptance button.
In Text Color, select color for the text on the acceptance button.
In Background Color, select color for the acceptance button background.
2.4 More Information Button Configs
If visitors do not understand the notice clearly, they can click on the more information button to go to another page and learn more.
In Text, edit text on the more information button.
In Text Color, select color for the text on the button.
In Background Color, select color for the more information button background.
In Page, select a content page to be interlinked with the more information button.
Note: Pages listed in the drop-down box are CMS pages in Content Elements. You can go to Content ⇒ Pages to edit the content of CMS pages or create new CMS pages.
2.5 Custom Style Configs
In Custom CSS, customize CSS for the cookie notice to make it more visual.
Note:
Because the scope of the module configuration is store view, you can customize the cookie notice for each store view.
After setting, you need to save your configuration then flush cache to start using the module.
On the one hand, it is designed for those having the plan to launch out Magento 2 websites. Instead of showing blank words like “We are coming soon!” it is a must to create an eye-catching Coming Soon page to earn loves of early audiences.
On the other hand, this extension is required whenever your websites are under downtime. Say goodbye the incommunicative default maintenance page. A dedicated message and a specific maintenance end time make a user-friendly experience.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒BSS COMMERCE ⇒Maintenance Page to start setting up.
2.1 General settings
In Enable Maintenance, select “Yes”/”No” to enable/disable the maintenance page.
In Whitelist IPs, enter IPs that are allowed to access to the whole website during the maintenance time. Those IPs are separated by a comma without space.
In Restrict URLs, enter URLs that visitors can still access during the maintenance time. Multiple URLs must be separated by a comma without space. Add a slash (/) after the URL of the home page.
In Redirect Page, select where to redirect customers during maintenance time:
404 Not Found
Homepage
Enable Cookies
Privacy Policy
About us
Customer Service
Custom Page
In Enable Google Analytics, choose Yes to enable Google Analytics tracking for the Maintenance page. Otherwise, choose No.
*Note:
Please turn off Magento 2 default maintenance mode (if any) before enabling BSS Coming Soon/Maintenance Page extension. Otherwise, there will be conflict and error
Custom Page is the customized maintenance page set as follows.
2.2 Layout
There are two built-in layouts to choose from:
1 Column
2 Columns
2.3 Background
In Background Types, choose among three options:
+ Image: Upload one image to be the background of the custom page. Supported formats include jpg, jpeg, gif, png.
File size should not exceed the website’s maximum upload size. 1920x960 is the best-recommended size.
+ Slider: Upload multiple images to slideshow the background every 5 seconds. After clicking the “Choose Files” button, hold “Ctrl” and choose as many images as wanted. Supported formats include jpg, jpeg, gif, png.
File size should not exceed the website’s maximum upload size. 1920x960 is the best-recommended size.
+ Video: Upload one video to be the page background. Supported formats include mp4 and WebM. Please verify your upload_max_size PHP value. If the video size is greater than this value, the video will not be uploaded
2.4 Logo
In Icon, click “Choose File” to add any images to the Coming Soon/Maintenance page. It is recommended to upload your Logo – the brand equity.
Feel free to customize Icon Width and Icon Height to fit your page the most. We recommend entering the original sizes of the uploaded image.
2.5 Set up a countdown timer
A countdown timer is an essential part of the Coming Soon/Maintenance page so that visitors know exactly when to return your website.
Under the Timer Countdown tab:
In Enable: Turn the timer countdown on/off
In Title: Tailor the title of the countdown timer
In Title color: Support color picker to select the title color
In End Time: Decide when to stop the maintenance mode
In Disable maintenance mode after end time:
Yes: When the timer reaches end time, visitors can access to the site normally
No: Instead of turning off maintenance mode, visitors will still be redirected to the maintenance page and the timer will stop at 00:00:00
Clock Type: Select the type of countdown clock.
2.6 Metadata
Under Text Content tab:
In Page Title: Enter meta title of the customer page
In Page Description: Enter the Meta description for your maintenance page
Better for SEO juice.
2.7 Set up Newsletter, Social & Footer
Even your site is off; you can still get in touch with potential customers.
Under the Newsletter tab:
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the Newsletter subscription block; otherwise, choose No
In Title, tailor the title for newsletter box
In Title Color, enter or pick a color for the title
Under the Social tab:
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the Social block; otherwise, choose No
In Title, tailor the title for the Social block
In Title Color, enter or pick a color for the title
In Facebook Link/Google+ Link/Twitter Link/Instagram Link/Pinterest Link, remove # and add your business social accounts.
In dropdown options of Footer, you can choose defined blocks or customized maintenance footer.
Moreover, you can create new blocks by going to Content => Blocks.
For example, here we choose Maintenance Page Footer.
2.8 Set up an alert email for admin
You should always be aware of the maintenance end time so that you can adjust the time if necessary. Under Alert for Admin tab:
In Email Sender, choose the sender of the alert email
In Email Receiver, enter one or multiple addresses to receive the alert
In Email Template, choose the template of the alert email
In Number of Days to Notify Admin in Advance, enter the number of days before the end time to send notification email automatically to the admin.
*Notes:
You must install SMTP to send alert to the admin
If you do not install Cron, please run the command php bin/magento cron:run --group="default" instead
Add a logo to the email template for a professional display. Learn how here.
2.9 Preview the page
Once you complete all settings, remember to Save Config.
Also, there will be a notification of Cache Management on the top of the page, please follow the link and flush the cache.
Click the Preview button to preview the coming soon/maintenance page.
2.10 Enable/Disable Maintenance Page via Command
To enable, please run php bin/magento maintenance:enable
To disable, please run php bin/magento maintenance:disable
Magento 2 Checkout Success Pageis an extension that allows store owners to customize Checkout Success Page (known as Thank You Page) as they want, display order details and style success page with a thank you message, a coupon code, CMS blocks, suggested products, etc. With this module, your thank you page will be more informative and will give customers the convenience in the checkout process.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Checkout Success Page
2.1 General
In General, choose Yes to enable the module, No to disable it.
2.2 Order Information Section
In Enable, choose Yes to enable section, or No to disable it
In Show Order Status, choose Yes to enable order status, or No to disable it
In Show Product Thumbnail, choose Yes to enable product image, or No to disable it
In Show Reorder Button, choose Yes to enable, or No to disable it
In Show Print Button, choose Yes to enable, or No to disable it
Note: Other order information like shipping address, shipping method, payment method, billing address and order summary are set to enable/disable with the whole section.
Moreover, on the checkout page, your customer can click on the order number to see their order review in seconds.
If it's a login customers, it will redirect to My Orders in their profile.
If it's a non-login customer, by tapping the order number, customers then have to fill in the form to see their order details.
2.3 Thank You Message
In Enable, choose Yes to enable Thank you message on success page, or No to disable it.
In Message, you can edit the Thank you message.
In Background Image, insert background image for Thank you message.
Note: In case you don’t add the background image, this module still support displays the text message well.
2.4 Coupon Code Section
In Enable, choose Yes to enable coupon code section, or No to disable it.
In Sort Order, select number (1 to 6) to set the position of this section in the frontend.
In Enable for Customer Groups, choose customer groups who can see the coupon code.
In Description, input the description for the coupon code.
In Use Coupon Code, choose available coupon code in the database or choose “Custom Coupon Code” to enter a coupon code not been in the sale rules database.
Note: The Custom Coupon Code field and Min Subtotal field only appear when you select Custom Coupon Code option.
In Custom Coupon Code, enter a coupon code. This coupon code can be from the third party extension or from another store.
In Min Subtotal, set the minimum amount of merchandise that the customer must purchase to qualify for the discount. This feature is valid only for the coupon entered in Custom Coupon Code field above.
In Background Image, click Choose File button to insert background image for the coupon code.
2.5 Social Network Sharing Section
In Enable, choose Yes to enable social networks sharing section, or No to disable it.
In Sort Order, select number (1 to 6) to set the position of this section in the frontend.
Note: this module shares the website homepage on social networks instead of the success page.
2.6 Subscription Section
In Enable, choose Yes to enable subscription section, or No to disable it.
In Sort Order, select number (1 to 6) to set the position of this section in the frontend.
2.7 CMS Block Section
In Enable CMS Block, choose Yes to enable CMS Block, or No to disable.
In CMS Block, select available CMS Block in your store.
In Sort Order CMS Block, select a number (1 to 6) to set the position of sections in the frontend.
In Enable Custom Block, choose Yes to enable custom Block, or No to disable.
In Custom Block, edit a new CMS Block.
In Sort Order Custom Block, select a number (1 to 6) to set the position of sections in the frontend.
2.8 Products Suggestion Section
In Enable, choose Yes to enable social network sharing buttons, or No to disable it.
In Sort Order, select number (1 to 6) to set the position of this section in the frontend.
In Product Type, choose Related Products, Cross-sell Products or Up-sell Products to be displayed in success page.
2.9 Frontend Preview
In Order Number, enter order number of an order that you want to watch its success page.
In Preview Here, click on the link to go to success page in the frontend of that order. In case the order number that you fill in does not exist, the success page of the latest order will be presented when you click on the link.
Note: You need to save config before clicking on the link to preview the success page of the order.
2.10 Custom Style
Change style of buttons: Print order, Re-order, Continue Shopping, and Subscribe.
In Button Text Color, set the color for text in buttons.
In Button Background Color, set the background color for buttons.
Custom Success title
In Success Icon, upload an icon to be displayed along with the success title
In Success Text, edit a short title for the success page.
Change the style of title boxes, including Shipping address, Shipping method, Billing address, Payment method, Order summary, and Recommended products.
In Title Background Color, choose the background color for the title box.
In Title Text Color, choose text color
In Title Border Color, choose border color for the title box.
Note:
Because the scope of the module configuration is store view, you can customize the success page for each store view.
After setting, you need to save your configuration then flush cache to start using the module.
Ajax Add to Cart for Magento 2 extensionallows customers to add products to shopping cart without loading new pages. For products with many options such as configurable, grouped or bundle products, customers can conveniently select product options in popup. Besides, this extension supports admin to change setting and design of popup in the backend.
Note: The extension supports ajax cart function on all pages that contain the Add to Cart button, except for Wishlist, Related, Up-Sell and Cross-Sell Block.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Ajax Cart.
Note:
Success Popup (confirmation popup) to notify customers of adding products to cart successfully
Quick View Popup (add-to-cart popup) for customers to select product options when adding bundle, grouped and configurable products to cart
2.1 General Options
In Enabled, choose Yes to enable or No to disable the module.
Enabled Fuction in Product Page to choose Yes to enable ajax add-to-cart function in product pages.
In ‘Add To Cart’ Button Selector, the default class to select Add To Cart button is “.action.tocart” but you can change this information to make it compatible to your theme/site.
In 'Popup Animation', select one of 5 effects for the popup: Zoom, Horizontal Move, Move from Top, 3D Unfold, Zoom-out; or choose None (appear) if you don't want the popup to be applied the effect.
2.2 Success Popup Settings
Show Product Image to choose Yes to include product image in Success Popup. Otherwise choose No to exclude it
Image Size to set the size of product image displayed in Success popup (measured in pixel)
Show Product Price to choose Yes to include product price in Success Popup. Otherwise choose No to exclude it
Show “Continue” Button to choose Yes to enable Continue button in the Success Popup or No to disable this button.
Countdown Time for Button to enable countdown function for View Cart button or Continue button; then set time (measured in seconds) in Countdown Time section.
ShowCart Quantity and Cart Subtotal to choose Yes to include cart quantity and cart subtotal in Success Popup. Otherwise choose No to exclude them.
Show ‘Go To Checkout’ Link to choose Yes to include checkout link embedded in Success Popup, otherwise choose No to exclude it.
In Show Suggested Product Block, choose Yes to include suggested product block in Success Popup then fill in the following fields, or No to exclude this product block.
In Title of Suggested Product Block, enter the message to motivate customer to add more products to cart. Eg: You may be interested in these products.
In Choose Suggested Products, choose which types of products to display in suggested product block: Related products, Up-sell products, Cross-sell products.
In Number of Suggested Products, set restriction of the number of products displayed in suggested product block.
2.3 Success Popup Design
In Color of Text on Buttons, determine color of text on buttons in Success Popup.
In Text of ‘Continue’ Button, decide the text displayed for Continue button, then choose button color and button color on hover in the 2 sections: ‘Continue’ Button Color and ‘Continue’ Button Color on Hover.
In Text of ‘View Cart’ Button, type the text content displayed for View Cart button, then choose color and color on hover in the 2 sections: ‘View Cart’ Button Color and ‘View Cart’ Button Color on Hover.
2.4 Quick View Popup Setting
In Show ‘Go to Product’ Link, choose Yes to enable “Go to Product” link in Quick View popup, otherwise choose No.
In Show Additional Data, choose Yes to add product information (including product detail, review and more information) in Quick View Popup, or No to hide this section.
2.5. Cart Flying Effect
In 'Enable Cart Flying Effect', choose Yes to enable cart flying effect, then 2 other configs appear, otherwise choose No.
In 'Cart Flying Animation Speed', type the time that customer can see product fly to the cart (measured in seconds). You can type decimal number in this field.
In 'Enable Transparent Image While Flying', choose Yes if you want the product image to fade out when flying into the cart, otherwise choose No.
3. API Support
We provide you BSS's list of GraphQL & REST API that our Magento 2 Ajax Add To Cart extension supports.
Special Price Time Countdown for Magento 2 extension displays countdown timers on the product page and catalog page for special price products and catalog price rule products. This Magento 2 Price Countdown extension is the efficient tool to run a promotion for an online store.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. General Confis
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Special Price Time Countdown.
2.1.1. Enable
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
2.1.2. Promotion Content
In Enable Promotion Message, choose Yes to enable the promotion message.
In Text, enter text for the promotion message.
In Color, pick a color for the promotion message.
In Font Size, define a font size for the promotion message.
In Enable Promotion Discount, choose Yes to enable the promotion discount.
In Text, enter text for the promotion discount.
In Color, pick a color for the promotion discount.
In Font Size, define a font size for the promotion discount.
*Note: The value of promotion message and promotion discount will be automatically calculated based on the special price.
For example: original price = $100, special price = $75
The promotion message value is: $25
The promotion discount value is: 25%
2.1.3. Start Time Countdown
In Enable Start Time Countdown, choose Yes to enable Start Time Countdown. This countdown is used for notifying customers about the upcoming promotion.
In Display X Days Before, enter the number of days that the Start Time Countdown is displayed before the starting date of the special price.
For example:
The promotion is valid from May 10 to May 15. Set Display X Days Before = 2
Start Time Countdown is displayed on May 8.
In Display on Catalog Page, choose Yes to enable the Start Time Countdown on catalog page.
In Time Countdown Style, choose one of the 3 following styles: Default, Frame, and Square.
In Use Time Countdown Message, choose Yes to enable the Start Time Countdown message.
In Time Countdown Message, fill in the Start Time Countdown message.
In Color of Message, select a color for the Start Time Countdown message.
In Font Size of Message, define a font size for the Start Time Countdown message.
In Display on Product Page, choose Yes to enable the Start Time Countdown on the product page.
All the rest of the config is the same as the setup of Start Time Countdown on catalog page.
*Note: With different setup, you can specify different style, message and design for the Start Time Countdown on the product page and catalog page.
For example:
Start Time Countdown on catalog page. Style: Frame, Message: The promotion will soon be here.
Start Time Countdown on the product page. Style: Square, Message: Don’t miss the discount.
2.1.4. End Time Countdown
In Enable End Time Countdown, choose Yes to enable End Time Countdown. This countdown is used for reminding customers of the current promotion.
In Display X Days Before, enter the number of days that the End Time Countdown is displayed before the ending date of the special price.
For example:
The promotion is valid from May 10 to May 15. Set Display X Days Before = 3
End Time Countdown is displayed on May 12.
In Display on Catalog Page, choose Yes to enable the End Time Countdown on catalog page.
In Time Countdown Style, choose one of the 3 following styles: Default, Frame, and Square.
In Use Time Countdown Message, choose Yes to enable the End Time Countdown message.
In Time Countdown Message, fill in the End Time Countdown message.
In Color of Message, select color for the End Time Countdown message.
In Font Size of Message, define font size for the Start Time Countdown message.
In Display on Product Page, choose Yes to enable the End Time Countdown on product page.
All the rest of config is the same as the setup of End Time Countdown on catalog page.
2.1.5. Search Engine Optimization
A promotion page is automatically generated to present all discounted products with countdown timer. This separated page is supported with basic SEO config:
In Promotion Page Title, enter the name placed on the header of the promotion page.
In URL Key, define the URL key for the promotion page.
In Meta Title, fill in meta title for the promotion page. The standard length of meta title is around 60 characters.
In Meta Keyword, fill in meta keywords for the promotion page.
In Meta Description, fill in meta description for the promotion page. The standard length of meta description is around 300 characters.
2.2. Set Special Price for Products
Go to Catalog⇒ Products.
Find the product you want to set special price, click the Edit button to go to the Product Edit Page.
Enter the product special price in Special Price, then set the starting and ending date of the special.
In Enable End Time Countdown, the option is Yes by default. You can select No to disable End Time Countdown for each product.
In Enable Start Time Countdown, the option is Yes by default. You can select No to disable Start Time Countdown for each product.
2.3. Set Catalog Price Rule
Go to Marketing ⇒ Promotions ⇒ Catalog Price Rule.
Click Add New Rule button. Then fill in the required fields in Rule Information, Conditions, and Actions.
Follow this example:
*Note: If a product follows both Special price rule and Catalog price rule, the extension will prioritize these 3 situations:
Countdown will apply catalog price rule or special price depending on which one is in effect.
With products with both rules and in the valid time, Countdown will be applied for a product with cheaper price.
With products that are near the valid time, Countdown will be applied for the valid time that is earlier.
2.4. Insert Widget for Time Countdown
Go to Content ⇒ Elements ⇒ Widgets.
Click Add Widget button to create a new widget.
2.4.1. Countdown Clock Widget
To create the Countdown Clock Widget, choose BSS Time Countdown (Countdown Clock) in Type.
Fill in the required field in Storefront Properties. Follow the example:
In Widget Options, follow this instruction:
In Enable Widget, choose Yes to activate the widget.
In Enable Start Time, choose Yes to enable the Start Time Countdown Clock.
In Start Date, select the starting date of your promotion.
In Use Time Countdown Message, if choose Yes these 2 following configs will be displayed:
Time Countdown Message: Enter the message for the Start Time Countdown Clock.
Color of Message: Choose the color of the Start Time Countdown Clock message.
In Time Countdown Style, choose one of the 2 styles (Default, Square) for the Start Time Countdown Clock.
In Enable End Time, choose Yes to enable the End Time Countdown Clock.
In End Date, select the starting date of your promotion.
In Use Time Countdown Message, if choose Yes these 2 following configs will be displayed:
Time Countdown Message: Enter the message for the End Time Countdown Clock.
Color of Message: Choose the color of the End Time Countdown Clock message.
In Time Countdown Style, choose one of the 2 styles (Default, Square) for the End Time Countdown Clock.
This is an example of Countdown Clock Widget:
2.4.2. Start Time Countdown Widget – Upcoming Sale Widget
To create the Start Time Countdown Widget, choose BSS Time Countdown (Start Time – Upcoming Sale Product List) in Type.
Fill in the required field in Storefront Properties like the previous part.
To complete Widget Options, follow this instruction:
In Enable Widget, choose Yes to enable the widget.
In Title, fill in the title of the widget.
In Show Product Slider, choose Yes to display the discounted products in the slider.
In Number of Products Per Slide, restrict the number of products displayed on each slide.
In Auto Slide Time, decide the period of time each slide is automatically transited.
In Number of Products to Display, limit the number of products to be included in the slider. For example, you can display 30 products in total, and show 5 products per slide.
This is an example of Upcoming Sale Widget:
2.4.3. End Time Countdown Widget – On Sale Widget
The setup of On Sale Widget is the same as the Upcoming Sale Widget.
*Note: The Upcoming Sale Widget is calculated from the present time to the Start Time, while the On Sale Widget is calculated from the present time to the End Time.
If you make any change in the Catalog price rule, you need to reindex (reindex: System/Index Management).
Promotion Bar for Magento 2 extensionhelps you create unlimited notification bars to update your customers on promotional deals as well as important news to grab customers and visitors’ attention
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 General Config
Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Promotion Bar.
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
In Display “Close” Button, choose Yes to show the “Close” button in the top right position of the promo banner. Customers can manually close the bar with that button.
In Display Multiple Promotion Bars, If select Yes, banners set with the same position on the page will be shown in a slider. Please, use the same resolution images for the best results.
In Enable Slide Control, select Yes to show the “Previous” and “Next” button on the slider.
In Enable Slider Pagination, choose Yes to enable pagination function for the slider.
In Autoplay Speed of Slider, decide the amount to time for the slider to automatically transit. Count in seconds.
In Auto Close Slider After, decide the amount to time for the slider to automatically close. Count in seconds. Enter 0 to disable the auto-close function.
2.2 Manage Promotion Bar
Go to Marketing ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Promotion Bar ⇒ Manage Promotion Bar.
The Manage Promotion Bar grid is developed as the standard of Magento 2 default grid. You can create a new banner, set up and manage all promotion bars here.
After clicking on the Create New Promotion Bar button, you will be redirected to New Promotion Bar Page. There 3 main sections: General, Display Rule, and Content and Design.
2.2.1 General
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the new promotion bar, or No to disable it.
In Name, enter the name for the new promotion bar.
In Store Views,choose one or multiple store views where your new promotion banner should be displayed.
In Customer Groups, select which customer groups you want to display the new promotion bar.
In Start Date, use the calendar view to easily choose the starting date to display the new promotion bar. Please enter in yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss or yyyy-mm-dd format. For example:
In End Date, choose the expiring date to remove the new promotion bar. Please enter in yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss or yyyy-mm-dd format.
In Priority, enter a number to set the priority of the new promotion bar. Please don’t leave this field blank.
The value of this field decides which promotion bar is prioritized in case when you choose NO in “Display multiple promotion Bars” in Configuration part, it will show only one banner with the highest priority among various created promo banners at the same place.
2.2.2 Display Rule
In Display on Page, select which page to display the new promotion bar.
In Exclude Categories, enter the ID of Categories to be excluded from the Display Rule. Example: 3,4,5. All the product pages belonging to the category will be excluded from the promotion bar.
In Exclude Products, enter the ID of products to be excluded from the Display Rule. For example: 3,4,5. The promotion banner will be hidden on each product page specified.
In Position, choose one of the 5 following options to set the position of the new promotion page.
In Sticky Bar, choose Yes to stick the bar on the top/bottom page when the customer scrolls.
If the bar position is one of these options: Top of page, Above Menu, Under Menu, Above Page Content, the bar is sticky on the top page.
If the bar position is Under Page Content, the bar is sticky on the bottom page.
If the config Enable Slider Pagination in the configuration is Yes and config Sticky Bar of one bar is Yes, the slider is sticky even if it includes non-sticky bars.
If there are many sticky bars at different positions on the page, only the bar at the highest position will be sticky. For example, you have one bar at the top of the page and one at the Above Menu; both are set to stick, but only the bar at the top of the page is sticky.
If config Display Multiple Promotion Bar is No, display the bar with the highest priority.
In Auto Close Promotion Bar After, decide the amount of time for the new promotion bar to automatically close. Count in seconds. Enter 0 to disable the auto-close function.
2.2.3 Content and Design
In Content, use the WYSIWYG editor to enter text, upload pictures and edit content for the new promotion bar. Remember that you can choose only one picture per bar.
In Background Color, use the color picker to choose the background color. For example:
In Height, enter a number (count in pixel) to set the height of the new promotion bar.
Click Save Promotion Bar button to save all configurations.
Magento 2 Product Label extension allows attaching various visibly-appealing labels such as on sale, new-in, best-seller, hot-deal label to product icon. By that way, online merchants can highlight its promotion and get customers’ attention quickly.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ Product Label
2.1 General Configuration
In Enable Module: choose Yes to enable the module, or No to disable it.
In Batch Size: set batch size based on your site's conditions, this function helps to optimize your website's performance - especially for those with lots of products.
In Display multiple labels on product: choose Yes to show various labels to the thumbnail image of the product that meets the set conditions. If the admin selects No, the only label with the highest priority will be applied.
In If product is out of stock, only show "Out of Stock" label:
With Out of stock Product: when choosing Yes, only those labels under "Apply for Out of stock product" condition will be applied to the accordingly product.
*** Note:
Label with "Apply for Out of stock product" configuration turned to YES will be shown on ALL out-of-stock products even if said products are not satisfied label's display condition.
In case there are various labels set to “Apply to Out-of-stock Product,” the label having the highest priority is used.
Even when those stock-out products meet the conditions of other labels, only “Out of stock” label will be shown.
If the admin selects No, out-of-stock products can be marked with various labels.
In Label does not display on:
Choose any page on which the display of product labels is excluded. Multiple-selection is allowed by holding Ctrl and clicking.
Skip this field to show labels on all pages: Home Page, Catalog Page, Product Page, Shopping Cart Page, etc.
In Display Configuration:
Product Page Label Container: currently the default Magento, change accordingly to your website theme.
Product List Label Container: currently the default Magento, change accordingly to your website theme.
2.2 Product Label Grid
All created product labels are recorded in the grid for further management. Please follow Marketings ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Product Label ⇒ Manage Label.
Product Label grid includes label image, label name, label status, priority, display duration, etc.
In Action column, choose Edit to modify the product label thumbnail, re-schedule the label display, or change label condition.
The admin can choose multiple labels and take mass action to delete those selected labels.
2.3 Product Label Creation
In Product Label grid, please click on Add New Label to create a new product label.
In Name: enter the name of the product label.
In Enable: choose Yes to enable product label, or No to disable it.
In Image: choose button to upload the label prepared beforehand to product thumbnail. To replace the label, click the button and re-upload another image.
Admin can adjust the size and move to locate the label anywhere within the product image.
In Priority: Insert one number to decide the priority of label display when “Display multiple labels on product” is set to No or there are multiple “Out of Stock” labels enabled.
In Is Out-of-stock Product Label?:
Choose Yes to apply the label to all stock-out items. If so, there is no need to set label conditions.
Choose No to apply the label to products based on label conditions.
In Valid Start Date: choose date and time to begin the display of label on the product image. Skip this field to apply the label to the ending date.
In Valid End Date: choose date and time to remove the label from the product image. Skip this field to always display the label from its starting date.
In Store view: Choose specific store views that product label is shown. Skip this field to display the label on all store views. Multiple-selection is allowed by holding Ctrl and clicking.
In Customer Group: Choose specific customer groups that product label is shown. Skip this field to display the label for all customer groups. Multiple-selection is allowed by holding Ctrl and clicking.
Similar to setting the Catalog Price Rule, the admin can define flexible conditions to apply the labels to various items.
***Note:
If a label is not set condition and the config "IsOut-of-stock Product Label" is set to No, this label will be applied to all products on the site.
When you make configuration changes to the label that was created, remember to reindex "BSS Commerce Product Label Indexer".
If special price is set as a label condition, it will only be applicable to products with special price that has a specific date range.
Remember to Save the label in completing the product label creation.
3. API Support
3.1 GraphQL API
GraphQL API support is included in the GraphQL package, acting as an add-on for anyone who needs to use GraphQL.
Note: From version 1.1.8, config "Pre-Order Message in Cart/Order" and "Availability Date" were deleted for optimizing purposes. You can fill in the config "Availability message" the text and the date you want to show on the product page.
1. Overview
Pre-Order for Magento 2 extension allows previously ordering out of stock products or upcoming products. Admins can edit notices and messages to alert their customers and offer information about pre-order products.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 General Configuration
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Pre-Order
In Enabled, choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
In Allow Mixing Order, choose Yes to allow adding both regular and pre-order items to an order, or No to allow adding only pre-order items or regular items to the order.
In Display Out of Stock Product with Pre-Order Status Only, config only works when the default "Display out of stock" is set "Yes".
The default Magento 2 disables out of stock products, to enable them, please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Inventory ⇒ Stock Options, in Display Out of Stock Products, choose Yes.
In Text for Pre-order Button, edit text to be shown on the pre-order button.
In Note for Pre-Order Products in Cart/Order, edit a notice for pre-order product in cart/order. {preorder_date} can be used as the Pre-order Button Availability period in each product detail page.
In Default Message for Pre-order Products, edit a message about pre-order products to appear on the product pages. {preorder_date} can be used as the Pre-order Button Availability period in each product detail page.
Note for pre-order products in the shopping cart:
Note for pre-order products in order information page (My Account ⇒ My Orders ⇒ View Order)
Note:
Only registered customers can view the order information page by going to My Account My Orders ⇒ View Order.
Because the scope of the module configuration is store view, you can customize the pre-order configurations for each store view.
After setting, you need to save your configuration then flush the cache to start using the module.
2.2 Product Detail Page Configs
Please go to Catalog ⇒Products then select a product to go to its product details page. Scroll down to see the Pre Order configuration block:
* Notes: This Pre Order for Magento 2 extension only supports Simple products, Configurable Products and Grouped products. It does not support Virtual, Downloadable, and Bundle Products.
In Pre-Order:
Yes: set pre-order function for the product. The Add to Cart button is automatically replaced by the Pre-order button and it is always pre-order items without depending on Quantity and Stock Status.
No: not set pre-order function for the product. And it is the default value if you don’t customize.
When Product Become Out Of Stock: if the product is out of stock, Add to Cart button is replaced by the Pre-Order button and customers can pre-order this product. In case the product is in stock but customers order the quantity of product that is more than the available quantity, this order will be changed to pre-order.
Note:
We recommend you turn off the back order configuration of the default Magento 2 if you set the pre order configuration to Yes/ when out of stock. This is to prevent logic conflict.
You can use the back-order from the default Magento when you turn our pre order to No.
In Pre-order Message, {preorder_date} can be used as the Pre-order Button Availability period. If this field is blank, the default message edited in the configuration will be displayed.
In Availability Message, {preorder_date} can be used as the Pre-order Button Availability period.
In
Here is how the front end renders your message.
2.3 Work with configurable & grouped
To setup pre-order for Configurable Product and Grouped Product, you need to customize for separate children products.
+ With Configurable Product:
If a child product is set as pre-order and buyers select this child product, the Add to Cart button is immediately replaced by the Pre-Order button.
+ With Grouped Product:
In product page, the pre-order message will be shown under the pre-order product.
2.4 Manage previous orders in backend
Please go to Sales ⇒ Orders, the order grid table will appear.
In the Status column, order status of pre-orders is Pending Pre-Order or Processing Pre-Order. You can quickly find the pre-order by sorting status.
Note:
Status “Pending Pre-Order” will be changed to “Processing Pre-Order” after creating invoices for the orders.
You can’t create shipment for the orders including pre-order items.
In case pre-order products have been in stock and you want to change status for the orders containing them, you can go to the Order View Page and change status from Pending Pre-Order to Pending or Processing Pre-Order to Processing.
2.5 Show alert for the pre-order product in the order confirmation email.
This is a built-in feature. The notification message here will depend on the Note for Pre-order Products in Cart/Order configuration at the General Configuration.
*Note: Compatible with MSI
If the website is assigned to multi-source: Product is displayed as Pre-Order only when all sources have stock status is Out of Stock or all source quantities are 0, Salable Qty has no impact.
If the website is assigned to one source only: Product is displayed as Pre-Order only when stock status is Out of Stock or source quantity is 0. If Salable Qty equals or less than 0, the product is still displayed as usual.
3. API Support
3.1. REST API
The REST APIs below is used for tier price, base price, special price with store view scope: See here
3.2. GraphQL API
The GraphQL APIs below is used for tier price, base price, special price with store view scope: See here
Pop-up for Magento 2 extension helps you create the eye-catching pop-up that is highly flexible and customizable for many purposes, such as promotion, notification, guideline, or newsletter. You decide where to display the pop-up, set display animation, and apply for customer groups or store views.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 General Configuration
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Pop-up General Configuration.
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
2.2 Manage Pop-up Grid
Go to Marketing ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Pop-up ⇒ Manage Pop-up.
Manage Pop-up grid shows all pop-up you have created with full information, including Pop-up Name, Enable, Display Rule, Displayed Pages, Content, Store Views, Customer Groups, Start Date and End Date. The Manage Pop-up grid works just like standard grid in Magento 2 default with features such as mass action (delete, enable, disable), filter and column display.
2.3 How to Create New Pop-up
Please click on the Create New Pop-up button located on the top right of the grid. You will be redirected to the New Pop-up Page, which has 3 tabs:
General
Display Rule
Content and Design
There are 4 buttons to support creating a new pop-up:
Back
Reset
Save and Continue
Save Pop-up
2.3.1 General
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the new pop-up.
In Name, enter the pop-up’s name.
In StoreViews, select which store views to display the pop-up.
In CustomerGroups, choose the customer groups to view pop-up.
In StartDate, select a date in the calendar view to begin showing the pop-up.
In EndDate, select a date in the calendar view to stop displaying the pop-up.
In Priority, enter a number to decide the priority of the pop-up when multiple pop-ups are created on a page.
2.3.2 Display Rule
In DisplayRule, choose one of the four following conditions to set conditions for displaying the pop-up:
After customers spend X seconds on the page.
After customers scroll page by X percent.
After customers view X pages.
Immediately when customers visit the page.
Exit Intent
In Xequals, enter a number to decide the value of X.
In DisplayAnimation, choose one of the six following options to set display effects for the pop-up:
Zoom
Horizontal Move
Move from Top
3D Unfold
Zoom-out
None
In Position, select the position to display the pop-up on the page.
Top Left
Top Center
Top Right
Middle Left
Middle Center
Middle Right
In Auto Close Pop-up After, enter the amount of time (seconds) for the pop-up to automatically close. Ex: 10. Enter “0” to disable auto close of Pop-up
In Display Frequency, determine the frequency of pop-up display by selecting one of the following options:
When all conditions are satisfied: the pop-up appears if the above rules are executed.
Only once: the pop-up only appears one time per customer. + For guest customer: the popup will show one time per session. + For login customer: the popup will show one time when they open the site and not login yet, then it will show only one more time when the customer login the account after the popup is created.
+ When the admin click the backend button Reset display event counter (and choose OK when confirmation popup shows up): the popup will show one more time for both guest and login customer.
Only once per session: the pop-up appears once in a session. If you choose this option, you need to set Cookie Expires.
For example, if you choose DisplayFrequency as “Only once per session” and set the 2 minutes for the CookieExpires, the pop-up is displayed when the conditions are satisfied, then it won’t be shown in the next 2 minutes (until the session ends or the cookie expires).
When and only when Display Frequency is When all conditions are satisfied, floating popup can be enabled. In Enable Floating Pop-up, choose Yes to display Floating Popup (Popup still appear on product page after being closed by customer).
After choosing Yes, you need to implement these configurations:
In Floating Pop-up Type: Alter Popup into Icon/Button by selecting one.
If you choose Icon, in Floating Icon, you canchoose one of 8 available icon designs:
Contact Form
Hot Deal
Newsletter
Notification Bell
Promotional
Promotions
Social Media
Warning.
If you choose Button, you can customize the text and color of the popup in Floating Button Text and Floating Button Fill Color.
In Floating Pop-up Position, select the position to display the floating pop-up on the page:
Middle Left
Middle Right
Bottom Center
Bottom Left
Bottom Right
In Display "Close" button, select No to not allow customers to close Floating Popup. Otherwise, select Yes.
In Layout Updates:
In Display on, select pages to show the pop-up, including the following types of pages:
Category Pages
Product Pages
Generic Pages
When you choose each type of page, you can select all pages or specific pages depending on your demand.
For example:
+ Category page:
+ Product page:
+ All pages:
(You can exclude specific pages from displaying a popup when you select the option as All pages)
Furthermore, it is easy to add more layout updates to show popup in more pages by clicking the button.
After selecting the position and page, you can check the result on the front end.
2.3.3. Content and Design
Content and Design
In Content, use the WYSIWYG editor to create content for the pop-up.
You can use this tool to insert widget, image or video for the pop-up’s content.
In Pop-up CSS, use CSS to change the design of the pop-up. If leaving blank, the default pop-up will be applied.
Or, you can use our default template to quickly render your pop up.
There are 5 templates to choose from:
Contact Form
Age Verification
Newsletter
Hot deals (product listing)
Social sharing
After choosing your template, click on the Load Template button to make the template appear in the Content edit interface.
In the Content edit, you can make any modification if needed.
In Popup CSS, you can enter CSS code to change the popup design. If leave blank, the default design will be used.
Note: After any change to the pop-up configuration, either Save, Delete, Mass delete, Mass active, is made, a cache notification will appear.
You then must go to SYSTEM -> Tools -> Cache Management ->Flush Magento Cache for those changes to be applied to the front end
3. API Support
We provide you BSS's list of GraphQL API that our Magento 2 Pop up extension supports.
Products Widget Slider for Magento 2 extension helps store owners to create a product slide which shows off Most Viewed, On Sale, Best Seller products. This slider will promote your products in an eye-catching way, so it is very necessary to boost or cross your sales. Besides, you can put it on anywhere on your site and customize what you want to show.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Admin ⇒ Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Products Widget Slider.
2.1 In Store Front Properties
To begin, you have to go Content ⇒ Widget ⇒ Add Widget. After that, you will see a panel with options. Let’s see this picture below for more details:
Type Option: There are 3 types of widget slider store owners can choose, which is respectively with product features: Most Viewed, On Sale, Best Seller.
Design Theme: Choose the theme
After clicking “continue”, a new panel will appear. See this picture below:
Widget Title: Title of the widget will be used to distinguish with other widgets, not to be shown in the front-end
Assign to Store Views: Choose Store Views which you want your slider to be displayed.
Layout Updates: Click “Add Layout Update”. Choose where you want your slider to be displayed. After choosing a place, select a template. There are 2 types of template:
BSS Products Template: similar to Luma Default template
BSS Curved Template: based on Luma Default template, but improved to be more eye-catching and responsive
2.2 In Widget Option
Title: Choose a title which will be shown in the front end
Website Data: Choose your website where data is used
From Date to Date: Filter by date. Choose a time when data is used. This option is active with Best Seller and Most Viewed. Note:
If you just enter From Date, products will be taken “From Date” to endless.
If you just enter To Date, products will be taken to “To Date” as well.
If you do not enter this option, all products will be taken
Condition: Using conditions of default Magento to filter products
Sort Collection By: With each type, shop owners can choose how to sort
Best Seller: Sort by product name, price, number of products ordered
Most Viewed: sort by product name, price, views time
On Sale: Sort by product name, price, the percentage of price decreased, the fix value of price decreased
Sort Collection Order: Ascending or descending
Show Product Price: Choose “yes” if you want to show product price
Show Add to Cart: Choose “yes” if you want to show “add to cart” button
Show Out Of Stock: Choose “yes” if you want to show “out of stock” products
Show Add to Compare: Choose “yes” if you want to show “add to compare” button
Show Products in Slider: Choose “yes” if you want to use this widget as the slider
Products per slide: number of products you want to show in slider
Show Navigation Dots: Choose “yes” if you want to show navigation dots below the slider
Show Prev/Next Button: Choose “yes” if you want your slider have Prev/Next button
Auto slide every (second): Choose a time for the auto slide. If value = 0 or leave it blank, there is no auto transition
Number of Products to display: the number of products to display in the slider
*Important Note: go to Reports ⇒ Statistics ⇒ Refresh Statistics to update the newest report. So your sliders can import exact data.
2.3 Freely add code to the page
Choose which page you want to edit. Content ⇒ Pages ⇒ Action ⇒ Edit
Click on Insert Widget icon. Do like 2.2-step to insert a new widget
Next, click on Show/Hide Editor to see the code
Code meaning:
{{widget type="Bss\BestSeller\Block\Product\ProductsList" – Block which widget is using
title="BSS Best Seller Product" – widget’s name
websiteID="0" - website id = 0 means all website data; 1,2,3,… is ID of website data
from_date="2018-03-07" –From Date
to_date="2018-03-15" –To Date
enable_categories_filter="1" –Filter by Category 0 = no, 1 = Yes
categories_filter=",38,20,21,23,24,25,26" – List of category to be filtered
collection_sort_by="sold_quantity" - Sort by quantity, name or price
Out of Stock Notification for Magento 2 extension allows customers and guests to sign up for out of stock products. The extension will automatically send to notification email to the list of subscribed customers when the product is back in stock.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 General Config
Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Out of Stock Notification.
2.1.1 Stock Alerts
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it.
In Allow Product Subscription for, select group to apply out of stock notification.
In Send Notification Based on Available Number of Product, choose Yes to allow sending notification email according to the number of items in stock. For example, if there are 15 people sign up for the out of stock notification for a product, but there are only 10 items available. The extension will send product alert for the first 10 people, the remaining 5 people will be put on the waiting list.
In Notification Message, enter a message to guide customers to fill in the email field.
In Stop Notification Message, enter a message to guide customer on how to stop notification from the product. In case you leave it unfilled, the default message will get displayed.
In Limit Email Send per Customer (Must Fill), restrict the number of stock alert email sent to each customer in case the product is back to stock many times. (Only apply to a product)
For example, you set the limit number of emails sent per customer is 3. When a customer subscribes to receive notification of back-to-stock product A, the maximum number of emails you can send to this customer is 3. Even the product A is re-stocked many times (more than 3), you only send customers 3 emails.
If the customer subscribes to get updated of back-to-stock product B, the limit number of email is also 3.
In Send Mail When Quantity (Must Fill), send email to the customer only when product quantity reach meets this requirement.
In Stock Alert Email Template, choose the template of stock alert email.
In Alert Email Sender, choose the sender of the stock alert email.
2.1.2 Stock Alert Run Settings
Note: This Setting is only applied for Stock Alert, not for Price Alert Subscription.
In Choose Type Cron, there are two ways to set the frequency of running cron job to send emails.
Dropdown: On selecting dropdown cron type, there are various options available in Frequency. You can run cron daily/weekly/monthly.
Accordingly, out-of-stock notification emails will be automatically sent daily/weekly/monthly as set.
Field: This option helps you send notification emails more flexibly without selecting Run cron now button.
In Frequency field, enter cron values in the following order:
Here, we set to run cron every minute. In other words, product alerts will be updated every minute.
In Start Time, set the starting time to send emails.
In Error Email Recipient (Must Fill), set email to receive error mail in case of cron job’s error.
In Error Email Sender, set email to send error mail in case of cron job’s error.
In Error Email Template, set an error email template.
*Note: Remember to enable displaying out of stock product.
Go to Stores Configuration
2.1.3 Price Alerts
In Enable: choose to enable the Price Alert function.
In Allow Price Subscription for Customer Group: Choose the customer groups to allow subscribing for price alerts.
In Allow Price Subscription for Product Type: Choose which types of products to allow signing up for price alerts.
Note: For the moment, we haven’t supported this function on Grouped and Bundle products yet. We’ll update as soon as possible. Please contact us if you need this function.
For Simple, Downloadable & Virtual Products: The subscription field is displayed on the product page. When the price of a subscribed product changes, an email will be sent with that product page link.
For Configurable Products: This function is not applied to the parent product and the subscription field only shows up when selecting the child product.
When the price of the subscribed child product changes, an email will be sent with the product page link.
However, if the child product's visibility once set to "Catalog/Search" then the admin changes it to "Not visible individually", the product link will redirect to the Page Not Found.
In Limit Email Send per Customer (Must Fill): here you set the maximum number of emails sent to customers about price adjustments. When there’s a price change, the email will be sent only one after running cron.
In Email Sender: Enter the email address used for sending to customers.
In Price Alert Email Template: Choose the email template for price alerts.
In Notification Message, enter a message to guide customers to fill in the email field.
In Stop Notification Message, enter a message to guide customer on how to stop notification from the product. In case you leave it unfilled, the default message will get displayed.
2.1.4 Notify Button Design
Note: This setting is applied for both Stock & Price Alerts.
In Notify Button Text, edit the text within the nofify button.
In Stop Notify Button Text, edit the text within the stop nofify button.
In Button Text Color, edit text color.
In Button Coor, edit button color.
2.2 Manage Stock/Price Alert Subscription
BSSCommerce ⇒ Manage Stock Alert Subscription (for Stock Alerts) or Manage Price Alert Subscription (for Price Alert). There're 2 separated grid tables for you to keep track & manage these 2 functions.
Admin can manage stock/price subscription information of customer here, including customer name, email, product, send count (the number of times that stock/price email is sent to the customer), send date and status of the subscription.
In the Status column, you will find 3 kinds of status: Sent, Pending and Sent Count Limit Reached.
When the number in the Send Count reaches the number of Limit Email Send per Customer that you set in the configuration, it will show the status Sent Count Limit Reached. Except for 2 cases:
If you increase the limit - The status will change from Pending to Instock to Sent and the Send Count will increase until it reaches the limit again.
The customer unsubscribes and then subscribes again with the same email address - The limit will be reset from the start.
To perform actions on these subscriptions, tick the checkbox and choose:
Delete: to delete all selected price alert subscriptions
Run cron: to send notification emails to selected subscribers
*New Update: The extension has a new feature to export the list of customer subscriptions. You can find the Export button next above the Manage Customer Subscription Grid.
2.3 Stock/Price Alert Email Template
Go to Marketing ⇒ Communications ⇒ Email Templates.
Click the Add New Template button to create the email template.
In Template, select Stock Alert or Price Alert.
Then click Load Template button.
You can modify the template by inserting variables in the Template Content.
Fill in all the required fields, and click Save Template button.
Then go back to the General Config Stock/Price Alert Stock/Price Alert Email Template. You choose a new template you just created, and save the configuration.
2.4 Display Notify Button
2.4.1 Category Page
The Notify button is located under the Out of stock status when hovering on each product. You will be redirected to the product when clicking this button.
2.4.2 Product Page
Guest or not-logged-in customers fill in the email field and click Notify Me button to receive stock alert notification. A message will be shown as “Alert subscription has been saved” and a Stop Notify button appears to stop notification for that product if customer need.
For the logged-in customer, the email field will be automatically filled in.
2.5 Stock/Price Alert Subscription Tabs
Two additional tabs called Stock Alert Subscription & Price Alert Subscription is included on the Customer Account Page of logged-in customers. The customer can check information of products that they have subscribed here, stop notification of any product and stop notification of all products.
2.6 Stock Alert Email
When the product is back in stock, the extension will automatically send notification email as set up in 2.1.
2.7 Stock Alert with Product Types
2.7.1 Simple Product
In Product detail page, set the product's Stock Status to Out Of Stock and Out of Stock Notification to Enable then save.
Said product now shows no Add to Cart button.
2.7.2 Compound Product's logic
*Note* Out of stock notification logic for Configurable Product, Grouped Product, and Bundle Product.
Display out of stock (default): Yes -> category page shows the product that is out of stock with notify me button
The redirect in the notification email when the product is back in stock will depend on where the customer subscribes to get notification:
Subscribe at the parent product -> redirect to the parent product page.
Subscribe at the child product -> redirect to the child product page.
Note: With the configurable product, the module doesn't support the scenario when the parent product is out of stock. (This is because in this scenario, the default Magento still show the product page in stock and can't add to cart the child product)
Frequently Bought Together for Magento 2 extensioneffectively boosts sale by suggesting products that are commonly bought together. The list of items can be chosen from related, cross-sell, up-sell products, or the hand-pick products set admin. The extension can use purchase history to track product commonly sold together and add them to the frequently block.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 Set Frequently Bought Together List
Go to Product ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Product Edit Page ⇒ Related Products, Up-Sell, Cross-Sells and Frequently Bought Together.
In Frequently Bought Together, add products which are commonly bought together with the main product.
2.2 General
Go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Frequently Bought Together General.
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
In Priority List, there are five methods of selecting frequently bought together products. Drag and drop to prioritize the methods to be applied. For example: The extension will prioritize to choose items from Frequently Bought Together Product block. If no items found, the extension will get data from Related Products, then Up-Sell Product, Real Data and Cross-sell Products.
Frequently Bought Together Products: Select items from the frequently bought together product list set in 2.1.
Real Data: Track product which is commonly sold together in the purchase. The items will be calculated according to the frequency of appearance with the main products of orders in the select time period.
In Start Date, select date to begin calculating frequently bought together products for Real Data method.
2.3 Frequently Bought Together List Setting
Go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Frequently Bought Together ⇒ Frequently Bought Together List Setting.
In Display List, there two ready-made design for displaying Frequently Bought Together list.
Style 1:
Style 2:
In Show Main Product in List, choose Yes to include the main product in Frequently Bought Together list. Choose No to exclude it.
In Title of List, enter the message shown above the list. For example: Based on your choice, there are other options you may like.
In Limit Product in List, restrict the number of products displayed in Frequently Bought Together list.
In Limit Products in Slider, restrict the number of items displayed in one slide.
In Slider Speed, set transition duration between 2 continuous slides.
In Auto Slider, choose Yes to enable automatic slider. No to disable this function.
In Show Price, choose Yes to display prices of products in Frequently Bought Together list.
In Show Review, choose Yes to display reviews of products in Frequently Bought Together list.
In Preview Selected Items, choose Yes to enable previewing brief information of the selected product in Frequently Bought Together list. The information includes product name, quantity, and unit price.
In Show “Add to Cart” button, choose Yes to display “Add to Cart” button.
Config to customize“Add Multiple to Cart” button:
Show “Add Multiple to Cart” button.
Text on “Add Multiple to Cart” button.
Background Color of “Add Multiple to Cart” button.
Color of Text on “Add Multiple to Cart” button.
Config to customize“Add Multiple to Wishlist” button:
Show “Add Multiple to Wishlist” button.
Text on “Add Multiple to Wishlist” button.
Background Color of “Add Multiple to Wishlist” button.
Color of Text on “Add Multiple to Wishlist” button.
2.4 Pop-up Setting
Go to Stores Configuration BSSCommerce Frequently Bought Together Pop-up Setting.
When adding products in Frequently Bought Together list to cart, the extension will work like Add Multiple Products to Cart.There are two ways to add product in Frequently Bought Together list to cart:
Add each product to cart separately: Display success pop-up, choose option/quantity in the pop-up for products with options.
Add multiple products to cart: Tick on products and click “Add Multiple to Cart” button. The products added to cart successfully will be displayed in the slider of success pop-up. For products with options, the customer can select options/quantity right from the pop-up.
*Note:
To add all product in Frequently Bought Together list, tick on “Select all product” then click “Add Multiple to Cart” button.
To add selected products to wishlist, click “Add Multiple to Wishlist” button.
In Limit Product in Slider, restrict the number of products displayed in the slider of success pop-up.
In Slider Speed, set transition duration between two continuous slides.
In Auto Slider, choose Yes to enable automatic slider.
In Show Price, choose Yes to display the price of product.
In Show “Continue” button, choose Yes to display “Continue Shopping” button.
In Countdown Time on Button, set countdown function for the “Continue” button or “View Cart” button.
In Countdown Time, set countdown time.
In Show Cart Quantity and Cart Subtotal, choose Yes to display total items in cart and cart subtotal.
In Show “Go to Checkout” Link, choose Yes to display “Go to Checkout” link.
Config to customize“Add Multiple to Cart” button:
Text on “Add Multiple to Cart” button.
Background Color of “Add Multiple to Cart” button.
Color of Text on “Add Multiple to Cart” button.
Config to customize“View Cart” button:
Text on “View Cart” button.
Background Color of “View Cart” button.
Color of Text on “View Cart” button.
Config to customize“Continue” button:
Text on “Continue” button.
Background Color of “Continue” button.
Color of Text on “Continue” button.
Note: You can use the default Magento's Import function to import frequently bought together products.
3. API Support
We provide you BSS's list of GraphQL that our Magento 2 Frequently Bought Together extension supports.
Everyone loves free shipping. And Magento 2 Free Shipping Bar will help you present your free shipping policy to buyers in a compelling and irresistible way. The notifier about free shipping will be displayed in form of a message bar. It informs customers about the minimum cart total to get free shipping and the remaining amount until they reach that limit. For example: “15$ left until 89$ for free shipping”. Regularly, store owners often set a popup to remind buyers of this program. But we all know how quickly it is closed before anything can be read. With Magento 2 Free Shipping Bar, we make sure your message is conveyed to buyers at any places you wish on your store.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Free Shipping Bar and start configuration.
2.1 General Configuration
In Enabled: Choose Yes to enable the module or choose No to disable it. The module can be enabled/disable on Store view level.
In Free Shipping Threshold: For each Customer Group, choose the minimum amount for free shipping at the Threshold box. In the Message box, set the message displaying in the message bar. You can use these 3 variables: {leftValue}, {thresholdValue} and {cartSubtotal}. Please remind that {leftValue}={thresholdValue}-{cartSubtotal}.
The scope of the settings is Store View. Hence you can customize the message in different languages and the Threshold value at different currencies for each store view.
Below is an example of the free shipping bar showing to the not-logged-in customer group.
In Success Message: Customize the message showing when a buyer reaches the free shipping minimum amount.
In Layout Position: Choose the position you want to display the free shipping bar. You can choose among Top Content or Top Page.
In Sticker: Choose Yes to keep the free shipping bar showing during the scrolling down of the page, otherwise choose No.
In Allow to Close: Choose Yes to allow buyers to close the free shipping message bar, otherwise choose No.
In Auto-hide after: Choose the period of time (unit: second) after which the message bar will be hidden. If you set the value to 0, the bar will always be shown.
In Auto-hide after: Choose the period of time (unit: second) after which the message bar will be hidden. If you set the value to 0, the bar will always be shown.
In Free shipping threshold include tax: Choose Yes to include tax in the free shipping threshold in the message bar, otherwise choose No.
2.2 Display on Pages
In Homepage: Choose Yes to display free shipping message bar on the Homepage, otherwise choose No.
In Category Page: Choose Yes to display free shipping message bar on category pages, otherwise choose No.
In Product Page: Choose Yes to display free shipping message bar on product pages, otherwise choose No.
In Cart Page: Choose Yes to display free shipping message bar on shopping cart page, otherwise choose No.
In Checkout Page: Choose Yes to display free shipping message bar on the checkout page, otherwise choose No.
2.3 Design Settings
In Font Type: Choose the font type for the text on free shipping message bar.
In Font Size: Choose the font size for the text on free shipping message bar.
In Text Color: Choose the color for the text on free shipping message bar.
In Value Color: Choose the color for the text of {leftValue}, {thresholdValue} and {cartSubtotal} on free shipping message bar.
In Background Color: Choose the color for the background of free shipping message bar.
In Text Align: Choose the align for the text on free shipping message bar.
In Custom CSS: Admin can customize CSS for the text on free shipping message bar. But admin cannot set the width on the Custom CSS option as it may affect the responsiveness of the message bar.
Note: This extension merely takes care of the display of the free shipping notification. You need to configure your free shipping conditions separately.
Magento 2 Customers Also Bought/ Also Viewed extension help you get the smart product suggestion sections for your store. This module automatically tracks and displays related products of an item based on the real behavior of customers with this item.
There are 2 separate sections in this extension: Customers Also Bought (Who Bought This Also Bought) and Customers Also Viewed (Who Viewed This Also Viewed). The Also Bought and Also Viewed block are displayed on two separate blocks in the frontend. Because they work individually, you can customize for each of them from the backend.
2. How Do It Work?
When a customer is visiting a product page, the extension filters out customers who bought (viewed) this product. After recording the list of customers, this module will collect their order (product page view) history. Then, these products will be indexed as also bought (also viewed) items by customers to be performed on the Customers Also Bought (Also Viewed) block in the frontend.
To customize the settings of this module, please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Customers Also Bought Also Viewed to enable these 2 settings.
Next, navigate to Content ⇒ Elements ⇒ Widgets and click Add Widgets:
In Type: select Bss Also Bought or Bss Also Viewed.
In Design Theme: select a theme you want to add the widget.
In Storefront Properties
In Widget Title: enter a title/name for the widget.
In Assign to Store Views: select a store view to which you want to assign the widget.
In Sort Order: enter a number to specify the order of this widget in the same container.
In Layout Updates: click Add Layout Updates button to show display options. You select a display option in which you want to place this widget and then choose products/pages as well as a container. You can also add more layout Updates by clicking the Add Layout Update button.
In Widget Options:
In Title: edit the title for Customers Also Bought/Customers Also Viewed to be shown in the frontend.
In Product ID:
+ If the currently selected pages are product pages, let's skip this field because the module will filter based on current products.
+ If the currently selected pages are not product pages, let's enter product ID into this field and the module will show the list of also bought/also viewed products of this product ID on the widget.
In Only Show Products from Same Category: choose Yes to only show also bought/also viewed products in the same category as the product being bought/ viewed, or No to show products in any category.
Note: when indicating the category of viewed product, this module will eliminate the root category to get the exact result.
In Limit Number of Products to Be Shown: enter a number to set the maximum number of products are shown on the Also Bought/Also Viewed. The default value will be 10 in case you don’t fill in this field.
In Show as Slider:
+ choose Yes to show also bought/viewed products as a slider. In Number of Products per Slider, set the number of items to be displayed in a slider.
+ choose No to show them in multiple rows. In Number of Product per Row, set the number of items to be displayed in a row.
In Sort by: choose a condition to filter out products to be shown, there are 7 options for you to select:
+ Random: sort out also bought/also viewed products randomly
+ Product Name (A-Z): arrange also bought/also viewed products based on name (A-Z) and sort out the number of products to be shown from the top.
+ Product Name (Z-A): arrange also bought/also viewed products based on name (Z-A) and sort out the number of products to be shown from the top.
+ Product Price (High-Low): sort out the number of products to be shown from the highest to lowest price.
+ Product Price (High-Low): sort out the number of products to be shown from the lowest to the highest price
+ Ordered Quantity of Product (High-Low): sort out the products to be shown from the highest ordered quantity of product to lowest.
In Show In Stock Products Only: choose Yes to only show in-stock products, or No to show both in stock and out of stock products.
*Note: Default Magento 2 disables out of stock product, you can go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Inventory, change Display Out of Stock Products to Yes to enable them.
In Enable Add to Cart Button/ Add to Wishlist/ Add to Compare/ Reviews Link: choose Yes to display these buttons along with products in, or No to disable them.
Finally, click Save, and Flush Cache to see the result on the frontend.
Because the scope of the module configuration is store view, you can customize for each store view.
Rich Snippets in Magento 2 is a kind of additional information about your website which you provide for the search engine crawlers like Google or Bings. This information described in form of structured data markup will be shown in a more appealing display of your Magento 2 store and its products in the search result. Rich Snippets for Magento 2 is the perfect choice to get all Rich Snippets you need with just a few clicks!
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Rich Snippets and start configuration.
2.1 In General Options
In Enabled: Choose Yes to enable the module or choose No to disable it. The module can be enabled/disabled on Store view level.
2.2 In Site Structure
In Sitename in Search Result: Choose Yes to show the website name you assign in the search result, otherwise choose No. If you choose No, the Show Search Box in Search Result will be disabled.
In Website Name: Choose the name for your website to be displayed in the search result.
In Website Description: Write a description for your website to be displayed in the search result.
In Website Image: Choose an image for your website to be displayed when sharing via Open Graph on Facebook and via Twitter Card on Twitter.
In Show Search Box in Search Result: Choose Yes to show a specific search box for your website, otherwise choose No.
In Twitter Username: Enter Twitter Username with @ to support Twitter card.
In Website Image: Choose Yes to show breadcrumbs (show navigation path) of product page instead of the regular URLs in the search result, otherwise choose No.
2.3 In Local Business
In Enable Local Business: Choose Yes to show the following information of your website in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Business Type: Select your suitable business type from the drop-down list.
In Name of Business: Choose the name for your business to be displayed in the search result.
In Logo: Choose a logo of your business.
In Email: Enter your business email.
In Telephone: Enter your business phone.
In Locality: Enter the locality of your business.
In Price Range: Enter the price range of your business.
In Street Address: Enter your business street address.
In Social Profile Links: Enter your business social profile links. Please enter one link per line.
2.4 In Product Options
In Show Name: Choose Yes to show the product name in the search result, otherwise choose No. If you choose No, all the following settings will be disabled.
In Show SKU: Choose Yes to show the product SKU in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Image: Choose Yes to show the product image in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Description: Choose Yes to show the product description in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Review: Choose Yes to show the product review in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Avg. Rating: Choose Yes to show the product average rating in search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Price: Choose Yes to show the product price in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Availability: Choose Yes to show the product availability (in stock/out of stock) in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Conditions: Choose Yes to show the New condition of products. We support the New attribute to appear in the search result.
In Add Category: If you choose Enable, the category path is added to the product URL displayed in SERPs.
In Add Brand: Select an attribute code of the brand to appear in the search result.
In Add Gtin: Select a GTIN to display in the search result.
In Custom Properties: Customize any Rich snippet and assign it to an attribute. You need to enter custom properties following the Rich snippet structure. Otherwise, you face issues when checking your website on Google Structured Data Testing Tool.
2.5 In Category Options
In Show Name: Choose Yes to show the category name in the search result, otherwise choose No. If you choose No, all the following settings will be disabled.
In Show Description: Choose Yes to show the category description in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Product Offers: Choose Yes to display offers of products in the search result, otherwise choose No.
In Show Image: Choose Yes to show the category image in the search result, otherwise choose No.
2.6 In Open Graph
In Enable for Product Page: Choose Yes to enable Open Graph when sharing Product Pages via Facebook, otherwise choose No.
In Enable for Category Page: Choose Yes to enable Open Graph when sharing Category Pages via Facebook, otherwise choose No.
In Enable for Website: Choose Yes to enable Open Graph when sharing your homepage via Facebook, otherwise choose No.
2.7 In Twitter Card
In Enable for Product Page: Choose Yes to enable Twitter Card when sharing Product Pages via Twitter, otherwise choose No.
In Enable for Category Page: Choose Yes to enable Twitter Card when sharing Category Pages via Twitter, otherwise choose No.
In Enable for Website: Choose Yes to enable Twitter Card when sharing your homepage via Twitter, otherwise choose No.
Meta tags play a crucial part in SEO for any Magento store. This information will be read by the search engines to evaluate the content of the site to decide the search result ranking. Meta title and meta description also affect how the site appears in the search result page. Meta Tags Template for Magento 2 helps to create all of this powerful information automatically for all products in your store.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. Feature Settings
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Product Setting:
In Max Product Meta Title Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for product meta title (should be about 70-71 characters).
In Max Product Meta Description Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for product meta description (should be about 160 characters).
In Max Product Meta Keywords: Choose the maximum number of product meta keywords (should be about 30 words).
In Max URL Key Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for product URL keys (should be about 70 words).
In Category Setting:
In Max Category Meta Title Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for category meta title (should be about 70-71 characters).
In Max Category Meta Description Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for category meta description (should be about 160 characters).
In Max Category Meta Keywords: Choose the maximum number of category meta keywords (should be about 30 words).
In Max URL Key Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for category URL keys (should be about 70 words).
2.2. Generate a Product Meta Template
Please go to Marketing ⇒ BSS Commerce SEO ⇒ Meta Template and start configuration.
Choose Add New to create a new meta template.
In General:
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the template or No to disable it.
In Name: Choose a name for the template.
In Meta Template Type: Choose Product.
In Scope: Choose the scope (store view, website) to apply the template. You can choose multiple store views/websites by holding Ctrl and click.
In Priority, choose priority for the template. In case the product is under multiple categories with different templates, the priority settings will be considered for the affected meta template to avoid conflict. The smaller number will be prioritized.
In Product Conditions:
You need to set up necessary conditions to determine which products to be applied by the meta tag template.
In Template Settings:
In Meta Title: Write the meta title for products. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Meta Description: Write the meta description for products. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Meta Keyword: Write the meta keywords for products. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In URL Key: Enter a URL key or click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Short Description: Write a short description of the products. In the WYSIWYG editor, the Insert Template Variables will not be shown. Click on Show/Hide Editor to show the regular text area with variables.
In Description: Write a short description of the products. In the WYSIWYG editor, the Insert Template Variables will not be shown. Click on Show/Hide Editor to show the regular text area with variables.
Finally, you click Save and Generate button and then are redirected to a new Generate Meta Template page. You continue to click Start Generating button and will track the process of generating the product template. You can let the process automatically run and continue to make other configurations in a new tab. Don’t configure on the same tab while the process is happening.
After this process is finished, you can check the results on the Search Engine Optimization of each product edit page.
*Note: In the Search Engine Optimization of each product edit page, you can exclude the product from Meta Templates Updates.
2.3. Generate a Category Meta Template
Please go to Marketing ⇒ BSS Commerce SEO ⇒ Meta Template.
Choose Add New to create a new meta template.
In General:
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the template or No to disable it.
In Name: Choose a name for the template.
In Meta Template Type: Choose Category
In Scope: Choose the scope (store view, website) to apply the template. You can choose multiple store view/website by hold Ctrl and click.
In Priority choose priority for the template. In case the category is under multiple categories with different templates, the priority settings will be considered for the affected meta template to avoid conflict. The smaller number will be prioritized.
In Category Choose:
Choose the category to apply the template. You can choose multiple categories by holding Ctrl and click.
In Apply for Sub-categories: Choose Yes to apply the template for sub-categories, otherwise choose No.
In Template Settings:
In Meta Title: Write the meta title for categories. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Meta Description: Write the meta description for categories. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Meta Keyword: Write the meta keywords for categories. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In URL Key: Enter a URL key or click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Description: Write a short description for the categories. In the WYSIWYG editor, the Insert Template Variables will not be shown. Click on Show/Hide Editor to show the regular text area with variables.
Lastly, click Save and Generate and do similarly as you start generating the product meta template.
*Note: In the Search Engine Optimization of each category page, you can exclude the category from Meta Templates Updates.
Lazy Load for Magento 2 extension serves Magento 2 based website. It not only creates an eye-catching image emerging transition but also optimizes Magento 2 site speed. Especially, the extension is developed with SEO which promotes site rank in the SERPs.
Lazy Load for Magento 2 helps admin thoroughly from the backend. You, at your discretion, decide the homepage shall not be affected by the extension as well as the time point at which the next images will be loaded before appearing on the screen.
2. How Does It Work?
To make configuration of this module, follow this below instruction:
Step 1: Go to Admin Panel ⇒ Stores ⇒ Configuration
Step 2: At the left side of the page, find BSS Commerce, and select Lazy Image Loader.
There are 5 parts you can fix as your wishes: Enabled, Threshold, Exclude controllers, Exclude path, Exclude Home Page.
2.1 Enabled
You can select between enabling and disabling Lazy Load for Magento 2 by setting the status in Enabled box into “Enable” or “Disable”.
2.2 Threshold
In Threshold box, you can set the number pixel before images appear on the screen, then the image will be loaded earlier as the pixels you set. For instance, if you set the number in the box is 14, it means that the images will be loaded before when your scroll position is far from 14 pixels.
2.3 Exclude Controllers, Path, Homepage
Lazy Load for Magento 2 allows admin to decide which part will be excluded from lazy- loaded function. To exclude controller, admin can click on Add and then filling the match in the box. Admin also can delete the Match and add more by clicking on Delete, and Add button alternately.
Similar to Controller, admin can control the Path which they do not want to be affected by lazy image load.
Finally, admin can set whether Homepage is affected by lazy image load or not in the box Exclude Home Page.
After finishing all of these set-up steps, you can click on Save Config button to start using Lazy Image Loader for Magento 2 extension.
Google and other engines use programs which are often known as crawlers to “read” (index) your pages and decide which ranking the content deserves on the search result. Submitting an XML sitemap to these crawlers is how you can get your Magento store indexed. XML Sitemap for Magento 2 is an effective tool for creating and optimizing the best XML sitemap for SEO.
2. How Does It Work?
To configure XML sitemap for your Magento 2 store, please follow these 2 steps:
Step 1: Configure the extension settings as your wishes at Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Google XML Sitemap.
Step 2: Create a new XML sitemap at Marketing Google XML.
First, we will show you how to configure the extension settings.
2.1. General Setting
In Enables: Choose Yes to enable frequency setting for the extension to update the sitemap, otherwise choose No to disable it.
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the extension to update the sitemap. The options are Daily - Weekly – Monthly.
In Error Email Recipient: Choose the recipient to receive error email once there is an error.
In Error Email Sender: Choose the name of the sender displaying in error email.
In Error Email Template: Choose the template for error email.
In Root Path: enter a root path for the xml sitemap.
In Sitemap Title: enter a title for the sitemap.
In Description: enter a description for the sitemap.
2.2. Homepage Options
In Show Homepage: Choose Yes to show homepage in the XML sitemap, otherwise choose No to hide it.
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index Homepage. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index Homepage. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
In Enable Modify: Choose Yes to show the time of the latest modify of the homepage in XML sitemap file, otherwise choose No to hide it.
2.3. Categories Options
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index category pages. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index category pages. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
In Disable Categories: Fill in the ID of categories you want to hide from sitemap (separated by a comma). Products in selected categories will not be affected by this setting.
2.4. Product Options
In Enable Path: This setting depends on the Use Categories Path for Product URLs of your site. Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Search Engine Optimization ⇒ Use Categories Path for Product URLs:
If the setting is No, you will choose No at Enable Path.
If the setting is Yes, you will choose Yes at Enable Path.
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index product pages. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index product pages. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
In Add Images to Sitemap: Choose how you want to add the images of products into your XML sitemap. There are 3 options:
No: Do not add images to the sitemap.
Base Only: Only add base images of products into the sitemap.
All: Add all images of products into the sitemap.
In Disable Product Type: You can choose to hide all products belong to (a) product type(s) from the sitemap.
In Disable Product: Fill in the ID of products you want to hide from sitemap (separated by a comma).
2.5. CMS Page Options
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index CMS pages. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index product pages. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
2.6. Additional Link List
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index additional links. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index additional links. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
In List of Additional Links: Fill in the list of additional links to be shown in the sitemap.
2.7. Sitemap File Limit
In Divide Sitemap: There are 4 options for dividing sitemap
None: Do not divide sitemap.
Date: Divide site map by the last modified date of the products.
Category: Divide site map by the products in the same category.
Manufacture: Divide site map by the products with the same manufature.
Note: Sitemap is divided following the maximum number of URLs per file and maximum file size settings.
In Maximum No of URLs per file: Maximum number of URLs in an XML sitemap file.
In Maximum File Size: Maximum file size in byte.
2.8. Search Engine Submission
In Enable Submission to Robots.txt: Choose Yes to display sitemap file location in Robots.txt file, otherwise choose No.
2.9. Generate Sitemap
After finishing setting up the extension, admins will generate a sitemap which will be created following the above settings.
Please go to Marketing ⇒ Google XML, select Add Sitemap to create a new sitemap.
In File Name: Choose the name for the sitemap. The format is nameofthesitemap.xml.
In case you are already using an XML sitemap, there would be 2 options at this point:
Create a new sitemap with a different name from the old sitemap. You can submit both sitemaps on Google Search Console and the crawler will read both file.
Delete the old sitemap then create a new one with the same name as the old. The new sitemap following the module setting will be over written on the search console and will not affect SEO.
In Path: The default path is “/”. If you want to use a different path, you have to create a new folder at the backend.
Choose Save.
After saving the sitemap, click Generate for the sitemap to be created following the module settings.
2.1o. Include/exclude pages from the XML Sitemap
In product/category edit page, you can easily include or exclude these pages from the XMl sitemap.
Please go to Search Engine Optimization section to configure Yes or No for the
Google AMP - Accelerated Mobile Pages is the hottest trending technology for faster and smoother loading for mobile web pages. With the ability to be loaded in just a few seconds, the new mobile pages will increase user engagement on your store and drop the exit rate. Google AMP Extension for Magento 2 by BSSCommerce is an effective tool to generate and customize AMP pages for your site as your wishes.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 Create & customize AMP pages
The module will auto-generate the category page and product page for your Magento 2 store. For the Homepage, CMS pages, and parent category, admins will have to create by themselves using the AMP widgets provided by the extension. Please follow the steps below to create and customize your own AMP pages in Magento 2
Please go to Admin ⇒ Content ⇒ Pages ⇒ Add New Page and start configuration.
Set a name for the Page in Page Title.
In Content, create the content normally for the desktop version of the Page
In AMP Content, choose Insert Widget.
In Widget Type, please select among 6 AMP Widget Types including: Product list, Slide, Iframe, Social Share, Youtube, and Image.
In the following parts, we will introduce how to configure each type of AMP widgets provided by the extension.
2.2 AMP Product List Widget
In Title: Fill in the text displaying above the products.
In Height: Choose height for product slider.
In Number of Products to Display: Choose the number of products which will be shown.
In Image Height: Choose the height of product image.
In Image Width: Choose the width of product image.
In Condition: Choose the condition for products which will be shown.
2.3 AMP Slide Widget
Please go to Admin ⇒ BSS AMP Slide ⇒ AMP Slide ⇒ Create New Banner and start configuration.
In Enable: Choose Yes.
In Name: Choose the name for the slide (for management purpose at backend only, not to be displayed at frontend).
In Auto play: Choose Yes for the slide to be auto played, otherwise choose No.
In Width: Choose the width for the slide.
In Height: Choose the height for the slide.
In the next step, we will create items for the above slide.
Please go to Admin ⇒ BSSCommerceAMP Slide Items Create New Slide Item and start configuration.
In Enable: Choose Yes.
In Slide: Choose the slide which you just created
In Title: Choose the title for the slide items (displayed in frontend).
In Link: Choose a link where the customer will be directed to once clicking on the slide items.
In Caption: Choose the caption which will be displayed under the image.
In Open Url in a New Window: Choose Yes for the link to be displayed in a new window, otherwise choose No.
In Sort Order: Choose the order of the image in the slide items.
In Image: Upload the image you want to display.
Repeat these steps for all the images you want to be displayed in the slide item. The slide item can include many images. Below is an example of the images we put in the slide items for the homepage.
After finishing making the slide for the AMP banner, insert the banner in the AMP page.
2.4 AMP Iframe Widget
In Link: Choose the link to the Iframe. Please fill in a link with https. The link must be enabled to display at Iframe
In Width: Choose the width for the Iframe.
In Height: Choose the height for the Iframe.
2.5 AMP Social Share Widget
There are 8 types of available social share including Facebook, Email, Gplus, Linkedin, Pinterest, Tumblr, Twitter, and Whatsapp.
Choose Yes to enable otherwise choose No.
For Facebook, please fill in app ID.
2.6 AMP Youtube Widget
InYoutube ID: Choose the text after “https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=”.
In Autoplay: Choose Yes for the video to be auto played, otherwise choose No.
In Width: Choose the width for the video.
In Height: Choose the height for the video.
2.7 AMP Image Widget
In Image: Choose the image you want to display.
In Alt: Choose Alt text for the image.
In Width: Choose the width for the image.
In Height: Choose the height for the image.
2.8 General Configuration
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ Accelerated Mobile Pages and start configuration.
In Enabled: Choose Yes to enable the module, otherwise choose No.
In Enable Search and Subscription Box (for https website only): Choose Yes to display search box and subscription box, otherwise choose No. If your site is not using https, please choose No.
In Button Background Color: Choose the background color for the button on AMP pages.
In Button Background Color (Hover): Choose the background color for the button on AMP pages when hovering.
In Button Text Color: Choose the color for text on the button on AMP pages.
In Button Text Color (Hover): Choose the color for text on the button on AMP pages when hovering.
In Custom CSS: Set the CSS for all AMP pages.
In Enabled: Choose Yes to enable this function for GTM and Google Analytics.
In AMP GTM ID: Fill in the ID of your Google Tag Manage account to integrate.
In AMP Analytics Account: Fill in the ID of your Google Analytics account to integrate AMP pages to Analytics.
In Custom CSS for Home Page/ Category Page/Product Page/: Set the CSS for each type of AMP page.
2.9. New function updates
Auto convert all HTML on site
The module supports converting all HTML on the site to amp HTML. For example, when you enter the description of products or categories, the module supports rendering those HTML scripts to amp HTML.
However, it just supports some basic tags and has not yet supported iframe tag.
Notes to set up image size using class type AMP
For example: <img class="bss-amp-width300 bss-amp-height200" src="path-name"/>
When you go to the AMP page, this image has width as 300 and height as 200.
(This method only applies to AMP pages).
There are 2 following cases:
Case 1: Admin does not set up value for width and height in the backend:
+ Viewing the page under AMP mode, the image sizes are corresponding to values set up in the class:
+ Viewing the page under normal view mode, the real image size is shown:
Case 2: Admin sets up value for width and height in the backend
+ Viewing the page under AMP mode, the image is displayed with the width corresponding to the value of width set up in the class and this module also compresses the image based on a ratio set up for AMP class to show.
+ Viewing the page under normal view, the image is displayed with the width corresponding to the value of width in the original file and this module also compresses the image based on a ratio of the original file to show.
2.10 Note
All of the configurations are under store view scope. You can set up AMP version separated for each store view.
AMP is a separated version of your website (not depend on theme). Hence, customization may be needed.
All of the CSS configurations must follow AMP standard. Please visit https://www.ampproject.org/ to know more details about the standard.
After making new AMP content/changes to AMP content, please submit the link of the content to Google Search Console for changes to be displayed
To validate your AMP pages, please use these three tools:
Dynamic HMTL Sitemap for Magento 2 by BSSCommerce is developed to generate a detailed and useful sitemap including links to categories, products, CMS pages and store views of your Magento 2. This module helps enhance SEO performance of your business and provide your customers with a clear structure of your site.
2. How Does It Work?
Please flush all Magento caches after you make any configuration of the module for the changes to take effect.
You go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ HTML Sitemap to start setting up.
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the module, otherwise choose No.
In HTML Sitemap URL Key: Enter a URL key for the sitemap.
*Note:
URLs of the sitemap are different per store:
For example, the URL key of the sitemap in store A is store-a and the URL key of the sitemap in store B is store-b. When customers access the sitemap of store A, then switch to store B, customers are redirected to the sitemap in store B under the right sitemap URL of store B.
Enter special characters to URL key or any spaces:
After saving configs, these special characters or spaces are auto removed and replaced by the dash(-).
In Title of Site, choose the title for the sitemap.
In Session Order, fill in the order of sessions to be displayed. Please fill in all 4 items separated by a coma. The ID of sessions as below:
1: Product List
2: Store View List
3: Additional Link List
4: Category and CMS Page List
In Meta Title, choose the meta title for your sitemap.
In Meta Keywords, choose the meta keywords for your sitemap.
In Meta Description, write meta description for your sitemap.
In Show Product Link, choose Yes to show product links in the sitemap, otherwise choose No.
In Title of “Product List”, choose the title for the product list session in the sitemap.
In Sort Product by, choose among DESC for descending or ASC for ascending.
In Arrange Product by, choose Name/Date/Price to sort product links.
In Maximum Products Displayed on Sitemap, choose the maximum for the number of product links to be shown. The limit number you can fill in is 50000.
* Note: You can exclude products from the HTML sitemap by configuring it in each product edit page.
In Show Store View Link, choose Yes to show store view links in the sitemap, otherwise choose No.
In Title of “Store View List”, choose the title for the store view list session in the sitemap.
In Show Category Link, choose Yes to show category links in the sitemap, otherwise choose No.
In Title of “Category List”, choose the title for the category list session in the sitemap.
In Disable Category, fill in IDs of categories you want to hide in the sitemap (separated by a comma). For example: 1,2,5,9,23,45,77.
* Note: You can exclude categories from the HTML sitemap by configuring it in each category edit page. Once you set Yes for this configuration, the category is listed in the Disable Category config.
In Title of “Additional Link List”, choose the title for the additional link list session in the sitemap.
In Open Additional Link in a New Tab, choose Yes to open additional links in a new tab, otherwise choose No.
In List of Additional Links, choose the links and the anchor you want to display for each link. Follow this example: [http://yourlink1.com][Anchor Text 1].
In Show CMS Link, choose Yes to show CMS links in the sitemap, otherwise choose No.
In Title of “CMS List”, choose the title for the CMS link list session in the sitemap.
In Disable CMS Link, choose the CMS links you want to hide from the sitemap. Hold Ctrl when choosing multiple options.
Defer JavaScript Extension for Magento 2 is developed based on the version for Magento 1. Like its initial version, Defer JavaScript Extension for Magento 2 is one of the most powerful factors that help to improve the website’s speed.
This module is very useful in reducing the loading time of a website so that customers can enjoy a better shopping experience on your store, leading to stronger engagement and higher brand loyalty.
2. How Does It Work?
You go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Defer JavaScript to start setting up.
2.1. Enable
At the backend, you can easily enable or disable BSS Defer JavaScript module by selecting “Yes” or “No” in the Enable box.
In Defer Iframes: Choose Yes to enable this function, otherwise choose No.
(If your webpage has some embed code of other sites, it means that the browser has to load JavaScript files of these pages along with your site. This thing will cause defer score of your website decrease or the site does not perform fast enough for better customer experience. Therefore, using Defer JavaScript will help you to defer these Iframes effectively by loading Iframes of these embed sites only when your site finishes loading completely.)
2.2. Manage Controllers, Paths and Homepage
If you want some of your pages not to be affected by Defer JavaScript Extension for Magento 2, you can easily exclude it by fulfilling these pages’ information into these excluded boxes:
Exclude controllers and paths: Click Add Match button and write down your wished paths or controllers that you want to disable Defer JavaScript for Magento 2
Exclude Homepage: you can disable this module on Homepage faster and more easily by selecting “Yes” in the Exclude Home Page box.
*NOTE: You have to fill in the controllers/ paths that you want to exclude the affection of Defer JavaScript Extension for Magento 2 when selecting Add Match button.
If you do not fill it up, the system will automatically set all pages in your website affected by our module.
You can click on the wastebasket symbol on the right side of the box to delete the created box.
If you do not know the controllers/paths to fulfill the Exclude Controllers/ Paths box, but you still want to disable Defer JavaScript function for some pages, you can select “Yes” in the Show Controllers and Paths box.
After selecting “Yes”, you can find information about the Controllers / Paths in the table at the end of the frontend page:
2.3 In Put JavaScript in HTML Body Tag
Choose Yes to put all deferred JavaScript at the end of HTML body tag.
Choose No to put all deferred JavaScript at the end of the page.
When you finish changing the configuration, you can click on “Save Config” button to save all of your setting with Defer JavaScript.
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Product Export Column and start configuration.
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the module or choose No to disable it.
In Allowed Attribute: Choose the custom product attributes which you want to be in separate columns when exporting products.
After that, move over to System⇒ Data Transfer ⇒ Export.
In Entity Type, select Products.
After that, scroll all the way to the end of the page and click Continue to export your product with custom attributes seperated.
*Note:
For Magento 2.3.2, the export is processed under the backend. You need to set up Cron and wait for the export process complete and then check exported file by navigating to System ⇒ Export.
Reorder Product List for Magento 2 extension show all ordered products as a list which allows customers to reorder previous them without wasting time and effort. With this module, the reorder process will be shortened a lot and more convenient for customers so Reorder Product List for Magento 2 is absolutely a great choice for wholesalers.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. For customers
This is how the Reorder Product List for Magento 2 is displayed in the frontend:
List all purchased products in one place for fast reordering
Choose which information to show: SKU, product image, price, ordered quantity, stock status, quantity box to reorder.
Search items by any piece of information above. The search autocomplete makes it faster.
Support Quick View to see the current price of items and choose product options in the popup
Add multiple ordered products to cart and redirect to checkout.
Support adding multiple purchased items to the wishlist
2.2. For admins
2.2.1. General Options
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module
In Redirect to Cart after Adding Products to Cart: choose Yes to allow customers to redirect to cart after they add products to cart, if not, choose No.
In Redirect to Wishlist after Adding Products to Wishlist: choose Yes to allow customers to redirect to wishlist after they add products to wishlist, if not, choose No.
In Ignore Buy Request Param: Tick to ignore the param of items after the checkout.
2.2.2. List
In Enable to Add All Products to Wishlist: choose Yes so that customers can add all ordered products to the wishlist.
In Default Column(s) Displayed: choose which columns you want to show as default in the frontend:
+ Checkbox: allow choosing multiple items.
+ Image
+ Product Name
+ Ordered Price: showing price of items at that time they ordered
+ Quantity: this will allow customers to choose the number of products to reorder
+ Ordered Quantity: showing the number of the ordered product
+ Ordered Date: column showing the date customers ordered products
+ Stock Status
+ Add to Cart
Show Quick View Button in Column:
+ Image: choose Image if you want to show the Quick View button on the image of items.
+ Name: choose Name if you want that your customers can click into items’ name. Then, when customer click images, they can be zoom in/out.
Show Quantity: Choose Yes to show the stock number of products, choose No if you want to hide it.
Show SKU: Choose Yes to show SKU of products.
Products per Page on List Allowed Values: type numbers separated by commas to set the number of products shown per page.
Products per Page on List Default Values: choose one of the numbers you set on the above box to set the number of product will be displayed as default.
Products Listing Sort by: choose one of these below:
+ Name
+ Price
+ Ordered Date
+ Ordered Quantity
Allow Showing All Products per Page: choose Yes to show "All" option in the "Show X Per Page" dropdown, if not then choose No.
Click Import Old Orders to update all previous orders placed before installing our extension into the Reorder Product List.
3. API Support
We provide you BSS's list of GraphQL APIs that our Magento 2 Reorder Product List extension supports.
Minimum Order Amount For Customer Group Extension For Magento 2 is developed from the initial version for Magento 1 to work well on Magento 2 platform. This extension allows admin to set a limitation of minimal order value for each group of customer. Customers will not be able to check out if they order a smaller amount of value than required. This function is especially suitable for B2B e-commerce. Using this extension can help you reach greater revenue.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. Set Minimum Amount for Customer Group
Please navigate to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Sales ⇒ Minimum Order Amount.
In Enabled, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it.
In Minimum Amount for Customer Group, choose customer group and decide the minimum order amount for each group. You can also add more group or delete any unwanted group if needed.
You can tailor different error messages to show per customer group on the shopping cart page in case of under-value orders.
For example,
If you skip these field, the default message "Minimum order amount is 'the minimum order amount'" is in place.
Remember to go to System ⇒ Cache Management and Flush Magento Cache so that the configurations are active.
*Note: You can assign one and only a minimum order amount per customer group. Otherwise, an error message is shown.
2.2. Set Minimum Amount for Specific Customer
Go to Customer => All Customer => Edit (Or Add New) => Account Information => Minimum order amount.
This module displays all children products of the configurable product in a very simple table with fields such as product availability, price, tier price, quantity, and subtotal.
Especially, a price range of the configurable product is also shown on the category page, which is determined by the lowest and highest one among prices of children products.
2. How Does It Work?
Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Configurable Grid Table View.
Enable the extension
In Enabled: Choose Yes to enable the module or choose No to disable it.
2.1. Set up the grid table view
First off, we provide advanced features to improve the display of the Configurable Grid Table View.
Optimize the display of the grid table view
In Display Stock Availability: choose Yes to display stock availability in the grid table as "In Stock" or "Out of Stock." Otherwise, choose No.
In Display Stock Number: Choose Yes to show the number of products available instead of "In Stock." Otherwise, choose No.
In Display Out of Stock Products: choose Yes to show "Out-of-stock" products in the table, too. Otherwise, choose No.
In Display Product SKU: choose Yes to show SKU of child products. Otherwise, choose No.
In Subtotal: Choose Yes to show the subtotal column in the table. Otherwise, choose No.
In Show Unit Price:
Choose Yes to display the column of Unit price in the grid table
Choose No to hide the Unit Price column
Choose Only Different Price to show the price of child products having different prices. If all child products of a configurable product have the same price, the unit price column will be hidden.
In Show Detailed Total: Choose Yes to display the total quantity and total price at the bottom of the table in detail.
Here is an example of the Configurable Grid Table View product page.
The configurable product in a grid table view
2.2. Set up advanced tier prices
Enable advanced tier price for the configurable product
When it comes to tier price, you can:
Choose Yes to enable Advanced Tier Price on the configurable product pages.
Choose Yes to enable Table Tier Price so that customers get information about tier prices at a glance.
Choose Yes to enable Tooltip Tier Price. A note will be shown in the tooltip when customers hover on a specific child product.
*NOTE: In order to use Advanced Tier Price, the final tier price rules and unit price of the products must be completely the same, disregarding whether these products have the same price.
Which means:
With Tier Price = Fixed, the initial Unit Price can be different, and the Tier Pricing Rule must be the same.
With Tier Price = Discount, the initial Unit Price must be the same, and the Tier Pricing Rule must be the same.
The reason behind the module logic is that with Tier Price = Discount, if the initial Unit Price of the products is different, the final Unit Price will be different. Therefore, applying the same tier pricing will cause damage to the store owner.
For example:
You have two products A and B (A & B are two children items of a product) that you want to group for advanced tier price. A has a price of $5 and B is $10. You set the same tier pricing rule for them: Buy 10 get 10% OFF.
With the below logic, the module makes sure customers cannot cheat by buying 9 product A and 1 product B to get the discount.
In the storefront, the tier prices are shown accordingly:
Tables of tier prices
and ...
Show tooltips of tier prices
2.3. Set up the table view per group
In Disable for Customer Group: Choose specific customer groups to disable the grid table view. Those restricted customers can only see the default configurable product pages.
2.4. Set up the table view per device
Optimize the grid table view for devices
In Mobile and Tablet Display:
Enable Mobile Display: Choose Yes to enable display configurations for mobile. If you enabled it, the Hide Columns on Mobile configs will show to allow you to choose which columns you want to hide on mobile.
Enable Tablet Display: Choose Yes to enable display configurations for tablet. If you enabled it, the Hide Columns on Tablet configs will show to allow you to choose which columns you want to hide on tablet.
2.5. Enable/disable the grid table view per configurable product
If you want to disable the grid table view for any configurable products, please to Catalogs => Products => Product Edit Page => Grid Table View General tab.
Configurable Product Matrix View for Magento 2 creates a matrix form for configurable products including unlimited custom options. With the help of Configurable Product Matrix View for Magento 2, store owners can target wholesale customers effectively because they can purchase your products in a large quantity without repeating this process. Therefore, owners will have more chances to boost up their sales and retain customers for a better shopping experience in the site.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. Functions
Show configurable product as a matrix form so customers just need to enter quantity and add all selected products to cart at once.
In case that configurable product has more than 2 attributes, it will get 2 last attributes of configurable product to present in the matrix form.
Show Price Range for configurable product.
Display Unit Price, Special Price, Stock Status and Stock Quantity in the table. Especially, the module supports showing Tier Price as tooltips when customers click on quantity box.
Automatically calculate total price when choosing quantity.
Work well with configurable product having many attributes.
Support default swatch function with clickable options.
Work well with all types of custom options.
Configure to enable matrix view for particular configurable products
Configure Matrix View for each attribute:
In an attribute backend, if you set Yes for Matrix View configuration, then the Matrix View will get 2 last attributes as we mentioned above.
If you set No for it, then this attribute cannot be displayed in the Matrix View, and our module will get another attribute right above it in the configurable product configuration.
2.2. How to configure
Go through Stores Configuration BSS Commerce Configurable Product Matrix View.
Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module.
Sort AttributeOption:
Default: the attribute will be sort as you set in the backend.
A-Z: the attribute will be sort as alphabet.
Show Tier Price: choose Yes if you want to show Tier Price as tooltips when customers click into quantity box. If not, then choose No.
Show Price Range: choose Yes to show Price Range of ConfigurableProduct.
Actually it will check Normal Price at first. This configuration will show the lowest and the highest price of children products if they have different normal prices. In case children products have the same normal prices (even they have different special price) then Price Range will not display.
Show Unit Price: choose Yes if you want to show Unit Price of children products in the matrix view. If not, choose No.
Show Total Price: choose Yes to show TotalPrice.
Show Stock Quantity: if you want to show Stock number and stock status, please choose Yes. If not, then select No.
Flush Configurable Product Page Cache: The default is set to No. If you want to flush configurable product page cache after placed orders, untick the Use system value, then turn the configuration to Yes.
NOTE: After updating stock of one product or disable a product, it is required to reindex data. Please follow System Index Management.
Expand Mass Actions box and choose Select All
Then, select Reindex Data in Actions tab and Submit
Show Quantity Increase/Decrease Buttons: choose Yes to display Increase/Decrease buttons in the quantity box in matrix form, so customers can select quantity conveniently. If you don’t, choose No.
Advanced Tier PriceCalculation:
Choose Yes: total amount is based on tier price of total quantity of children products added to cart.
NOTE:
This feature is only applied to children products having the same tier prices. That means: if a configurable product has 50 children products, all 50 children products need to have the same tier price.
If there is at least 1 children product does not have tier price or have different tier price with others, this feature will not be applied.
For example, tier price of buying 1-9 Black-S shirt, 1-9 Gray-S shirt is similarly $45. Tier price of buying 10-more for every children product is $40. Therefore, when you buy 3 Black-S shirts and 7 Black-XL shirts, tier price is $40/shirt. The total amount is now$400.
Choose No: total quantity will take default tier price, which means that the total amount is calculated by the tier prices of each children product multiply to total quantity of each chosen children product.
For the above example, when using Magento default tier price calculation, the total amount is determined as $450 because it is calculated based on each tier price of each children product (Tier price is equal to $45/shirt)
Enable for Customer Groups: select which customer groups you want to apply this Configurable Product Matrix View for Magento 2 extension.
2.3. Some notes about the display in the frontend
The module has checked quantity conditions of children products when they are chosen and added to cart. In case having an error, it will show red mark and a tooltip to notify about the error.
If a child product having custom options is disabled, it will become a blank in the table. In case, you disable all children products having the same option of an attribute, then this option will not be displayed, it also will not show an empty row or column in the Matrix View table.
Edit/Update products from cart will redirect to the product page as the default.
You can add products to cart even when the subtotal does not meet Minimum Order Amount requirement.
If you want more information about Configurable Products, check it out:
This extension absolutely deserves to be a brilliant solution for any Magento site for selling large quantity, like B2B websites.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 In the frontend
Show Price Range for configurable products.
Show associated products in a grid table with custom options, for example, color and size
Show SKU, Availability, Unit Price, Tier Price, and Subtotal in this grid table. Especially, Tier Price is shown in tooltips when hovering.
Work well with Color swatch function of Magento default with clickable options.
Support all type of custom options.
2.2 In the backend
Go through Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Configurable Product Wholesale Display.
Enabled: choose Yes to enable the extension.
Display Attributes: choose attributes to show in the grid table as wished.
Display StockNumber: choose Yes to show the number of stock in the grid table. Choose No, it will show stock status: In stock or Out of stock.
Advanced TierPrice:
+ Choose Yes then the total amount is based on tier price of the total quantity of children products added to cart.
This feature is only applied if all added child products have the same tier prices from v1.3.9 and earlier.
From v1.4.0, the extension does not require setting tier price for all child products for Advanced TierPrice to work. This feature is applied for any child products have the same discount amount and required quantity in tier price.
3 cases of the same discount amount:
1. Discount with a fixed amount
For example, the tier price of buying 1-9 Black-S shirt, 1-9 Gray-S shirt is similarly $50. Tier price of buying 10-more for the above 2 products is $40. If you buy 3 Black-S shirts and 7 Gray-S shirts, tier price is now $40/shirt. The total amount is now $400.
2. Discount with percentage
For example, the tier price of buying 1-9 Black-S shirt, 1-9 Gray-S shirt is similarly $50. Tier price of buying 10-more for every child product is 15% off - $42,5 after discount. If you buy 3 Black-S shirts and 7 Gray-S shirts, the tier price is now $42.5/shirt. The total amount is now $425.
3. Discount with both a fixed amount and percentage
For example, the tier price of buying 1-9 Black-S shirt, 1-9 Gray-S shirt is similarly $50. Tier price of buying 10-more for Black-S shirt is $42,5 after discounting 15% off and buying 7 Gray-S shirts is the fixed amount of $42,5. If you buy 3 Black-S shirts and 7 Gray-S shirts, the tier price is now $42.5/shirt. The total amount is now $425.
+ Choose No: total quantity will take the default tier price. The total amount is calculated by tier prices of each child product multiplied by the total quantity of each chosen child product.
For the above example, when using Magento default tier price calculation, the total amount is determined as $500 because it is calculated based on each tier price of each child product (Tier price is equal to $50/shirt)
*NOTE: Special Price Vs. Tier Price
+ If special price < tier price, applying special price to the total amount
+ If tier price 1 < special price < tier price 2, do not apply advanced tier price.
PriceRange: choose Yes if you want to display Price Range for the configurable product above the table.
Ajax Load: choose Yes to load wholesale display table by using Ajax
Enable Sorting: Yes to allow sorting by click to the tittle of the collumn on the front end. No to deny.
Hide Price on Table for Customer Groups: choose which customer groups you want to hide price.
Enable for Customer Groups: choose which customer groups to show this wholesale display.
You can also custom the design of the table (for responsive purposes)
Header Row Background Color: pick one color that suits your page's design
Header Row Text Color: pick the color of the text
Enabled Mobile Display: choose Yes to make the table responsive on mobiles
Display Mobile Attributes: choose attributes to show in the grid table view for mobiles
Enabled Tablet Display: choose Yes to make the table responsive on tablets.
Display Tablet Attributes: choose attributes you want to show in the grid table on tablets.
Sorting the Wholesale Display table: by clicking on the attribute of the table.
Enable/disable the Wholesale Display table per Product: in the product edit page, scroll down to CPWD General. Choose Yes to enable the table and No to disable the display.
Enable Wholesale Display: On/off showing the wholesale table display at the frontend of the config product. Use Ajax Load for Wholesale Display: The default is set at Use config, which will apply the config for Ajax Load that you set above. In addition, you can use yes/no to on/off using the Ajax load for the config product.
2.3. Choose the order of attributes
The order of custom attributes shown in configurable product wholesale display is based on the order of selected attributes when you create the configurable product.
For example, you create the Hero Hoodie with two custom options: size and color. Here you see the size is arranged above the color:
Hence, in the product page, size options are above the color options.
If you want to change this order, just move the color to above the size to below. Remember to Save changes.
If you want more information about Configurable Products, check it out:
Add Multiple Products To Cart for Magento 2 allows adding multiple products right in the product lists (category pages and search result pages.) Custom options are available to choose in the popup.
This extension is strongly recommended for B2B/wholesale customers who have no time to go to the product page by product page.
Note: This module does not support the Internet Explorer browser.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Ajax Add Multiple Products Cart.
2.1 General Configs
In Enabled: Choose Yes to enable the module or choose No to disable it.
In Enable for Customer Group(s): Only chosen groups are allowed to add multiple products to cart.
In Apply “Add Multiple Products To Cart”: Select class and ID to be applied to the module (separated by a comma).
For example: .cms-home .products-grid,.catalog-category-view .productsgrid,.catalogcategory-view .products-list
In Apply “Add Multiple Products To Quote”: Similar to "Add Multiple Products To Cart". However, this config is available only if you install this module with BSS M2 Request for Quote.
In Forbid Category Pages: Choose to exclude categories that you don't want to show 'Add all products to Quote" button & "Add all products to Cart" button. If leave blanks, then the rules will be appiled accordingly to other configurations.
In Default Qty: Select default quantity displaying in quantity box.
*Note:
The “Add Multiple Products” configuration only works with the product list having a similar structure to the product list page on the default category page or default widget.
If you want to apply the functions to other customized pages, you need to fix the HTML structure.
Config Apply "Add Multiple Products To Quote" only works when BSS M2 Request for Quote is also installed.
The extension works well with all product types, except for products having the type of custom options to be File.
2.2 Button, Checkbox, Qty Box
In Position of “Add all products” button: Choose where to display the Add all to cart button, as long as it is convenient for your customers: Top, Bottom, Both (Top and Bottom) or Right (Scroll)
Here is an example of the button in the Top position.
In Display Total Product or Total Qty: Choose to display the total number of selected products in the Add all to cart button.
In Show Product checkbox: Choose Yes to show checkbox next to each product.
In Show Selected Icon: Choose Yes to show an icon to mark selected product.
In Selected Icon Image: Upload the icon you want to display. The recommended dimension is 30x30px.
2.3 Popup Setting
Please define:
Image size (px) – For single product successfully added to Cart, shown in the success pop-up in case of adding only one product to cart.
Image size (px) – For multiple products successfully added to Cart, shown in the success pop-up in case of adding multiple products to cart.
Image size (px) – For selection popup: Choose the image size of the product in the popup shown to specify options and quantity
Number of Items displayed in one success popup for desktop screens. The default Number of Items for the tablet is 2 and for mobile is 1.)
Also, choose the effect of slide in popup:
Slide Speed: choose the transition duration of the slide in a millisecond.
Auto Slide: choose Yes for the slide in the success pop-up to be moved automatically.
Show Product Price: choose Yes show product price when adding only one product to cart.
Show Product Image: choose Yes to show the products’ images in the success popup.
Show “Continue” Button: choose Yes to show the continue shopping button at the success popup.
Countdown Time on Button: choose either View cart Button or Continue Button to show the countdown time. Choose No if you do not want to display the countdown time.
Countdown Time: …(s): Choose the period of time to countdown until redirecting to either View cart or Continue shopping.
Show Mini Cart: choose Yes to display the mini cart on the success pop-up.
Checkout Link in Mini Cart: choose Yes to show checkout link in the mini cart.
2.4 Popup Design
In Text on “Add Multiple to Cart” Button: Enter the content of the button
In Color of Text on Button: Pick the color of text in buttons.
In Text on “Continue” Button: Enter the content of “Continue” button.
In “Continue” Button Color: Pick the color of “Continue” button.
In “Continue” Button Color on Hover: Pick the color of “Continue” button when hovering.
In Text on “View Cart” Button: Enter the content of “View Cart” button.
In “View Cart” Button Color: Pick the color of “View Cart” button.
In “View Cart” Button Color on Hover: Pick the color of “View Cart” button when hovering.
Magento 2 Store Credit extension is a useful tool that can help fasten the refund process and increase customer loyalty. Accordingly, you can refund by store credit right into Customer Account. Customers can spend the credit on later purchases.
Besides refund, you can adjust the store credit wallet as wished - It is all based on your marketing purposes.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 General configs
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Store Credit.
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the extension.
In Use Store Credit in Checkout Page: choose Yes to allow customers to apply store credit to pay for the order on the checkout page, or No to not allow.
In Use Store Credit in Shopping Cart: choose Yes to allow customers to apply store credit to pay for order on the shopping cart page, or No to not allow.
*Note: In the formulas below, store credit, discount, subtotal, shipping fee, tax have a positive value. In Order Summary, store credit and discount are displayed with a minus symbol (-) before its positive value.
In Allow Applying Store Credit to Shipping:
If you choose Yes, customers can use the store credit to pay for the shipping fee: store credit = subtotal + tax - discount.
If you choose No, customers can't use the store credit to pay for the shipping fee even if they apply a store credit value more than the amount: subtotal + tax - discount.
In Allow Applying Store Credit to Tax:
If you choose Yes, customers can use the store credit to pay the tax fee: store credit = subtotal + shipping fee - discount.
If you choose No for Allow Applying Store Credit to Tax, customers can't use the store credit to pay for the tax even if they applies a store credit value more than the amount: subtotal + shipping fee - discount.
In case you choose No for both Allow Applying Store Credit to Tax & Allow Applying Store Credit to Shipping, customers can't use the store credit to pay for both the shipping fee and the tax even if they applies a store credit value more than the amount: subtotal - discount.
*Notes:
+ If you disable both “Use Store Credit in Checkout Page” and “Use Store Credit in Shopping Cart”, there aren’t fields to enter store credit value, shipping fee can’t be paid by store credit even if you enable or disable this config.
+ To display Store Credit in the Shopping cart and the Checkout page, refunds on the credit card (2.3) or updated credit in the backend (2.5) are required first.
+ If the value entered in Apply Store Credit box equals the order total in the shopping cart or checkout page, the payment method options will be hidden.
+ If you choose checkout with another currency (not base currency), the Order Summary is displayed with this currency.
2.2 Email configs
In Store Credit Update Email Template: select an email template to send customers information about store credit update.
You can go to Marketing ⇒ Email Templates to edit or add a new email template as you want.
In Store Credit Update Email Sender: select an available email sender of your website.
Remember to Save config.
*Note: The email update store credit will show 2 currencies if you checkout without base currency.
2.3 Refund to Store Credit
When creating credit memos, you can choose Refund to Store Credit option to transfer the refund to customer store credit.
2.4 Apply Store Credit for backend orders
When creating orders from the backend, you can also apply for the Store Credit.
2.5 Manage Store Credit balances
Choose a specific account under Customers and open Store Credit under that account.
In Statistic, you can update track and update the value of store credit and notify customers to come back soon to spend the credit.
In Balance section, you can update the store credit balance of the customer.
Website: select a website to update store credit on this website. Please make sure that you Shared Customer Accounts globally to associate the account to all websites. (go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Customers ⇒ Customer Configuration ⇒ Account Sharing Options, in Share Customer Accounts, select Global option)
Update Value: enter a number to update store credit amount, add – in the number prefix to subtract the store credit balance.
Comment: add a comment about store credit update
Notify Customer: choose Yes to send customer notification email about store credit update, or No to not send.
In History, you can view store credit transaction history of the customer in a grid. This grid includes:
*Notes: The Statistic and History section are also displayed in the customer information page in the frontend for the customer.
2.6 Track Store Credit transactions
2.6.1 Store Credit Transaction
Please go to Admin Panel ⇒ BSS STORE CREDIT ⇒ Transactions to view information of all store credit transactions in your site.
Transaction ID column: number of transaction.
Customer column: customer name linked to customer information page in the backend.
Email column: email of the omer.
Balance Change column: the amount of store credit was added or subtracted.
Balance column: store credit balance after the transaction took place
In Action column: the action makes store credit balance change
Date column: the specific time and date that the transaction happened.
Additional Info column: more information about the transaction, you can click on links to view orders or credit memos.
2.6.2 Summary Store Credit Transaction Chart Report
Open Report under BSS STORE CREDIT.
The chart displays the summary store credit increment and decrements on your site, you can set the duration time and select to view the report of store credit by day, month or year.
This module works well with multiple websites, you can see the detailed report of each website by selecting one in the website config.
Press the Refresh button to view the chart exported from your settings.
In the default, logged-in customers have solely one wish list which is confusing with a load of items added. Multiple Wishlists for Magento 2 will solve this problem by helping buyers to sort out products for different purposes by creating many wish lists.
*Note: If your customers already had wish lists before you install this module, their current wish list will become the main wish list. If they want to have other ones, simply create more.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Multiple Wishlist.
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the module or choose No to disable it.
In Redirect to My Wish List Page: Choose Yes to redirect customers to My Wish List Page after a product is added to wish list. Otherwise, choose No.
In Remove Items after Adding to Cart: Choose Yes to keep items in Wish Lists after being added to Cart. Otherwise, choose No.
3. Create Wishlist/Add to Wishlist
In the frontend, customers can create any wishlist within clicks.
Accordingly, whenever they click on the "wishlist" icon, there is a popup shown accordingly. Customers can choose existing wishlists or create a new wishlist to add products to.
An item can be added to multiple wishlists from the product page, category page, search result page, compare page, the shopping cart page, homepage, CMS page, related product block, and cross-sell product block (in cart.)
*Notes:
When you add a product that has the custom option in File type, that product will be added directly to the main wishlist and you will be redirected to the Wish List page.
Also, a success notification will be shown.
4. Multiple-wishlist page
To check and manage items in wishlists, please go to My Wish List under Account or navigate to My Account ⇒ My Wishlist.
Here you can:
Create a new wishlist
Delete any wishlist
Edit the name of specific wishlist
Share wishlist with specific emails, along with the message
Add all items in the wishlist to cart with the defined quantity
5. Manage Items in Wishlists
To make any changes for specific items in the wishlist, please hover across that product.
As can be seen, you can:
Edit the product (quantity, custom options, etc.)
Add comment to the product
Change the quantity of the product
Add the product to cart
Remove the product from the wishlist
Copy or Move the product to other wishlists
Accordingly, there is a popup shown to choose where you want to copy or move the product.
6. API Support
We provide you BSS's list of GraphQL & REST API that our Magento 2 Multiple Wishlist extension supports.
Magento 2 Request for Quote extension is developed with B2B e-commerce business in mind. It provides both the admin and customers a quick and professional way to streamline the price quotation process.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 Global config
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ Request4Quote
Set Enable Request4Quote to Yes to enable the quote request function.
In Auto change quote price when changing customer group:
+ Yes: Allow for changing the product price in pending/ updated/ resubmitted quote automatically when the admin changes customer group for the customer. However, it needs a little time to save the changed information in customer info both in the backend and frontend if your customer has a lot of submitted quotes.
+ No: The price will change following the new customer group when the customer does any of these actions: click view quote, reload the page view, click move to checkout. In the backend, the price will change after the admin clicks edit quote or convert to order.
In Enable “Add to Quote” for All Products, please choose among:
+ Yes: Display “Add to Quote” for all products
+ No: Disable “Add to Quote” for all products
+ Customer Group: Choose groups you want to enable the quote request function.
Notes:
Magento 2 Request for Quote extension supports all product types
Once enabled, “Add to Quote” button will be shown on the Product page; Category page; Search page; Wishlist page; Compare page; and CMS widget.
You can go to Catalog ⇒ Categories and choose a specific category to enable or disable the “Add to Quote” button.
4. Also, go to Catalog ⇒ Products and choose a specific product to enable or disable the “Add to Quote” button.
The quote request settings will be applied according to Global Config to Category, and to Product Config.
Set Apply Default Qty Conditions for Quoted Products to No. Customers can add any number of products to the quote cart without concerning the minimum, maximum, or increment quantity set in advance.
In Minimum Quote Amount per Customer Group, you can define the minimum quote amount allowed in the quote cart.
Notes:
When the quote total is lower than the requirement, the Message will be shown and the Submit Quote Request will be hidden.
We also equip Magento 2 Request for Quote extension with many thoughtful configurations to help you manage the quote better.
In Default Day(s) to Quote Expiration, enter a number after which all created quotes will expire. You can adjust this period per quote request on the Quote Edit Page.
In Send Reminder …. Day(s) before Expiration, enter a number after which a Quote Reminder email will be sent to notify the admin and customers about soon-to-expire quotes.
In Disable Comment per Quote Item, set this field to No if you allow customers to add some notes for each item in the quote cart.
In Required Shipping Address, set this field to Yes to require customers to enter the shipping address when submitting a new quote request. That way, both you and your customers can choose a suitable shipping method. Otherwise, set it to No.
In Disable Resubmit Action,
+ Set this field to No if you allow customers to resubmit the expired and rejected.
+ Set this field to Yes if you only allow customers to resubmit the updated quotes
In Icon Mini Quote, upload an image.
In Auto Logging for Customer, set this field to Yes so that customers can login automatically and go to the quote detail page when clicking the quote link in transactional emails. Otherwise, set it to No.
2.2 Email config
Expand the Request4Quote Email Configtab:
You can choose our built-in email templates or create a new one by going to Marketing ⇒ Communications ⇒ Email Templates.
To check the email, enter your email in Send Quote Email Copy to.
2.3 Customize the Quote Button
You can tailor the text and custom style of quote request button to fit your site the most.
On completing all settings, remember to Save Config and go to Cache Management.
2.4 Submit & manage Quotes in the storefront
2.4.1 Submit a quote request
Based on your configuration, the “Add to Quote” button is shown for products, categories, and for customer groups.
Customers and guests, then, can add multiple products to the quote cart from Product page; Category page; Search page; Wishlist page; Compare page; and CMS widget.
All quoted products will be listed on the quote cart page for further updates. Click on the mini quote cart icon to go to the Quote Cart.
Here, customers and guests can add notes per quote item and a comment for the whole quote request.
Both customers and not-logged in customers can choose between logging in/ creating a new account or submitting the quote request immediately.
Fill in the required fields and submit the quote request.
*NOTE: The following table includes fields that customers needs to fill in to submit a quote.
Field
Explanations
Email address
Text field: required
Receiver confirmation email such as success submits admin approves, etc.
First Name
Text required
Last Name
Text required
Customer Comment
Text field which allows customers to add a comment for all quote carts before requesting a quote
Subtotal
Similar to a shopping cart.
Subtotal is not include shipping fee, tax, gift option, discount code, store credit, reward point, etc.
Submit quote request
Allow not-logged in customer to submit a quote
Login to a request
Login to submit a quote by a customer account
Mainly, not-logged in customers can also create an account using that email after submitting a quote. If a guest register right after, the quote will be assigned to that customer account.
2.4.2 Manage the quotes in My Quotes
All submitted quote requests will be updated in My Quotes under My Account if your customer already has an account.
Otherwise, with not-logged customers, they will receive an approved quote email with a token link to quote history.
If you Enable Resubmit Action, customers can resubmit the rejected/expired/updated quotes so that they can streamline the price quotation process without having to submit a new quote. This saves you from hundreds of spam quote requests a day!
To delete quotes, customers can click the"Delete" button.
Non-customers also have the same ability. They can access My Quotes through token at email.
There is also a "Move to Checkout" button, which can help customers quickly checkout with a submitted quote.
Moreover, to print or get the PDF file of your quote (regardless of status), click at the "Print" button at the quote detail page.
2.4.3 Email notifications about quotes
Our module will automatically send email notifications about quote status to the customer.
New quote email:
Update quote email:
Accept quote email:
Reject quote email:
2.5 Manage Quote Requests in the backend
In the Admin Panel, please go to Sales ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Manage Quote Requests.
Quote Status
Explanation
Admin Actions
Customer Actions
Pending
After the customer submits a quote request for the first time
Admin can perform all possible actions with this status
Except for the cancel quote action (quote status will change to canceled), the customer cannot take any further actions
Rejected
After the admin rejects the quote request
Admin cannot take any further actions
The customer can perform all possible actions with the quote in this status except using the checkout button
Updated
After the admin clicks "Send to Customer" on the quote edit page. The admin can customize the quote in advance
Admin cannot take any further actions
The customer can perform all possible actions with this status
Re-submitted
After the customer resubmits a rejected/updated/expired quote
Admin can perform all possible actions with a quote in this status
The customer cannot take any further actions
Ordered
After the customer placed an order from the quote successfully.
Both admin and customer can Print PDF
Expired
After the expiration date has passed and the quote has not been converted into an order, the quote status will change to expired
Admin cannot take any further actions
The customer can perform all possible actions with the quote in this status except using the Checkout button
Closed
After the customer cancels the quote request
Both admin and customer can Print PDF
Both admin and customer can Print PDF
Complete
Store owners & buyers agree with Quotes, but don’t convert to Orders
Both admin and customer can "Print PDF"
2.5.1 Accept/Reject quote request
You can accept, reject or customize the quote request as wished by going to the Quote Edit Page.
Click on Rejected to reject the quote request. You can no longer edit the quote.
In My Quotes, the quote status is changed to Rejected. Whether customers can resubmit the quote or not is based on your configurations.
Or, you can customize the quote (price, quantity, expiry date, comment, additional products; shipping method) and Send to Customer.
In My Quotes, the quote status is changed to Updated. Customers can either move quote to cart or resubmit the quote.
Furthermore, the admin can Delete the quote if you see the unwanted quote.
Notification emails are sent whenever the quote status is updated.
If you install both Magento 2 Request for Quote and Magento 2 Sales Rep modules by BSS, in the manage quote grid, the extra column "Sales Rep" will be displayed, allowing you to check and filter the sales rep title of the user who requested the quote.
Quick Order For Magento 2 extension allows searching and adding almost all product types right in a form instead of loading product page by product page.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. In the frontend
Quick Order For Magento 2 extension optimizes the order process and decreases buying time.
Accordingly, there is a Fast Order form in the storefront for customers to search, select, and add multiple products to the shopping cart.
Access Magento 2 quick order form (Select either of these two ways)
Click “Fast Order” shortcut in top menu/footer/near mini cart of the website. (The display of this shortcut is based on the backend configuration.)
Access directly Fast Order CMS Page by entering the URL.
There are two templates available. The admin can enable either of them per customer group.
2.1.1 Template 1 - sEARCH BOX IN ROW
Search products to add to cart
In the Search box, type some characters of a product name or SKU.
* Note:
+ The smart autosuggestion function supports displaying the matched results. Even better, if there is one and only product name or SKU matched, it will be auto-selected.
+ With custom options (including configurable product, grouped product, or simple product with custom option), a popup will be loaded and shown to select desired options.
Enter multiple SKUs with quantities to the form
Enter SKUs (except for bundle products) with the corresponding quantity per line.
For example:
WS05-XS-Red:5
24-MB01:10
Upload CSV file to fasten ordering
What’s more, Magento 2 Quick Order extension also supports CSV import if customers have their own list of products and attributes.
To check the function, please follow:
Download the sample CSV file
Input CSV file as format: SKU and quantity of products. Only enter simple/downloadable products without custom options and child products of the configurable
Click the Upload button to upload this file
Choose other product attributes
Enter the number of items in the Quantity box. The Subtotal will be immediately updated.
Choose Edit to modify product attributes and other custom options or Delete to delete the chosen product.
Click Add lines button to expand the fast order form as wanted.
Add all to cart/Proceed to Checkout
On completing selecting products and their attributes, please select Add to cart button to add all to the shopping cart.
You can also proceed to checkout without navigating to the mini cart.
2.1.2. Template 2 - sEARCH BOX OUT ROW
BSS Commerce Quick Order for Magento 2 extension features an additional fast order template to make the ordering process even faster.
Instead of searching individual products per line, customers can search the whole website in a smart search box. Most excitingly, customers can check to add multiple products to the form.
With products with custom options, a popup with multiple product pages will be shown accordingly.
Customers can still enter multiple SKUs or upload the csv. file, as well as add all products to the cart and proceed to checkout.
*Notes: Please note that our Magento 2 Fast Order extension and its two templates do not support the IE browser.
2.2. In the backend
2.2.1. Fast Order CMS Page
We have already built a Fast Order CMS Page for you.
To check, please go to Content ⇒ Pages ⇒ Fast Order
Expand the Search Engine Optimization section to fill in the meta-information.
In URL Key, there is an auto-generated key. Copy the key to use in the fast order form configuration.
Remember to Save Page if you make any changes.
2.2.2. Backend configs
In Admin Panel, please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Fast Order.
In General configs:
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module or No to disable it.
In Fast Order Form Template, choose either Search box in row or Search box out row.
In Number of Lines: set the number of lines of Fast Order auto shown on the CMS page.
In Autocomplete Minimum Characters: set the minimum characters typed in the search box so that the result can appear.
In Max Results to Show: set the number of results displayed in the autocomplete box.
In Main Color, pick the color of header and buttons that fits the design of the whole website.
In Shortcut URL Key, enter the URL key of the Fast Order CMS Page. This field is filled in advance, so skip if you do not change anything in the CMS Page.
In Position of Fast Order Shortcut, choose where to display the shortcut link.
Near mini cart
In top menu
In footer
In Enable for customer groups: choose groups to enable Wholesale Fast Order function.
In Refresh: Choose Yes/No to keep the products in form when customers refresh the page.
In Mini Fast Order Form Configuration config:
Our extension allows adding multiple products to cart via Mini Fast Order Form without having to access the full Fast Order page. Product SKUs or product names are required for this function to work.
In Enabled, choose Yes to activate Mini Fast Order Form feature. Choose No if you'd like to turn off this feature.
In Number of Lines, input your desired number of lines that readily appear on the Mini Fast Order Form menu. The default value is 5.
In Pre-populated products config:
Our extension supports a smart algorithm to pre-load multiple products based on customers’ order history whenever they access the fast order form.
In Enabled, choose Yes to activate this smart feature.
In Action, choose either Automation or Manual.
If you choose Automation, the pre-populated products are auto-loaded by two criteria:
+ 5 out of the Bestseller list according to default report, or
+ Most frequently ordered products from the customer's account.
+ Enter Max results to show. 5 is recommended.
+ Remember to Reindex data so that the automotive pre-populated products can be shown.
*Note:
+ For Logged-in customers: the module shows products in orders completed during the past 90 days. If orders were completed more than 90 days ago, the module displays best-seller products of the store during the past 90 days.
+ For Not Logged-in customers: the module displays best-seller products of the store during the past 90 days.
If you choose Manual, you can add a list of products at will
Click the left icon and select products IDs, or enter multiple IDs separated by commas without spaces.
In the end, save and flush the Cache.
2.2.3. Recommended Products
Our Magento 2 Quick Order works well with all B2B extensions.
Hide Price/Call For Price for Magento 2 allows to flexibly hide price for a particular product, a certain category, or specific customer groups. Besides hiding price, the extension also hides “Add to Cart” button and replace it with a custom message or a Call for Price button that link to an Inquiry form in Ajax popup to obtain customer’s request.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1 In Configuration
Navigate to BSS Advanced Hide Price ⇒ Configuration.
In Configuration, there are five main sections: General Config, Call For Price/Hide Price Priority, Call For Price Form Design, Call For Price Global Config and Hide Price Global Config. Product Config
2.1.1 In General Config
In Enabled Advanced Hide Price, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it.
In Add to Cart Button Selector, you can enter the selector of Add to Cart button depending on the theme or site.
In Email Answer Customer Inquiry, select an email to send a reply to customer’s request then select Email Template.
In Email Notify Admin, fill in your email to immediately receive an email notifying customer request, then select Email Template.
2.1.2 In Call For Price/Hide Price Priority
Prioritize Call For Price or Hide Price Config by selecting that config in Call For Price/Hide Price Priority.
2.1.3 In Call For Price Form Design
In Call For Price Form, customize the inquiry form by adding/ deleting fields in the form to obtain customer requests. Filling in the following options:
Decide filed name in Label. E.g: Customer request.
Decide filed type in Type. There are 3 options to select: Text Field, Text Area, Checkbox.
Decide the order of the field in Inquiry Form in Order.
Tick Enable checkbox to enable the field or Required to make the field compulsory to fill in, or click action button to discard it.
In Show Customer Name and Email, choose No to exclude Name and Email field in Inquiry Form if customers have logged in their accounts on site. Otherwise, choose Yes to include these filed for both logged-in and non-logged-in customers.
In AntiSpam Protection, choose Yes to enable reCaptcha test, or No to disable it.
If you choose Yes, 2 options will be displayed: Site Key and Site Secret.
In Label, enter the label for the reCaptcha test. For example: reCaptcha.
In Choose the type of reCAPTCHA, select reCAPTCHA V2.
Then click the Register button.
The Recaptcha is now successfully created. Please copy the site secret key and site secret.
2.1.4 In Call For Price Global Config
In Call For Price Text, enter a text to display in Call For Price button which is in replace of Add to Cart button.
In Apply For Categories, select which categories to apply Call For Price config. Choose one, multiple or all categories.
In Apply For Customer Groups, select which customer groups to apply Call For Price config. Choose one, multiple or all customer groups.
In Not Applied For Product IDs, enter IDs of products to exclude from applying Call For Price config.
2.1.5 In Hide Price Global Config
In Hide Price Text, enter a text to display in the custom message which is in replace of Add to Cart button.
In Apply For Categories, select which categories to apply Hide Price config. Choose one, multiple or all categories.
In Apply For Customer Groups, select which customer groups to apply Hide Price config. Choose one, multiple or all customer groups.
In Not Applied For Product IDs, enter IDs of products to exclude from applying Hide Price config.
2.2 In Customer Inquiry List
Go to BSS Advanced Hide PriceCustomer Inquiry List.
In Customer Inquiry List, check the list of customers who have sent requests with information, including ID (ID of request), product name, customer name, customer email, created at (time and date when customers sent request), email response and action.
In Action, choose View in dropdown Select to navigate to the inquiry information page.
2.2.1 In General Information
Check information of the request sent from customer, including general information and additional information.
2.2.2 In Send Mail
In Send Email, fill in a number to notify customers of price for the requested product in Price For Request.
Enter a comment to answer customer inquiry if needed in Comment.
Finally, click Send Email for Customer button.
2.3 In Catalog
Navigate to Catalog ⇒ Products
On Product Grid, search for a product that you want to apply Hide Price or Call for Price config.
In Action, click Edit to go to Product Edit page. Scroll down to find Hide Price/Call For Price config.
In Call/Hide Price Type, decide the config you want to apply for that specific product. You can choose either:
Use Global Config
Call For Price
Hide Price
Disable AdvancedHidePrice
In Call/Hide Price Text, enter a text to display in place of Add to Cart button.
In Call/Hide Price For Customer Group, select which customer to apply config.
2.4 Notice for Call For Price Email Template
Magento 2 Hide Price Call For Price extension provides some variables to display fields on Email Template.
Admin Notify Email:
{{var name}} Name of the customer who sent request
{{var email}} Email Customer
{{var id}} Request ID
{{var product_name}} Product Name
{{var product_id}} Product ID
{{var additional_field|raw}} Fields created by admin (already available in HTML)
Reply Customer Email:
{{var customer_name}} Name of the customer who sent request
{{var product_name}} Product name
{{var product_price}} Product price
{{var date}} Date of request
{{var comment}} Comment of admin
{{var additional_field|raw}} Fields created by admin (already available in HTML)
Hide Price for Magento 2 extensionallows admin to hide product price and replace Add to Cart button with a custom message or a custom URL. Developed as the standard version of Hide Price Call For Price extension, Hide Price for Magento 2 guarantees to have all hide price functions with some new upgrades.
There are two levels of Hide Price: Product Config and Global Config, in which Product Config has a higher priority.
2.1 Global config
Go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Hide Price General Config.
In Enabled, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it.
In ‘Add to Cart’ Button Selector, enter the selector of Add to Cart button depending on the website’s theme.
In case you use One Step Checkout extension which does not use the URL form "domain/checkout", you need to enter the new form URL to the Checkout Controller field.
For example, our One Step Checkout extension use onestepcheckout/index/index
Then, hide-price products will not be added to the checkout and a message will show accordingly as above.
In Hide Price Action choose options:
Hide Price and “Add to Cart” button;
Show Price and Hide “Add to Cart” button;
In Hide Price Message, enter a custom message which is shown in place of the Add to Cart button.
In Apply for Categories, choose categories in which you want to hide price from chosen customer groups.
Price is hidden on all product pages under the chosen categories except for which you enable the Hide price product config.
In Apply for Customer Groups, choose groups from which you want to hide price.
In Hide Price URL, enter an URL to link to the custom message.
2.2 Product config
Go to Catalog ⇒ Products ⇒ Product Edit Page ⇒ Hide Price.
In Hide Price Action, choose 1 of the following 4 options:
Use Hide Price Global Config: Apply hide price in Global Config by default.
Disable: Disable hide price for the product.
Hide Price and “Add to Cart” Button: Hide both product price and Add to Cart button.
Show Price and Hide “Add to Cart” Button: Hide Add to Cart button but still show the product price.
When you choose to Hide "Add to Cart" Button, the hide price message will be in place.
In Hide Price Message: tailor the message to inform customers of how to get the price.
In Hide Price for Customer Groups, choose the customer groups from which you want to hide price.
In Hide Price URL, enter an URL to link to the custom message.
In the frontend, the price is hidden from the chosen customer groups.
*Note 1: You should not set up Hide Price for the child products of the configurable product. Instead, setting Hide Price for the configurable product is enough!
*Note 2: When enabling "hide price" for any products, the «offers» product snippet will be hidden in the structured data. Yet Google Search Console requires at least one of these 3 product snippets: «offers», «reviews» or «aggregateRating». Therefore you need to insert the 2 latter data to avoid missing structure data complaints from GSC & maintain good SEO score.
Find out more about Product snippet structured data here.
*Note 3:
1. Configurable product:
In Apply for child product section:
Preselect (Default)/ Yes: Preserve the original configuration. Apply hide price configuration of a parent product for all child products.
No: Not apply hide price configuration of parent product for child product.
2. Bundle product:
2.1. Bundle product without dynamic price: Apply config following the parent product.
2.2. Bundle product with dynamic price:
Bundle product hides price: Hide both parent and child products' prices.
Bundle product displays price, child products hide price: Apply based on each child product configuration. Customers can't add to cart the child product, which has hide price configuration.
3. Grouped product:
Grouped product hides price: Hide all parent and child products prices.
Grouped product displays price, child products hide price: Apply based on each child product configuration. Customers can't add to cart the child product, which has hide price configuration.
2.3 Customer Config
Go to Customer ⇒ All Customers ⇒ [specific_customer] Edit ⇒ Account Information.
In Hide Price, choose 1 of the following 3 options:
Please select: apply hide price rules to this customer following Customer group configurations of Product detail and/or Global Config.
Enable: apply hide price rules to this customer not depending on Customer group configurations of Product detail and/or Global Config.
Disable: hide price rules are not applied to this customer.
You also track hide prices for each customer in the customer grid.
Magento 2 Category Permission extensionallows admin to assign permission to categories for each customer group. By setting catalog permission for customer groups, store owners can hide the content they do not want to share with specific customer groups.
As you may know, the concept of the "Magento hide category for customer group" is gaining its popularity in the B2B eCommerce world.
The extension is ideal for B2B websites when restricting access to categories or CMS pages is quite necessary to segment customers.
Go to Admin ⇒ Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Catalog Permission.
In Enable Catalog Permission Extension:
Enable: Choose Yes to enable the extension.
2.1.1 Catalog Permission
In Catalog Permission:
Enable Catalog Permission: choose Yes to restrict catalog to the chosen customer groups.
Error Message: tailor the Error Message you want to show on the page to which customers are redirected. You can also set different messages for different Magento 2 customer group catalog by going to Catalog => Categories.
Redirect to Page: choose among these six pages to redirect customers when they access a restricted page.
+ Sign-in Page
+ 404 Not Found
+ Homepage
+ Enable Cookies
+ Privacy Policy
+ About us
+ Customer Service
+ Sign-in Page
+ Custom URL
+ None
*Note:
+ If you create a new CMS page, it will be added to "Redirect to Page" options.
+ Please make sure that the chosen page is not restricted by CMS permission function.
+ If you disable the redirected page, customers will be redirected to Home Page.
Disable Category Link: choose Yes to hide the link of category on the menu and layered navigation.
*Notes:
- For Magento version older than 2.4.x:
+ If at least one sub-category that has different catalog permission from that of the parent category, the parent category link will be shown.
+ In other words, only when all subcategories have the same permission as the parent category will the parent category link be disabled.
- For Magento version 2.4.x and later: If the parent category has a catalog permission, then even if the sub-category is configured to show, both parent and sub-category links will not be shown.
Apply Parent Category Setting to Sub-Category: Choose Yes to apply the setting of the parent category for its sub-categories.
Use Category Permission for Products Belonging to: choose Yes to disable products belonging to the restricted Magento customer group catalog. For the product belongs to multiple categories: If there's at least one Magento hide category for customer group, the product will not be available to access in other categories.
If you choose No, non-permitted customers can still access the products under restricted categories.
2.1.2 CMS Page Permission
In CMS Permission:
Enable CMS Page Permission: choose Yes to restrict the CMS pages to specific customer groups.
Error Message: tailor the Error Message you want to show on the page to which customers are redirected.
Redirect to Page: choose one of the options to redirect customers to the selected page. Catalog Permission for Magento 2 extension provides options as follow:
+ Sign-in Page
+ 404 Not Found
+ Homepage
+ Enable Cookies
+ Privacy Policy
+ About us
+ Customer Service
+ Sign-in Page
+ Custom URL
+ None
*Note:
+ If you create a new CMS page, it will be added to "Redirect to Page" options.
+ Please make sure that the chosen page is not restricted by CMS permission function.
+ If the redirected page is disabled, customers will be redirected to Home Page.
2.2 Set permission for categories
Go to Catalog ⇒ Categories and navigate to the category you want to set permission.
In Redirect Type:
Use Global Config: apply the error message and redirect customers to the page as you set above.
Customize per Category: Tailor message for a specific category and choose how to redirect visitors in Select Page, Custom URL, and BSS Error Message.
In Restricted Customer Group: select customer group(s) you don't want to grant access to the category.
2.3 Set permission for CMS pages
Go to Content ⇒Pages and navigate to the category you want to set permission.
Similarly, in Redirect Type:
Use Global Config: apply the error message and redirect customers to the page as you set above.
Customize per Category: Tailor message for a specific CMS Page and choose how to redirect visitors in Select Page, Custom URL, and BSS Error Message.
In Restricted Customer Group: select customer group(s) you don't want to grant access to the CMS page.
3. API Support
3.1 Rest API
This module enables using Rest API to create permission in category and cmsPage.
Magento 2 Force Login extension requires customers to log in to view specific pages on your website, which are freely set up by you. When they are redirected to the login page, an alert message will be shown. After successful login, you can redirect customers to your chosen pages.
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Force Login
2.1 General configs
In Enable: choose Yes to enable the Force Login functions.
In Disable Default Registration: choose Yes to disable the Registration link on the top link and login page, or No to enable it for the customer to sign up.
2.2 Enable "Force Login" When users visit pages
In Alert Message: edit a Magento 2 force login message to be shown on the restricted page.
There are 2 options to force login: All Page or Special Page.
For the Special Page option, you can choose to restrict access for two types of pages:
Specific pages of your preference: Please enter your targeted URLs either as Exactly or Contain.
Our suggested pages: Select types of page to force login to access:
Product Page
Category Page
Cart Page
Checkout Page
Search Term Page
Advanced Search Page
Search Results Page
Contact Page
CMS Pages
*Notes:
Specific Pages could be custom pages created by third-party extensions, for example, the FAQs.
We support specific CMS Pages to force login: 404 Not Found; Home Page; Enable Cookies; Privacy Policy; About Us; Customer Service.
2.3 Redirect users after successful login
It is important to streamline the experience of users after the "force-login" requirement. You can choose among 4 redirect options.
Default: redirect users to the page after login like default Magento 2
Home Page: redirect users to Home Page after login
Previous Url: redirect users to the page they are trying to access when they are forced to login
Custom Url: Enter the page URL that you want to send your customers to after login
*Notes:
With custom pages by third-party extensions, if you select this option, you will be redirected to the previous page of the force login page.
For example: You require a login to access the FAQs page.
A customer goes to the Home page ⇒ Women (category page) ⇒ FAQs page and login. He/She is redirected to Women (category page).
Remember to Save Config on completing
2.4 Google reCAPTCHA & 2FA installation
Magento is adding Google reCAPTCHA and 2FA functionality to all Magento Commerce and Open Source versions 2.1 and above to reduce unauthorized access and spam.
Google reCAPTCHA technology is to ensure the access attempt by humans only, not bots. Compared with Magento CAPTCHA module, the reCAPTCHA enhances security with additional benefits including support for invisible reCAPTCHA.
2FA Authentication adds support for software authentication apps and hardware authentication devices provided by Google Authenticator, Authy, U2F devices, and Duo Security, among others.
Hence, BSS Commerce strongly recommends installing these functions for your Magento 2 Website.
Magento 2 SEO Extension by BSSCommerce is the complete SEO package to maximize the effectiveness of Search Engine Optimization for your e-commerce business. This comprehensive SEO extension for Magento 2 includes all crucial tools for great SEO performance, such as Rich snippets, XML sitemap, HTML sitemap, SEO Report, SEO Toolbar, and so on.
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE and start configuration.
2.1. In SEO Core
This section allows you to set up general SEO settings for the whole site.
In Enable Custom H1 Page: Choose Yes to enable or No to disable this function.
If you choose Yes, the Custom H1 Page field will be enabled in the Search Engine Optimization of each category, CMS, and product edit page.
This feature is very useful for store owners in specific cases.
For example, if you run a promotion for product A and want to place an eye-catching Heading 1 without changing the product name (the H1 as the default setting), you can enter a custom H1 like “Hot Deal 50% OFF Strive Shoulder Pack | Today Only”. Customers now see the new heading on the product page, replacing the original heading 1. However, the product name is unchanged and is still displayed on the shopping cart and checkout page.
In Google Site Verification Code: If you are using Google Search Console, you need to enter the code provided by Google. This helps the module to show your site impressions, clicks, CTR,... from Google Search Console.
You enter this code into the field: 9FD50240145DBB177642FF639FD4A222
2.2. In Rich Snippets
Magento 2 Rich Snippets adds rich snippets, breadcrumbs, rating, price, review, etc., for products and other information of your Magento 2 store to the search result pages.
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
2.2.1. Site Structure
In Sitename in Search Result: Choose Yes to show the website name you assign in the search result. Otherwise, choose No. If you choose No, the Show Search Box in Search Result will be disabled.
In Website Name: Choose the name for your website to be displayed in the search result.
In Website Description: Enter the description to apply to all pages (except for product and category pages).
In Website Image: Choose an image for your website to be displayed when sharing via Open Graph on Facebook and via Twitter Card on Twitter.
In Show Search Box in Search Result: Choose Yes to show a specific search box for your website. Otherwise, choose No.
In Twitter Username: Enter Twitter Username with @ to support Twitter card.
In Show breadcrumbs: Choose Yes to show breadcrumbs (navigation path) of product pages instead of the regular URLs in the search results. Otherwise, choose No.
2.2.2. Local Business
In Enable Local Business: Choose Yes to show the following information about your website in the search result. Otherwise, choose No. If you choose No, all the following settings will be disabled.
In Business Type: Select your suitable business type from the drop-down list.
In Logo: Choose a logo for your business.
In Name of Business: Choose a name for your business to be displayed in the search result.
In Email: Enter your business email.
In Telephone: Enter your business phone.
In Price Range: Enter the price range of your business.
In Locality: Enter the locality of your business.
In Street Address: Enter your business street address.
In Social Profile Links: Enter your business social profile links. Please enter one link per line.
⇒ For more information about these store properties, explore HERE!
2.2.3. Product Options
In Show Name: Choose Yes to show the product name in the search result. Otherwise, choose No. If you choose No, all the following settings will be disabled.
In Show SKU: Choose Yes to show the product SKU in the search result. Otherwise, choose No.
In Show Image: Choose Yes to show the product image in the search result. Otherwise, choose No.
In Show Description: Choose Yes to show the product description in the search result. Otherwise, choose No.
In Show Review: Choose Yes to show the product review in the search result. Otherwise, choose No.
In Show Avg. Rating: Choose Yes to show the average rating of the product in the search result. Otherwise, choose No.
In Show Price: Choose Yes to show the product price in the search result. Otherwise, choose No.
In Show Availability: Choose Yes to show the product availability (in stock/out of stock) in the search result. Otherwise, choose No.
In Show Conditions: Choose Yes to show the New condition of products. We support the New attribute to appear in the search result.
In Add Category: If you choose Enable, the category path is added to the product URL displayed in SERPs.
In Add Brand: Select an attribute code of the brand to appear in the search result.
In Add Gtin: Select a GTIN to display in the search result.
In Custom Properties: Customize any Rich snippet and assign it to an attribute. You need to enter custom properties following the Rich snippet structure. Otherwise, you face issues when checking your website on Google Structured Data Testing Tool.
2.2.4. Category Options
In Show Name: Choose Yes to show the category name in the search result. Otherwise, choose No. If you choose No, all the following settings will be disabled.
In Show Description: Choose Yes to show the category description in the search result. Otherwise, choose No.
In Show Product Offers: Choose Yes to display offers of products in the search result. Otherwise, choose No.
In Show Image: Choose Yes to show the category image in the search result. Otherwise, choose No.
2.2.5. Open Graph
In Enable for Product Page: Choose Yes to enable Open Graph when sharing Product Pages via Facebook. Otherwise, choose No.
In Enable for Category Page: Choose Yes to enable Open Graph when sharing Category Pages via Facebook. Otherwise, choose No.
In Enable for Website: Choose Yes to enable Open Graph when sharing your homepage via Facebook. Otherwise, choose No.
2.2.6. Twitter Card
In Enable for Product Page: Choose Yes to enable Twitter Card when sharing Product Pages via Twitter. Otherwise, choose No.
In Enable for Category Page: Choose Yes to enable Twitter Card when sharing Category Pages via Twitter. Otherwise, choose No.
In Enable for Website: Choose Yes to enable Twitter Card when sharing your homepage via Twitter. Otherwise, choose No.
NOTE: After admin have installed and configured the extension, it could take anywhere from a few days up to a month, depending on how regularly Google crawls your site, to show the rich snippets on SERPs. To validate the data added to your rich snippets, you can use tools provided by Google.
2.3. Google XML Sitemap
Magento 2 XML Sitemap generates and splits XML sitemap for Magento 2 store to boost up crawling by search engines.
To configure the XML sitemap for your Magento 2 store, please follow these 2 steps:
Step 1: Configure the extension settings as your wish at Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCOMMERCE ⇒ Google XML Sitemap.
Step 2: Create a new XML sitemap at Marketing ⇒ Google XML.
First, we will show you how to configure the feature settings.
2.3.1. General Setting
In Enables: Choose Yes to generate an XML Sitemap.
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the extension to update the sitemap. The options are Daily - Weekly – Monthly.
In Error Email Recipient: Choose the recipient to receive an error email once there is an error.
In Error Email Sender: Choose the name of the sender displayed in the error email.
In Error Email Template: Choose the template for the error email.
In Root Path: Specify a root path for the XML sitemap.
In Sitemap Title: Enter a title for the sitemap.
In Sitemap Description: Enter a description for the sitemap.
2.3.2. Homepage Options
In Show Homepage: Choose Yes to show the homepage in the XML sitemap. Otherwise, choose No to hide it.
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index the Homepage. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index the Homepage. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
In Enable Modify: Choose Yes to show the time of the latest modification of the homepage in the XML sitemap file. Otherwise, choose No to hide it.
2.3.3. Categories Options
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index category pages. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index category pages. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
In Disable Category and All Products on Category: Fill in the ID of categories you want to hide from the sitemap (separated by a comma). Products in selected categories will not be affected by this setting.
* Note: You can exclude categories from the XML sitemap by configuring it in each category edit page. Once you set Yes for this configuration, the category is listed in the Disable Category and All Products on Category config.
2.3.4. Product Options
In Enable Path: If you choose Yes, the Use Categories Path for Product URLs config is also enabled. This config is found by going to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Catalog ⇒ Catalog⇒ Search Engine Optimization ⇒ Use Categories Path for Product URLs.
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index product pages. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index product pages. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
In Add Images to Sitemap: Choose how you want to add the images of products into your XML sitemap. There are 3 options:
No: Do not add images to the sitemap.
Base Only: Only add base images of products into the sitemap.
All: Add all images of products into the sitemap.
In Disable Product Type: You can choose to hide all products belonging to (a) product type(s) from the sitemap.
In Disable Product: Fill in the ID of the products you want to hide from the sitemap (separated by a comma).
* Note: You can exclude products from the XML sitemap by configuring it on each product edit page. Once you set Yes for this configuration, the product is also listed in the Disable Products config.
2.3.5. CMS Page Options
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index CMS pages. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index product pages. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
In Disable CMS Link: Choose CMS links to be disabled from the XML Sitemap.
2.3.6. Additional Link List
In Frequency: Choose the frequency for the search engine crawlers to index additional links. The options are: Always - Hourly - Daily - Weekly - Monthly - Yearly - Never.
In Priority: Choose the priority for the search engine crawlers to index additional links. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0.
In List of Additional Links: Fill in the list of additional links to be shown in the sitemap.
2.3.7. Sitemap File Limit
In Divide Sitemap: There are 4 options for dividing the sitemap:
None: Do not divide the sitemap.
Date: Divide the sitemap by the last modified date of the products.
Category: Divide the sitemap by the products in the same category.
Manufacture: Divide the sitemap by the products with the same manufacturer. The sitemaps are arranged based on the following sort order:
1: CMS Page Link + Category Link
2: Product Link
3: Additional Link
* Note: Dividing the sitemap still follows the maximum number of URLs per file and maximum file size settings.
In Maximum No of URLs per file: Maximum number of URLs in an XML sitemap file.
In Maximum File Size: Maximum file size in bytes.
2.3.8. Search Engine Submission Settings
In Enable Submission to Robots.txt: Choose Yes to display XML Sitemap URL in Robots.txt file. Otherwise, choose No.
2.3.9. Generate Sitemap
After finishing setting up the extension, the admins will generate a sitemap that will be created following the above settings.
Please go to Marketing ⇒ Google XML Sitemap, and select Add Sitemap to create a new sitemap.
In File Name: Choose a name for the sitemap. The format is nameofthesitemap.xml.
In case you are already using an XML sitemap, there would be 2 options at this point:
Create a new sitemap with a different name from the old sitemap. You can submit both sitemaps on Google Search Console, and the crawler will read both files.
Delete the old sitemap, then create a new one with the same name as the old one. The new sitemap following the module setting will be overwritten on the search console and will not affect SEO.
In Path: The default path is “/”. If you want to use a different path, you have to create a new folder at the backend.
Choose Save.
After saving the sitemap, click Generate for the sitemap to be created following the module settings.
2.3.10. Edit and Delete Sitemap
Please go to Marketing ⇒ Google XML Sitemap, and select the sitemap you want to edit or delete.
In the Name, Path and Store View section, you can change the name, path and store view of the XML Sitemap. Click Save and Generate to finish the change.
Click Delete to delete the sitemap.
To reset the sitemap, click Reset and then click Save. Back to the main section, and click Generate to finish.
Note: Before generating the XML sitemap, please Flush Cache. Go to System > Cache Management > Flush Magento Cache.
2.4. In HTML Sitemap
Magento 2 HTML Sitemap helps auto-generate an HTML sitemap to provide your store visitors with a convenient overview of the website and make your store more user-friendly.
2.4.1. General
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature. Otherwise, choose No.
In HTML Sitemap URL Key: Enter a URL key for the sitemap.
*Note:
URLs of the sitemap are different per store:
For example, the URL key of the sitemap in store A is store-a, and the URL key of the sitemap in store B is store-b. When customers access the sitemap of store A, then switch to store B, customers are redirected to the sitemap in store B under the right sitemap URL of store B.
Enter special characters to the URL key or any spaces:
After saving configs, these special characters or spaces are auto-removed and replaced by the dash(-).
In Title of Site: Choose the title for the sitemap.
In Show Link at: Select Footer or Header where the sitemap link is displayed.
In Session Order: Fill in the order of sessions to be displayed. Please fill in all 4 items separated by a coma. The ID of sessions as below:
1: Product List
2: Store View List
3: Additional Link List
4: Category and CMS Page List
2.4.2. Search Engine Optimization
In Meta Title: Choose the meta title for your sitemap.
In Meta Keywords: Choose the meta keywords for your sitemap.
In Meta Description: Write the meta description for your sitemap.
2.4.3. Product List
In Show Product Link: Choose Yes to show product links in the sitemap. Otherwise, choose No.
In Title of “Product List”: Choose the title for the product list session in the sitemap.
In Sort Product by: Choose among DESC for descending or ASC for ascending.
In Arrange Product by: Choose Name/Date/Price to sort product links.
In Maximum Products Displayed on Sitemap: Choose the maximum number of product links to be shown. The limit number you can fill in is 50000.
* Note: You can exclude products from the HTML sitemap by configuring it on each product edit page.
2.4.4. Store List
In Show Store View Link: Choose Yes to show store view links in the sitemap. Otherwise, choose No.
In Title of “Store View List”: Choose the title for the store view list session in the sitemap.
2.4.5. Category List
In Show Category Link: Choose Yes to show category links in the sitemap. Otherwise, choose No.
In Title of “Category List”: Choose the title for the category list session in the sitemap.
In Disable Category: Fill in the IDs of categories you want to hide in the sitemap (separated by a comma). For example: 1,2,5,9,23,45,77.
* Note: You can exclude categories from the HTML sitemap by configuring it in each category edit page. Once you set Yes for this configuration, the category is listed in the Disable Category config.
2.4.6. Additional Link List
In Title of “Additional Link List”: Choose the title for the additional link list session in the sitemap.
In List of Additional Links: Choose the links and the anchor you want to display for each link. Follow this example: [http://yourlink1.com][Anchor Text 1].
In Open Additional Link in a New Tab: Choose Yes to open additional links in a new tab. Otherwise choose No.
2.4.7. CMS Link List
In Show CMS Link: Choose Yes to show CMS links in the sitemap. Otherwise, choose No.
In Title of “CMS List”: Choose the title for the CMS link list session in the sitemap.
In Disable CMS Link: Choose the CMS links you want to hide from the sitemap. Hold Ctrl when choosing multiple options.
2.5. Robots Meta Tag
Magento 2 Robots Meta Tag allow you to give special instructions directly to search engines to control how and if your content appears on Google, Bing and other search engines.
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Robots Meta Tag: Enter URL Pattern based on the following formats.
With categories or a folder: Enter the path with "/" before and after the path.
For example: You want to set NoIndex and Nofollow for all categories with the "tops-men" URL key. Please enter: /tops-men/
In Option: There are 3 options for you to choose from INDEX, NO FOLLOW – NOINDEX, FOLLOW and, NOINDEX, NOFOLLOW.
In NOINDEX, FOLLOW Robots Meta Header: Choose pages to set up No Index, Follow Tag.
Edit custom instruction of robots.txt File: enter your custom instruction for the robot.txt file (if any). You can learn how to write a robot.txt file here. If you leave this field blank, the file Robots.txt will run with the default Magento setup.
Magento 2 Canonical Tags helps admins tell the crawlers which is the main URL to assign the search value to among pages with similar content.
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
2.6.1. Canonical Tag for Homepage
In Use Another Url for Homepage: Leave it blank if you want to use the default Canonical Tag for Homepage. Fill in the URL path if you want the crawler to read that URL instead of the homepage.
This config is also included in the Search Engine Optimization section of the Homepage edit page.
2.6.2. Canonical Tag for Product
In Canonical for Product: There are 2 available options:
Use Long Url Path: Set the Canonical Tag on the longest product URL. If the product belongs to multiple categories at the same category level, the applied category will be the last category in the Categories section on the Catalog management of the product. Take the below image as an example. The applied category will be Jackets.
In the Search Engine Optimization section of each product edit page, you can also specify another URL for the Canonical tag.
2.6.3. Canonical Tag for Category
In Use Next/Previous Tag in Category: Choose Yes to enable canonical for Next/Previous Tag in categories or choose No to disable it.
In Add Canonical Tag to Layered Navigation:
Choose Yes: Canonical URL is the URL of the original category.
Choose No: Canonical URL is the URL corresponding to parameters.
In the Search Engine Optimization section of each category edit page, you can also specify another URL for the Canonical tag.
2.7. Advanced Breadcrumbs SEO
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Type of Breadcrumbs: There are 2 available options:
Use Long Url Path: Set the breadcrumbs to be the FULL path of a product or a category
Use Short Url Path: Set the breadcrumbs to be the SHORTENED path of a product or a category. Now, you need to configure Enable Category Priority to show the shortened path (Noted: Type of Breadcrumbs config has higher priority than Enable Category Priority config.)
The Breadcrumbs for Product A will be Home ⇒ Jacket ⇒ Product A. You can take a look at the image below.
If the product belongs to multiple categories with the same category level, the applied category will be the last category at the Categories section on Catalog management of the product.
In Enable Category Priority: Choose Yes to enable category priority or No to disable it.
To manage category priority, please go to Marketing ⇒ BSS Commerce SEO ⇒Advanced Breadcrumbs.
ID: show the ID of the category. In this section, all available categories of your site will be listed.
Path: show the path of the category.
Level: show the category level. Only categories whose category level is greater or equal 2 can be applied breadcrumbs.
Priority: fill in the ID of the prior category (to prevent your breadcrumb from rendering wrongly, you shouldn't fill the Priority ID with 1 or 2 - any other number is fine.) Take a category with ID= 5 and the path of 1/2/3/5 as an example. If you fill in the priority as 3, Breadcrumbs of category 5 and all of its belonging products will be displayed with breadcrumbs of category 3 as the priority.
The default table has no priority set up, and the system will automatically show the full breadcrumb path accordingly. Once you edit the value of the priority config, you must enter a number or Cancel to get back to the original value. From here, you can't leave this field empty anymore.
2.8. Redirect 301 SEO
Magento 2 301 Redirects allows creating redirects to take customers to an alternative whenever they access a deleted page to improve user experience.
2.8.1. General
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
2.8.2. Redirect 301 SEO
This setting only applies to deleted product pages.
In Default Redirect to: Set the default page for the 301 pages to be redirected to. These are the options for the destination of redirecting: Parent Category, Parent Category with Priority, Homepage, and Other CMS Pages.
In case of choosing Parent Category, when a product is deleted, the links of that product will be redirected to the nearest parent category of the product.
In case of choosing Parent Category with Priority, redirects work similarly to the option of Parent Category. However, if the destination category is set up for a priority in ID in Marketing ⇒ BSS Commerce SEO ⇒Advanced Breadcrumbs, the links of that product will be redirected to this category priority.
In case the product gets several categories at the same level, the category will be redirected is the last category in the Categories section on Catalog management of the product.
If in Default Redirect to, you choose "Parent Category, Parent Category with Priority" but the product that was assigned to the category no longer exists, then after deleting the product, if users click on the link from the frontend, they will be redirected to the "CMS no router page" of default setting (Stores > Configuration > General > Web > Default Pages):
In Time Period (in days) to Keep Redirect on Website: choose the time period for redirecting to be applied.
2.9. HREFLANG Tag Support
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Add HREFLANG for Store View: Assign language and country for each store view.
In Enable for Homepage: Choose Yes to enable Hreflang tag for the Homepage or choose No to disable it.
In Enable for Category: Choose Yes to enable the Hreflang tag for Category Pages or choose No to disable it.
In Enable for CMS Page: Choose Yes to enable Hreflang tag for CMS Pages or choose No to disable it.
In Enable for Product Page: Choose Yes to enable the Hreflang tag for Product Pages or choose No to disable it.
2.10. Meta Tags Template
Magento 2 Meta Tags Template allows you to customize the product and category meta description, meta title, and meta keywords and easily auto-adding it for multiple products.
2.10.1. Feature Settings
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Product Setting:
In Max Product Meta Title Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for the product meta title (should be about 70-71 characters).
In Max Product Meta Description Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for the product meta description (should be about 160 characters).
In Max Product Main Keyword Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for the product main keyword (should be about 155-160 characters).
In Max Product Meta Keywords: Choose the maximum number of product meta keywords (should be about 30 words).
In Max URL Key Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for product URL keys (should be about 70 words).
In Category Setting:
In Max Category Meta Title Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for the category meta title (should be about 70-71 characters).
In Max Category Meta Description Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for the category meta description (should be about 160 characters).
In Max Category Main Keyword Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for the category main keyword (should be about 155-160 characters).
In Max Category Meta Keywords: Choose the maximum number of category meta keywords (should be about 30 words).
In Max URL Key Length: Choose the maximum number of characters for category URL keys (should be about 70 words).
2.10.2. Generate a Product Meta Template
Please go to Marketing ⇒ BSS Commerce SEO ⇒ Meta Template and start configuration.
Choose Add New to create a new meta template.
In General:
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the template or No to disable it.
In Name: Choose a name for the template.
In Meta Template Type: Choose Product.
In Scope: Choose the scope (store view, website) to apply the template. You can choose multiple store views/websites by holding Ctrl and clicking them.
In Priority, choose priority for the template. In case the product is under multiple categories with different templates, the priority settings will be considered for the affected meta template to avoid conflict. The smaller number will be prioritized.
In Product Conditions:
You need to set up necessary conditions to determine which products to be applied by the meta tag template.
In Template Settings:
In Meta Title: Write the meta title for products. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Meta Description: Write the meta description for products. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Meta Keyword: Write the meta keywords for products. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Main Keyword: Enter the main keywords for products. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In URL Key: Enter a URL key or click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Short Description: Write a short description of the products. In the WYSIWYG editor, the Insert Template Variables will not be shown. Click on Show/Hide Editor to show the regular text area with variables.
In Description: Write a short description of the products. In the WYSIWYG editor, the Insert Template Variables will not be shown. Click on Show/Hide Editor to show the regular text area with variables.
Finally, you click Save and Generate button and then are redirected to a new Generate Meta Template page. You continue to click Start Generating button and will track the process of generating the product template. You can let the process automatically run and continue to make other configurations in a new tab. Don’t configure on the same tab while the process is happening.
After this process is finished, you can check the results on the Search Engine Optimization of each product edit page.
*Note 1: In the Search Engine Optimization of each product edit page, you can exclude the product from Meta Templates Updates.
*Note 2: After saving all templates to a store view: when a new product is created, the template with the highest priority will be applied.
2.10.3. Generate a Category Meta Template
Please go to Marketing ⇒ BSS Commerce SEO ⇒ Meta Template.
Choose Add New to create a new meta template.
In General:
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the template or No to disable it.
In Name: Choose a name for the template.
In Meta Template Type: Choose Category
In Scope: Choose the scope (store view, website) to apply the template. You can choose multiple store views/websites by holding Ctrl and clicking them.
In Priority choose priority for the template. In case the category is under multiple categories with different templates, the priority settings will be considered for the affected meta template to avoid conflict. The smaller number will be prioritized.
In Category Choose:
Choose the category to apply the template. You can choose multiple categories by holding Ctrl and clicking them.
In Apply for Sub-categories: Choose Yes to apply the template for sub-categories. Otherwise, choose No.
In Template Settings:
In Meta Title: Write the meta title for categories. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Meta Description: Write the meta description for categories. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Meta Keyword: Write the meta keywords for categories. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Main Keyword: Enter the main keywords for categories. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In URL Key: Enter a URL key or click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Description: Write a short description of the categories. In the WYSIWYG editor, the Insert Template Variables will not be shown. Click on Show/Hide Editor to show the regular text area with variables.
Lastly, click Save and Generate and do similarly as you start generating the product meta template.
*Note: In the Search Engine Optimization of each category page, you can exclude the category from Meta Templates Updates.
2.11. SEO ALT Text
Magento 2 SEO ALT Text enables adding alternative text to images to help screen-reading tools describe images to visually impaired readers and allows search engines to better crawl and rank your website.
2.11.1. Configurations
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Alt Tag Template: Write Alt text template for images. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
In Image Name Template: Write the name template for images. You can click on Insert Template Variables to choose the variables we provide.
Then you click Generate button to be redirected to a new page, then start generating both templates. You can track the process in this page conveniently.
*Note: In the Search Engine Optimization of each product edit page, you can exclude the product from SEO Alt Text Template.
2.11.2. Manage images and edit ALT for each image
Please go to Marketing ⇒ BSS Commerce SEO ⇒ SEO ALt Text.
This grid shows all product images on your website and you can easily filter wanted images.
When you click an image, you are able to edit the image file name and alt text, then save config within the grid.
*Note:
Enter the right format for image names without any special characters and under .jpg, .jpeg, .png, .gif, .bmp.
After generating all images, you need to run command: php bin/magento catalog:images:resize to resize and show image in the frontend.
For product with many images, click on the product and every image is shown for you to edit.
2.12. SEO External Links
Mageno 2 SEO external link allows you to auto-mark external links as NO FOLLOW so that Google doesn’t crawl these links anymore.
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Excluded Domain: List domains you want to not apply this function.
2.13. SEO Toolbar
The Magento 2 SEO Toolbar is an extremely helpful tool that gives you an overview of the results of your SEO performance on the frontend.
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
Then you click Start Check button to see an SEO analysis for homepage on the frontend.
This toolbar tells you which SEO factors meet requirements, and which ones are not good enough and need to be checked again.
When you navigate to other pages, the toolbar appears to give an SEO analysis for these pages.
2.14. SEO Report
The Magento 2 SEO Report is an extremely helpful tool that helps you check the current SEO situation of your page on the backend.
2.14.1 Configurations
View the SEO Report Configurations Tutorial Video here!
In Enable: Choose Yes to enable the feature or choose No to disable it.
In Google Search Console Start Date: Enter a start date to check data on Google Search Console.
In Google Search Console End Date: Select an end date
Current date: Data is checked from the start date to the current time you are checking.
Custom date: You can select any date as you want.
In Client ID: Sign in to your Google API Console, go to Credentials > Client ID for Web Application, copy and then paste the Client ID in the field.
In Client Secret: Sign in to your Google API Console, go to Credentials > Client ID for Web Application, copy and then paste the Client Secret in the field.
In Google Authorization Code: Click the Get Google Authorization Code button to get the code, copy then paste the code into the field.
2.14.2. SEO report & SEO Audit in edit pages
After completing configurations, you navigate to a product, category or CMS edit page to check how SEO report and SEO Audit performs.
SEO Report
In Meta Title and Meta Description: display a color bar to notify admins about how valid title and description are, according to the number of characters.
In Main Keyword: Enter the main keyword and it is used to for SEO Audit and Google Search Console.
SEO Audit
In SEO Audit: The module gives you a list of messages to notify about:
+ The usage of main keyword in meta title, meta description, product description, and URL
+ Main keyword density
+ The current situation of description
+ Outbound links
In Google Search Console: You need to set up Google Authorization Code to connect Google Search Console, then complete settings in the SEO Report Config.
A grid is displayed to tell you such information as below:
The module checks 3 factors in this section: Main keyword, Meta keyword and Page URL. Through connecting Google Search Console, the admin will know the details of each key including Average position, Impressions, Clicks and CTR.
*Note: URLs of product, category or CMS pages are used to query on Google Search Console. These URLs meet configs on the Canonical Tag module.
2.14.3. SEO Report Dashboard
Please go to Marketing ⇒ BSS Commerce SEO ⇒ SEO Report.
This grid displays all important SEO information of page URLs on the website.
If you click Crawl All Site button, you are redirected to the Crawl SEO report page. The module carries out crawling data for websites which have just set up this module. This process only needs to be done once because new products are automatically updated.
You tap Crawl All site button to start the data crawling process. There are 2 Crawl status:
Success: the URL can be accessed from the frontend (even 404).
False: Lost of Internet connection can be a cause for False status. As a consequence, the crawling process is not finished.
*Note:
Data of meta title, meta description, meta keyword and main keyword is updated according to the real time.
Data of Headings, Images, Open Graph, Twitter Card is updated once a day when admins edit products/categories.
During the crawling process, you can open a new tab to make other configurations.
The process will stop when you click Back to SEO Report button.
Customer Approval for Magento 2 extension outweighs the default of Magento 2 by allowing admins to approve or disapprove new accounts as they want. This definitely helps store owners to manage new customer accounts.
After a customer creates an account, there will be a Pending message shown up:
Next, a notification email will be sent to admin:
Then admin accepts or declines new accounts, there will be Approval or Disapproval emails sent to customers.
Here is an Approval email:
Here is a Disapproval email:
When this customer signs in, if his account is still pending, then the Pending message will be displayed. In case his account is disapproved, there will be a Disapproved message:
2.2 In the backend
2.2.1 General configuration
Go through Stores ⇒ Setting ⇒ Configuration⇒ BSS Commerce Customer Approval
In General Configuration:
Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module.
Auto Approve Accounts:
Choose Yes if you want to accept new accounts automatically.
NOTE: The difference between this Auto Approve Accounts function and the default is that you still can change customer account status in the backend, whereas the default cannot.
Choose No if you want to approve accounts manually.
Pending Message: you can edit text for the Pending message.
Disapproval Message: you can edit text for the Disapproval message.
In Admin Emails Settings:
Enabled: choose Yes to enable configurations below.
Email Templates: choose one of the available email templates of websites. This selected template will be used to send notifications about new accounts created for admin.
Email Sender: choose a name and email sender from Store Email Address of the default.
In Customer Email Settings:
Enabled: choose Yes so that all configurations below can work.
Email Sender: choose name and email of the sender from Store Email Address of the default.
Approval Email Templates: select one of the available email templates of your site. This template will be used if admin change account status into Approved.
Disapproval Email Templates: select one of the available email templates of your site. This template will be used if admin change account status into Disapproved.
NOTE in Email sender (for both Admin and Customer Email Settings):
If you use SMTP in order to send mails then it just allows you to register the sender’s name. This Email Sender function gets email only in email configuration of the SMTP module. Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Advanced ⇒ System ⇒ Gmail/Google Apps SMTP Pro in order to change email sender as you want.
If your server is not registered via SMTP to send emails then this configuration will get both name and email of the sender.
2.2.2 Customer Attributes in the backend
In Customer Grid:
After installing Customer Approval for Magento 2 extension, there is a Status column in Customer Grid in the backend:
In addition, admin can edit this status conveniently right in Customer Grid:
Moreover, admin can have mass action: choose multiple customer accounts to approve or disapprove them at once:
In Customer Information:
Status information is included in Customer View:
Admin can change an account status as wish in Account Information:
2.2.3. Required Email Confirmation
After installing this extension, in case admin sets Yes in Require Emails Confirmation, then when a customer creates an account, he cannot use his account and will be redirected to login page. A confirmation email will be sent to this customer so as to confirm his email and admin will also receive a notification about new accounts at the same time.
Next, this customer confirms his email then he will redirect to the login page. Pending message will be shown and still cannot use his account until the admin changes its status into Approved.
2.3 Notes for Installation
Copy all folders of the module into the root folder
Name the folder: Bss/CustomerApproval
Run: php bin/magento setup:upgrade in order to setup the module
Run: php bin/magento cache:flush to clear cache
Run: php bin/magento setup:static-content:deploy
Run: php bin/magento indexer:reindex customer_grid to reindex the customer grid
If the customer grid does not show users then you need to reindex the customer grid by php bin/magento indexer:reindex customer_grid
Magento 2 B2B Registration extensionallows the admin to create a new registration form by adding more fields for B2B customers into that form. Hence, the admin effectively obtains additional information from wholesale customers before deciding to accept or reject their registration.
The admin can include a B2B Registration form besides the default form. This form has additional fields to get to know more about B2B customers.
More importantly, the admin can review and approve or reject the B2B registration instead of activating the account automatically, like the default.
When the users complete the B2B registration form, a pending message is shown.
An email will be sent to the admin's email to inform of the new B2B registration. Then, admin can manage over that account.
If the admin approves the registration, an email will be sent to the user's email.
If the admin rejects the registration, a disapproval email is sent respectively. And, an error message is shown when the users try to access the account in the frontend.
2.2. In the backend
2.2.1. General Configuration
Go through Stores ⇒ Settings ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ B2B Registration.
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable the module.
2.2.1.1 Register settings
In B2B Account Page URL: enter URL of the customer registration page
In Shortcut Link in Header: select Yes to enable the shortcut link in the header. So customers can click this shortcut link to navigate the registration page.
In Shortcut Link Text: enter the title of the shortcut link in the header.
In Form Title: enter the title of the B2B registration form.
Choose additional fields in the B2B Registration form. If you do not want any fields to show up, choose No.
Please ensure that by default, these fields are not required. Go to Configuration ⇒ Customer Configuration⇒ Name and Address Options to check.
2.2.1.2 Customer groups
In Default Customer Group: choose a group that you want to add the customer into.
In Disable Regular Registration: select Yes to disable the standard “Create an Account” link in the header, “Create an Account” button in Sign-in Page, and checkout page.
Choose No to enable both "B2B Registration link" and the default "Create an Account link."
2.2.1.3 Approval settings
In Auto Approve Accounts: Choose Yes if you want to accept new B2B accounts automatically or No if you want to approve accounts manually.
NOTE: Even when you approve the B2B registration requests automatically, you can still change their status in the backend.
In Pending Message: enter Pending message.
In Disapproval Message: enter Disapproval message.
2.2.1.4 Admin email settings
In Enabled: choose Yes to enable configurations below.
In Email Sender: enter the name of the sender from Store Email Address of the default.
In Email Templates: choose among available email templates of websites to notify the admin of new B2B accounts.
In Recipients: enter emails, separated by commas, to receive notification about new accounts created.
2.2.1.5 Customer email settings
In Enabled: choose Yes to send notification emails to customer
In Email Sender: enter the name of the sender from Store Email Address of the default.
In Approval Email Templates: select among available email templates of your site to send an email after the admin approves the B2B registration.
In Disapproval Email Templates: select among available email templates of your website to send an email after the admin rejects the B2B registration.
In Pending Email Templates: select among available email templates of your website to send an email after customer sign-up the B2B account.
2.2.2. Default CAPTCHA support
To enable Captcha in the B2B Registration form, please follow Stores ⇒ Configurations ⇒ CUSTOMERS ⇒ Customer Configuration ⇒ CAPTCHA
Set Enable CAPTCHA on Storefront to Yes.
In Form, choose Create User form to enable the CAPTCHA
Set Display Mode to either Always to After number of attempts to login.
Define CAPTCHA settings.
2.2.3 Manage B2B registration requests
In Customer Grid:
There is an additional Status column in Customer Grid in the backend so that the admin can check the status of B2B accounts and make adjustments accordingly.
The admin can edit the status of single B2B account by double-clicking in any position in the row:
or, multiple B2B accounts:
or in Account Information of specific account:
2.3.4 Create Widget with B2B Registration Form as Page Type
Go to Content > Widget -> Select Type -> In Layout -> Specific Page -> B2B Registration Form.
Then you can continue to set up the widget or show at page or include in a block accordingly.
*Note:
- If the admin creates an account in the backend for a customer, there will be an approval notification email sent to the customer after finish creating this account.
However, that account has Normal status; admin can change into B2B Approval status, then there will also be a notification email sent to that customer.
- Magento 2 B2B Registration is compatible with Magento 2 Company Account by BSS. When these modules are installed and enabled at the same time, there is an extra configuration Is Company Account in Register Settings section. This configuration is displayed corresponding to a field - Field Register as a Company Account that allows customers to whether or not to register as a company account.
Social Login for Magento 2 Extension allows customers to sign through social media accounts like Facebook, Twitter, Google Plus... quickly via Ajax pop-up. They can sign up or login on a site quickly within a few clicks instead of wasting time filling in register or login form. Ajax pop-up is also a method to save up time customers might spend on loading new pages.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS COMMERCE ⇒ Ajax Social Login.
2.1. General
In Enable, choose Yes to enable the extension or No to disable it.
In Use Popup Ajax, choose Yes to enable popup for login and register. Otherwise, choose No to disable it.
In Send Password, choose Yes to send customers an email that contains the password after they login using a social account. The customer then can use their email and password to log in to your site. Choose No to disable it.
In Display Customer Photo, choose Yes to display the customer’s profile photo from the social account they used for signup, or choose No to not display customer’s social photo.
In Redirect after Login, select the page on site or any particular URL you want to redirect after customer login successfully.
In Redirect after Register, select the page on site or any particular URL you want to redirect after customer completed register process.
2.2. Social Button Block
In Display buttons social login on popup, decide to display social buttons on Login tab or Register tab of popup, or place it on both tabs.
In Display buttons social follow class or id, enter class/id to place social button social login on.
In Display buttons social register follow class or id, enter class/id to place social button social register on.
In Number of button displayed, set the restriction of number of buttons to display on social login block.
In Social Button Sorting, decide the arrangement of buttons in social login block.
2.3. ReCaptcha
In Site Key and Secret Key, click “Create a site key” and register reCaptcha.
After registering, you will get the Site key and Secret key as below:
In Theme, choose the theme of reCaptcha between:
Light:
Dark:
In Type: Choose the type of robot checking between Image and Audio
In Size: Choose the size of reCaptcha widget between Normal and Compact.
In Popup Form: Choose the form(s) of popup on site to place the reCaptcha widget. A form of popup includes Login,Register and Forgot Password?
2.4. Configure specific social account
2.4.1. Facebook
In Enable, choose Yes to enable Facebook account for login and register on the site, or choose No to disable it.
In App ID and App Secret, click on “click here” below Enable dropdown box, you will be redirected to the Meta for developers page.
Log in to your Meta developer account, then follow the steps below:
+ Create New App:
Click on My App (you will only see this option after login).
In the Apps page, click the Create App button.
Select the app type as Consumer or None then click Next.
Fill the details of your app then click Create App.
Once you have created the app and are in the App Dashboard, navigate to Settings > Basic.
First, fill all 6 fields that we noted in the photo above.
*Note: The Privacy Policy URL field is required to transfer permission of public_profile. In this field, fill the URL of your homepage.
Then, right on top, you will see the App ID and App secret to copy. Go to the module backend tab, copy and paste them then click Save Config.
Next, navigate to App Review> Permissions and Features. Then scroll down to the public_profile section and click Get advanced access.
A popup window will appeared. Check the box "I agree" and click Confirm.
After finish, in the public_profile section, the Access level will shown as Advanced access.
+ Configure Facebook Login:
In the App Dashboard, scroll down to Add products to your app section, locate the Facebook Login product, and click Set Up to add it to your app.
Navigate to Facebook Login > Settings.
To fill the Valid OAuth Redirect URIs field, copy the URL we provided in the URI redirection valid OAuth field in the module backend.
*Note: Currently, Facebook only supports https URL, they no longer support http URL.
+ Put App Into Public Status:
On the top bar, switch App Mode to Live.
2.4.2. Twitter
In Enable, choose Yes to enable Twitter account for login and register on the site, or choose No to disable it.
In Consumer Key (API Key) and Consumer Secret (API Secret), click on “click here” below Enable dropdown box, you will be redirected to the Twitter Developer Portal page.
Under Project & App, click on Overview.
In the Overview page, click Create App.
Enter the name of your app.
*Note: Your app's name must be unique.
Then click Next.
You should save the API Key, API Secret and Bearer Token code somewhere safe.
Next, click App Settings.
Under User authentication settings, click Set up.
Choose the App permisstions as you want and set Type of App as Web App, Automated App or Bot.
Next, in the App info section.
In Callback URI / Redirect URL: Copy the Callback URL in the module configuration.
In WebsiteURL: Enter your website URL.
Other fields are optional, you can fill them or not.
Finally, click Save.
Copy the OAuth 2.0 Client ID on the screen to Consumer Key (API Key) and OAuth 2.0 Client Secret as Consumer Secret (API Secret) in module configuration.
2.4.3. Google
In Enable, choose Yes to enable Google account for login and register on the site, or choose No to disable it.
In Client ID and Client Secret, click on “click here” below Enable dropdown box, you will be redirected to the Google Identity page.
Navigate to APIs & Services > Credentials.
First of all, you need to Create Project.
Enter the name of the project, then click Create.
Back to the APIs and Services section, click on OAuth consent screen, choose External and click Next.
Complete all required fields, then scroll down and click Save and Continue.
Then back to the Credentials section, click Create Credentials > OAuth client ID.
Select the Web application in application type and name your OAuth 2.0 client.
Scroll down and in the Authorized redirect URIs field, copy the Authorized redirect URIs in the module configuration.
After configuration is complete, you can see the Client ID and Client Secret to copy.
2.4.4. LinkedIn
To get Client ID, Client Secret and Redirect URL, please click on "click here" link and follow steps as below:
+ Create new application:
+ Set up Authentication for application: You get Redirect URLs in this step:
+ Copy Client ID and Client Secret to the configuration:
2.4.5. Window-Live
To get Application ID, Application Secret and Redirect URL, please click on "click here" link and follow steps as below:
+ Click on "click here" link to be redirected to Microsoft App register page:
+ Copy & Paste Redirect URL(s) to the app detail page:
+ Copy & Paste Application Id and Secret to Social Login configuration:
2.4.6. Instagram
In App ID and App Secret, click on “click here” below Enable dropdown box, you will be redirected to the Meta for developers page.
Log in to your Meta developer account, then follow the steps below:
+ Create New App:
Click on My App (you will only see this option after login).
In the Apps page, click the Create App button.
Select the app type as Consumer or None then click Next.
Fill the details of your app then click Create App.
Once you have created the app and are in the App Dashboard, navigate to Settings > Basic. Then fill 6 fields that we noted in the photo below.
*Note: You need to fill all the fields to avoid the 400 error when your customers login with Instagram.
Then scroll to the bottom of page, and click Add Platform.
Choose Website then click Next.
Add your website’s URL and click Save.
+ Configure Instagram Basic Display:
In the App Dashboard, scroll down to Add products to your app section, locate the Instagram Basic Display product, and click Set Up to add it to your app.
At the bottom of the page, click Create New App.
A confirm window will appear, click Create App.
Fill the Valid OAuth Redirect URIs field with the Redirect URL(s) we provided in the module backend.
Then copy the Instagram App ID and Instagram App Secret . Go to the module backend tab, copy and paste them in the Application Id and Application Secrets field then click Save Config.
*Note: Your account's client status must be Authorized to get real Instagram accounts. In case your account is in sandbox mode, you can only accept sandbox account.
To test, you need to add test user and accept it in Instagram account.
+ Put App Into Public Status:
On the top bar, switch App Mode to Live.
2.4.8. Vkontakte
Finally, click Save Config and to complete setting process.
In the default Magento 1, admin can easily reindex data from backend in the Index Management section. However, this feature is no longer available on Magento 2. Reindex from Backend for Magento 2 will solve this problem by helping admins reindex data without using any command lines.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ System ⇒ Index Management and start configuration.
Choose the Indexers which you want to reindex.
In Action box: Choose Reindex Data.
Choose Submit to complete.
3. Configure BSS Core Module
BSS Core module is required to install along with Reindex from Backend in your website so that you can receive the latest update of the extension quickly.
3.1. Benefits of BSS Core Module
Notify you the root path, the current version, latest version, and user guide of the extension.
Announce you the latest version via a popup message so that you can promptly get updated.
*Note: It is our commitment that we don't collect any data from your website.
3.2. Configure BSS Core module
Please navigate to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSS Commerce ⇒ Information or just click on the BSS Commerce logo in the left admin menu to be brought to the Information section:
In Installed Modules: Display a list of installed extensions along with detailed information such as current version, latest version, and user guide's links.
In Root Footer: Show the root path of Magento base.
In Configuration:
Enable BSS Commerce Popup: choose Yes/No to enable/disable the popup which will announce you latest versions of BSS extension.
Additional CSS: Add more CSS to the frontend depending on your demand.
Enable Preprocessed CSS:
+ Choose Yes: In case the theme on your site cannot compile the LESS file to the CSS file, BSS Core module will help you to declare the CSS files in the BSS module to the frontend.
Pre-select Shipping/Payment for Magento 2 extension is a simple solution to speed up customers’ purchasing process by pre-filling shipping method and payment method on the checkout page based on their availability and configured position.
2. How Does It Work?
Magento 2 Pre-select Shipping/Payment extension consists of two easy-to-configure features. Let’s get started following this navigation:
Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Pre-select Shipping/Payment.
2.1. Auto Shipping Config
In Enable, choose Yes to have Auto Shipping Config enabled on the websites; or No to disable this feature.
In Auto Select Shipping Method: Admins can pick a given shipping method to be automatically filled.
If admins want to have more methods to select, please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Shipping Methods and enable needed methods.
In Shipping Method Position: If the shipping method auto-selected above is not available, one of three following options is applied.
None: Shipping Method is under customers’ decision as the default Magento 2.
Last Method: Auto-apply the last shipping method on the checkout page.
First Method: Auto-apply the first shipping method on the checkout page.
2.2. Auto Payment Config
In Enable, choose Yes to have Auto Payment Config enabled on the websites; or No to disable this feature.
In Auto Select Payment Method: Admins can pick a given payment method to be automatically filled.
If admins want to have more methods to select, please go to Store ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Payment Methods and enable needed methods.
In Payment Method Position: If the payment method auto-selected above is not available, one of the three following options is applied.
None: Payment Method is under customers’ decision as the default Magento 2.
Last Method: Auto-apply the last payment method on the checkout page.
First Method: Auto-apply the first payment method on the checkout page.
Order Details on Success Page for Mafento 2 extension allows showing all order information on the success page. This is a useful extension for you to customize thank you page for free.
2. How Does It Work?
Please go to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Order Details on Success Page.
2.1. General Configuration
In Enabled Module, choose Yes to enable the extension, or No to disable it.
In Show Payment Method, choose Yes to enable the payment method on the success page, or No to disable it.
In Show Shipping Method, choose Yes to enable the shipping method on the success page, or No to disable it.
In Show Billing Address, choose Yes to enable the billing address on the success page, or No to disable it.
In Show Shipping Address, choose Yes to enable the shipping address on the success page, or No to disable it.
In Show Order Product, choose Yes to enable the ordered products on the success page, or No to disable it.
In Show Order Status, choose Yes to enable the order status on the success page, or No to disable it.
In Show Print Order Link, choose Yes to enable the print order link on the success page, or No to disable it.
In Show Reorder Link, choose Yes to enable the reorder link on the success page, or No to disable it.
Note: Print Order Link and Reorder Link are not displayed unless the purchaser signs in your site.
2.4. Thank You Message Configuration
In Thank You Message, edit a thank you message to be shown on the success page.
In Text Input Size (Pixel), set text size for the thank you message.
In Color, select color for the thank you message text.
2.3. Text Above Order Details Configuration
In Text Above Order Details, edit text to be displayed above the order details field on the success page.
In Text Input Size (Pixel), set size for the text.
In Color, select color for the text.
2.4. Text Under Order Details Configuration
In Text Under Order Details, edit text to be displayed under the order details field on the success page.
In Text Input Size (Pixel), set size for the text.
In Color, select color for the text.
Note: - Because all config scopes are store view, you can customize the success page for each store view.
After setting, you need to save your configuration then flush cache to start using the module.
In order to allow you to customize the success page, this module will remove template in default and add the new template of the module to this page. Therefore, other default template customizations will be disabled if you using this module for your site.
2.5. The frontend preview
Because the success page is one time page, you need to create an order and place it to preview the success page.
Magento 2 Order Details on Success Page extension makes the success page become like that:
If you want your Thank you page more informative and attractive, you can consider another module of BSSCommerce Checkout Success Page for Magento 2.
Mega Menu for Magento 2 extension helps store owners to take control of navigation bar mega menu. The navigation bar is the first sight when customers come to your site. If your store has an eye-catching mega menu, it will look very professional and improve user experience as well. So, your customers just need a few clicks to find what they want.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. Configuration
Please go to BSS Commerce ⇒ Configuration
Or Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ BSSCommerce ⇒ Mega Menu
Select your storeview to enable/disable the module (M2 Mega Menu does not work with “All Store Views”)
2.2. Mega Menu grid
Go to BSSCommerce ⇒ Manage Menu Items.
Here you can add new mega menu and manage existing mega menus.
You can filter the mega menu grid by the ID, name and store view.
2.2.1. Add new mega menu
Click the Add New button.
Root Menu Name: Enter the name of your menu
Choose store views: Choose the Store view that the menu will display on. The default setting is set as All Store View. To choose specific store views, hold Ctrl and click on the name of the store views. (You can change the store view setting after saving the mega menu and creating root menus for it)
Priority: Enter the priority value. The default value is 0, which is the lowest priority. 1 will be the highest priority. From 1 and above, the higher the value, the lower the priority level.
*NOTE: In case there are 2 or more menus is set for the same storeview, the priority value will be considered.
If one menu has a lower priority value, it will be displayed on the front end of that storeview.
If 2 or more menus have the same priority value, the newest created menu will be displayed on the front end of that storeview.
2.2.2. Set mega menu structure
You can choose to edit configuration and edit menu right from the Action column of the mega menu grid.
Click Edit Menu to set mega menu structure.
On this window, you will see the structure of your mega menu. You can edit up to 3 levels of sub-menu and add unlimitedly.
Note: You can also choose to edit configuration on this window.
In the Back-end:
In the Front-end:
3. 3 types of sub-menu
There are 3 types of sub-menu. Each of them has different views. So you can freely change to get what you want to show for customers
*NOTE: Menu Content Type just works with Parent Menu Item level 1.
“Category Listing” option: there are 4 positions where you can freely put blocks, including Top, Left, Right, Bottom.
“Content” option: Besides 4 positions in “Category Listing”, “Content Option ”add a Content Block.
“Classic” option:
*NOTE: you can add, edit, delete menu items by right click on the menu
Admin Shipping Method free extension comes up with an original shipping method that is only visible to admins in the backend. Only by creating new orders in the backend, does the shipping method activate. In other words, customers cannot select this shipping method when they checkout, because it is not displayed in the frontend.
The extension should be designated for orders of free delivery cost.
2. How Does It Work?
Navigate to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Shipping Methods and find the module.
Enable: Choose Yes to enable the extension, choose No to disable it. The shipping method does not display in the frontend under any circumstances.
Title: Set title of shipping method when creating orders in the backend.
Method name: Input name of the method.
Ship to Applicable Countries: Select All Allowed Countries to allow every region receiving this shipping method, select Specify Countries to
limit nations assigned this shipping method.
Specific countries: Specify nations in countries list, multiple select is allowed. The shipping method will be applied within countries chosen
according to this list.
Show Method if Not Applicable: By choosing Yes, Admin Shipping Method will display even not activated by countries. Choose No to hide the method.
Displayed Error Message: Input message content. This notification will display when Admin Shipping Method is in use but the shipping address is out of applicable countries list.
Auto Create Invoice: It automatically generates invoices if Admin Shipping Method is used in the order.
Auto Create Shipment: It automatically generates shipments if Admin Shipping Method is used in the order.
Pre-select: Choose Yes to enable default select for Admin Shipping Method while creating orders in the backend, choose No to disable default shipping settings for this method.
Sort Order: Enter a number to set priority for Admin Shipping Method when multiple shipping methods are enabled.
Actually, when searching for products online, your customers do not always end the deal after browsing around your corner and pay you within a minute. It’s frequently that they will contact you and make the purchase outside the commerce website. This real-life case pushes us to build a solution that helps the store admin assign a custom payment method that fit the desire of both the seller and customer. This admin payment method will not appear on the frontend checkout page and only shows up on the backend create new order page.
This extension will work the same way as other payment methods. In detail, when admin creates order in the backend, down to the step of choosing the payment method, there the admin payment method is, with other payment methods. Also, this extension allows automatic creating invoices and shipments.
2. How Does It Work?
2.1. Module configuration
Navigate to Stores ⇒ Configuration ⇒ Sales ⇒ Payment Methods and find the module.
2.2. General configuration
Enabled: Choose Yes to enable the extension, choose to disable. The payment method does not display in frontend under any circumstances.
Title: Type the name of the payment method here. This will also be displayed in the frontend Account Dashboard.
Auto Create Invoice: Enable/Disable creating invoice right after the order is created.
Auto Create Shipment: Enable/Disable creating shipment right after the order is created.
Payment from Applicable Countries: Choose All Allowed Countries to assign this payment method to all areas or Specific Countries.
Payment from Specific Countries: If you have chosen Specific Countries above, then select the countries to allow using this method.
Pre-select: Choose Yes to enable preselecting the admin payment method for payment whenever you create a new order in the backend. Choose No to disable pre-selecting this method.
Sort Order: Enter a number to set priority for Admin Payment Method when multiple payment methods are enabled.